HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS - axiomcsgllc.com · Hamtramck Public Schools will receive single prime...

PROJECT MANUAL

For

HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS

Kosciuszko Middle School Food Service Upgrades

OWNER: HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS

3201 Roosevelt

Hamtramck, MI 48212

ARCHITECT: 65 Market Street Mount Clemens, MI 48043 P. (586) 469.3600 F. (586) 469.3607

PARTNERS PROJECT # 15-175B

March 17, 2016 / BIDDING - CONSTRUCTION

PARTNERS 15-175B

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC - 1

MARCH 17, 2016 / BIDDING - CONSTRUCTION

Division Section Title Pages

DIVISION 00 - PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS

COVER ………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS……………………………………………………………………………………………………… 4

000000 ....... PROJECT IDENTIFICATION……………………………………………………………………………… 1

ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS……………………………………………………………………………………………… 1

000200 ....... MATERIAL FINISH / COLOR SCHEDULE ....................................................................................... 4

A701 ........... INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ........................................................................................................ 6

002213 ....... SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ………………………………………………… 5

003000 ....... REQUIRED BID SUBMISSION MATERIALS ................................................................................... 1

003100 ....... BID FORM ........................................................................................................................................ 2

FAMILIAL RELATIONSHIP DISCLOSURE STATEMENT…………………………………………………………… 1

AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE - IRAN ECONOMIC SANCTIONS ACT……………………………………………… 1

004313 ....... BID SECURITY FORM ..................................................................................................................... 1

004373 ....... PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM ................................................................................ 1

006000 FORMS ............................................................................................................................................. 1

A201 ........... GENERAL CONDITIONS OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONSTRUCTION ........................................ 40

008000 ....... SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS .................................................................................................. 10

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

011000 ....... SUMMARY ....................................................................................................................................... 3

012300 ....... ALTERNATES .................................................................................................................................. 2

012500 ....... CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES ................................................................................ 2

012900 ....... PAYMENT PROCEDURES .............................................................................................................. 3

013100 ....... PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION ......................................................................... 4

013200 ....... CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION ....................................................................... 4

013300 ....... SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................... 9

014000 ....... QUALITY REQUIREMENTS ............................................................................................................ 6

014200 ....... REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 12

015000 ....... TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS ................................................................................. 4

016000 ....... PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS .......................................................................................................... 5

017000 ....... EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS ....................................................................................................... 5

017700 ....... CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES ............................................................................................................ 5

017810 ....... PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS ................................................................................................ 3

017820 ....... OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA ...................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS

024119 ....... SELECTIVE DEMOLITION ............................................................................................................... 5

DIVISION 03 - CONCRETE

033000 ....... CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE ......................................................................................................... 17

035416 ....... HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT ...................................................................................... 3

PARTNERS 15-1375B

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC - 2


DIVISION 04 – MASONRY

042000 ....... UNIT MASONRY .............................................................................................................................. 14

047200 ....... CAST STONE ................................................................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 05 – METALS

051200 ....... STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING .................................................................................................... 7

053100 ....... STEEL DECKING ............................................................................................................................. 4

055000 ....... METAL FABRICATIONS .................................................................................................................. 4

DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES

061053 ....... MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY .................................................................................................... 4

DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

071416........ COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING .................................................................................. 4

072100........ THERMAL INSULATION ................................................................................................................. 3

072726........ FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS .............................................................................. 7

075419........ POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING ..................................................................................... 8

076200........ SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM ........................................................................................... 7

078413........ PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING .................................................................................................... 4

079200........ JOINT SEALANTS ........................................................................................................................... 7

DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS

081113........ HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES ...................................................................................... 7

081433........ STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS ................................................................................................... 4

083113........ ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES ................................................................................................... 3

083513........ SIDE-FOLDING GRILLES ............................................................................................................... 4

087100........ DOOR HARDWARE ........................................................................................................................ 10

088000........ GLAZING ......................................................................................................................................... 7

089119........ FIXED LOUVERS ............................................................................................................................ 6

DIVISION 09 – FINISHES

092216........ NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING ........................................................................................ 5

092900........ GYPSUM BOARD ........................................................................................................................... 4

095123........ ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS ........................................................................................................ 4

096513........ RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES ........................................................................................ 4

096519........ RESILIENT TILE FLOORING .......................................................................................................... 4

099113........ EXTERIOR PAINTING..................................................................................................................... 3

099123........ INTERIOR PAINTING ...................................................................................................................... 7

DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

101100........ VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS ................................................................................................................ 4

101423........ PANEL SIGNAGE ............................................................................................................................ 4

104413........ FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS .................................................................................................. 3

104416........ FIRE EXTINGUISHERS .................................................................................................................. 2

109001........ MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES .................................................................................................. 3

PARTNERS 15-175B

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC - 3


DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

114000 ......... FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT ..................................................................................................... 60

DIVISION 20 – FACILITY SERVICES SUBGROUP – DIVISIONS 21 THROUGH 28

200010 ........ BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS ........................................................................................ 8

200020 ........ ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK ........................................................ 2

DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING

220553 ........ IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT .................................................... 2

220719 ........ PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION................................................................................................... 4

221005 ........ PLUMBING PIPING ......................................................................................................................... 12

221006 ........ PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES ................................................................................................. 4

223000 ........ PLUMBING EQUIPMENT ................................................................................................................ 4

DIVISION 23 – HEATING VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING

230553 ........ IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT ............................................................. 4

230593 ........ TESTING. ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC ................................................................ 4

230713 ........ DUCT INSULATION ........................................................................................................................ 6

230719 ........ HVAC PIPING INSULATION ........................................................................................................... 6

230913 ........ INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC ....................................................... 6

232213 ........ STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING ............................................................................ 6

232214 ........ STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES ................................................................. 6

233100 ........ HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS ........................................................................................................ 16

233300 ........ AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES ............................................................................................................. 4

233416 ........ CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS .......................................................................................................... 4

233423 ........ POWER VENTILATORS ................................................................................................................. 4

233700 ........ AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ........................................................................................................... 2

237433 ........ PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEATING AND COOLING MAKE-UP AIR UNITS ................................... 2

238101 ........ TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS ............................................................................................ 4

DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL

260500 ........ BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS ......................................................................................... 8

260501 ........ MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION ............................................................................................... 4

260519 ........ LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES ....................................... 8

260526 ........ GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ....................................................... 4

260529 ........ HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ........................................................ 8

260534 ........ CONDUIT ......................................................................................................................................... 10

260537 ........ BOXES ............................................................................................................................................. 6

260553 ........ IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS ........................................................................... 6

262416 …… PANELBOARDS ……………………………………………………………………………………………. 8

262726 ........ WIRING DEVICES ........................................................................................................................... 6

265100 ........ INTERIOR LIGHTING ...................................................................................................................... 10

265701……. OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND INDOOR PHOTOCELLS……………………………………………... 6

PARTNERS 15-1375B

TABLE OF CONTENTS

TOC - 4


DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK

312000 ........ EARTH MOVING ............................................................................................................................. 8

DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS

321313 ........ CONCRETE PAVING ...................................................................................................................... 5

329200 ........ HYDROSEEDING ............................................................................................................................ 3

329220 ........ TOPSOIL ......................................................................................................................................... 3

329320 ........ FINE GRADING ............................................................................................................................... 3

DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

334600 ........ SUBDRAINAGE ............................................................................................................................... 5

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

PARTNERS 15-175B

PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

000000 - 1


PROJECT IDENTIFICATION

PROJECT: HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS

KOSZIUSZKO MIDDLE SCHOOL – FOOD SERVICE UPGRADES

Location:

Kosciuszko Middle School

2333 Burger

Hamtramck, MI 48212

OWNER: HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS

3201 Roosevelt

Hamtramck, MI 48212

ARCHITECT: PARTNERS IN ARCHITECTURE, PLC

65 Market Street

Mount Clemens, MI 48043

(586) 469.3600

CIVIL PROJECT CONTROL ENGINEERING, INC.

ENGINEER: 2420 Pte. Tremble Road

Algonac, MI 48001

(810) 794 – 1931

STRUCTURAL SHYMANSKI & ASSOCIATES, LLC.

ENGINEER: 33426 Nine Mile Road

Livonia, MI 48154

(734) 855 – 4810

MECHANICAL & STRATEGIC ENERGY SOLUTIONS, INC.

ELECTRICAL 4000 West Eleven Mile Road

ENGINEER: Berkley, MI 48072

(248) 399.1900

FOOD SERVICE FOOD SERVICE DESIGNS, LLC.

DESIGNER: 9201 Funston Street

White Lake, MI 48386

(248) 399.1900

BID DUE DATE: April 6, 2016; 2:00 p.m.

END OF SECTION

PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC 15-175B

Advertisement for Bid

HAMTRAMCK PUBLIC SCHOOLS 3201 Roosevelt

Hamtramck, MI 48212

BID TITLE: KOSCIUSZKO MIDDLE SCHOOL FOOD SERVICE UPGRADES Hamtramck Public Schools will receive single prime sealed bids to furnish all labor and materials and perform all work

necessary and incidental for the Kosciuszko Middle School Food Service Upgrades in accordance with published

instructions, specifications, drawings and other contract documents.

There will be a Pre-Bid Meeting and Walkthrough, for all contractors wishing to submit a bid, at Kosciuszko Middle School, located at 2333 Burger, Hamtramck, MI 48212, on Tuesday, March 29th, 2016 at 3:30 p.m.

Sealed bids must be received at the Hamtramck Public Schools Administration Building, located at 3201 Roosevelt,

Hamtramck, MI 48212, no later than, Wednesday, April 6th, 2016 at 2:00pm. Bids received after this date and time and

bids received electronically or via fax will not be accepted or considered. Bids will be publicly opened and read aloud at

2:05pm.

Bidders MUST use the bid form(s) in the specification packages. RETURN TWO COMPLETE COPIES OF EACH BID

SUBMITTAL. Bids shall be submitted in a sealed envelope, clearly labeled with the bid title, date and time due.

All bids shall be accompanied by a sworn and notarized statement disclosing any familial relationship(s) that exist between the

owner(s) or any employee of the bidder and any member of the Board of Education of the School District or the

Superintendent of the School District. The Board of Education shall not accept a bid that does not include a sworn and

notarized familial relationship disclosure statement. All bids must also be submitted with a sworn and notarized Affidavit of

Compliance regarding Michigan Public Act No. 517 of 2012 – Iran Economic Sanctions Act.

Submit with each bid, a certified check or acceptable bid bond payable to Hamtramck Public Schools, in an amount equal to

five percent (5%) of the total bid.

Bids submitted shall fully comply in all respects to these instructions, published specifications, drawings, and other contract

documents. Bid price shall include all costs associated with this project.

No bid may be withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days after the date of the bid opening. The Board reserves the right to

reject any or all bids received and to waive any formalities in regard thereto. In addition, the Board reserves the right to

evaluate bids on any basis determined by the Board to be in the best interest of the Board and to consider alternate bids if the

low bidder(s) do not meet the specifications or are otherwise determined to be unqualified.

The Architect will provide the documents to prospective bidders, electronically free of charge or in hard copy format at $40.00

per set. Checks shall be made payable to: PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC. Bid documents will be available on or about

March17, 2016. Interested contractors should request documents via email @ [email protected]. Questions may

be directed to PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC, 65 Market Street, Mt. Clemens, MI 48043 (Phone: 586-469-3600).

mailto:[email protected]

MATERIAL FINISH / COLOR SCHEDULE PARTNERS 15-175BMATERIAL SCHEDULE

000200-1

Spec Section

Item Description Product Specified Finish / Color Location(refer to drawings for exact locations)

Remarks

042000 UNIT FB-1 Face Brick Belden Brick Burbank - Flatsets (Dark) and Edge

setsAvalon

047200CS-1 Cast Stone Royal Stone As selected from manufacturer's full

range of colorsAccent Band

CS-2 Cast Stone Royal Stone As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors

Base

76200MFP-1 Pre-Finished Metal

CopingPeterson Aluminum Corp. (PAC-CLAD)

As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors

079200Sealant at Metal Flashing As selected from manufacturer's full

range of colorsSealant at Face Brick As selected from manufacturer's full

range of colorsSealant at Exteior Windows and Gate

As selected from manufacturer's full range of colors

081416ST-1 Plain Sliced Red Oak Eggers Industries 01: Clear Interior

096513RB-1 Resilient Wall Base

Johnsonite Match adjacent epoxy wall base color

CAST STONE

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

RESILIENT WALL BASE

JOINT SEALANTS

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

March 17, 2016BIDDING / CONSTRUCTION


000200-2

Spec Section


Remarks

096519VCT-1 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong: Standard Excelon

Imperial Texture51860 Soft Cool Gray MS Café Field

VCT-2 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong: Arteffects 57216 Intaglio Gray MS Café Accent

VCT-3 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong: Standard Excelon Imperial Texture

51946 Gentian Blue MS Café Accent


51878 Golden MS Café Accent


51814 Pomegranate Red MS Café Accent

VCT-6 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong: Standard Excelon MultiColor

52500 Carnival White ES Café Field

VCT-7 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong: Standard Excelon Rave

57517 Bodacious Blue ES Café Accent


51821 Caribbean Blue ES Café Accent


57509 Lemon Lick ES Café Accent


57516 Screamin' Pumplin ES Café Accent


57510 Kickin' Kiwi ES Café Accent


57515 Hot Lips ES Café Accent

VCT-13 Vinyl Composition Tile Armstrong Match existing tile color Classroom

RESILIENT TILE FLOORING



000200-3

Spec Section


Remarks

099123PNT-1 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6531 - Indigo Door Frames

PNT-2 Paint Sherwin Williams SW7557 - Summer White Wall - Field

PNT-3 Paint Sherwin Williams SW7072 - Online MS Walls - Accent

PNT-4 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6387 - Compatible Cream MS Walls - Accent

PNT-5 Paint Sherwin Williams SW7005 - Pure White Ceilings

PNT-6 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6959 - Blue Chip ES Walls - Accent

PNT-7 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6909 - Lemon Twist ES Walls - Accent

PNT-8 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6890 - Osage Orange ES Walls - Accent

PNT-9 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6374 - Torchlight Walls - Accent

PNT-10 Paint Sherwin Williams SW6328 - Firewood MS Walls - Accent

PNT-11 Paint Sherwin Williams Metallic Silver Radiators

PNT-12 Paint Sherwin Williams Match existing upper color Hallways

PNT-13 Paint Sherwin Williams Mtach existing lower color Hallways

PNT-14 Paint Sherwin Williams Match existing classrooms New Classroom

PNT-15 Paint Performance Epoxy Coat Refer to spec Kitchen, Dishwashing

INTERIOR PAINTING



000200-4

Spec Section


Remarks

321313CC-1 Integral Colored

ConcreteBrickform As Selected from Manufacturers (16)

Stock and Standard ColorsConcrete Color 1 @ Avalon

CC-2 Integral Colored Concrete

Brickform As Selected from Manufacturers (16) Stock and Standard Colors

Concrete Color 2 @ Avalon



Concrete Color 1 @ Elmwood



Concrete Color 2 @ Elmwood



Concrete Color 1 @ Koepsell



Concrete Color 2 @ Koepsell

CONCRETE PAVING


Document A701TM – 1997 Instructions to Bidders

AIA Document A701™ – 1997. Copyright © 1970, 1974, 1978, 1987 and 1997 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 17:52:55 on 03/20/2016 under Order No.9748253455_1 which expires on 03/11/2017, and is not for resale.User Notes: (1765036905)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)Hamtramck Public Schools - Kosciuszko Middle School - Food Service Upgrades 2333 Burger Hamtramck, MI 48212 THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Hamtramck Public Schools 3201 Roosevelt Hamtramck, MI 48212 THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC 65 Market Street Mount Clemens, MI 48043 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 DEFINITIONS 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS 6 POST-BID INFORMATION 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTOR

You created this PDF from an application that is not licensed to print to novaPDF printer (http://www.novapdf.com)

http://www.novapdf.com/


2

ARTICLE 1 DEFINITIONS § 1.1 Bidding Documents include the Bidding Requirements and the proposed Contract Documents. The Bidding Requirements consist of the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, Instructions to Bidders, Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, the bid form, and other sample bidding and contract forms. The proposed Contract Documents consist of the form of Agreement between the Owner and Contractor, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications and all Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract.

§ 1.2 Definitions set forth in the General Conditions of the Contract for Construction, AIA Document A201, or in other Contract Documents are applicable to the Bidding Documents. § 1.3 Addenda are written or graphic instruments issued by the Architect prior to the execution of the Contract which modify or interpret the Bidding Documents by additions, deletions, clarifications or corrections. § 1.4 A Bid is a complete and properly executed proposal to do the Work for the sums stipulated therein, submitted in accordance with the Bidding Documents. § 1.5 The Base Bid is the sum stated in the Bid for which the Bidder offers to perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents as the base, to which Work may be added or from which Work may be deleted for sums stated in Alternate Bids. § 1.6 An Alternate Bid (or Alternate) is an amount stated in the Bid to be added to or deducted from the amount of the Base Bid if the corresponding change in the Work, as described in the Bidding Documents, is accepted. § 1.7 A Unit Price is an amount stated in the Bid as a price per unit of measurement for materials, equipment or services or a portion of the Work as described in the Bidding Documents. § 1.8 A Bidder is a person or entity who submits a Bid and who meets the requirements set forth in the Bidding Documents. § 1.9 A Sub-bidder is a person or entity who submits a bid to a Bidder for materials, equipment or labor for a portion of the Work. ARTICLE 2 BIDDER’S REPRESENTATIONS § 2.1 The Bidder by making a Bid represents that:§ 2.1.1 The Bidder has read and understands the Bidding Documents or Contract Documents, to the extent that such documentation relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, and for other portions of the Project, if any, being bid concurrently or presently under construction. § 2.1.2 The Bid is made in compliance with the Bidding Documents. § 2.1.3 The Bidder has visited the site, become familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and has correlated the Bidder’s personal observations with the requirements of the proposed Contract Documents. § 2.1.4 The Bid is based upon the materials, equipment and systems required by the Bidding Documents without exception. ARTICLE 3 BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.1 COPIES § 3.1.1 Bidders may obtain complete sets of the Bidding Documents from the issuing office designated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid in the number and for the deposit sum, if any, stated therein. The deposit will be refunded to Bidders who submit a bona fide Bid and return the Bidding Documents in good condition within ten days after receipt of Bids. The cost of replacement of missing or damaged documents will be deducted from the deposit. A Bidder receiving a Contract award may retain the Bidding Documents and the Bidder’s deposit will be refunded.




3

§ 3.1.2 Bidding Documents will not be issued directly to Sub-bidders unless specifically offered in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, or in supplementary instructions to bidders. § 3.1.3 Bidders shall use complete sets of Bidding Documents in preparing Bids; neither the Owner nor Architect assumes responsibility for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents. § 3.1.4 The Owner and Architect may make copies of the Bidding Documents available on the above terms for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work. No license or grant of use is conferred by issuance of copies of the Bidding Documents. § 3.2 INTERPRETATION OR CORRECTION OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS § 3.2.1 The Bidder shall carefully study and compare the Bidding Documents with each other, and with other work being bid concurrently or presently under construction to the extent that it relates to the Work for which the Bid is submitted, shall examine the site and local conditions, and shall at once report to the Architect errors, inconsistencies or ambiguities discovered. § 3.2.2 Bidders and Sub-bidders requiring clarification or interpretation of the Bidding Documents shall make a written request which shall reach the Architect at least seven days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.2.3 Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents will be made by Addendum. Interpretations, corrections and changes of the Bidding Documents made in any other manner will not be binding, and Bidders shall not rely upon them. § 3.3 SUBSTITUTIONS § 3.3.1 The materials, products and equipment described in the Bidding Documents establish a standard of required function, dimension, appearance and quality to be met by any proposed substitution. § 3.3.2 No substitution will be considered prior to receipt of Bids unless written request for approval has been received by the Architect at least ten days prior to the date for receipt of Bids. Such requests shall include the name of the material or equipment for which it is to be substituted and a complete description of the proposed substitution including drawings, performance and test data, and other information necessary for an evaluation. A statement setting forth changes in other materials, equipment or other portions of the Work, including changes in the work of other contracts that incorporation of the proposed substitution would require, shall be included. The burden of proof of the merit of the proposed substitution is upon the proposer. The Architect’s decision of approval or disapproval of a proposed substitution shall be final. § 3.3.3 If the Architect approves a proposed substitution prior to receipt of Bids, such approval will be set forth in an Addendum. Bidders shall not rely upon approvals made in any other manner. § 3.3.4 No substitutions will be considered after the Contract award unless specifically provided for in the Contract Documents. § 3.4 ADDENDA § 3.4.1 Addenda will be transmitted to all who are known by the issuing office to have received a complete set of Bidding Documents. § 3.4.2 Copies of Addenda will be made available for inspection wherever Bidding Documents are on file for that purpose. § 3.4.3 Addenda will be issued no later than four days prior to the date for receipt of Bids except an Addendum withdrawing the request for Bids or one which includes postponement of the date for receipt of Bids. § 3.4.4 Each Bidder shall ascertain prior to submitting a Bid that the Bidder has received all Addenda issued, and the Bidder shall acknowledge their receipt in the Bid.




4

ARTICLE 4 BIDDING PROCEDURES § 4.1 PREPARATION OF BIDS § 4.1.1 Bids shall be submitted on the forms included with the Bidding Documents. § 4.1.2 All blanks on the bid form shall be legibly executed in a non-erasable medium. § 4.1.3 Sums shall be expressed in both words and figures. In case of discrepancy, the amount written in words shall govern. § 4.1.4 Interlineations, alterations and erasures must be initialed by the signer of the Bid. § 4.1.5 All requested Alternates shall be bid. If no change in the Base Bid is required, enter "No Change." § 4.1.6 Where two or more Bids for designated portions of the Work have been requested, the Bidder may, without forfeiture of the bid security, state the Bidder’s refusal to accept award of less than the combination of Bids stipulated by the Bidder. The Bidder shall make no additional stipulations on the bid form nor qualify the Bid in any other manner. § 4.1.7 Each copy of the Bid shall state the legal name of the Bidder and the nature of legal form of the Bidder. The Bidder shall provide evidence of legal authority to perform within the jurisdiction of the Work. Each copy shall be signed by the person or persons legally authorized to bind the Bidder to a contract. A Bid by a corporation shall further give the state of incorporation and have the corporate seal affixed. A Bid submitted by an agent shall have a current power of attorney attached certifying the agent’s authority to bind the Bidder. § 4.2 BID SECURITY § 4.2.1 Each Bid shall be accompanied by a bid security in the form and amount required if so stipulated in the Instructions to Bidders. The Bidder pledges to enter into a Contract with the Owner on the terms stated in the Bid and will, if required, furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Should the Bidder refuse to enter into such Contract or fail to furnish such bonds if required, the amount of the bid security shall be forfeited to the Owner as liquidated damages, not as a penalty. The amount of the bid security shall not be forfeited to the Owner in the event the Owner fails to comply with Section 6.2. § 4.2.2 If a surety bond is required, it shall be written on AIA Document A310, Bid Bond, unless otherwise provided in the Bidding Documents, and the attorney-in-fact who executes the bond on behalf of the surety shall affix to the bond a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. § 4.2.3 The Owner will have the right to retain the bid security of Bidders to whom an award is being considered until either (a) the Contract has been executed and bonds, if required, have been furnished, or (b) the specified time has elapsed so that Bids may be withdrawn or (c) all Bids have been rejected. § 4.3 SUBMISSION OF BIDS § 4.3.1 All copies of the Bid, the bid security, if any, and any other documents required to be submitted with the Bid shall be enclosed in a sealed opaque envelope. The envelope shall be addressed to the party receiving the Bids and shall be identified with the Project name, the Bidder’s name and address and, if applicable, the designated portion of the Work for which the Bid is submitted. If the Bid is sent by mail, the sealed envelope shall be enclosed in a separate mailing envelope with the notation "SEALED BID ENCLOSED" on the face thereof. § 4.3.2 Bids shall be deposited at the designated location prior to the time and date for receipt of Bids. Bids received after the time and date for receipt of Bids will be returned unopened. § 4.3.3 The Bidder shall assume full responsibility for timely delivery at the location designated for receipt of Bids. § 4.3.4 Oral, telephonic, telegraphic, facsimile or other electronically transmitted bids will not be considered. § 4.4 MODIFICATION OR WITHDRAWAL OF BID § 4.4.1 A Bid may not be modified, withdrawn or canceled by the Bidder during the stipulated time period following the time and date designated for the receipt of Bids, and each Bidder so agrees in submitting a Bid.




5

§ 4.4.2 Prior to the time and date designated for receipt of Bids, a Bid submitted may be modified or withdrawn by notice to the party receiving Bids at the place designated for receipt of Bids. Such notice shall be in writing over the signature of the Bidder. Written confirmation over the signature of the Bidder shall be received, and date- and time-stamped by the receiving party on or before the date and time set for receipt of Bids. A change shall be so worded as not to reveal the amount of the original Bid. § 4.4.3 Withdrawn Bids may be resubmitted up to the date and time designated for the receipt of Bids provided that they are then fully in conformance with these Instructions to Bidders. § 4.4.4 Bid security, if required, shall be in an amount sufficient for the Bid as resubmitted. ARTICLE 5 CONSIDERATION OF BIDS § 5.1 OPENING OF BIDS At the discretion of the Owner, if stipulated in the Advertisement or Invitation to Bid, the properly identified Bids received on time will be publicly opened and will be read aloud. An abstract of the Bids may be made available to Bidders. § 5.2 REJECTION OF BIDS The Owner shall have the right to reject any or all Bids. A Bid not accompanied by a required bid security or by other data required by the Bidding Documents, or a Bid which is in any way incomplete or irregular is subject to rejection. § 5.3 ACCEPTANCE OF BID (AWARD) § 5.3.1 It is the intent of the Owner to award a Contract to the lowest qualified Bidder provided the Bid has been submitted in accordance with the requirements of the Bidding Documents and does not exceed the funds available. The Owner shall have the right to waive informalities and irregularities in a Bid received and to accept the Bid which, in the Owner’s judgment, is in the Owner’s own best interests. § 5.3.2 The Owner shall have the right to accept Alternates in any order or combination, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Bidding Documents, and to determine the low Bidder on the basis of the sum of the Base Bid and Alternates accepted. ARTICLE 6 POST-BID INFORMATION § 6.1 CONTRACTOR’S QUALIFICATION STATEMENT Bidders to whom award of a Contract is under consideration shall submit to the Architect, upon request, a properly executed AIA Document A305, Contractor’s Qualification Statement, unless such a Statement has been previously required and submitted as a prerequisite to the issuance of Bidding Documents. § 6.2 OWNER’S FINANCIAL CAPABILITY The Owner shall, at the request of the Bidder to whom award of a Contract is under consideration and no later than seven days prior to the expiration of the time for withdrawal of Bids, furnish to the Bidder reasonable evidence that financial arrangements have been made to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Unless such reasonable evidence is furnished, the Bidder will not be required to execute the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. § 6.3 SUBMITTALS § 6.3.1 The Bidder shall, as soon as practicable or as stipulated in the Bidding Documents, after notification of selection for the award of a Contract, furnish to the Owner through the Architect in writing:

.1 a designation of the Work to be performed with the Bidder’s own forces;

.2 names of the manufacturers, products, and the suppliers of principal items or systems of materials and equipment proposed for the Work; and

.3 names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for the principal portions of the Work.

§ 6.3.2 The Bidder will be required to establish to the satisfaction of the Architect and Owner the reliability and responsibility of the persons or entities proposed to furnish and perform the Work described in the Bidding Documents.




6

§ 6.3.3 Prior to the execution of the Contract, the Architect will notify the Bidder in writing if either the Owner or Architect, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Bidder. If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a proposed person or entity, the Bidder may, at the Bidder’s option, (1) withdraw the Bid or (2) submit an acceptable substitute person or entity with an adjustment in the Base Bid or Alternate Bid to cover the difference in cost occasioned by such substitution. The Owner may accept the adjusted bid price or disqualify the Bidder. In the event of either withdrawal or disqualification, bid security will not be forfeited. § 6.3.4 Persons and entities proposed by the Bidder and to whom the Owner and Architect have made no reasonable objection must be used on the Work for which they were proposed and shall not be changed except with the written consent of the Owner and Architect. ARTICLE 7 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND§ 7.1 BOND REQUIREMENTS § 7.1.1 If stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the Bidder shall furnish bonds covering the faithful performance of the Contract and payment of all obligations arising thereunder. Bonds may be secured through the Bidder’s usual sources. § 7.1.2 If the furnishing of such bonds is stipulated in the Bidding Documents, the cost shall be included in the Bid. If the furnishing of such bonds is required after receipt of bids and before execution of the Contract, the cost of such bonds shall be added to the Bid in determining the Contract Sum. § 7.1.3 If the Owner requires that bonds be secured from other than the Bidder’s usual sources, changes in cost will be adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents. § 7.2 TIME OF DELIVERY AND FORM OF BONDS§ 7.2.1 The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to the Owner not later than three days following the date of execution of the Contract. If the Work is to be commenced prior thereto in response to a letter of intent, the Bidder shall, prior to commencement of the Work, submit evidence satisfactory to the Owner that such bonds will be furnished and delivered in accordance with this Section 7.2.1. § 7.2.2 Unless otherwise provided, the bonds shall be written on AIA Document A312, Performance Bond and Payment Bond. Both bonds shall be written in the amount of the Contract Sum. § 7.2.3 The bonds shall be dated on or after the date of the Contract. § 7.2.4 The Bidder shall require the attorney-in-fact who executes the required bonds on behalf of the surety to affix thereto a certified and current copy of the power of attorney. ARTICLE 8 FORM OF AGREEMENT BETWEEN OWNER AND CONTRACTORUnless otherwise required in the Bidding Documents, the Agreement for the Work will be written on AIA Document A101, Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor Where the Basis of Payment Is a Stipulated Sum.



PARTNERS 15-175B SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS 002213-1


DOCUMENT 002213 - SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

1.1 INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS

A. Instructions to Bidders for Project consist of the following:

1. AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders," a copy of which is bound in this Project Manual. 2. The following Supplementary Instructions to Bidders modify and add to the requirements of the

Instructions to Bidders.

1.2 SUPPLEMENTARY INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS, GENERAL

A. The following supplements modify AIA Document A701, "Instructions to Bidders." Where a portion of the Instructions to Bidders is modified or deleted by these Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, unaltered portions of the Instructions to Bidders shall remain in effect.

1.3 ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS

A. No modifications.

1.4 ARTICLE 2 - BIDDER'S REPRESENTATIONS

A. Add Section 2.1.3.1:

1. 2.1.3.1 - The Bidder has investigated all required fees, permits, and regulatory requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and has properly included in the submitted bid the cost of such fees, permits, and requirements not otherwise indicated as provided by Owner.

B. Add Section 2.1.5:

1. 2.1.5 - The Bidder is a properly licensed Contractor according to the laws and regulations of The State of Michigan and meets qualifications indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents.

C. Add Section 2.1.6:

1. 2.1.6 - The Bidder has incorporated into the Bid adequate sums for work performed by installers whose qualifications meet those indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents.

1.5 ARTICLE 3 - BIDDING DOCUMENTS

A. Delete Paragraph 3.1.1 in its entirety and substitute the following: 1. 3.1.1 - Bidders may obtain up to two (2) complete set of bidding documents from the Architect at

the cost as listed in the Advertisement for Bids. Additional sets are available at direct cost to the bidder. Electronic sets (PDF format) are available at no cost.



B. Add Section 3.3.5:

1. 3.3.5 - Where the Contractor chooses to use an item approved by request but other than one shown on the details or specified, he shall be responsible for the coordination of any necessary changes in other work, and shall bear the cost of such changes.

C. 3.4 - Addenda:

1. Delete Section 3.4.3 and replace with the following:

a. 3.4.3 - Addenda may be issued at any time prior to the receipt of bids.

2. Add Section 3.4.4.1:

a. 3.4.4.1 - Owner may elect to waive the requirement for acknowledging receipt of 3.4.4 Addenda as follows:

1) 3.4.4.1.1 - Information received as part of the Bid indicates that the Bid, as submitted, reflects modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents included in an unacknowledged Addendum.

2) 3.4.4.1.2 - Modifications to the Procurement and Contracting Documents in an unacknowledged Addendum do not, in the opinion of Owner, affect the Contract Sum or Contract Time.

1.6 ARTICLE 4 - BIDDING PROCEDURES

A. 4.1 - Preparation of Bids:

1. Add Section 4.1.9:

a. 4.1.9 - Owner may elect to disqualify a bid due to failure to submit a bid in the form requested, failure to bid requested alternates or unit prices, failure to complete entries in all blanks in the Bid Form, or inclusion by the Bidder of any alternates, conditions, limitations or provisions not called for.

B. Delete Section 4.2.1 in its entirety and substitute the following:

1. 4.2.1 - No bid will be considered, unless it is accompanied by a certified check or acceptable Bid Bond payable without condition to the Owner, in an amount equal to (5%) of the total bid. The certified check or Bid Bond which must accompany each bid is required as a guarantee that the bidder will enter into a contract with the Owner for the work described in the proposal and furnish a performance and payment bond and certificates of insurance as specified after notice by the Owner or Architect that contracts have been awarded to him and are ready for execution.

C. Add Section 4.2.3.1:

1. 4.2.3.1 - The Bid Security of the three lowest bidders will be retained until the contract has been awarded and executed, but not longer than (75) days. The Bid Security of other bidders will be returned within a reasonable time after the opening of bids.



D. 4.3 – Submission of Bids

1. Add Section 4.3.5: The Bidder shall submit with their bid the following information:

a. A sworn and notarized statement disclosing any familial relationship that exists between the Owner(s) or any employee of the Bidder and any member of the Hamtramck Public Schools Board of Education or the Superintendent of Schools. Use the form provided in the project manual.”

b. A sworn and notarized Affidavit of Compliance regarding Michigan Public Act No. 517 of 2012 – Iran Economic Sanctions Act. Use the form provided in the project manual.

c. Bid Security.

E. 4.4 - Modification or Withdrawal of Bids:

1. Add Section 4.4.1.1: a. 4.4.1.1 – Bids may not be withdrawn for a period of ninety (90) days from the bid opening

date.

F. 4.5 - Break-Out Pricing Bid Supplement:

1. Add Section 4.5:

a. 4.5 - Provide detailed cost breakdowns (schedule of values) no later than two business days following Architect's request.

G. 4.6 - Subcontractors, Suppliers, and Manufacturers List Bid Supplement:

1. Add Section 4.6:

a. 4.6 - Provide list of major subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers furnishing or installing products no later than two business days following Architect's request. Include those subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers providing work totaling three percent or more of the Bid amount. Do not change subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers from those submitted without approval of Architect.

1.7 ARTICLE 5 - CONSIDERATION OF BIDS

A. 5.2 - Rejection of Bids:


a. 5.2.1 - Owner reserves the right to reject a bid based on Owner's and Architect's evaluation of qualification information submitted with the bid as well as following the opening of bids. Owner's evaluation of the Bidder's qualifications will include: status of licensure and record of compliance with licensing requirements, record of quality of completed work, record of Project completion and ability to complete, record of financial management including financial resources available to complete Project and record of timely payment of obligations, record of Project site management including compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction, record of and number of current claims and disputes and the



status of their resolution, and qualifications of the Bidder's proposed Project staff and proposed subcontractors.

1.8 ARTICLE 6 - POSTBID INFORMATION

A. 6.1 - Contractor's Qualification Statement:


a. 6.1.1 - Contractor's Qualification Statement is to be submitted no later than two business days following Architect’s request.

B. 6.3 - Submittals:


a. 6.3.1.4 - Submit information requested in Sections 6.3.1.1, 6.3.1.2, and 6.3.1.3 no later than two business days following Architect's request.

1.9 ARTICLE 7 - PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND

A. 7.1 - Bond Requirements:


a. 7.1.1.1 - Both a Performance Bond and a Payment Bond will be required, each in an amount equal to 100 percent of the Contract Sum.

B. 7.2 - Time of Delivery and Form of Bonds:

1. Delete the first sentence of Section 7.2.1 and insert the following:

a. The Bidder shall deliver the required bonds to Owner no later than 10 days after the date of Notice of Intent to Award and no later than the date of execution of the Contract, whichever occurs first. Owner may deem the failure of the Bidder to deliver required bonds within the period of time allowed a default.

2. Delete Section 7.2.3 and insert the following:

a. 7.2.3 - Bonds shall be executed and be in force on the date of the execution of the Contract.

1.10 ARTICLE 9 - EXECUTION OF THE CONTRACT

A. Add Article 9:

1. 9.1.1 - Subsequent to the Notice of Intent to Award, and within 10 days after the prescribed Form of Agreement is presented to the Awardee for signature, the Awardee shall execute and deliver the Agreement to Owner through Architect in such number of counterparts as Owner may require.



2. 9.1.2 - Owner may deem as a default the failure of the Awardee to execute the Contract and to supply the required bonds when the Agreement is presented for signature within the period of time allowed.

3. 9.1.3 - Unless otherwise indicated in the Procurement and Contracting Documents or the executed Agreement, the date of commencement of the Work shall be the date of the executed Agreement.

4. 9.1.4 - In the event of a default, Owner may declare the amount of the Bid security forfeited and elect to either award the Contract to the next responsible bidder or re-advertise for bids.

END OF DOCUMENT 002213

PARTNERS 15-175B REQUIRED BID SUBMISSION MATERIALS 003000 - 1


SECTION 003000 –REQUIRED BID SUBMISSION MATERIALS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Following this page is the Bid Form. Bidder must completely fill out the Bid Form and Submit (2) original copies, by the date and time specified.

B. Following the Bid Form, is the “Familial Relationship Disclosure Statement”, of which the bidder must submit a notarized copy with their bid.

C. Following the Bid Form is the "Affidavit of Compliance - Iran Economic Sanctions Act", of which the bidder must submit a notarized copy with their bid.

D. Bidder must submit with the bid, “Bid Security” as described in specifications section 002213.

END OF SECTION 003000

PARTNERS 15-175B BID FORM 003100 - 1


BID FORM

BID PROPOSAL FOR: Hamtramck Public Schools – Kosciuszko Middle School – Food Service Upgrades Project # 15-175B

BID TO: Hamtramck Public Schools Administration Building 3201 Roosevelt Hamtramck, MI 48212

BID DUE DATE: April 6, 2016 at 2:00pm

BIDDERS NAME: ______________________________________________________________________

We have examined the Contract Documents for the proposed Hamtramck Public Schools – Kosciuszko Middle School – Food Service Upgrades project as prepared by PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC. In accordance therewith, the undersigned proposes to furnish all labor and materials for construction as set forth in the Contract Documents, including the following Addenda, if any (fill in the addenda number, thus confirming receipt):

Addendum Number ________ Addendum Number ________

Addendum Number ________ Addendum Number ________

1. Accompanying the proposal is a bid security for work required to be furnished by the Contract Documents, the same being subject to forfeiture in the event of default by the undersigned.

2. I agree to complete the Project, by the dates listed in Specification Section 011000 – Summary; provided that a notice to proceed is issued within thirty (30) days.

3. I understand that the Owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids, and it is agreed that this bid may not be

withdrawn for a period of sixty (60) days from the opening thereof. 5. Attached herewith are the documents requested in the Supplementary Instructions to Bidders, Specification Section

002213, paragraph 4.3.5.

A. BASE BID: (Insert a base bid amount in the blank provided).

__________________________________________________Dollars $___________________

PARTNERS 15-175B BID FORM 003100 - 2


B. ALTERNATES: Refer to section 012300 for a complete description:

1. Alternate No. 1: REFINISH CORRIDOR FLOORING

Add $ ____________________

2. Alternate No. 2: CONSTRUCT MASONRY SCREEN WALL AT GAS METER

Add $ ____________________

C. SCHEDULE: Fill in proposed construction duration to achieve substantial completion. Refer to Specification Section 011000 for schedule requirements.

_________________________

BIDDERS INFORMATION:

Company Name:_____________________________________________________________

Contact Name:______________________________________________________________

Signature:_____________________________Title__________________________________ Email: _____________________________________________________________________ Address:___________________________________________________________________ ___________________________________________________________________ Phone Number: _______________________ Fax Number: __________________________ Cell Phone Number: ______________________________ Date:__________________

END OF BID FORM

Company Name:

According to Section 1267 of the Revised School Code the bid must be accompanined with a sworn and notarized statement disclosing any familial relationship between the owner or an

employee of the bidder and any member of the district's board or superintendent of the district.

There are no familial relationships between the bidder, the owner or an employee of the bidder and any member of the district's board or superintendent.

Yes, there is a familial relationship between the bidder, the owner or an employee of the bidder and a member of the district's board or superintendent.

If so, please state the person(s) and the relationship:

Bidder, the Owner and/or Employee District Board and/or Superintendent

Subscribed and sworn this day of 2016

In the County of State of

by

Notary Public Signature

My commission expires on: Seal or stamp:

(313) 872-9270

Kosciuszko Middle School - Food Service Upgrades

Hamtramck Public Schools

Hamtramck Public Schools

3201 Roosevelt, Hamtramck, MI 48212

PARTNERS 15-175B AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE

IRAN ECONOMIC SANCTIONS ACT


AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE - IRAN ECONOMIC SANCTIONS ACT

Michigan Public Act No. 517 of 2012

The undersigned, the owner or authorized officer of the below-named contractor (the "Contractor"), pursuant to the

compliance certification requirement provided in the Hamtramck Public Schools (the District”) Request For Proposals

For Hamtramck Public Schools Kosciuszko Middle School Food Service Upgrades (the "RFP), hereby certified,

represents and warrants that the Contractor (including its officers, directors and employees) is not an "Iran linked

business" within the meaning of the Iran Economic Sanctions Act, Michigan Public Act No. 517 of 2012 (the "Act"), and

that in the event Contractor is awarded a contract as a result of the aforementioned RFP, the Contractor will not become

an "Iran linked business" at any time during the course of performing any services under the contract.

The Contract further acknowledges that any person who is found to have submitted a false certification is responsible

for a civil penalty of not more than $250,000.00 or 2 times the amount of the contract or proposed contract for which

the false certification was made, whichever is greater, the cost of the District’s investigation, and reasonable attorney

fees, in addition to the fine. Moreover, any person who submitted a false certification shall be ineligible to bid on a

request for proposal for three (3) years from the date that it is determined that the person has submitted the false

certification.

CONTRACTOR:

_________________________________________________ Name of Contractor

By:

Its:

Date:

STATE OF _________________________________)

)ss.

COUNTY OF )

This instrument was acknowledged before me on the __________ day of __________________________, 2016,

by .

, Notary Public

County,

My Commission Expires:

Acting in the County of:

PARTNERS 15-175B BID SECURITY FORMS 004313-1


DOCUMENT 004313 - BID SECURITY FORMS

1.1 BID FORM SUPPLEMENT

A. A completed bid bond form is required to be attached to the Bid Form. 1. A certified check is also an acceptable means of providing the required bid security. Certified

check must be payable to “Hamtramck Public Schools”.

1.2 BID BOND FORM

A. AIA Document A310, "Bid Bond," is the recommended form for a bid bond. A bid bond acceptable to Owner, or other bid security as described in the Instructions to Bidders, is required to be attached to the Bid Form as a supplement.

B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from The American Institute of Architects; www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; email: [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.


PARTNERS 15-175B PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM 004373-1


DOCUMENT 004373 - PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM

1.1 POST BID SUPPLEMENT

A. A completed Proposed Schedule of Values form is required to be provided, upon request from Architect after bid has been submitted.

1.2 PROPOSED SCHEDULE OF VALUES FORM

A. Proposed Schedule of Values Form: Provide a breakdown of the bid amount, including alternates, in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of bid. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide multiple line items for principal material and subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

B. Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.

1. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects; http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.


PARTNERS 15-175B FORMS 006000-1


DOCUMENT 006000 - FORMS

1.1 FORM OF AGREEMENT AND GENERAL CONDITIONS

A. The following form of Owner/Contractor Agreement and form of the General Conditions shall be used for Project:

1. AIA Document A101, "Standard Form of Agreement between Owner and Contractor, Stipulated Sum."

a. The General Conditions for Project are AIA Document A201, "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction."

1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE FORMS

A. Administrative Forms: Additional administrative forms are specified in Division 01 General Requirements.

B. Copies of AIA standard forms may be obtained from the American Institute of Architects; http://www.aia.org/contractdocs/purchase/index.htm; [email protected]; (800) 942-7732.

C. Preconstruction Forms:

1. Form of Performance Bond and Labor and Material Bond: AIA Document A312, "Performance Bond and Payment Bond."

2. Form of Certificate of Insurance: AIA Document G715, "Supplemental Attachment for ACORD Certificate of Insurance 25-S."

D. Information and Modification Forms: 1. Form of Request for Proposal: AIA Document G709, "Work Changes Proposal Request." 2. Change Order Form: AIA Document G701, "Change Order." 3. Form of Architect's Memorandum for Minor Changes in the Work: AIA Document G707, "Architect's

Supplemental Instructions." 4. Form of Change Directive: AIA Document G714, "Construction Change Directive."

E. Payment Forms:

1. Schedule of Values Form: AIA Document G703, "Continuation Sheet." 2. Payment Application: AIA Document G702/703, "Application and Certificate for Payment and

Continuation Sheet." 3. Form of Contractor's Affidavit: AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts

and Claims." 4. Form of Affidavit of Release of Liens: AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of

Release of Liens." 5. Form of Consent of Surety: AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."


Document A201TM – 2007 General Conditions of the Contract for Construction

Init.

/

AIA Document A201™ – 2007. Copyright © 1911, 1915, 1918, 1925, 1937, 1951, 1958, 1961, 1963, 1966, 1970, 1976, 1987, 1997 and 2007 by The American Institute of Architects. All rights reserved. WARNING: This AIA® Document is protected by U.S. Copyright Law and International Treaties. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this AIA® Document, or any portion of it, may result in severe civil and criminal penalties, and will be prosecuted to the maximum extent possible under the law. This document was produced by AIA software at 17:55:50 on 03/20/2016 under Order No.9748253455_1 which expires on 03/11/2017, and is not for resale. User Notes: (1146124627)

1

ADDITIONS AND DELETIONS: The author of this document has added information needed for its completion. The author may also have revised the text of the original AIA standard form. An Additions and Deletions Report that notes added information as well as revisions to the standard form text is available from the author and should be reviewed. A vertical line in the left margin of this document indicates where the author has added necessary information and where the author has added to or deleted from the original AIA text.

This document has important legal consequences. Consultation with an attorney is encouraged with respect to its completion or modification.

for the following PROJECT: (Name and location or address)Hamtramck Public Schools - Kosciuszko Middle School - Food Service Upgrades 2333 Burger Hamtramck, MI 48212 THE OWNER: (Name, legal status and address) Hamtramck Public Schools 3201 Roosevelt Hamtramck, MI 48212 THE ARCHITECT: (Name, legal status and address) PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC 65 Market Street Mount Clemens, MI 48043 TABLE OF ARTICLES 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 2 OWNER 3 CONTRACTOR 4 ARCHITECT 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 8 TIME 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES



Init.

/


2

INDEX (Topics and numbers in bold are section headings.) Acceptance of Nonconforming Work 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Acceptance of Work9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.3 Access to Work 3.16, 6.2.1, 12.1 Accident Prevention 10 Acts and Omissions 3.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.8, 3.18, 4.2.3, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 10.2.5, 10.2.8, 13.4.2, 13.7, 14.1, 15.2 Addenda 1.1.1, 3.11 Additional Costs, Claims for 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 6.1.1, 7.3.7.5, 10.3, 15.1.4 Additional Inspections and Testing 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 12.2.1, 13.5 Additional Insured 11.1.4 Additional Time, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 8.3.2, 15.1.5 Administration of the Contract 3.1.3, 4.2, 9.4, 9.5 Advertisement or Invitation to Bid 1.1.1 Aesthetic Effect 4.2.13 Allowances 3.8, 7.3.8 All-risk Insurance 11.3.1, 11.3.1.1 Applications for Payment 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.10, 11.1.3 Approvals 2.1.1, 2.2.2, 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.10.2, 3.12.8, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 4.2.7, 9.3.2, 13.5.1 Arbitration 8.3.1, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.3.2, 15.4 ARCHITECT 4 Architect, Definition of 4.1.1 Architect, Extent of Authority 2.4, 3.12.7, 4.1, 4.2, 5.2, 6.3, 7.1.2, 7.3.7, 7.4, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.8, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 12.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1 Architect, Limitations of Authority and Responsibility 2.1.1, 3.12.4, 3.12.8, 3.12.10, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.10, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 5.2.1, 7.4, 9.4.2, 9.5.3, 9.6.4, 15.1.3, 15.2

Architect’s Additional Services and Expenses2.4, 11.3.1.1, 12.2.1, 13.5.2, 13.5.3, 14.2.4Architect’s Administration of the Contract3.1.3, 4.2, 3.7.4, 15.2, 9.4.1, 9.5 Architect’s Approvals 2.4, 3.1.3, 3.5, 3.10.2, 4.2.7Architect’s Authority to Reject Work3.5, 4.2.6, 12.1.2, 12.2.1 Architect’s Copyright1.1.7, 1.5 Architect’s Decisions 3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 4.2.14, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 15.2, 15.3Architect’s Inspections 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Architect’s Instructions3.2.4, 3.3.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 13.5.2Architect’s Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12 Architect’s Project Representative4.2.10 Architect’s Relationship with Contractor1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.9.2, 3.9.3, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.4.2, 13.5, 15.2 Architect’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 11.3.7Architect’s Representations 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.10.1 Architect’s Site Visits3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Asbestos 10.3.1 Attorneys’ Fees3.18.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.3 Award of Separate Contracts 6.1.1, 6.1.2 Award of Subcontracts and Other Contracts for Portions of the Work 5.2Basic Definitions 1.1Bidding Requirements 1.1.1, 5.2.1, 11.4.1 Binding Dispute Resolution9.7, 11.3.9, 11.3.10, 13.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6.1, 15.3.1, 15.3.2, 15.4.1 Boiler and Machinery Insurance11.3.2 Bonds, Lien 7.3.7.4, 9.10.2, 9.10.3Bonds, Performance, and Payment 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.3.9, 11.4



Init.

/


3

Building Permit 3.7.1 Capitalization 1.3 Certificate of Substantial Completion 9.8.3, 9.8.4, 9.8.5 Certificates for Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.3 Certificates of Inspection, Testing or Approval 13.5.4 Certificates of Insurance 9.10.2, 11.1.3 Change Orders 1.1.1, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.8.2.3, 3.11, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 5.2.3, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.2, 7.3.2, 7.3.6, 7.3.9, 7.3.10, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 9.10.3, 10.3.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.4, 11.3.9, 12.1.2, 15.1.3 Change Orders, Definition of 7.2.1 CHANGES IN THE WORK 2.2.1, 3.11, 4.2.8, 7, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3.1, 9.3.1.1, 11.3.9 Claims, Definition of 15.1.1 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 3.2.4, 6.1.1, 6.3, 7.3.9, 9.3.3, 9.10.4, 10.3.3, 15, 15.4 Claims and Timely Assertion of Claims 15.4.1 Claims for Additional Cost 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 7.3.9, 10.3.2, 15.1.4 Claims for Additional Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 6.1.1, 8.3.2, 10.3.2, 15.1.5 Concealed or Unknown Conditions, Claims for 3.7.4 Claims for Damages 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Claims Subject to Arbitration 15.3.1, 15.4.1 Cleaning Up 3.15, 6.3 Commencement of the Work, Conditions Relating to 2.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.4.1, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12.6, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 6.2.2, 8.1.2, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 11.1, 11.3.1, 11.3.6, 11.4.1, 15.1.4 Commencement of the Work, Definition of 8.1.2 Communications Facilitating Contract Administration 3.9.1, 4.2.4 Completion, Conditions Relating to 3.4.1, 3.11, 3.15, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 8.2, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10, 12.2, 13.7, 14.1.2 COMPLETION, PAYMENTS AND 9

Completion, Substantial 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7Compliance with Laws1.6, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14.1.1, 14.2.1.3, 15.2.8, 15.4.2, 15.4.3 Concealed or Unknown Conditions3.7.4, 4.2.8, 8.3.1, 10.3 Conditions of the Contract1.1.1, 6.1.1, 6.1.4Consent, Written 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.3.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2Consolidation or Joinder 15.4.4 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS 1.1.4, 6 Construction Change Directive, Definition of7.3.1Construction Change Directives 1.1.1, 3.4.2, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1.1, 7.1.2, 7.1.3, 7.3, 9.3.1.1Construction Schedules, Contractor’s3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2Contingent Assignment of Subcontracts5.4, 14.2.2.2Continuing Contract Performance 15.1.3 Contract, Definition of 1.1.2CONTRACT, TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE 5.4.1.1, 11.3.9, 14Contract Administration 3.1.3, 4, 9.4, 9.5Contract Award and Execution, Conditions Relating to 3.7.1, 3.10, 5.2, 6.1, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 11.4.1Contract Documents, Copies Furnished and Use of 1.5.2, 2.2.5, 5.3 Contract Documents, Definition of 1.1.1Contract Sum 3.7.4, 3.8, 5.2.3, 7.2, 7.3, 7.4, 9.1, 9.4.2, 9.5.1.4, 9.6.7, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1, 14.2.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.4, 15.2.5 Contract Sum, Definition of 9.1Contract Time3.7.4, 3.7.5, 3.10.2, 5.2.3, 7.2.1.3, 7.3.1, 7.3.5, 7.4, 8.1.1, 8.2.1, 8.3.1, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 12.1.1, 14.3.2, 15.1.5.1, 15.2.5 Contract Time, Definition of 8.1.1



Init.

/


4

CONTRACTOR 3 Contractor, Definition of 3.1, 6.1.2 Contractor’s Construction Schedules 3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2 Contractor’s Employees 3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1 Contractor’s Liability Insurance 11.1 Contractor’s Relationship with Separate Contractors and Owner’s Forces 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 6, 11.3.7, 12.1.2, 12.2.4 Contractor’s Relationship with Subcontractors 1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.18.1, 3.18.2, 5, 9.6.2, 9.6.7, 9.10.2, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7, 11.3.8 Contractor’s Relationship with the Architect 1.1.2, 1.5, 3.1.3, 3.2.2, 3.2.3, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.4.2, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 3.16, 3.18, 4.1.3, 4.2, 5.2, 6.2.2, 7, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 10.2.6, 10.3, 11.3.7, 12, 13.5, 15.1.2, 15.2.1 Contractor’s Representations 3.2.1, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.8.2 Contractor’s Responsibility for Those Performing the Work 3.3.2, 3.18, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 9.5.1, 10.2.8 Contractor’s Review of Contract Documents 3.2 Contractor’s Right to Stop the Work 9.7 Contractor’s Right to Terminate the Contract 14.1, 15.1.6 Contractor’s Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.4, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3, 11.4.2 Contractor’s Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Contractor’s Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 7.3.7, 8.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Contractual Liability Insurance 11.1.1.8, 11.2 Coordination and Correlation 1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.1, 3.10, 3.12.6, 6.1.3, 6.2.1 Copies Furnished of Drawings and Specifications 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.11 Copyrights 1.5, 3.17 Correction of Work 2.3, 2.4, 3.7.3, 9.4.2, 9.8.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.1, 12.1.2, 12.2Correlation and Intent of the Contract Documents 1.2 Cost, Definition of 7.3.7

Costs2.4, 3.2.4, 3.7.3, 3.8.2, 3.15.2, 5.4.2, 6.1.1, 6.2.3, 7.3.3.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.8, 7.3.9, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 10.3.6, 11.3, 12.1.2, 12.2.1, 12.2.4, 13.5, 14Cutting and Patching 3.14, 6.2.5 Damage to Construction of Owner or Separate Contractors3.14.2, 6.2.4, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.1.1, 11.3, 12.2.4 Damage to the Work3.14.2, 9.9.1, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.5, 10.4, 11.3.1, 12.2.4Damages, Claims for 3.2.4, 3.18, 6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1, 9.6.7, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.5, 11.3.7, 14.1.3, 14.2.4, 15.1.6Damages for Delay6.1.1, 8.3.3, 9.5.1.6, 9.7, 10.3.2Date of Commencement of the Work, Definition of8.1.2Date of Substantial Completion, Definition of8.1.3Day, Definition of 8.1.4Decisions of the Architect3.7.4, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 15.2, 6.3, 7.3.7, 7.3.9, 8.1.3, 8.3.1, 9.2, 9.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 13.5.2, 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1, 15.2Decisions to Withhold Certification 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.7, 14.1.1.3 Defective or Nonconforming Work, Acceptance, Rejection and Correction of2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.5, 9.5.1, 9.5.2, 9.6.6, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1Definitions 1.1, 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.5, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 3.12.3, 4.1.1, 15.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.1, 9.1, 9.8.1Delays and Extensions of Time3.2, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Disputes6.3, 7.3.9, 15.1, 15.2 Documents and Samples at the Site3.11 Drawings, Definition of1.1.5Drawings and Specifications, Use and Ownership of 3.11 Effective Date of Insurance 8.2.2, 11.1.2Emergencies10.4, 14.1.1.2, 15.1.4 Employees, Contractor’s3.3.2, 3.4.3, 3.8.1, 3.9, 3.18.2, 4.2.3, 4.2.6, 10.2, 10.3.3, 11.1.1, 11.3.7, 14.1, 14.2.1.1



Init.

/


5

Equipment, Labor, Materials or 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2 Execution and Progress of the Work 1.1.3, 1.2.1, 1.2.2, 2.2.3, 2.2.5, 3.1, 3.3.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.7.1, 3.10.1, 3.12, 3.14, 4.2, 6.2.2, 7.1.3, 7.3.5, 8.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.1, 10.2, 10.3, 12.2, 14.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.3Extensions of Time 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3, 7.4, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3, 15.1.5, 15.2.5 Failure of Payment 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2 Faulty Work (See Defective or Nonconforming Work) Final Completion and Final Payment 4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.1, 11.3.5, 12.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Financial Arrangements, Owner’s 2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4 Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance 11.3.1.1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 Governing Law 13.1 Guarantees (See Warranty) Hazardous Materials 10.2.4, 10.3 Identification of Subcontractors and Suppliers 5.2.1 Indemnification 3.17, 3.18, 9.10.2, 10.3.3, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 11.3.1.2, 11.3.7 Information and Services Required of the Owner 2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.4, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Initial Decision 15.2 Initial Decision Maker, Definition of 1.1.8 Initial Decision Maker, Decisions 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5Initial Decision Maker, Extent of Authority 14.2.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.3, 15.2.1, 15.2.2, 15.2.3, 15.2.4, 15.2.5 Injury or Damage to Person or Property 10.2.8, 10.4 Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 12.2.1, 13.5 Instructions to Bidders 1.1.1 Instructions to the Contractor 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.8.1, 5.2.1, 7, 8.2.2, 12, 13.5.2

Instruments of Service, Definition of1.1.7Insurance 3.18.1, 6.1.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 11Insurance, Boiler and Machinery11.3.2 Insurance, Contractor’s Liability 11.1 Insurance, Effective Date of8.2.2, 11.1.2Insurance, Loss of Use 11.3.3 Insurance, Owner’s Liability11.2 Insurance, Property 10.2.5, 11.3 Insurance, Stored Materials 9.3.2INSURANCE AND BONDS11Insurance Companies, Consent to Partial Occupancy9.9.1Intent of the Contract Documents1.2.1, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 4.2.13, 7.4 Interest13.6 Interpretation1.2.3, 1.4, 4.1.1, 5.1, 6.1.2, 15.1.1 Interpretations, Written 4.2.11, 4.2.12, 15.1.4 Judgment on Final Award 15.4.2 Labor and Materials, Equipment1.1.3, 1.1.6, 3.4, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Labor Disputes 8.3.1Laws and Regulations1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1.1, 11.3, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Liens2.1.2, 9.3.3, 9.10.2, 9.10.4, 15.2.8 Limitations, Statutes of12.2.5, 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Limitations of Liability 2.3, 3.2.2, 3.5, 3.12.10, 3.17, 3.18.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 4.2.12, 6.2.2, 9.4.2, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 10.2.5, 10.3.3, 11.1.2, 11.2, 11.3.7, 12.2.5, 13.4.2Limitations of Time2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2.7, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4.1, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 11.3.1.5, 11.3.6, 11.3.10, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15 Loss of Use Insurance11.3.3



Init.

/


6

Material Suppliers 1.5, 3.12.1, 4.2.4, 4.2.6, 5.2.1, 9.3, 9.4.2, 9.6, 9.10.5Materials, Hazardous 10.2.4, 10.3 Materials, Labor, Equipment and 1.1.3, 1.1.6, 1.5.1, 3.4.1, 3.5, 3.8.2, 3.8.3, 3.12, 3.13, 3.15.1, 4.2.6, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 6.2.1, 7.3.7, 9.3.2, 9.3.3, 9.5.1.3, 9.10.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4, 14.2.1.1, 14.2.1.2Means, Methods, Techniques, Sequences and Procedures of Construction 3.3.1, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 9.4.2 Mechanic’s Lien 2.1.2, 15.2.8 Mediation 8.3.1, 10.3.5, 10.3.6, 15.2.1, 15.2.5, 15.2.6, 15.3, 15.4.1 Minor Changes in the Work 1.1.1, 3.12.8, 4.2.8, 7.1, 7.4 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS 13 Modifications, Definition of 1.1.1 Modifications to the Contract 1.1.1, 1.1.2, 3.11, 4.1.2, 4.2.1, 5.2.3, 7, 8.3.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 11.3.1 Mutual Responsibility 6.2 Nonconforming Work, Acceptance of 9.6.6, 9.9.3, 12.3 Nonconforming Work, Rejection and Correction of 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 4.2.6, 6.2.4, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.9.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.1 Notice 2.2.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.2.4, 3.3.1, 3.7.2, 3.12.9, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 11.1.3, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1, 14.2, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice, Written 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9.2, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 11.3.6, 12.2.2.1, 13.3, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4.1 Notice of Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 15.1.2, 15.4 Notice of Testing and Inspections 13.5.1, 13.5.2 Observations, Contractor’s 3.2, 3.7.4 Occupancy 2.2.2, 9.6.6, 9.8, 11.3.1.5 Orders, Written 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9.2, 7, 8.2.2, 11.3.9, 12.1, 12.2.2.1, 13.5.2, 14.3.1 OWNER 2 Owner, Definition of 2.1.1

Owner, Information and Services Required of the2.1.2, 2.2, 3.2.2, 3.12.10, 6.1.3, 6.1.4, 6.2.5, 9.3.2, 9.6.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.2, 9.10.3, 10.3.3, 11.2, 11.3, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 14.1.1.4, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Owner’s Authority 1.5, 2.1.1, 2.3, 2.4, 3.4.2, 3.8.1, 3.12.10, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 4.1.3, 4.2.4, 4.2.9, 5.2.1, 5.2.4, 5.4.1, 6.1, 6.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 8.2.2, 8.3.1, 9.3.1, 9.3.2, 9.5.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 10.3.2, 11.1.3, 11.3.3, 11.3.10, 12.2.2, 12.3, 13.2.2, 14.3, 14.4, 15.2.7Owner’s Financial Capability2.2.1, 13.2.2, 14.1.1.4Owner’s Liability Insurance11.2 Owner’s Relationship with Subcontractors1.1.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 9.6.4, 9.10.2, 14.2.2 Owner’s Right to Carry Out the Work 2.4, 14.2.2Owner’s Right to Clean Up6.3Owner’s Right to Perform Construction and to Award Separate Contracts6.1Owner’s Right to Stop the Work2.3Owner’s Right to Suspend the Work 14.3 Owner’s Right to Terminate the Contract14.2 Ownership and Use of Drawings, Specifications and Other Instruments of Service 1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.1.7, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.2.2, 3.11, 3.17, 4.2.12, 5.3Partial Occupancy or Use 9.6.6, 9.9, 11.3.1.5 Patching, Cutting and3.14, 6.2.5Patents3.17 Payment, Applications for 4.2.5, 7.3.9, 9.2, 9.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.3, 9.7, 9.8.5, 9.10.1, 14.2.3, 14.2.4, 14.4.3 Payment, Certificates for4.2.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.4, 9.5, 9.6.1, 9.6.6, 9.7, 9.10.1, 9.10.3, 13.7, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.4 Payment, Failure of 9.5.1.3, 9.7, 9.10.2, 13.6, 14.1.1.3, 14.2.1.2Payment, Final4.2.1, 4.2.9, 9.8.2, 9.10, 11.1.2, 11.1.3, 11.4.1, 12.3, 13.7, 14.2.4, 14.4.3Payment Bond, Performance Bond and7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Payments, Progress9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 9



Init.

/


7

Payments to Subcontractors 5.4.2, 9.5.1.3, 9.6.2, 9.6.3, 9.6.4, 9.6.7, 14.2.1.2PCB 10.3.1 Performance Bond and Payment Bond 7.3.7.4, 9.6.7, 9.10.3, 11.4 Permits, Fees, Notices and Compliance with Laws 2.2.2, 3.7, 3.13, 7.3.7.4, 10.2.2PERSONS AND PROPERTY, PROTECTION OF 10 Polychlorinated Biphenyl 10.3.1 Product Data, Definition of 3.12.2 Product Data and Samples, Shop Drawings 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7 Progress and Completion 4.2.2, 8.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 14.1.4, 15.1.3 Progress Payments 9.3, 9.6, 9.8.5, 9.10.3, 13.6, 14.2.3, 15.1.3 Project, Definition of 1.1.4 Project Representatives 4.2.10 Property Insurance 10.2.5, 11.3 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY 10 Regulations and Laws 1.5, 3.2.3, 3.6, 3.7, 3.12.10, 3.13, 4.1.1, 9.6.4, 9.9.1, 10.2.2, 11.1, 11.4, 13.1, 13.4, 13.5.1, 13.5.2, 13.6, 14, 15.2.8, 15.4 Rejection of Work 3.5, 4.2.6, 12.2.1 Releases and Waivers of Liens 9.10.2 Representations 3.2.1, 3.5, 3.12.6, 6.2.2, 8.2.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.8.2, 9.10.1 Representatives 2.1.1, 3.1.1, 3.9, 4.1.1, 4.2.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.10, 5.1.1, 5.1.2, 13.2.1 Responsibility for Those Performing the Work3.3.2, 3.18, 4.2.3, 5.3, 6.1.3, 6.2, 6.3, 9.5.1, 10 Retainage 9.3.1, 9.6.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions by Contractor 3.2, 3.12.7, 6.1.3 Review of Contractor’s Submittals by Owner and Architect 3.10.1, 3.10.2, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2, 5.2, 6.1.3, 9.2, 9.8.2 Review of Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples by Contractor 3.12

Rights and Remedies 1.1.2, 2.3, 2.4, 3.5, 3.7.4, 3.15.2, 4.2.6, 5.3, 5.4, 6.1, 6.3, 7.3.1, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.2.5, 10.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.4, 14, 15.4 Royalties, Patents and Copyrights3.17 Rules and Notices for Arbitration15.4.1Safety of Persons and Property 10.2, 10.4Safety Precautions and Programs3.3.1, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 5.3, 10.1, 10.2, 10.4Samples, Definition of 3.12.3 Samples, Shop Drawings, Product Data and3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Samples at the Site, Documents and 3.11 Schedule of Values9.2, 9.3.1 Schedules, Construction3.10, 3.12.1, 3.12.2, 6.1.3, 15.1.5.2Separate Contracts and Contractors1.1.4, 3.12.5, 3.14.2, 4.2.4, 4.2.7, 6, 8.3.1, 12.1.2Shop Drawings, Definition of 3.12.1 Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7Site, Use of 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Site Inspections3.2.2, 3.3.3, 3.7.1, 3.7.4, 4.2, 9.4.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Site Visits, Architect’s 3.7.4, 4.2.2, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.5.1, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 13.5 Special Inspections and Testing4.2.6, 12.2.1, 13.5Specifications, Definition of1.1.6Specifications1.1.1, 1.1.6, 1.2.2, 1.5, 3.11, 3.12.10, 3.17, 4.2.14 Statute of Limitations 13.7, 15.4.1.1 Stopping the Work2.3, 9.7, 10.3, 14.1 Stored Materials6.2.1, 9.3.2, 10.2.1.2, 10.2.4 Subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.1SUBCONTRACTORS5Subcontractors, Work by1.2.2, 3.3.2, 3.12.1, 4.2.3, 5.2.3, 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6.7Subcontractual Relations 5.3, 5.4, 9.3.1.2, 9.6, 9.10, 10.2.1, 14.1, 14.2.1



Init.

/


8

Submittals 3.10, 3.11, 3.12, 4.2.7, 5.2.1, 5.2.3, 7.3.7, 9.2, 9.3, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.1.3 Submittal Schedule 3.10.2, 3.12.5, 4.2.7 Subrogation, Waivers of 6.1.1, 11.3.7 Substantial Completion 4.2.9, 8.1.1, 8.1.3, 8.2.3, 9.4.2, 9.8, 9.9.1, 9.10.3, 12.2, 13.7 Substantial Completion, Definition of 9.8.1 Substitution of Subcontractors 5.2.3, 5.2.4 Substitution of Architect 4.1.3 Substitutions of Materials 3.4.2, 3.5, 7.3.8 Sub-subcontractor, Definition of 5.1.2 Subsurface Conditions 3.7.4 Successors and Assigns 13.2 Superintendent 3.9, 10.2.6 Supervision and Construction Procedures 1.2.2, 3.3, 3.4, 3.12.10, 4.2.2, 4.2.7, 6.1.3, 6.2.4, 7.1.3, 7.3.7, 8.2, 8.3.1, 9.4.2, 10, 12, 14, 15.1.3 Surety 5.4.1.2, 9.8.5, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 14.2.2, 15.2.7 Surety, Consent of 9.10.2, 9.10.3 Surveys 2.2.3 Suspension by the Owner for Convenience 14.3 Suspension of the Work 5.4.2, 14.3 Suspension or Termination of the Contract 5.4.1.1, 14 Taxes 3.6, 3.8.2.1, 7.3.7.4 Termination by the Contractor 14.1, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Cause 5.4.1.1, 14.2, 15.1.6 Termination by the Owner for Convenience14.4 Termination of the Architect 4.1.3 Termination of the Contractor 14.2.2 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT 14

Tests and Inspections 3.1.3, 3.3.3, 4.2.2, 4.2.6, 4.2.9, 9.4.2, 9.8.3, 9.9.2, 9.10.1, 10.3.2, 11.4.1, 12.2.1, 13.5TIME8Time, Delays and Extensions of 3.2.4, 3.7.4, 5.2.3, 7.2.1, 7.3.1, 7.4, 8.3, 9.5.1, 9.7, 10.3.2, 10.4, 14.3.2, 15.1.5, 15.2.5Time Limits 2.1.2, 2.2, 2.4, 3.2.2, 3.10, 3.11, 3.12.5, 3.15.1, 4.2, 5.2, 5.3, 5.4, 6.2.4, 7.3, 7.4, 8.2, 9.2, 9.3.1, 9.3.3, 9.4.1, 9.5, 9.6, 9.7, 9.8, 9.9, 9.10, 11.1.3, 12.2, 13.5, 13.7, 14, 15.1.2, 15.4 Time Limits on Claims 3.7.4, 10.2.8, 13.7, 15.1.2Title to Work9.3.2, 9.3.3 Transmission of Data in Digital Form1.6UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK 12Uncovering of Work 12.1 Unforeseen Conditions, Concealed or Unknown3.7.4, 8.3.1, 10.3 Unit Prices7.3.3.2, 7.3.4 Use of Documents 1.1.1, 1.5, 2.2.5, 3.12.6, 5.3Use of Site 3.13, 6.1.1, 6.2.1 Values, Schedule of9.2, 9.3.1 Waiver of Claims by the Architect 13.4.2 Waiver of Claims by the Contractor9.10.5, 13.4.2, 15.1.6 Waiver of Claims by the Owner9.9.3, 9.10.3, 9.10.4, 12.2.2.1, 13.4.2, 14.2.4, 15.1.6Waiver of Consequential Damages 14.2.4, 15.1.6 Waiver of Liens9.10.2, 9.10.4 Waivers of Subrogation6.1.1, 11.3.7Warranty 3.5, 4.2.9, 9.3.3, 9.8.4, 9.9.1, 9.10.4, 12.2.2, 13.7Weather Delays15.1.5.2 Work, Definition of 1.1.3Written Consent1.5.2, 3.4.2, 3.7.4, 3.12.8, 3.14.2, 4.1.2, 9.3.2, 9.8.5, 9.9.1, 9.10.2, 9.10.3, 11.4.1, 13.2, 13.4.2, 15.4.4.2Written Interpretations 4.2.11, 4.2.12



Init.

/


9

Written Notice 2.3, 2.4, 3.3.1, 3.9, 3.12.9, 3.12.10, 5.2.1, 8.2.2, 9.7, 9.10, 10.2.2, 10.3, 11.1.3, 12.2.2, 12.2.4, 13.3, 14, 15.4.1

Written Orders 1.1.1, 2.3, 3.9, 7, 8.2.2, 12.1, 12.2, 13.5.2, 14.3.1, 15.1.2



Init.

/


10

ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS § 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS § 1.1.1 THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS The Contract Documents are enumerated in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor (hereinafter the Agreement) and consist of the Agreement, Conditions of the Contract (General, Supplementary and other Conditions), Drawings, Specifications, Addenda issued prior to execution of the Contract, other documents listed in the Agreement and Modifications issued after execution of the Contract. A Modification is (1) a written amendment to the Contract signed by both parties, (2) a Change Order, (3) a Construction Change Directive or (4) a written order for a minor change in the Work issued by the Architect. Unless specifically enumerated in the Agreement, the Contract Documents do not include the advertisement or invitation to bid, Instructions to Bidders, sample forms, other information furnished by the Owner in anticipation of receiving bids or proposals, the Contractor’s bid or proposal, or portions of Addenda relating to bidding requirements. § 1.1.2 THE CONTRACT The Contract Documents form the Contract for Construction. The Contract represents the entire and integrated agreement between the parties hereto and supersedes prior negotiations, representations or agreements, either written or oral. The Contract may be amended or modified only by a Modification. The Contract Documents shall not be construed to create a contractual relationship of any kind (1) between the Contractor and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants, (2) between the Owner and a Subcontractor or a Sub-subcontractor, (3) between the Owner and the Architect or the Architect’s consultants or (4) between any persons or entities other than the Owner and the Contractor. The Architect shall, however, be entitled to performance and enforcement of obligations under the Contract intended to facilitate performance of the Architect’s duties. § 1.1.3 THE WORK The term "Work" means the construction and services required by the Contract Documents, whether completed or partially completed, and includes all other labor, materials, equipment and services provided or to be provided by the Contractor to fulfill the Contractor’s obligations. The Work may constitute the whole or a part of the Project. § 1.1.4 THE PROJECT The Project is the total construction of which the Work performed under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part and which may include construction by the Owner and by separate contractors. § 1.1.5 THE DRAWINGS The Drawings are the graphic and pictorial portions of the Contract Documents showing the design, location and dimensions of the Work, generally including plans, elevations, sections, details, schedules and diagrams. § 1.1.6 THE SPECIFICATIONS The Specifications are that portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work, and performance of related services. § 1.1.7 INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE Instruments of Service are representations, in any medium of expression now known or later developed, of the tangible and intangible creative work performed by the Architect and the Architect’s consultants under their respective professional services agreements. Instruments of Service may include, without limitation, studies, surveys, models, sketches, drawings, specifications, and other similar materials. § 1.1.8 INITIAL DECISION MAKER The Initial Decision Maker is the person identified in the Agreement to render initial decisions on Claims in accordance with Section 15.2 and certify termination of the Agreement under Section 14.2.2. § 1.2 CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS § 1.2.1 The intent of the Contract Documents is to include all items necessary for the proper execution and completion of the Work by the Contractor. The Contract Documents are complementary, and what is required by one shall be as binding as if required by all; performance by the Contractor shall be required only to the extent consistent with the Contract Documents and reasonably inferable from them as being necessary to produce the indicated results.



Init.

/


11

§ 1.2.2 Organization of the Specifications into divisions, sections and articles, and arrangement of Drawings shall not control the Contractor in dividing the Work among Subcontractors or in establishing the extent of Work to be performed by any trade. § 1.2.3 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, words that have well-known technical or construction industry meanings are used in the Contract Documents in accordance with such recognized meanings. § 1.3 CAPITALIZATION Terms capitalized in these General Conditions include those that are (1) specifically defined, (2) the titles of numbered articles or (3) the titles of other documents published by the American Institute of Architects. § 1.4 INTERPRETATION In the interest of brevity the Contract Documents frequently omit modifying words such as "all" and "any" and articles such as "the" and "an," but the fact that a modifier or an article is absent from one statement and appears in another is not intended to affect the interpretation of either statement. § 1.5 OWNERSHIP AND USE OF DRAWINGS, SPECIFICATIONS AND OTHER INSTRUMENTS OF SERVICE§ 1.5.1 The Architect and the Architect’s consultants shall be deemed the authors and owners of their respective Instruments of Service, including the Drawings and Specifications, and will retain all common law, statutory and other reserved rights, including copyrights. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers shall not own or claim a copyright in the Instruments of Service. Submittal or distribution to meet official regulatory requirements or for other purposes in connection with this Project is not to be construed as publication in derogation of the Architect’s or Architect’s consultants’ reserved rights. § 1.5.2 The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors and material or equipment suppliers are authorized to use and reproduce the Instruments of Service provided to them solely and exclusively for execution of the Work. All copies made under this authorization shall bear the copyright notice, if any, shown on the Instruments of Service. The Contractor, Subcontractors, Sub-subcontractors, and material or equipment suppliers may not use the Instruments of Service on other projects or for additions to this Project outside the scope of the Work without the specific written consent of the Owner, Architect and the Architect’s consultants. § 1.6 TRANSMISSION OF DATA IN DIGITAL FORM If the parties intend to transmit Instruments of Service or any other information or documentation in digital form, they shall endeavor to establish necessary protocols governing such transmissions, unless otherwise already provided in the Agreement or the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 2 OWNER § 2.1 GENERAL § 2.1.1 The Owner is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Owner shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Owner with respect to all matters requiring the Owner’s approval or authorization. Except as otherwise provided in Section 4.2.1, the Architect does not have such authority. The term "Owner" means the Owner or the Owner’s authorized representative. § 2.1.2 The Owner shall furnish to the Contractor within fifteen days after receipt of a written request, information necessary and relevant for the Contractor to evaluate, give notice of or enforce mechanic’s lien rights. Such information shall include a correct statement of the record legal title to the property on which the Project is located, usually referred to as the site, and the Owner’s interest therein. § 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER§ 2.2.1 Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor may request in writing that the Owner provide reasonable evidence that the Owner has made financial arrangements to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract. Thereafter, the Contractor may only request such evidence if (1) the Owner fails to make payments to the Contractor as the Contract Documents require; (2) a change in the Work materially changes the Contract Sum; or (3) the Contractor identifies in writing a reasonable concern regarding the Owner’s ability to make payment when due. The Owner shall furnish such evidence as a condition precedent to commencement or continuation of the Work or



Init.

/


12

the portion of the Work affected by a material change. After the Owner furnishes the evidence, the Owner shall not materially vary such financial arrangements without prior notice to the Contractor. § 2.2.2 Except for permits and fees that are the responsibility of the Contractor under the Contract Documents, including those required under Section 3.7.1, the Owner shall secure and pay for necessary approvals, easements, assessments and charges required for construction, use or occupancy of permanent structures or for permanent changes in existing facilities.

§ 2.2.3 The Owner shall furnish surveys describing physical characteristics, legal limitations and utility locations for the site of the Project, and a legal description of the site. The Contractor shall be entitled to rely on the accuracy of information furnished by the Owner but shall exercise proper precautions relating to the safe performance of the Work. § 2.2.4 The Owner shall furnish information or services required of the Owner by the Contract Documents withreasonable promptness. The Owner shall also furnish any other information or services under the Owner’s control and relevant to the Contractor’s performance of the Work with reasonable promptness after receiving the Contractor’s written request for such information or services. § 2.2.5 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor one copy of the Contract Documents for purposes of making reproductions pursuant to Section 1.5.2. § 2.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO STOP THE WORKIf the Contractor fails to correct Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents as required by Section 12.2 or repeatedly fails to carry out Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, the Owner may issue a written order to the Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been eliminated; however, the right of the Owner to stop the Work shall not give rise to a duty on the part of the Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of the Contractor or any other person or entity, except to the extent required by Section 6.1.3. § 2.4 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK If the Contractor defaults or neglects to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents and fails within a ten-day period after receipt of written notice from the Owner to commence and continue correction of such default or neglect with diligence and promptness, the Owner may, without prejudice to other remedies the Owner may have, correct such deficiencies. In such case an appropriate Change Order shall be issued deducting from payments then or thereafter due the Contractor the reasonable cost of correcting such deficiencies, including Owner’s expenses and compensation for the Architect’s additional services made necessary by such default, neglect or failure. Such action by the Owner and amounts charged to the Contractor are both subject to prior approval of the Architect. If payments then or thereafter due the Contractor are not sufficient to cover such amounts, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. ARTICLE 3 CONTRACTOR § 3.1 GENERAL § 3.1.1 The Contractor is the person or entity identified as such in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. The Contractor shall be lawfully licensed, if required in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. The Contractor shall designate in writing a representative who shall have express authority to bind the Contractor with respect to all matters under this Contract. The term "Contractor" means the Contractor or the Contractor’s authorized representative. § 3.1.2 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 3.1.3 The Contractor shall not be relieved of obligations to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents either by activities or duties of the Architect in the Architect’s administration of the Contract, or by tests, inspections or approvals required or performed by persons or entities other than the Contractor.



Init.

/


13

§ 3.2 REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR § 3.2.1 Execution of the Contract by the Contractor is a representation that the Contractor has visited the site, become generally familiar with local conditions under which the Work is to be performed and correlated personal observations with requirements of the Contract Documents. § 3.2.2 Because the Contract Documents are complementary, the Contractor shall, before starting each portion of the Work, carefully study and compare the various Contract Documents relative to that portion of the Work, as well as the information furnished by the Owner pursuant to Section 2.2.3, shall take field measurements of any existing conditions related to that portion of the Work, and shall observe any conditions at the site affecting it. These obligations are for the purpose of facilitating coordination and construction by the Contractor and are not for the purpose of discovering errors, omissions, or inconsistencies in the Contract Documents; however, the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any errors, inconsistencies or omissions discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. It is recognized that the Contractor’s review is made in the Contractor’s capacity as a contractor and not as a licensed design professional, unless otherwise specifically provided in the Contract Documents. § 3.2.3 The Contractor is not required to ascertain that the Contract Documents are in accordance with applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, but the Contractor shall promptly report to the Architect any nonconformity discovered by or made known to the Contractor as a request for information in such form as the Architect may require. § 3.2.4 If the Contractor believes that additional cost or time is involved because of clarifications or instructions the Architect issues in response to the Contractor’s notices or requests for information pursuant to Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall make Claims as provided in Article 15. If the Contractor fails to perform the obligations of Sections 3.2.2 or 3.2.3, the Contractor shall pay such costs and damages to the Owner as would have been avoided if the Contractor had performed such obligations. If the Contractor performs those obligations, the Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner or Architect for damages resulting from errors, inconsistencies or omissions in the Contract Documents, for differences between field measurements or conditions and the Contract Documents, or for nonconformities of the Contract Documents to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities. § 3.3 SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES§ 3.3.1 The Contractor shall supervise and direct the Work, using the Contractor’s best skill and attention. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for, and have control over, construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures and for coordinating all portions of the Work under the Contract, unless the Contract Documents give other specific instructions concerning these matters. If the Contract Documents give specific instructions concerning construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, the Contractor shall evaluate the jobsite safety thereof and, except as stated below, shall be fully and solely responsible for the jobsite safety of such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. If the Contractor determines that such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures may not be safe, the Contractor shall give timely written notice to the Owner and Architect and shall not proceed with that portion of the Work without further written instructions from the Architect. If the Contractor is then instructed to proceed with the required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures without acceptance of changes proposed by the Contractor, the Owner shall be solely responsible for any loss or damage arising solely from those Owner-required means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. § 3.3.2 The Contractor shall be responsible to the Owner for acts and omissions of the Contractor’s employees, Subcontractors and their agents and employees, and other persons or entities performing portions of the Work for, or on behalf of, the Contractor or any of its Subcontractors. § 3.3.3 The Contractor shall be responsible for inspection of portions of Work already performed to determine that such portions are in proper condition to receive subsequent Work. § 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS § 3.4.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide and pay for labor,materials, equipment, tools, construction equipment and machinery, water, heat, utilities, transportation, and other



Init.

/


14

facilities and services necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work, whether temporary or permanentand whether or not incorporated or to be incorporated in the Work. § 3.4.2 Except in the case of minor changes in the Work authorized by the Architect in accordance with Sections 3.12.8 or 7.4, the Contractor may make substitutions only with the consent of the Owner, after evaluation by the Architect and in accordance with a Change Order or Construction Change Directive. § 3.4.3 The Contractor shall enforce strict discipline and good order among the Contractor’s employees and other persons carrying out the Work. The Contractor shall not permit employment of unfit persons or persons not properly skilled in tasks assigned to them. § 3.5 WARRANTY The Contractor warrants to the Owner and Architect that materials and equipment furnished under the Contract will be of good quality and new unless the Contract Documents require or permit otherwise. The Contractor further warrants that the Work will conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents and will be free from defects, except for those inherent in the quality of the Work the Contract Documents require or permit. Work, materials, or equipment not conforming to these requirements may be considered defective. The Contractor’s warranty excludes remedy for damage or defect caused by abuse, alterations to the Work not executed by the Contractor, improper or insufficient maintenance, improper operation, or normal wear and tear and normal usage. If required by the Architect, the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory evidence as to the kind and quality of materials and equipment. § 3.6 TAXES The Contractor shall pay sales, consumer, use and similar taxes for the Work provided by the Contractor that are legally enacted when bids are received or negotiations concluded, whether or not yet effective or merely scheduled to go into effect. § 3.7 PERMITS, FEES, NOTICES AND COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS§ 3.7.1 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall secure and pay for the building permit as well as for other permits, fees, licenses, and inspections by government agencies necessary for proper execution and completion of the Work that are customarily secured after execution of the Contract and legally required at the time bids are received or negotiations concluded. § 3.7.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities applicable to performance of the Work. § 3.7.3 If the Contractor performs Work knowing it to be contrary to applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of public authorities, the Contractor shall assume appropriate responsibility for such Work and shall bear the costs attributable to correction. § 3.7.4 Concealed or Unknown Conditions. If the Contractor encounters conditions at the site that are (1) subsurface or otherwise concealed physical conditions that differ materially from those indicated in the Contract Documents or (2) unknown physical conditions of an unusual nature, that differ materially from those ordinarily found to exist and generally recognized as inherent in construction activities of the character provided for in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall promptly provide notice to the Owner and the Architect before conditions are disturbed and in no event later than 21 days after first observance of the conditions. The Architect will promptly investigate such conditions and, if the Architect determines that they differ materially and cause an increase or decrease in the Contractor’s cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, will recommend an equitable adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. If the Architect determines that the conditions at the site are not materially different from those indicated in the Contract Documents and that no change in the terms of the Contract is justified, the Architect shall promptly notify the Owner and Contractor in writing, stating the reasons. If either party disputes the Architect’s determination or recommendation, that party may proceed as provided in Article 15. § 3.7.5 If, in the course of the Work, the Contractor encounters human remains or recognizes the existence of burial markers, archaeological sites or wetlands not indicated in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall immediately suspend any operations that would affect them and shall notify the Owner and Architect. Upon receipt of such notice, the Owner shall promptly take any action necessary to obtain governmental authorization required to resume



Init.

/


15

the operations. The Contractor shall continue to suspend such operations until otherwise instructed by the Owner but shall continue with all other operations that do not affect those remains or features. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time arising from the existence of such remains or features may be made as provided in Article 15. § 3.8 ALLOWANCES § 3.8.1 The Contractor shall include in the Contract Sum all allowances stated in the Contract Documents. Items covered by allowances shall be supplied for such amounts and by such persons or entities as the Owner may direct, but the Contractor shall not be required to employ persons or entities to whom the Contractor has reasonable objection. § 3.8.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents,

.1 Allowances shall cover the cost to the Contractor of materials and equipment delivered at the site and all required taxes, less applicable trade discounts;

.2 Contractor’s costs for unloading and handling at the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for stated allowance amounts shall be included in the Contract Sum but not in the allowances; and

.3 Whenever costs are more than or less than allowances, the Contract Sum shall be adjusted accordingly by Change Order. The amount of the Change Order shall reflect (1) the difference between actual costs and the allowances under Section 3.8.2.1 and (2) changes in Contractor’s costs under Section 3.8.2.2.

§ 3.8.3 Materials and equipment under an allowance shall be selected by the Owner with reasonable promptness. § 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT § 3.9.1 The Contractor shall employ a competent superintendent and necessary assistants who shall be in attendance at the Project site during performance of the Work. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor, and communications given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. § 3.9.2 The Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the name and qualifications of a proposed superintendent. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to the proposed superintendent or (2) that the Architect requires additional time to review. Failure of the Architect to reply within the 14 day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 3.9.3 The Contractor shall not employ a proposed superintendent to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not change the superintendent without the Owner’s consent, which shall not unreasonably be withheld or delayed. § 3.10 CONTRACTOR’S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES§ 3.10.1 The Contractor, promptly after being awarded the Contract, shall prepare and submit for the Owner’s and Architect’s information a Contractor’s construction schedule for the Work. The schedule shall not exceed time limits current under the Contract Documents, shall be revised at appropriate intervals as required by the conditions of the Work and Project, shall be related to the entire Project to the extent required by the Contract Documents, and shall provide for expeditious and practicable execution of the Work. § 3.10.2 The Contractor shall prepare a submittal schedule, promptly after being awarded the Contract and thereafter as necessary to maintain a current submittal schedule, and shall submit the schedule(s) for the Architect’s approval. The Architect’s approval shall not unreasonably be delayed or withheld. The submittal schedule shall (1) be coordinated with the Contractor’s construction schedule, and (2) allow the Architect reasonable time to review submittals. If the Contractor fails to submit a submittal schedule, the Contractor shall not be entitled to any increase in Contract Sum or extension of Contract Time based on the time required for review of submittals. § 3.10.3 The Contractor shall perform the Work in general accordance with the most recent schedules submitted to the Owner and Architect.



Init.

/


16

§ 3.11 DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE The Contractor shall maintain at the site for the Owner one copy of the Drawings, Specifications, Addenda, Change Orders and other Modifications, in good order and marked currently to indicate field changes and selections made during construction, and one copy of approved Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar required submittals. These shall be available to the Architect and shall be delivered to the Architect for submittal to the Owner upon completion of the Work as a record of the Work as constructed. § 3.12 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES § 3.12.1 Shop Drawings are drawings, diagrams, schedules and other data specially prepared for the Work by the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor, manufacturer, supplier or distributor to illustrate some portion of the Work. § 3.12.2 Product Data are illustrations, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, brochures, diagrams and other information furnished by the Contractor to illustrate materials or equipment for some portion of the Work. § 3.12.3 Samples are physical examples that illustrate materials, equipment or workmanship and establish standards by which the Work will be judged. § 3.12.4 Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals are not Contract Documents. Their purpose is to demonstrate the way by which the Contractor proposes to conform to the information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents for those portions of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittals. Review by the Architect is subject to the limitations of Section 4.2.7. Informational submittals upon which the Architect is not expected to take responsive action may be so identified in the Contract Documents. Submittals that are not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action. § 3.12.5 The Contractor shall review for compliance with the Contract Documents, approve and submit to the Architect Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals required by the Contract Documents in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness and in such sequence as to cause no delay in the Work or in the activities of the Owner or of separate contractors. § 3.12.6 By submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples and similar submittals, the Contractor represents to the Owner and Architect that the Contractor has (1) reviewed and approved them, (2) determined and verified materials, field measurements and field construction criteria related thereto, or will do so and (3) checked and coordinated the information contained within such submittals with the requirements of the Work and of the Contract Documents. § 3.12.7 The Contractor shall perform no portion of the Work for which the Contract Documents require submittal and review of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals until the respective submittal has been approved by the Architect. § 3.12.8 The Work shall be in accordance with approved submittals except that the Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for deviations from requirements of the Contract Documents by the Architect’s approval of Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals unless the Contractor has specifically informed the Architect in writing of such deviation at the time of submittal and (1) the Architect has given written approval to the specific deviation as a minor change in the Work, or (2) a Change Order or Construction Change Directive has been issued authorizing the deviation. The Contractor shall not be relieved of responsibility for errors or omissions in Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals by the Architect’s approval thereof. § 3.12.9 The Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing or on resubmitted Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples or similar submittals, to revisions other than those requested by the Architect on previous submittals. In the absence of such written notice, the Architect’s approval of a resubmission shall not apply to such revisions. § 3.12.10 The Contractor shall not be required to provide professional services that constitute the practice of architecture or engineering unless such services are specifically required by the Contract Documents for a portion of the Work or unless the Contractor needs to provide such services in order to carry out the Contractor’s responsibilities for construction means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures. The Contractor shall not be



Init.

/


17

required to provide professional services in violation of applicable law. If professional design services or certifications by a design professional related to systems, materials or equipment are specifically required of the Contractor by the Contract Documents, the Owner and the Architect will specify all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. The Contractor shall cause such services or certifications to be provided by a properly licensed design professional, whose signature and seal shall appear on all drawings, calculations, specifications, certifications, Shop Drawings and other submittals prepared by such professional. Shop Drawings and other submittals related to the Work designed or certified by such professional, if prepared by others, shall bear such professional’s written approval when submitted to the Architect. The Owner and the Architect shall be entitled to rely upon the adequacy, accuracy and completeness of the services, certifications and approvals performed or provided by such design professionals, provided the Owner and Architect have specified to the Contractor all performance and design criteria that such services must satisfy. Pursuant to this Section 3.12.10, the Architect will review, approve or take other appropriate action on submittals only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall not be responsible for the adequacy of the performance and design criteria specified in the Contract Documents. § 3.13 USE OF SITE The Contractor shall confine operations at the site to areas permitted by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities and the Contract Documents and shall not unreasonably encumber the site with materials or equipment. § 3.14 CUTTING AND PATCHING § 3.14.1 The Contractor shall be responsible for cutting, fitting or patching required to complete the Work or to make its parts fit together properly. All areas requiring cutting, fitting and patching shall be restored to the condition existing prior to the cutting, fitting and patching, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents. § 3.14.2 The Contractor shall not damage or endanger a portion of the Work or fully or partially completed construction of the Owner or separate contractors by cutting, patching or otherwise altering such construction, or by excavation. The Contractor shall not cut or otherwise alter such construction by the Owner or a separate contractor except with written consent of the Owner and of such separate contractor; such consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. The Contractor shall not unreasonably withhold from the Owner or a separate contractor the Contractor’s consent to cutting or otherwise altering the Work. § 3.15 CLEANING UP § 3.15.1 The Contractor shall keep the premises and surrounding area free from accumulation of waste materials or rubbish caused by operations under the Contract. At completion of the Work, the Contractor shall remove waste materials, rubbish, the Contractor’s tools, construction equipment, machinery and surplus materials from and about the Project. § 3.15.2 If the Contractor fails to clean up as provided in the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so and Owner shall be entitled to reimbursement from the Contractor. § 3.16 ACCESS TO WORK The Contractor shall provide the Owner and Architect access to the Work in preparation and progress wherever located. § 3.17 ROYALTIES, PATENTS AND COPYRIGHTSThe Contractor shall pay all royalties and license fees. The Contractor shall defend suits or claims for infringement of copyrights and patent rights and shall hold the Owner and Architect harmless from loss on account thereof, but shall not be responsible for such defense or loss when a particular design, process or product of a particular manufacturer or manufacturers is required by the Contract Documents, or where the copyright violations are contained in Drawings, Specifications or other documents prepared by the Owner or Architect. However, if the Contractor has reason to believe that the required design, process or product is an infringement of a copyright or a patent, the Contractor shall be responsible for such loss unless such information is promptly furnished to the Architect.



Init.

/


18

§ 3.18 INDEMNIFICATION § 3.18.1 To the fullest extent permitted by law the Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the Owner, Architect, Architect’s consultants, and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), but only to the extent caused by the negligent acts or omissions of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, regardless of whether or not such claim, damage, loss or expense is caused in part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or reduce other rights or obligations of indemnity that would otherwise exist as to a party or person described in this Section 3.18. § 3.18.2 In claims against any person or entity indemnified under this Section 3.18 by an employee of the Contractor, a Subcontractor, anyone directly or indirectly employed by them or anyone for whose acts they may be liable, the indemnification obligation under Section 3.18.1 shall not be limited by a limitation on amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for the Contractor or a Subcontractor under workers’compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. ARTICLE 4 ARCHITECT § 4.1 GENERAL § 4.1.1 The Owner shall retain an architect lawfully licensed to practice architecture or an entity lawfully practicing architecture in the jurisdiction where the Project is located. That person or entity is identified as the Architect in the Agreement and is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number. § 4.1.2 Duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of the Architect as set forth in the Contract Documents shall not be restricted, modified or extended without written consent of the Owner, Contractor and Architect. Consent shall not be unreasonably withheld. § 4.1.3 If the employment of the Architect is terminated, the Owner shall employ a successor architect as to whom the Contractor has no reasonable objection and whose status under the Contract Documents shall be that of the Architect. § 4.2 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT § 4.2.1 The Architect will provide administration of the Contract as described in the Contract Documents and will be an Owner’s representative during construction until the date the Architect issues the final Certificate for Payment. The Architect will have authority to act on behalf of the Owner only to the extent provided in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.2 The Architect will visit the site at intervals appropriate to the stage of construction, or as otherwise agreed with the Owner, to become generally familiar with the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and to determine in general if the Work observed is being performed in a manner indicating that the Work, when fully completed, will be in accordance with the Contract Documents. However, the Architect will not be required to make exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work. The Architect will not have control over, charge of, or responsibility for, the construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, or for the safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work, since these are solely the Contractor’s rights and responsibilities under the Contract Documents, except as provided in Section 3.3.1. § 4.2.3 On the basis of the site visits, the Architect will keep the Owner reasonably informed about the progress and quality of the portion of the Work completed, and report to the Owner (1) known deviations from the Contract Documents and from the most recent construction schedule submitted by the Contractor, and (2) defects and deficiencies observed in the Work. The Architect will not be responsible for the Contractor’s failure to perform the Work in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. The Architect will not have control over or charge of and will not be responsible for acts or omissions of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or their agents or employees, or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work.



Init.

/


19

§ 4.2.4 COMMUNICATIONS FACILITATING CONTRACT ADMINISTRATIONExcept as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or when direct communications have been specially authorized, the Owner and Contractor shall endeavor to communicate with each other through the Architect about matters arising out of or relating to the Contract. Communications by and with the Architect’s consultants shall be through the Architect. Communications by and with Subcontractors and material suppliers shall be through the Contractor. Communications by and with separate contractors shall be through the Owner. § 4.2.5 Based on the Architect’s evaluations of the Contractor’s Applications for Payment, the Architect will review and certify the amounts due the Contractor and will issue Certificates for Payment in such amounts. § 4.2.6 The Architect has authority to reject Work that does not conform to the Contract Documents. Whenever the Architect considers it necessary or advisable, the Architect will have authority to require inspection or testing of the Work in accordance with Sections 13.5.2 and 13.5.3, whether or not such Work is fabricated, installed or completed. However, neither this authority of the Architect nor a decision made in good faith either to exercise or not to exercise such authority shall give rise to a duty or responsibility of the Architect to the Contractor, Subcontractors, material and equipment suppliers, their agents or employees, or other persons or entities performing portions of the Work. § 4.2.7 The Architect will review and approve, or take other appropriate action upon, the Contractor’s submittals such as Shop Drawings, Product Data and Samples, but only for the limited purpose of checking for conformance with information given and the design concept expressed in the Contract Documents. The Architect’s action will be taken in accordance with the submittal schedule approved by the Architect or, in the absence of an approved submittal schedule, with reasonable promptness while allowing sufficient time in the Architect’s professionaljudgment to permit adequate review. Review of such submittals is not conducted for the purpose of determining the accuracy and completeness of other details such as dimensions and quantities, or for substantiating instructions for installation or performance of equipment or systems, all of which remain the responsibility of the Contractor as required by the Contract Documents. The Architect’s review of the Contractor’s submittals shall not relieve the Contractor of the obligations under Sections 3.3, 3.5 and 3.12. The Architect’s review shall not constitute approval of safety precautions or, unless otherwise specifically stated by the Architect, of any construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures. The Architect’s approval of a specific item shall not indicate approval of an assembly of which the item is a component. § 4.2.8 The Architect will prepare Change Orders and Construction Change Directives, and may authorize minorchanges in the Work as provided in Section 7.4. The Architect will investigate and make determinations and recommendations regarding concealed and unknown conditions as provided in Section 3.7.4. § 4.2.9 The Architect will conduct inspections to determine the date or dates of Substantial Completion and the date of final completion; issue Certificates of Substantial Completion pursuant to Section 9.8; receive and forward to the Owner, for the Owner’s review and records, written warranties and related documents required by the Contract and assembled by the Contractor pursuant to Section 9.10; and issue a final Certificate for Payment pursuant to Section 9.10. § 4.2.10 If the Owner and Architect agree, the Architect will provide one or more project representatives to assist in carrying out the Architect’s responsibilities at the site. The duties, responsibilities and limitations of authority of such project representatives shall be as set forth in an exhibit to be incorporated in the Contract Documents. § 4.2.11 The Architect will interpret and decide matters concerning performance under, and requirements of, the Contract Documents on written request of either the Owner or Contractor. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. § 4.2.12 Interpretations and decisions of the Architect will be consistent with the intent of, and reasonably inferable from, the Contract Documents and will be in writing or in the form of drawings. When making such interpretations and decisions, the Architect will endeavor to secure faithful performance by both Owner and Contractor, will not show partiality to either and will not be liable for results of interpretations or decisions rendered in good faith. § 4.2.13 The Architect’s decisions on matters relating to aesthetic effect will be final if consistent with the intent expressed in the Contract Documents.



Init.

/


20

§ 4.2.14 The Architect will review and respond to requests for information about the Contract Documents. The Architect’s response to such requests will be made in writing within any time limits agreed upon or otherwise with reasonable promptness. If appropriate, the Architect will prepare and issue supplemental Drawings and Specifications in response to the requests for information. ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS § 5.1 DEFINITIONS § 5.1.1 A Subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct contract with the Contractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Subcontractor. The term "Subcontractor" does not include a separate contractor or subcontractors of a separate contractor. § 5.1.2 A Sub-subcontractor is a person or entity who has a direct or indirect contract with a Subcontractor to perform a portion of the Work at the site. The term "Sub-subcontractor" is referred to throughout the Contract Documents as if singular in number and means a Sub-subcontractor or an authorized representative of the Sub-subcontractor. § 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK§ 5.2.1 Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents or the bidding requirements, the Contractor, as soon as practicable after award of the Contract, shall furnish in writing to the Owner through the Architect the names of persons or entities (including those who are to furnish materials or equipment fabricated to a special design) proposed for each principal portion of the Work. The Architect may reply within 14 days to the Contractor in writing stating (1) whether the Owner or the Architect has reasonable objection to any such proposed person or entity or (2) that the Architect requires additional time for review. Failure of the Owner or Architect to reply within the 14-day period shall constitute notice of no reasonable objection. § 5.2.2 The Contractor shall not contract with a proposed person or entity to whom the Owner or Architect has made reasonable and timely objection. The Contractor shall not be required to contract with anyone to whom the Contractor has made reasonable objection. § 5.2.3 If the Owner or Architect has reasonable objection to a person or entity proposed by the Contractor, the Contractor shall propose another to whom the Owner or Architect has no reasonable objection. If the proposed but rejected Subcontractor was reasonably capable of performing the Work, the Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be increased or decreased by the difference, if any, occasioned by such change, and an appropriate Change Order shall be issued before commencement of the substitute Subcontractor’s Work. However, no increase in the Contract Sum or Contract Time shall be allowed for such change unless the Contractor has acted promptly and responsively in submitting names as required. § 5.2.4 The Contractor shall not substitute a Subcontractor, person or entity previously selected if the Owner or Architect makes reasonable objection to such substitution. § 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS By appropriate agreement, written where legally required for validity, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor, to the extent of the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor, to be bound to the Contractor by terms of the Contract Documents, and to assume toward the Contractor all the obligations and responsibilities, including the responsibility for safety of the Subcontractor’s Work, which the Contractor, by these Documents, assumes toward the Owner and Architect. Each subcontract agreement shall preserve and protect the rights of the Owner and Architect under the Contract Documents with respect to the Work to be performed by the Subcontractor so that subcontracting thereof will not prejudice such rights, and shall allow to the Subcontractor, unless specifically provided otherwise in the subcontract agreement, the benefit of all rights, remedies and redress against the Contractor that the Contractor, by the Contract Documents, has against the Owner. Where appropriate, the Contractor shall require each Subcontractor to enter into similar agreements with Sub-subcontractors. The Contractor shall make available to each proposed Subcontractor, prior to the execution of the subcontract agreement, copies of the Contract Documents to which the Subcontractor will be bound, and, upon written request of the Subcontractor, identify to the Subcontractor terms and conditions of the proposed subcontract agreement that may



Init.

/


21

be at variance with the Contract Documents. Subcontractors will similarly make copies of applicable portions of such documents available to their respective proposed Sub-subcontractors. § 5.4 CONTINGENT ASSIGNMENT OF SUBCONTRACTS§ 5.4.1 Each subcontract agreement for a portion of the Work is assigned by the Contractor to the Owner, provided that

.1 assignment is effective only after termination of the Contract by the Owner for cause pursuant to Section 14.2 and only for those subcontract agreements that the Owner accepts by notifying the Subcontractor and Contractor in writing; and

.2 assignment is subject to the prior rights of the surety, if any, obligated under bond relating to the Contract.

When the Owner accepts the assignment of a subcontract agreement, the Owner assumes the Contractor’s rights and obligations under the subcontract. § 5.4.2 Upon such assignment, if the Work has been suspended for more than 30 days, the Subcontractor’s compensation shall be equitably adjusted for increases in cost resulting from the suspension. § 5.4.3 Upon such assignment to the Owner under this Section 5.4, the Owner may further assign the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity. If the Owner assigns the subcontract to a successor contractor or other entity, the Owner shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all of the successor contractor’s obligations under the subcontract. ARTICLE 6 CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS § 6.1 OWNER’S RIGHT TO PERFORM CONSTRUCTION AND TO AWARD SEPARATE CONTRACTS § 6.1.1 The Owner reserves the right to perform construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, and to award separate contracts in connection with other portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site under Conditions of the Contract identical or substantially similar to these including those portions related to insurance and waiver of subrogation. If the Contractor claims that delay or additional cost is involved because of such action by the Owner, the Contractor shall make such Claim as provided in Article 15. § 6.1.2 When separate contracts are awarded for different portions of the Project or other construction or operations on the site, the term "Contractor" in the Contract Documents in each case shall mean the Contractor who executes each separate Owner-Contractor Agreement. § 6.1.3 The Owner shall provide for coordination of the activities of the Owner’s own forces and of each separate contractor with the Work of the Contractor, who shall cooperate with them. The Contractor shall participate with other separate contractors and the Owner in reviewing their construction schedules. The Contractor shall make any revisions to the construction schedule deemed necessary after a joint review and mutual agreement. The construction schedules shall then constitute the schedules to be used by the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner until subsequently revised. § 6.1.4 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, when the Owner performs construction or operations related to the Project with the Owner’s own forces, the Owner shall be deemed to be subject to the same obligations and to have the same rights that apply to the Contractor under the Conditions of the Contract, including, without excluding others, those stated in Article 3, this Article 6 and Articles 10, 11 and 12. § 6.2 MUTUAL RESPONSIBILITY § 6.2.1 The Contractor shall afford the Owner and separate contractors reasonable opportunity for introduction and storage of their materials and equipment and performance of their activities, and shall connect and coordinate the Contractor’s construction and operations with theirs as required by the Contract Documents. § 6.2.2 If part of the Contractor’s Work depends for proper execution or results upon construction or operations by the Owner or a separate contractor, the Contractor shall, prior to proceeding with that portion of the Work, promptly report to the Architect apparent discrepancies or defects in such other construction that would render it unsuitable for such proper execution and results. Failure of the Contractor so to report shall constitute an acknowledgment that



Init.

/


22

the Owner’s or separate contractor’s completed or partially completed construction is fit and proper to receive the Contractor’s Work, except as to defects not then reasonably discoverable. § 6.2.3 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for costs the Owner incurs that are payable to a separate contractor because of the Contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities or defective construction. The Owner shall be responsible to the Contractor for costs the Contractor incurs because of a separate contractor’s delays, improperly timed activities, damage to the Work or defective construction.

§ 6.2.4 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage the Contractor wrongfully causes to completed or partially completed construction or to property of the Owner or separate contractors as provided in Section 10.2.5. § 6.2.5 The Owner and each separate contractor shall have the same responsibilities for cutting and patching as are described for the Contractor in Section 3.14. § 6.3 OWNER’S RIGHT TO CLEAN UP If a dispute arises among the Contractor, separate contractors and the Owner as to the responsibility under their respective contracts for maintaining the premises and surrounding area free from waste materials and rubbish, the Owner may clean up and the Architect will allocate the cost among those responsible. ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK § 7.1 GENERAL § 7.1.1 Changes in the Work may be accomplished after execution of the Contract, and without invalidating the Contract, by Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work, subject to the limitations stated in this Article 7 and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. § 7.1.2 A Change Order shall be based upon agreement among the Owner, Contractor and Architect; a Construction Change Directive requires agreement by the Owner and Architect and may or may not be agreed to by the Contractor; an order for a minor change in the Work may be issued by the Architect alone. § 7.1.3 Changes in the Work shall be performed under applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and the Contractor shall proceed promptly, unless otherwise provided in the Change Order, Construction Change Directive or order for a minor change in the Work. § 7.2 CHANGE ORDERS § 7.2.1 A Change Order is a written instrument prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner, Contractor and Architect stating their agreement upon all of the following:

.1 The change in the Work;

.2 The amount of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum; and

.3 The extent of the adjustment, if any, in the Contract Time. § 7.3 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVES § 7.3.1 A Construction Change Directive is a written order prepared by the Architect and signed by the Owner and Architect, directing a change in the Work prior to agreement on adjustment, if any, in the Contract Sum or Contract Time, or both. The Owner may by Construction Change Directive, without invalidating the Contract, order changes in the Work within the general scope of the Contract consisting of additions, deletions or other revisions, the Contract Sum and Contract Time being adjusted accordingly. § 7.3.2 A Construction Change Directive shall be used in the absence of total agreement on the terms of a Change Order. § 7.3.3 If the Construction Change Directive provides for an adjustment to the Contract Sum, the adjustment shall be based on one of the following methods:

.1 Mutual acceptance of a lump sum properly itemized and supported by sufficient substantiating data topermit evaluation;

.2 Unit prices stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon;

.3 Cost to be determined in a manner agreed upon by the parties and a mutually acceptable fixed or percentage fee; or



Init.

/


23

.4 As provided in Section 7.3.7. § 7.3.4 If unit prices are stated in the Contract Documents or subsequently agreed upon, and if quantities originally contemplated are materially changed in a proposed Change Order or Construction Change Directive so that application of such unit prices to quantities of Work proposed will cause substantial inequity to the Owner or Contractor, the applicable unit prices shall be equitably adjusted. § 7.3.5 Upon receipt of a Construction Change Directive, the Contractor shall promptly proceed with the change in the Work involved and advise the Architect of the Contractor’s agreement or disagreement with the method, if any, provided in the Construction Change Directive for determining the proposed adjustment in the Contract Sum or Contract Time. § 7.3.6 A Construction Change Directive signed by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including adjustment in Contract Sum and Contract Time or the method for determining them. Such agreement shall be effective immediately and shall be recorded as a Change Order. § 7.3.7 If the Contractor does not respond promptly or disagrees with the method for adjustment in the Contract Sum, the Architect shall determine the method and the adjustment on the basis of reasonable expenditures and savings of those performing the Work attributable to the change, including, in case of an increase in the Contract Sum, an amount for overhead and profit as set forth in the Agreement, or if no such amount is set forth in the Agreement, a reasonable amount. In such case, and also under Section 7.3.3.3, the Contractor shall keep and present, in such form as the Architect may prescribe, an itemized accounting together with appropriate supporting data. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, costs for the purposes of this Section 7.3.7 shall be limited to the following:

.1 Costs of labor, including social security, old age and unemployment insurance, fringe benefits required by agreement or custom, and workers’ compensation insurance;

.2 Costs of materials, supplies and equipment, including cost of transportation, whether incorporated or consumed;

.3 Rental costs of machinery and equipment, exclusive of hand tools, whether rented from the Contractor or others;

.4 Costs of premiums for all bonds and insurance, permit fees, and sales, use or similar taxes related to the Work; and

.5 Additional costs of supervision and field office personnel directly attributable to the change. § 7.3.8 The amount of credit to be allowed by the Contractor to the Owner for a deletion or change that results in a net decrease in the Contract Sum shall be actual net cost as confirmed by the Architect. When both additions and credits covering related Work or substitutions are involved in a change, the allowance for overhead and profit shall be figured on the basis of net increase, if any, with respect to that change. § 7.3.9 Pending final determination of the total cost of a Construction Change Directive to the Owner, the Contractor may request payment for Work completed under the Construction Change Directive in Applications for Payment. The Architect will make an interim determination for purposes of monthly certification for payment for those costs and certify for payment the amount that the Architect determines, in the Architect’s professional judgment, to be reasonably justified. The Architect’s interim determination of cost shall adjust the Contract Sum on the same basis as a Change Order, subject to the right of either party to disagree and assert a Claim in accordance with Article 15. § 7.3.10 When the Owner and Contractor agree with a determination made by the Architect concerning the adjustments in the Contract Sum and Contract Time, or otherwise reach agreement upon the adjustments, such agreement shall be effective immediately and the Architect will prepare a Change Order. Change Orders may be issued for all or any part of a Construction Change Directive. § 7.4 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK The Architect has authority to order minor changes in the Work not involving adjustment in the Contract Sum or extension of the Contract Time and not inconsistent with the intent of the Contract Documents. Such changes will be effected by written order signed by the Architect and shall be binding on the Owner and Contractor.



Init.

/


24

ARTICLE 8 TIME § 8.1 DEFINITIONS § 8.1.1 Unless otherwise provided, Contract Time is the period of time, including authorized adjustments, allotted in the Contract Documents for Substantial Completion of the Work. § 8.1.2 The date of commencement of the Work is the date established in the Agreement. § 8.1.3 The date of Substantial Completion is the date certified by the Architect in accordance with Section 9.8. § 8.1.4 The term "day" as used in the Contract Documents shall mean calendar day unless otherwise specifically defined. § 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION § 8.2.1 Time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. By executing the Agreement the Contractor confirms that the Contract Time is a reasonable period for performing the Work. § 8.2.2 The Contractor shall not knowingly, except by agreement or instruction of the Owner in writing, prematurely commence operations on the site or elsewhere prior to the effective date of insurance required by Article 11 to be furnished by the Contractor and Owner. The date of commencement of the Work shall not be changed by the effective date of such insurance. § 8.2.3 The Contractor shall proceed expeditiously with adequate forces and shall achieve Substantial Completion within the Contract Time. § 8.3 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME § 8.3.1 If the Contractor is delayed at any time in the commencement or progress of the Work by an act or neglect of the Owner or Architect, or of an employee of either, or of a separate contractor employed by the Owner; or by changes ordered in the Work; or by labor disputes, fire, unusual delay in deliveries, unavoidable casualties or other causes beyond the Contractor’s control; or by delay authorized by the Owner pending mediation and arbitration; or by other causes that the Architect determines may justify delay, then the Contract Time shall be extended by Change Order for such reasonable time as the Architect may determine. § 8.3.2 Claims relating to time shall be made in accordance with applicable provisions of Article 15. § 8.3.3 This Section 8.3 does not preclude recovery of damages for delay by either party under other provisions of the Contract Documents. ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION § 9.1 CONTRACT SUM The Contract Sum is stated in the Agreement and, including authorized adjustments, is the total amount payable by the Owner to the Contractor for performance of the Work under the Contract Documents. § 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES Where the Contract is based on a stipulated sum or Guaranteed Maximum Price, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect, before the first Application for Payment, a schedule of values allocating the entire Contract Sum to the various portions of the Work and prepared in such form and supported by such data to substantiate its accuracy as the Architect may require. This schedule, unless objected to by the Architect, shall be used as a basis for reviewing the Contractor’s Applications for Payment. § 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT § 9.3.1 At least ten days before the date established for each progress payment, the Contractor shall submit to the Architect an itemized Application for Payment prepared in accordance with the schedule of values, if required under Section 9.2, for completed portions of the Work. Such application shall be notarized, if required, and supported by such data substantiating the Contractor’s right to payment as the Owner or Architect may require, such as copies of requisitions from Subcontractors and material suppliers, and shall reflect retainage if provided for in the Contract Documents.



Init.

/


25

§ 9.3.1.1 As provided in Section 7.3.9, such applications may include requests for payment on account of changes in the Work that have been properly authorized by Construction Change Directives, or by interim determinations of the Architect, but not yet included in Change Orders. § 9.3.1.2 Applications for Payment shall not include requests for payment for portions of the Work for which the Contractor does not intend to pay a Subcontractor or material supplier, unless such Work has been performed by others whom the Contractor intends to pay.

§ 9.3.2 Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, payments shall be made on account of materials and equipment delivered and suitably stored at the site for subsequent incorporation in the Work. If approved in advance by the Owner, payment may similarly be made for materials and equipment suitably stored off the site at a location agreed upon in writing. Payment for materials and equipment stored on or off the site shall be conditioned upon compliance by the Contractor with procedures satisfactory to the Owner to establish the Owner’s title to suchmaterials and equipment or otherwise protect the Owner’s interest, and shall include the costs of applicable insurance, storage and transportation to the site for such materials and equipment stored off the site. § 9.3.3 The Contractor warrants that title to all Work covered by an Application for Payment will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment. The Contractor further warrants that upon submittal of an Application for Payment all Work for which Certificates for Payment have been previously issued and payments received from the Owner shall, to the best of the Contractor’s knowledge, information and belief, be free and clear of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances in favor of the Contractor, Subcontractors, material suppliers, or other persons or entities making a claim by reason of having provided labor, materials and equipment relating to the Work. § 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT § 9.4.1 The Architect will, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, either issue to the Owner a Certificate for Payment, with a copy to the Contractor, for such amount as the Architect determines is properly due, or notify the Contractor and Owner in writing of the Architect’s reasons for withholding certification in whole or in part as provided in Section 9.5.1. § 9.4.2 The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will constitute a representation by the Architect to the Owner, based on the Architect’s evaluation of the Work and the data comprising the Application for Payment, that, to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, the Work has progressed to the point indicated and that the quality of the Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents. The foregoing representations are subject to an evaluation of the Work for conformance with the Contract Documents upon Substantial Completion, to results of subsequent tests and inspections, to correction of minor deviations from the Contract Documents prior to completion and to specific qualifications expressed by the Architect. The issuance of a Certificate for Payment will further constitute a representation that the Contractor is entitled to payment in the amount certified. However, the issuance of a Certificate for Payment will not be a representation that the Architect has (1) made exhaustive or continuous on-site inspections to check the quality or quantity of the Work, (2) reviewed construction means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures, (3) reviewed copies of requisitions received from Subcontractors and material suppliers and other data requested by the Owner to substantiate the Contractor’s right to payment, or (4) made examination to ascertain how or for what purpose the Contractor has used money previously paid on account of the Contract Sum. § 9.5 DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATION§ 9.5.1 The Architect may withhold a Certificate for Payment in whole or in part, to the extent reasonably necessary to protect the Owner, if in the Architect’s opinion the representations to the Owner required by Section 9.4.2 cannot be made. If the Architect is unable to certify payment in the amount of the Application, the Architect will notify the Contractor and Owner as provided in Section 9.4.1. If the Contractor and Architect cannot agree on a revised amount, the Architect will promptly issue a Certificate for Payment for the amount for which the Architect is able to make such representations to the Owner. The Architect may also withhold a Certificate for Payment or, because of subsequently discovered evidence, may nullify the whole or a part of a Certificate for Payment previously issued, to such extent as may be necessary in the Architect’s opinion to protect the Owner from loss for which the Contractor is responsible, including loss resulting from acts and omissions described in Section 3.3.2, because of

.1 defective Work not remedied;

.2 third party claims filed or reasonable evidence indicating probable filing of such claims unless security acceptable to the Owner is provided by the Contractor;



Init.

/


26

.3 failure of the Contractor to make payments properly to Subcontractors or for labor, materials or equipment;

.4 reasonable evidence that the Work cannot be completed for the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum;

.5 damage to the Owner or a separate contractor;

.6 reasonable evidence that the Work will not be completed within the Contract Time, and that the unpaid balance would not be adequate to cover actual or liquidated damages for the anticipated delay; or

.7 repeated failure to carry out the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.5.2 When the above reasons for withholding certification are removed, certification will be made for amounts previously withheld. § 9.5.3 If the Architect withholds certification for payment under Section 9.5.1.3, the Owner may, at its sole option, issue joint checks to the Contractor and to any Subcontractor or material or equipment suppliers to whom the Contractor failed to make payment for Work properly performed or material or equipment suitably delivered. If the Owner makes payments by joint check, the Owner shall notify the Architect and the Architect will reflect such payment on the next Certificate for Payment. § 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS § 9.6.1 After the Architect has issued a Certificate for Payment, the Owner shall make payment in the manner and within the time provided in the Contract Documents, and shall so notify the Architect. § 9.6.2 The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor no later than seven days after receipt of payment from the Owner the amount to which the Subcontractor is entitled, reflecting percentages actually retained from payments to the Contractor on account of the Subcontractor’s portion of the Work. The Contractor shall, by appropriate agreement with each Subcontractor, require each Subcontractor to make payments to Sub-subcontractors in a similar manner. § 9.6.3 The Architect will, on request, furnish to a Subcontractor, if practicable, information regarding percentages of completion or amounts applied for by the Contractor and action taken thereon by the Architect and Owner on account of portions of the Work done by such Subcontractor. § 9.6.4 The Owner has the right to request written evidence from the Contractor that the Contractor has properly paid Subcontractors and material and equipment suppliers amounts paid by the Owner to the Contractor for subcontracted Work. If the Contractor fails to furnish such evidence within seven days, the Owner shall have the right to contact Subcontractors to ascertain whether they have been properly paid. Neither the Owner nor Architect shall have an obligation to pay or to see to the payment of money to a Subcontractor, except as may otherwise be required by law. § 9.6.5 Contractor payments to material and equipment suppliers shall be treated in a manner similar to thatprovided in Sections 9.6.2, 9.6.3 and 9.6.4. § 9.6.6 A Certificate for Payment, a progress payment, or partial or entire use or occupancy of the Project by the Owner shall not constitute acceptance of Work not in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.6.7 Unless the Contractor provides the Owner with a payment bond in the full penal sum of the Contract Sum, payments received by the Contractor for Work properly performed by Subcontractors and suppliers shall be held by the Contractor for those Subcontractors or suppliers who performed Work or furnished materials, or both, under contract with the Contractor for which payment was made by the Owner. Nothing contained herein shall require money to be placed in a separate account and not commingled with money of the Contractor, shall create any fiduciary liability or tort liability on the part of the Contractor for breach of trust or shall entitle any person or entity to an award of punitive damages against the Contractor for breach of the requirements of this provision. § 9.7 FAILURE OF PAYMENT If the Architect does not issue a Certificate for Payment, through no fault of the Contractor, within seven days after receipt of the Contractor’s Application for Payment, or if the Owner does not pay the Contractor within seven days after the date established in the Contract Documents the amount certified by the Architect or awarded by binding



Init.

/


27

dispute resolution, then the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, stop the Work until payment of the amount owing has been received. The Contract Time shall be extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased by the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable costs of shut-down, delay and start-up, plus interest as provided for in the Contract Documents. § 9.8 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 9.8.1 Substantial Completion is the stage in the progress of the Work when the Work or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents so that the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work for its intended use. § 9.8.2 When the Contractor considers that the Work, or a portion thereof which the Owner agrees to accept separately, is substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Architect a comprehensive list of items to be completed or corrected prior to final payment. Failure to include an item on such list does not alter the responsibility of the Contractor to complete all Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. § 9.8.3 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s list, the Architect will make an inspection to determine whether the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete. If the Architect’s inspection discloses any item, whether or not included on the Contractor’s list, which is not sufficiently complete in accordance with the Contract Documents sothat the Owner can occupy or utilize the Work or designated portion thereof for its intended use, the Contractor shall, before issuance of the Certificate of Substantial Completion, complete or correct such item upon notification by the Architect. In such case, the Contractor shall then submit a request for another inspection by the Architect to determine Substantial Completion. § 9.8.4 When the Work or designated portion thereof is substantially complete, the Architect will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion that shall establish the date of Substantial Completion, shall establish responsibilities of the Owner and Contractor for security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and shall fix the time within which the Contractor shall finish all items on the list accompanying the Certificate. Warranties required by the Contract Documents shall commence on the date of Substantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof unless otherwise provided in the Certificate of Substantial Completion. § 9.8.5 The Certificate of Substantial Completion shall be submitted to the Owner and Contractor for their written acceptance of responsibilities assigned to them in such Certificate. Upon such acceptance and consent of surety, if any, the Owner shall make payment of retainage applying to such Work or designated portion thereof. Such payment shall be adjusted for Work that is incomplete or not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 9.9 PARTIAL OCCUPANCY OR USE § 9.9.1 The Owner may occupy or use any completed or partially completed portion of the Work at any stage when such portion is designated by separate agreement with the Contractor, provided such occupancy or use is consented to by the insurer as required under Section 11.3.1.5 and authorized by public authorities having jurisdiction over the Project. Such partial occupancy or use may commence whether or not the portion is substantially complete, provided the Owner and Contractor have accepted in writing the responsibilities assigned to each of them for payments, retainage, if any, security, maintenance, heat, utilities, damage to the Work and insurance, and have agreed in writing concerning the period for correction of the Work and commencement of warranties required by the Contract Documents. When the Contractor considers a portion substantially complete, the Contractor shall prepare and submit a list to the Architect as provided under Section 9.8.2. Consent of the Contractor to partial occupancy or use shall not be unreasonably withheld. The stage of the progress of the Work shall be determined by written agreement between the Owner and Contractor or, if no agreement is reached, by decision of the Architect. § 9.9.2 Immediately prior to such partial occupancy or use, the Owner, Contractor and Architect shall jointly inspect the area to be occupied or portion of the Work to be used in order to determine and record the condition of the Work. § 9.9.3 Unless otherwise agreed upon, partial occupancy or use of a portion or portions of the Work shall not constitute acceptance of Work not complying with the requirements of the Contract Documents.



Init.

/


28

§ 9.10 FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT§ 9.10.1 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice that the Work is ready for final inspection and acceptance and upon receipt of a final Application for Payment, the Architect will promptly make such inspection and, when the Architect finds the Work acceptable under the Contract Documents and the Contract fully performed, the Architect will promptly issue a final Certificate for Payment stating that to the best of the Architect’s knowledge, information and belief, and on the basis of the Architect’s on-site visits and inspections, the Work has been completed in accordance with terms and conditions of the Contract Documents and that the entire balance found to be due the Contractor and noted in the final Certificate is due and payable. The Architect’s final Certificate for Payment will constitute a further representation that conditions listed in Section 9.10.2 as precedent to the Contractor’s being entitled to final payment have been fulfilled. § 9.10.2 Neither final payment nor any remaining retained percentage shall become due until the Contractor submits to the Architect (1) an affidavit that payrolls, bills for materials and equipment, and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner’s property might be responsible or encumbered (less amounts withheld by Owner) have been paid or otherwise satisfied, (2) a certificate evidencing that insurance required by the Contract Documents to remain in force after final payment is currently in effect and will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner, (3) a written statement that the Contractor knows of no substantial reason that the insurance will not be renewable to cover the period required by the Contract Documents, (4) consent of surety, if any, to final payment and (5), if required by the Owner, other data establishing payment or satisfaction of obligations, such as receipts, releases and waivers of liens, claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract, to the extent and in such form as may be designated by the Owner. If a Subcontractor refuses to furnish a release or waiver required by the Owner, the Contractor may furnish a bond satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against such lien. If such lien remains unsatisfied after payments are made, the Contractor shall refund to the Owner all money that the Owner may be compelled to pay in discharging such lien, including all costs and reasonable attorneys’ fees. § 9.10.3 If, after Substantial Completion of the Work, final completion thereof is materially delayed through no fault of the Contractor or by issuance of Change Orders affecting final completion, and the Architect so confirms, the Owner shall, upon application by the Contractor and certification by the Architect, and without terminating the Contract, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than retainage stipulated in the Contract Documents, and if bonds have been furnished, the written consent of surety to payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted shall be submitted by the Contractor to the Architect prior to certification of such payment. Such payment shall be made under terms and conditions governing final payment, except that it shall not constitute a waiver of claims. § 9.10.4 The making of final payment shall constitute a waiver of Claims by the Owner except those arising from

.1 liens, Claims, security interests or encumbrances arising out of the Contract and unsettled;

.2 failure of the Work to comply with the requirements of the Contract Documents; or

.3 terms of special warranties required by the Contract Documents. § 9.10.5 Acceptance of final payment by the Contractor, a Subcontractor or material supplier shall constitute a waiver of claims by that payee except those previously made in writing and identified by that payee as unsettled at the time of final Application for Payment. ARTICLE 10 PROTECTION OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.1 SAFETY PRECAUTIONS AND PROGRAMSThe Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. § 10.2 SAFETY OF PERSONS AND PROPERTY§ 10.2.1 The Contractor shall take reasonable precautions for safety of, and shall provide reasonable protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to

.1 employees on the Work and other persons who may be affected thereby;

.2 the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site, under care, custody or control of the Contractor or the Contractor’s Subcontractors or Sub-subcontractors; and



Init.

/


29

.3 other property at the site or adjacent thereto, such as trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures and utilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction.

§ 10.2.2 The Contractor shall comply with and give notices required by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, and lawful orders of public authorities bearing on safety of persons or property or their protection from damage, injury or loss.

§ 10.2.3 The Contractor shall erect and maintain, as required by existing conditions and performance of the Contract, reasonable safeguards for safety and protection, including posting danger signs and other warnings against hazards, promulgating safety regulations and notifying owners and users of adjacent sites and utilities. § 10.2.4 When use or storage of explosives or other hazardous materials or equipment or unusual methods are necessary for execution of the Work, the Contractor shall exercise utmost care and carry on such activities under supervision of properly qualified personnel. § 10.2.5 The Contractor shall promptly remedy damage and loss (other than damage or loss insured under property insurance required by the Contract Documents) to property referred to in Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3 caused in whole or in part by the Contractor, a Subcontractor, a Sub-subcontractor, or anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts they may be liable and for which the Contractor is responsible under Sections 10.2.1.2 and 10.2.1.3, except damage or loss attributable to acts or omissions of the Owner or Architect or anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them, or by anyone for whose acts either of them may be liable, and not attributable to the fault or negligence of the Contractor. The foregoing obligations of the Contractor are in addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18. § 10.2.6 The Contractor shall designate a responsible member of the Contractor’s organization at the site whose duty shall be the prevention of accidents. This person shall be the Contractor’s superintendent unless otherwise designated by the Contractor in writing to the Owner and Architect. § 10.2.7 The Contractor shall not permit any part of the construction or site to be loaded so as to cause damage or create an unsafe condition. § 10.2.8 INJURY OR DAMAGE TO PERSON OR PROPERTY If either party suffers injury or damage to person or property because of an act or omission of the other party, or of others for whose acts such party is legally responsible, written notice of such injury or damage, whether or not insured, shall be given to the other party within a reasonable time not exceeding 21 days after discovery. The notice shall provide sufficient detail to enable the other party to investigate the matter. § 10.3 HAZARDOUS MATERIALS § 10.3.1 The Contractor is responsible for compliance with any requirements included in the Contract Documents regarding hazardous materials. If the Contractor encounters a hazardous material or substance not addressed in the Contract Documents and if reasonable precautions will be inadequate to prevent foreseeable bodily injury or death to persons resulting from a material or substance, including but not limited to asbestos or polychlorinated biphenyl (PCB), encountered on the site by the Contractor, the Contractor shall, upon recognizing the condition, immediately stop Work in the affected area and report the condition to the Owner and Architect in writing. § 10.3.2 Upon receipt of the Contractor’s written notice, the Owner shall obtain the services of a licensed laboratory to verify the presence or absence of the material or substance reported by the Contractor and, in the event such material or substance is found to be present, to cause it to be rendered harmless. Unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall furnish in writing to the Contractor and Architect the names and qualifications of persons or entities who are to perform tests verifying the presence or absence of such material or substance or who are to perform the task of removal or safe containment of such material or substance. The Contractor and the Architect will promptly reply to the Owner in writing stating whether or not either has reasonable objection to the persons or entities proposed by the Owner. If either the Contractor or Architect has an objection to a person or entity proposed by the Owner, the Owner shall propose another to whom the Contractor and the Architect have no reasonable objection. When the material or substance has been rendered harmless, Work in the affected area shall resume upon written agreement of the Owner and Contractor. By Change Order, the Contract Time shall be



Init.

/


30

extended appropriately and the Contract Sum shall be increased in the amount of the Contractor’s reasonable additional costs of shut-down, delay and start-up. § 10.3.3 To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Owner shall indemnify and hold harmless the Contractor, Subcontractors, Architect, Architect’s consultants and agents and employees of any of them from and against claims, damages, losses and expenses, including but not limited to attorneys’ fees, arising out of or resulting from performance of the Work in the affected area if in fact the material or substance presents the risk of bodily injury or death as described in Section 10.3.1 and has not been rendered harmless, provided that such claim, damage, loss or expense is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the Work itself), except to the extent that such damage, loss or expense is due to the fault or negligence of the party seeking indemnity. § 10.3.4 The Owner shall not be responsible under this Section 10.3 for materials or substances the Contractor brings to the site unless such materials or substances are required by the Contract Documents. The Owner shall be responsible for materials or substances required by the Contract Documents, except to the extent of the Contractor’s fault or negligence in the use and handling of such materials or substances. § 10.3.5 The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner for the cost and expense the Owner incurs (1) for remediation of a material or substance the Contractor brings to the site and negligently handles, or (2) where the Contractor fails to perform its obligations under Section 10.3.1, except to the extent that the cost and expense are due to the Owner’s fault or negligence. § 10.3.6 If, without negligence on the part of the Contractor, the Contractor is held liable by a government agency for the cost of remediation of a hazardous material or substance solely by reason of performing Work as required by the Contract Documents, the Owner shall indemnify the Contractor for all cost and expense thereby incurred. § 10.4 EMERGENCIES In an emergency affecting safety of persons or property, the Contractor shall act, at the Contractor’s discretion, to prevent threatened damage, injury or loss. Additional compensation or extension of time claimed by the Contractor on account of an emergency shall be determined as provided in Article 15 and Article 7. ARTICLE 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS § 11.1 CONTRACTOR’S LIABILITY INSURANCE § 11.1.1 The Contractor shall purchase from and maintain in a company or companies lawfully authorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located such insurance as will protect the Contractor from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from the Contractor’s operations and completed operations under the Contract and for which the Contractor may be legally liable, whether such operations be by the Contractor or by a Subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable:

.1 Claims under workers’ compensation, disability benefit and other similar employee benefit acts that are applicable to the Work to be performed;

.2 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of the Contractor’s employees;

.3 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than the Contractor’s employees;

.4 Claims for damages insured by usual personal injury liability coverage;

.5 Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property, including loss of use resulting therefrom;

.6 Claims for damages because of bodily injury, death of a person or property damage arising out of ownership, maintenance or use of a motor vehicle;

.7 Claims for bodily injury or property damage arising out of completed operations; and

.8 Claims involving contractual liability insurance applicable to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.18.

§ 11.1.2 The insurance required by Section 11.1.1 shall be written for not less than limits of liability specified in the Contract Documents or required by law, whichever coverage is greater. Coverages, whether written on an occurrence or claims-made basis, shall be maintained without interruption from the date of commencement of the



Init.

/


31

Work until the date of final payment and termination of any coverage required to be maintained after final payment, and, with respect to the Contractor’s completed operations coverage, until the expiration of the period for correction of Work or for such other period for maintenance of completed operations coverage as specified in the Contract Documents. § 11.1.3 Certificates of insurance acceptable to the Owner shall be filed with the Owner prior to commencement of the Work and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of each required policy of insurance. These certificates and the insurance policies required by this Section 11.1 shall contain a provision that coverages afforded under the policies will not be canceled or allowed to expire until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Owner. An additional certificate evidencing continuation of liability coverage, including coverage for completed operations, shall be submitted with the final Application for Payment as required by Section 9.10.2 and thereafter upon renewal or replacement of such coverage until the expiration of the time required by Section 11.1.2. Information concerning reduction of coverage on account of revised limits or claims paid under the General Aggregate, or both, shall be furnished by the Contractor with reasonable promptness. § 11.1.4 The Contractor shall cause the commercial liability coverage required by the Contract Documents to include (1) the Owner, the Architect and the Architect’s consultants as additional insureds for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s operations; and (2) the Owner as an additional insured for claims caused in whole or in part by the Contractor’s negligent acts or omissions during the Contractor’s completed operations. § 11.2 OWNER’S LIABILITY INSURANCE The Owner shall be responsible for purchasing and maintaining the Owner’s usual liability insurance. § 11.3 PROPERTY INSURANCE § 11.3.1 Unless otherwise provided, the Owner shall purchase and maintain, in a company or companies lawfullyauthorized to do business in the jurisdiction in which the Project is located, property insurance written on a builder’s risk "all-risk" or equivalent policy form in the amount of the initial Contract Sum, plus value of subsequent Contract Modifications and cost of materials supplied or installed by others, comprising total value for the entire Project at the site on a replacement cost basis without optional deductibles. Such property insurance shall be maintained, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents or otherwise agreed in writing by all persons and entities who are beneficiaries of such insurance, until final payment has been made as provided in Section 9.10 or until no person or entity other than the Owner has an insurable interest in the property required by this Section 11.3 to be covered, whichever is later. This insurance shall include interests of the Owner, the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Project. § 11.3.1.1 Property insurance shall be on an "all-risk" or equivalent policy form and shall include, without limitation, insurance against the perils of fire (with extended coverage) and physical loss or damage including, without duplication of coverage, theft, vandalism, malicious mischief, collapse, earthquake, flood, windstorm, falsework, testing and startup, temporary buildings and debris removal including demolition occasioned by enforcement of any applicable legal requirements, and shall cover reasonable compensation for Architect’s and Contractor’s services and expenses required as a result of such insured loss. § 11.3.1.2 If the Owner does not intend to purchase such property insurance required by the Contract and with all of the coverages in the amount described above, the Owner shall so inform the Contractor in writing prior to commencement of the Work. The Contractor may then effect insurance that will protect the interests of the Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and by appropriate Change Order the cost thereof shall be charged to the Owner. If the Contractor is damaged by the failure or neglect of the Owner to purchase or maintain insurance as described above, without so notifying the Contractor in writing, then the Owner shall bear all reasonable costs properly attributable thereto. § 11.3.1.3 If the property insurance requires deductibles, the Owner shall pay costs not covered because of such deductibles. § 11.3.1.4 This property insurance shall cover portions of the Work stored off the site, and also portions of the Work in transit.



Init.

/


32

§ 11.3.1.5 Partial occupancy or use in accordance with Section 9.9 shall not commence until the insurance company or companies providing property insurance have consented to such partial occupancy or use by endorsement or otherwise. The Owner and the Contractor shall take reasonable steps to obtain consent of the insurance company or companies and shall, without mutual written consent, take no action with respect to partial occupancy or use that would cause cancellation, lapse or reduction of insurance. § 11.3.2 BOILER AND MACHINERY INSURANCE The Owner shall purchase and maintain boiler and machinery insurance required by the Contract Documents or by law, which shall specifically cover such insured objects during installation and until final acceptance by the Owner; this insurance shall include interests of the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors and Sub-subcontractors in the Work, and the Owner and Contractor shall be named insureds. § 11.3.3 LOSS OF USE INSURANCE The Owner, at the Owner’s option, may purchase and maintain such insurance as will insure the Owner against loss of use of the Owner’s property due to fire or other hazards, however caused. The Owner waives all rights of action against the Contractor for loss of use of the Owner’s property, including consequential losses due to fire or other hazards however caused. § 11.3.4 If the Contractor requests in writing that insurance for risks other than those described herein or other special causes of loss be included in the property insurance policy, the Owner shall, if possible, include such insurance, and the cost thereof shall be charged to the Contractor by appropriate Change Order. § 11.3.5 If during the Project construction period the Owner insures properties, real or personal or both, at or adjacent to the site by property insurance under policies separate from those insuring the Project, or if after final payment property insurance is to be provided on the completed Project through a policy or policies other than those insuring the Project during the construction period, the Owner shall waive all rights in accordance with the terms of Section 11.3.7 for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss covered by this separate property insurance. All separate policies shall provide this waiver of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. § 11.3.6 Before an exposure to loss may occur, the Owner shall file with the Contractor a copy of each policy that includes insurance coverages required by this Section 11.3. Each policy shall contain all generally applicable conditions, definitions, exclusions and endorsements related to this Project. Each policy shall contain a provision that the policy will not be canceled or allowed to expire, and that its limits will not be reduced, until at least 30 days’ prior written notice has been given to the Contractor. § 11.3.7 WAIVERS OF SUBROGATION The Owner and Contractor waive all rights against (1) each other and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, each of the other, and (2) the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and any of their subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees, for damages caused by fire or other causes of loss to the extent covered by property insurance obtained pursuant to this Section 11.3 or other property insurance applicable to the Work, except such rights as they have to proceeds of such insurance held by the Owner as fiduciary. The Owner or Contractor, as appropriate, shall require of the Architect, Architect’s consultants, separate contractors described in Article 6, if any, and the subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, agents and employees of any of them, by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, similar waivers each in favor of other parties enumerated herein. The policies shall provide such waivers of subrogation by endorsement or otherwise. A waiver of subrogation shall be effective as to a person or entity even though that person or entity would otherwise have a duty of indemnification, contractual or otherwise, did not pay the insurance premium directly or indirectly, and whether or not the person or entity had an insurable interest in the property damaged. § 11.3.8 A loss insured under the Owner’s property insurance shall be adjusted by the Owner as fiduciary and made payable to the Owner as fiduciary for the insureds, as their interests may appear, subject to requirements of any applicable mortgagee clause and of Section 11.3.10. The Contractor shall pay Subcontractors their just shares of insurance proceeds received by the Contractor, and by appropriate agreements, written where legally required for validity, shall require Subcontractors to make payments to their Sub-subcontractors in similar manner.



Init.

/


33

§ 11.3.9 If required in writing by a party in interest, the Owner as fiduciary shall, upon occurrence of an insured loss, give bond for proper performance of the Owner’s duties. The cost of required bonds shall be charged against proceeds received as fiduciary. The Owner shall deposit in a separate account proceeds so received, which the Owner shall distribute in accordance with such agreement as the parties in interest may reach, or as determined in accordance with the method of binding dispute resolution selected in the Agreement between the Owner and Contractor. If after such loss no other special agreement is made and unless the Owner terminates the Contract for convenience, replacement of damaged property shall be performed by the Contractor after notification of a Change in the Work in accordance with Article 7. § 11.3.10 The Owner as fiduciary shall have power to adjust and settle a loss with insurers unless one of the parties in interest shall object in writing within five days after occurrence of loss to the Owner’s exercise of this power; if such objection is made, the dispute shall be resolved in the manner selected by the Owner and Contractor as the method of binding dispute resolution in the Agreement. If the Owner and Contractor have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Owner as fiduciary shall make settlement with insurers or, in the case of a dispute over distribution of insurance proceeds, in accordance with the directions of the arbitrators. § 11.4 PERFORMANCE BOND AND PAYMENT BOND § 11.4.1 The Owner shall have the right to require the Contractor to furnish bonds covering faithful performance of the Contract and payment of obligations arising thereunder as stipulated in bidding requirements or specifically required in the Contract Documents on the date of execution of the Contract. § 11.4.2 Upon the request of any person or entity appearing to be a potential beneficiary of bonds covering payment of obligations arising under the Contract, the Contractor shall promptly furnish a copy of the bonds or shall authorize a copy to be furnished. ARTICLE 12 UNCOVERING AND CORRECTION OF WORK§ 12.1 UNCOVERING OF WORK § 12.1.1 If a portion of the Work is covered contrary to the Architect’s request or to requirements specifically expressed in the Contract Documents, it must, if requested in writing by the Architect, be uncovered for the Architect’s examination and be replaced at the Contractor’s expense without change in the Contract Time. § 12.1.2 If a portion of the Work has been covered that the Architect has not specifically requested to examine prior to its being covered, the Architect may request to see such Work and it shall be uncovered by the Contractor. If such Work is in accordance with the Contract Documents, costs of uncovering and replacement shall, by appropriate Change Order, be at the Owner’s expense. If such Work is not in accordance with the Contract Documents, such costs and the cost of correction shall be at the Contractor’s expense unless the condition was caused by the Owner or a separate contractor in which event the Owner shall be responsible for payment of such costs. § 12.2 CORRECTION OF WORK § 12.2.1 BEFORE OR AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETIONThe Contractor shall promptly correct Work rejected by the Architect or failing to conform to the requirements of the Contract Documents, whether discovered before or after Substantial Completion and whether or not fabricated, installed or completed. Costs of correcting such rejected Work, including additional testing and inspections, the cost of uncovering and replacement, and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 12.2.2 AFTER SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION § 12.2.2.1 In addition to the Contractor’s obligations under Section 3.5, if, within one year after the date ofSubstantial Completion of the Work or designated portion thereof or after the date for commencement of warranties established under Section 9.9.1, or by terms of an applicable special warranty required by the Contract Documents, any of the Work is found to be not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall correct it promptly after receipt of written notice from the Owner to do so unless the Owner has previously given the Contractor a written acceptance of such condition. The Owner shall give such notice promptly after discovery of the condition. During the one-year period for correction of Work, if the Owner fails to notify the Contractor and give the Contractor an opportunity to make the correction, the Owner waives the rights to require correction by the Contractor and to make a claim for breach of warranty. If the Contractor fails to correct



Init.

/


34

nonconforming Work within a reasonable time during that period after receipt of notice from the Owner or Architect, the Owner may correct it in accordance with Section 2.4. § 12.2.2.2 The one-year period for correction of Work shall be extended with respect to portions of Work first performed after Substantial Completion by the period of time between Substantial Completion and the actual completion of that portion of the Work. § 12.2.2.3 The one-year period for correction of Work shall not be extended by corrective Work performed by the Contractor pursuant to this Section 12.2. § 12.2.3 The Contractor shall remove from the site portions of the Work that are not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents and are neither corrected by the Contractor nor accepted by the Owner. § 12.2.4 The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting destroyed or damaged construction, whether completed or partially completed, of the Owner or separate contractors caused by the Contractor’s correction or removal of Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 12.2.5 Nothing contained in this Section 12.2 shall be construed to establish a period of limitation with respect to other obligations the Contractor has under the Contract Documents. Establishment of the one-year period for correction of Work as described in Section 12.2.2 relates only to the specific obligation of the Contractor to correct the Work, and has no relationship to the time within which the obligation to comply with the Contract Documents may be sought to be enforced, nor to the time within which proceedings may be commenced to establish the Contractor’s liability with respect to the Contractor’s obligations other than specifically to correct the Work. § 12.3 ACCEPTANCE OF NONCONFORMING WORK If the Owner prefers to accept Work that is not in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, the Owner may do so instead of requiring its removal and correction, in which case the Contract Sum will be reduced as appropriate and equitable. Such adjustment shall be effected whether or not final payment has been made. ARTICLE 13 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS § 13.1 GOVERNING LAW The Contract shall be governed by the law of the place where the Project is located except that, if the parties have selected arbitration as the method of binding dispute resolution, the Federal Arbitration Act shall govern Section 15.4. § 13.2 SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS § 13.2.1 The Owner and Contractor respectively bind themselves, their partners, successors, assigns and legalrepresentatives to covenants, agreements and obligations contained in the Contract Documents. Except as provided in Section 13.2.2, neither party to the Contract shall assign the Contract as a whole without written consent of the other. If either party attempts to make such an assignment without such consent, that party shall nevertheless remain legally responsible for all obligations under the Contract. § 13.2.2 The Owner may, without consent of the Contractor, assign the Contract to a lender providing construction financing for the Project, if the lender assumes the Owner’s rights and obligations under the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall execute all consents reasonably required to facilitate such assignment. § 13.3 WRITTEN NOTICE Written notice shall be deemed to have been duly served if delivered in person to the individual, to a member of the firm or entity, or to an officer of the corporation for which it was intended; or if delivered at, or sent by registered or certified mail or by courier service providing proof of delivery to, the last business address known to the party giving notice. § 13.4 RIGHTS AND REMEDIES § 13.4.1 Duties and obligations imposed by the Contract Documents and rights and remedies available thereundershall be in addition to and not a limitation of duties, obligations, rights and remedies otherwise imposed or available by law.



Init.

/


35

§ 13.4.2 No action or failure to act by the Owner, Architect or Contractor shall constitute a waiver of a right or duty afforded them under the Contract, nor shall such action or failure to act constitute approval of or acquiescence in a breach there under, except as may be specifically agreed in writing. § 13.5 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS § 13.5.1 Tests, inspections and approvals of portions of the Work shall be made as required by the Contract Documents and by applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations or lawful orders of public authorities. Unless otherwise provided, the Contractor shall make arrangements for such tests, inspections and approvals with an independent testing laboratory or entity acceptable to the Owner, or with the appropriate public authority, and shall bear all related costs of tests, inspections and approvals. The Contractor shall give the Architect timely notice of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. The Owner shall bear costs of (1) tests, inspections or approvals that do not become requirements until after bids are received or negotiations concluded, and (2) tests, inspections or approvals where building codes or applicable laws or regulations prohibit the Owner from delegating their cost to the Contractor. § 13.5.2 If the Architect, Owner or public authorities having jurisdiction determine that portions of the Work require additional testing, inspection or approval not included under Section 13.5.1, the Architect will, upon written authorization from the Owner, instruct the Contractor to make arrangements for such additional testing, inspection or approval by an entity acceptable to the Owner, and the Contractor shall give timely notice to the Architect of when and where tests and inspections are to be made so that the Architect may be present for such procedures. Such costs, except as provided in Section 13.5.3, shall be at the Owner’s expense. § 13.5.3 If such procedures for testing, inspection or approval under Sections 13.5.1 and 13.5.2 reveal failure of the portions of the Work to comply with requirements established by the Contract Documents, all costs made necessary by such failure including those of repeated procedures and compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses shall be at the Contractor’s expense. § 13.5.4 Required certificates of testing, inspection or approval shall, unless otherwise required by the Contract Documents, be secured by the Contractor and promptly delivered to the Architect. § 13.5.5 If the Architect is to observe tests, inspections or approvals required by the Contract Documents, the Architect will do so promptly and, where practicable, at the normal place of testing. § 13.5.6 Tests or inspections conducted pursuant to the Contract Documents shall be made promptly to avoid unreasonable delay in the Work. § 13.6 INTEREST Payments due and unpaid under the Contract Documents shall bear interest from the date payment is due at such rate as the parties may agree upon in writing or, in the absence thereof, at the legal rate prevailing from time to time at the place where the Project is located. § 13.7 TIME LIMITS ON CLAIMS The Owner and Contractor shall commence all claims and causes of action, whether in contract, tort, breach of warranty or otherwise, against the other arising out of or related to the Contract in accordance with the requirements of the final dispute resolution method selected in the Agreement within the time period specified by applicable law, but in any case not more than 10 years after the date of Substantial Completion of the Work. The Owner and Contractor waive all claims and causes of action not commenced in accordance with this Section 13.7. ARTICLE 14 TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION OF THE CONTRACT § 14.1 TERMINATION BY THE CONTRACTOR§ 14.1.1 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if the Work is stopped for a period of 30 consecutive daysthrough no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, for any of the following reasons:

.1 Issuance of an order of a court or other public authority having jurisdiction that requires all Work to be stopped;



Init.

/


36

.2 An act of government, such as a declaration of national emergency that requires all Work to be stopped;

.3 Because the Architect has not issued a Certificate for Payment and has not notified the Contractor of the reason for withholding certification as provided in Section 9.4.1, or because the Owner has not made payment on a Certificate for Payment within the time stated in the Contract Documents; or

.4 The Owner has failed to furnish to the Contractor promptly, upon the Contractor’s request, reasonable evidence as required by Section 2.2.1.

§ 14.1.2 The Contractor may terminate the Contract if, through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor, Sub-subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons or entities performing portions of the Work under direct or indirect contract with the Contractor, repeated suspensions, delays or interruptions of the entire Work by the Owner as described in Section 14.3 constitute in the aggregate more than 100 percent of the total number of days scheduled for completion, or 120 days in any 365-day period, whichever is less. § 14.1.3 If one of the reasons described in Section 14.1.1 or 14.1.2 exists, the Contractor may, upon seven days’ written notice to the Owner and Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner payment for Work executed, including reasonable overhead and profit, costs incurred by reason of such termination, and damages. § 14.1.4 If the Work is stopped for a period of 60 consecutive days through no act or fault of the Contractor or a Subcontractor or their agents or employees or any other persons performing portions of the Work under contract with the Contractor because the Owner has repeatedly failed to fulfill the Owner’s obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to matters important to the progress of the Work, the Contractor may, upon seven additional days’ written notice to the Owner and the Architect, terminate the Contract and recover from the Owner as provided in Section 14.1.3. § 14.2 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CAUSE § 14.2.1 The Owner may terminate the Contract if the Contractor

.1 repeatedly refuses or fails to supply enough properly skilled workers or proper materials;

.2 fails to make payment to Subcontractors for materials or labor in accordance with the respective agreements between the Contractor and the Subcontractors;

.3 repeatedly disregards applicable laws, statutes, ordinances, codes, rules and regulations, or lawful orders of a public authority; or

.4 otherwise is guilty of substantial breach of a provision of the Contract Documents. § 14.2.2 When any of the above reasons exist, the Owner, upon certification by the Initial Decision Maker that sufficient cause exists to justify such action, may without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the Owner and after giving the Contractor and the Contractor’s surety, if any, seven days’ written notice, terminate employment of the Contractor and may, subject to any prior rights of the surety:

.1 Exclude the Contractor from the site and take possession of all materials, equipment, tools, and construction equipment and machinery thereon owned by the Contractor;

.2 Accept assignment of subcontracts pursuant to Section 5.4; and

.3 Finish the Work by whatever reasonable method the Owner may deem expedient. Upon written request of the Contractor, the Owner shall furnish to the Contractor a detailed accounting of the costs incurred by the Owner in finishing the Work.

§ 14.2.3 When the Owner terminates the Contract for one of the reasons stated in Section 14.2.1, the Contractor shall not be entitled to receive further payment until the Work is finished. § 14.2.4 If the unpaid balance of the Contract Sum exceeds costs of finishing the Work, including compensation for the Architect’s services and expenses made necessary thereby, and other damages incurred by the Owner and not expressly waived, such excess shall be paid to the Contractor. If such costs and damages exceed the unpaid balance, the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. The amount to be paid to the Contractor or Owner, as the case may be, shall be certified by the Initial Decision Maker, upon application, and this obligation for payment shall survive termination of the Contract.



Init.

/


37

§ 14.3 SUSPENSION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.3.1 The Owner may, without cause, order the Contractor in writing to suspend, delay or interrupt the Work in whole or in part for such period of time as the Owner may determine. § 14.3.2 The Contract Sum and Contract Time shall be adjusted for increases in the cost and time caused by suspension, delay or interruption as described in Section 14.3.1. Adjustment of the Contract Sum shall include profit. No adjustment shall be made to the extent

.1 that performance is, was or would have been so suspended, delayed or interrupted by another cause for which the Contractor is responsible; or

.2 that an equitable adjustment is made or denied under another provision of the Contract. § 14.4 TERMINATION BY THE OWNER FOR CONVENIENCE § 14.4.1 The Owner may, at any time, terminate the Contract for the Owner’s convenience and without cause. § 14.4.2 Upon receipt of written notice from the Owner of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall

.1 cease operations as directed by the Owner in the notice;

.2 take actions necessary, or that the Owner may direct, for the protection and preservation of the Work; and

.3 except for Work directed to be performed prior to the effective date of termination stated in the notice, terminate all existing subcontracts and purchase orders and enter into no further subcontracts and purchase orders.

§ 14.4.3 In case of such termination for the Owner’s convenience, the Contractor shall be entitled to receive payment for Work executed, and costs incurred by reason of such termination, along with reasonable overhead and profit on the Work not executed. ARTICLE 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES § 15.1 CLAIMS § 15.1.1 DEFINITION A Claim is a demand or assertion by one of the parties seeking, as a matter of right, payment of money, or otherrelief with respect to the terms of the Contract. The term "Claim" also includes other disputes and matters in question between the Owner and Contractor arising out of or relating to the Contract. The responsibility to substantiate Claims shall rest with the party making the Claim. § 15.1.2 NOTICE OF CLAIMS Claims by either the Owner or Contractor must be initiated by written notice to the other party and to the Initial Decision Maker with a copy sent to the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker. Claims by either party must be initiated within 21 days after occurrence of the event giving rise to such Claim or within 21 days after the claimant first recognizes the condition giving rise to the Claim, whichever is later. § 15.1.3 CONTINUING CONTRACT PERFORMANCE Pending final resolution of a Claim, except as otherwise agreed in writing or as provided in Section 9.7 and Article 14, the Contractor shall proceed diligently with performance of the Contract and the Owner shall continue to make payments in accordance with the Contract Documents. The Architect will prepare Change Orders and issue Certificates for Payment in accordance with the decisions of the Initial Decision Maker. § 15.1.4 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL COST If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Sum, written notice as provided herein shall be given before proceeding to execute the Work. Prior notice is not required for Claims relating to an emergency endangering life or property arising under Section 10.4. § 15.1.5 CLAIMS FOR ADDITIONAL TIME § 15.1.5.1 If the Contractor wishes to make a Claim for an increase in the Contract Time, written notice as provided herein shall be given. The Contractor’s Claim shall include an estimate of cost and of probable effect of delay on progress of the Work. In the case of a continuing delay, only one Claim is necessary.



Init.

/


38

§ 15.1.5.2 If adverse weather conditions are the basis for a Claim for additional time, such Claim shall be documented by data substantiating that weather conditions were abnormal for the period of time, could not have been reasonably anticipated and had an adverse effect on the scheduled construction. § 15.1.6 CLAIMS FOR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESThe Contractor and Owner waive Claims against each other for consequential damages arising out of or relating to this Contract. This mutual waiver includes

.1 damages incurred by the Owner for rental expenses, for losses of use, income, profit, financing, business and reputation, and for loss of management or employee productivity or of the services of such persons; and

.2 damages incurred by the Contractor for principal office expenses including the compensation of personnel stationed there, for losses of financing, business and reputation, and for loss of profit except anticipated profit arising directly from the Work.

This mutual waiver is applicable, without limitation, to all consequential damages due to either party’s termination in accordance with Article 14. Nothing contained in this Section 15.1.6 shall be deemed to preclude an award of liquidated damages, when applicable, in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents. § 15.2 INITIAL DECISION § 15.2.1 Claims, excluding those arising under Sections 10.3, 10.4, 11.3.9, and 11.3.10, shall be referred to the Initial Decision Maker for initial decision. The Architect will serve as the Initial Decision Maker, unless otherwise indicated in the Agreement. Except for those Claims excluded by this Section 15.2.1, an initial decision shall be required as a condition precedent to mediation of any Claim arising prior to the date final payment is due, unless 30 days have passed after the Claim has been referred to the Initial Decision Maker with no decision having been rendered. Unless the Initial Decision Maker and all affected parties agree, the Initial Decision Maker will not decide disputes between the Contractor and persons or entities other than the Owner. § 15.2.2 The Initial Decision Maker will review Claims and within ten days of the receipt of a Claim take one or more of the following actions: (1) request additional supporting data from the claimant or a response with supporting data from the other party, (2) reject the Claim in whole or in part, (3) approve the Claim, (4) suggest a compromise, or (5) advise the parties that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim if the Initial Decision Maker lacks sufficient information to evaluate the merits of the Claim or if the Initial Decision Maker concludes that, in the Initial Decision Maker’s sole discretion, it would be inappropriate for the Initial Decision Maker to resolve the Claim. § 15.2.3 In evaluating Claims, the Initial Decision Maker may, but shall not be obligated to, consult with or seek information from either party or from persons with special knowledge or expertise who may assist the Initial Decision Maker in rendering a decision. The Initial Decision Maker may request the Owner to authorize retention of such persons at the Owner’s expense. § 15.2.4 If the Initial Decision Maker requests a party to provide a response to a Claim or to furnish additional supporting data, such party shall respond, within ten days after receipt of such request, and shall either (1) provide a response on the requested supporting data, (2) advise the Initial Decision Maker when the response or supporting data will be furnished or (3) advise the Initial Decision Maker that no supporting data will be furnished. Uponreceipt of the response or supporting data, if any, the Initial Decision Maker will either reject or approve the Claim in whole or in part. § 15.2.5 The Initial Decision Maker will render an initial decision approving or rejecting the Claim, or indicating that the Initial Decision Maker is unable to resolve the Claim. This initial decision shall (1) be in writing; (2) state the reasons therefor; and (3) notify the parties and the Architect, if the Architect is not serving as the Initial Decision Maker, of any change in the Contract Sum or Contract Time or both. The initial decision shall be final and binding on the parties but subject to mediation and, if the parties fail to resolve their dispute through mediation, to binding dispute resolution. § 15.2.6 Either party may file for mediation of an initial decision at any time, subject to the terms of Section 15.2.6.1.



Init.

/


39

§ 15.2.6.1 Either party may, within 30 days from the date of an initial decision, demand in writing that the other party file for mediation within 60 days of the initial decision. If such a demand is made and the party receiving the demand fails to file for mediation within the time required, then both parties waive their rights to mediate or pursue binding dispute resolution proceedings with respect to the initial decision. § 15.2.7 In the event of a Claim against the Contractor, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety, if any, of the nature and amount of the Claim. If the Claim relates to a possibility of a Contractor’s default, the Owner may, but is not obligated to, notify the surety and request the surety’s assistance in resolving the controversy. § 15.2.8 If a Claim relates to or is the subject of a mechanic’s lien, the party asserting such Claim may proceed in accordance with applicable law to comply with the lien notice or filing deadlines. § 15.3 MEDIATION § 15.3.1 Claims, disputes, or other matters in controversy arising out of or related to the Contract except those waived as provided for in Sections 9.10.4, 9.10.5, and 15.1.6 shall be subject to mediation as a condition precedent to binding dispute resolution. § 15.3.2 The parties shall endeavor to resolve their Claims by mediation which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Mediation Procedures in effect on the date of the Agreement. A request for mediation shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the mediation. The request may be made concurrently with the filing of binding dispute resolution proceedings but, in such event, mediation shall proceed in advance of binding dispute resolution proceedings, which shall be stayed pending mediation for a period of 60 days from the date of filing, unless stayed for a longer period by agreement of the parties or court order. If an arbitration is stayed pursuant to this Section 15.3.2, the parties may nonetheless proceed to the selection of the arbitrator(s) and agree upon a schedule for later proceedings. § 15.3.3 The parties shall share the mediator’s fee and any filing fees equally. The mediation shall be held in the place where the Project is located, unless another location is mutually agreed upon. Agreements reached in mediation shall be enforceable as settlement agreements in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4 ARBITRATION § 15.4.1 If the parties have selected arbitration as the method for binding dispute resolution in the Agreement, any Claim subject to, but not resolved by, mediation shall be subject to arbitration which, unless the parties mutually agree otherwise, shall be administered by the American Arbitration Association in accordance with its Construction Industry Arbitration Rules in effect on the date of the Agreement. A demand for arbitration shall be made in writing, delivered to the other party to the Contract, and filed with the person or entity administering the arbitration. The party filing a notice of demand for arbitration must assert in the demand all Claims then known to that party on which arbitration is permitted to be demanded. § 15.4.1.1 A demand for arbitration shall be made no earlier than concurrently with the filing of a request formediation, but in no event shall it be made after the date when the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim would be barred by the applicable statute of limitations. For statute of limitations purposes, receipt of a written demand for arbitration by the person or entity administering the arbitration shall constitute the institution of legal or equitable proceedings based on the Claim. § 15.4.2 The award rendered by the arbitrator or arbitrators shall be final, and judgment may be entered upon it in accordance with applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.3 The foregoing agreement to arbitrate and other agreements to arbitrate with an additional person or entity duly consented to by parties to the Agreement shall be specifically enforceable under applicable law in any court having jurisdiction thereof. § 15.4.4 CONSOLIDATION OR JOINDER § 15.4.4.1 Either party, at its sole discretion, may consolidate an arbitration conducted under this Agreement with any other arbitration to which it is a party provided that (1) the arbitration agreement governing the other arbitration



Init.

/


40

permits consolidation, (2) the arbitrations to be consolidated substantially involve common questions of law or fact, and (3) the arbitrations employ materially similar procedural rules and methods for selecting arbitrator(s). § 15.4.4.2 Either party, at its sole discretion, may include by joinder persons or entities substantially involved in a common question of law or fact whose presence is required if complete relief is to be accorded in arbitration, provided that the party sought to be joined consents in writing to such joinder. Consent to arbitration involving an additional person or entity shall not constitute consent to arbitration of any claim, dispute or other matter in question not described in the written consent. § 15.4.4.3 The Owner and Contractor grant to any person or entity made a party to an arbitration conducted under this Section 15.4, whether by joinder or consolidation, the same rights of joinder and consolidation as the Owner and Contractor under this Agreement.



PARTNERS 15-175B SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 008000-1


SECTION 008000 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the Contract for

Construction", AIA Document A201/2007 Edition. Where any Article of the General Conditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by these supplements, the unaltered provisions of that Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain in effect.

SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS ARTICLE 16 MODIFICATIONS TO THE GENERAL CONDITIONS 16.1 Modification of ARTICLE 1 GENERAL PROVISIONS 16.1.1 Modification of Paragraph 1.1 BASIC DEFINITIONS 16.1.1.3 Add to Subparagraph 1.1.3: The definition of 'Work' shall also include labor, materials, equipment and services provided or

to be provided by subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, material suppliers or any other entity for whom the Contractor is responsible under or pursuant to the Contract Documents.

16.2 Modification of ARTICLE 2 OWNER 16.2.1 Modification of Paragraph 2.1 GENERAL 16.2.2 Modification of Paragraph 2.2 INFORMATION AND SERVICES REQUIRED OF THE OWNER 16.2.2.3 Add to Subparagraph 2.2.3: However, Contractor shall notify Owner of any errors, problems or inaccuracies which it

becomes aware of in the course of its use of such surveys. 16.2.4 Modification of Paragraph 2.4 OWNER'S RIGHT TO CARRY OUT THE WORK 16.2.4.1 Add Subparagraph 2.4.1: 2.4.1 The Contractor agrees that the Owner, by mutual agreement with the Contractor, shall

have the right to place and install equipment and machinery during the progress of the Work before the completion of the various parts of the Work; and further agrees that such placing and installation of equipment shall not in any way effect the completion of the Work or any portion thereof, nor signify the Owner's acceptance of the Work or any portion thereof. Should the Owner place or install such equipment and machinery with its own forces, then it shall be responsible for any damage to Work of the Contractor caused by the Owner's work or workers. Should the Owner have such placement or installation performed by another contractor, then the Owner shall require said contractor to be responsible for all such damage caused by its work, its workmen, or its subcontractor.



16.3.4 Modification of Paragraph 3.4 LABOR AND MATERIALS 16.3.4 Add Subparagraphs 3.4.4, 3.4.5, 3.4.6 and 3.4.7: 3.4.4 Materials shall conform to manufacturer's standards in effect at the date of issuance of

the proposed Contract Documents and shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions.

3.4.5 Where the Contract Documents require the Work, or any part of same, to be above the

standards required by applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations and other statutory provisions pertaining to the Work, or above the quality of normal construction or trade standards, such Work shall be performed and completed by the Contractor in accordance with the Contract Documents.

3.4.6 Immediately after the issuance of a Letter of Intent or the award of the Contract for the

Work to the Contractor, and prior to the first Request for Payment, The Contractor shall submit to the Architect a schedule indicating the name of manufacturers of all material and equipment which it and its Subcontractors propose for use in the Work. No material or equipment shall be ordered until acceptance of the manufacturer is received from the Architect.

3.4.7 Identifying Markings: Where the manufacturer's name, patent numbers, Underwriter's

labels, model numbers or similar identifying marks are required, locate such markings as inconspicuously as possible. In no case will such marks be acceptable as part of basic design.

16.3.5 Modification of Paragraph 3.5 WARRANTY 16.3.5.1 Add Subparagraph 3.5.1: 3.5.1 The Contractor shall: .1 Warrant that all materials and workmanship of all of the Work of the Contract will be

serviceable, satisfactory, and will perform dependably, without excessive or unusual maintenance or care, the functions for which it was designed and free of defects in materials or workmanship for a period of at least two (2) years, and for such longer periods and special requirements as may be specified for individual types of materials, equipment, or Work, under individual Sections of the Specifications. Such warranty is in addition to and independent of any warranty or guarantee of any Subcontractor, Supplier or Manufacturer.

.2 Submit the above warranty, and all warranties required by the Contract Documents to

be delivered by Subcontractors, executed by the Contractor in written form and deliver all to the Owner as a condition precedent to Final Payment.

.3 Commence any work required hereunder within seven (7) working days after receipt of

written notice to do so by the Owner. If The Contractor shall fail or neglect to do so or to



complete the fulfillment of its obligations hereunder within thirty (30) days of receipt of said notice or such longer period as may be authorized by the Owner, the Owner shall have the right to perform all or any part of the Work or employ another person to do all or part of such Work and charge the expense thereof to the Contractor.

.4 Warranties shall be assignable and enforceable by all future Owners of the project. 16.3.7 Modification of Paragraph 3.7 PERMITS, FEES AND NOTICES 16.3.7.1 Add to the end of Paragraph 3.7.1: or which are required for the completion of the Project. 16.3.7.6 - .9 Add Subparagraphs 3.7.6, 3.7.7, 3.7.8 and 3.7.9: 3.7.65 The Contractor shall obtain a Certificate of Occupancy as required for partial and

complete occupancy by the Owner. The Contractor shall pay all fees necessary to secure said Certificates and shall deliver said Certificate to the Architect or Owner.

3.7.7 The Contractor shall furnish to the local authorities all necessary bonds or cash deposits

required as a pledge and security for the protection or maintenance of any public property or as otherwise stipulated.

3.7.8 Contractor shall be responsible for all approvals and permits not specifically enumerated

as the Owner's responsibility in paragraph 2.2.2 hereof or in the Contract Documents. 3.7.9 A photocopy of the building permit shall be delivered to the Architect and Owner as soon

as it is obtained. 16.3.9 Modification of Paragraph 3.9 SUPERINTENDENT 16.3.9 Add Subparagraphs 3.9.4, 3.9.5 and 3.9.6: 3.9.4 The Contractor's Superintendent or his duly authorized representative, shall remain in

attendance at the Site and shall be present at all times when work of any kind is being done, including work done at other than normal working hours.

3.9.5 The Contractor's Superintendent shall not be removed except for valid cause acceptable

to the Architect and the Owner in which case another Superintendent acceptable to them shall be provided.

3.9.6 Any employee of the Contractor whom the Architect or Owner considers detrimental to

the proper carrying out of the Work is to be removed promptly on the request of the Architect or Owner.

16.3.17 Modification of Paragraph 3.17 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS 16.3.17 Add Subparagraphs 3.17.1 and 3.17.2:



3.17.1 Use of Printed Materials: Contractors and suppliers shall agree that the Owner may, without cost, duplicate, publish, use, dispose of, and disclose in any manner and for any periods whatsoever, and have others so do, all Subject Data (whether or not copyrighted) which may be submitted or delivered to the Owner for use in the course of, or under, any Work performed for the Owner, or which may relate to said Work. By "Subject Data" is meant all writings (including, without limitation, instructions manuals, operating manuals, maintenance manuals and specifications), sound recordings, pictorial reproductions, drawings, prints, photographs and graphical representations, and works of a nature similar to any of the foregoing. In the event any such Subject Data shall be covered by copyright, Contractors and suppliers shall agree to grant to the Owner or obtain for the Owner the copyrighted material, a royalty-free, non-exclusive and irrevocable license, including a right to sublicense thereunder.

3.17.2 Any provision or provisions of these General Conditions or of the Contract to the

contrary notwithstanding, the Owner shall have the right at any time to modify, remove, obliterate, or ignore any marking not authorized by the terms of the Contract on any piece of Subject Data furnished or delivered under the Contract.

16.4 Modification to ARTICLE 4 ADMINISTRATION OF THE CONTRACT 16.4.1 Modification to Paragraph 4.1 ARCHITECT: 16.4.1.1.1 Add Subparagraph 4.1.1.1 in its entirety and substitute: 4.1.1.1 Architect - As used herein and elsewhere in the Contract Documents, the term

"Architect" shall mean PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC, 65 Market Street, Suite 200, Mount Clemens, MI 48043, acting individually or through any agents, consultants, or representatives duly authorized to act in its behalf, subject to the provisions of the Owner/Architect Agreement for the Project between Owner and PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC ("Architect").

16.5 Modifications of ARTICLE 5 SUBCONTRACTORS 16.5.2 Modification of Paragraph 5.2 AWARD OF SUBCONTRACTS AND OTHER CONTRACTS

FOR PORTIONS OF THE WORK 16.5.2.1 Add to Subparagraph 5.2.1: The list of proposed subcontractors shall be submitted within 24 hours of bid opening by the

low bidder(s), which list shall upon acceptance by the Owner be incorporated into the Contract. 16.5.3 Modification to Paragraph 5.3 SUBCONTRACTUAL RELATIONS 16.5.3 Add Subparagraphs 5.3.1: 5.3.1 Contractor shall furnish Owner a copy of each subcontract within ten days after it is

executed.



16.7 Modifications to ARTICLE 7 CHANGES IN THE WORK 16.7.1 Modification to Paragraph 7.1 GENERAL 16.7.1 Add Subparagraphs 7.1.4, 7.1.5, 7.1.6 and 7.1.7: 7.1.4 Proposal Request is a Change Proposal: A document issued by the Architect and

signed by the Contractor, containing a price quotation for Changes in the Work as described by a written "Change Description" and supplemented when necessary by revised drawings all attached thereto.

7.1.5 Contractor shall make no claims for extra cost on account of delay in completion of the

Work caused by any Changes in the Work except as expressly provided in the executed Change Order authorizing said Change.

7.1.6 Changes in Contract Sum: For any adjustments to the Contract Sum based on other than the unit prices method,

the Contractor agrees to charge and accept payment for his overhead, bonds, insurance, field supervision, profit and all other general conditions items / related miscellaneous costs at the following percentages of the cost attributable to the change in the Work:

.1 Ten percent (10%) for Work (labor and materials) by the Contractor not involving

subcontractors; .2 Ten percent (10%) for Work (labor and materials) by subcontractors; .3 When both additions and credits are involved in any change, the allowable

markup shall be figured on the basis of the net increase, if any; 7.1.7 A detailed breakdown of material (quantity and type) and an hourly breakdown of labor

must be submitted with each request for additional compensation. 16.8 Modifications to ARTICLE 8 TIME 16.8.2 Modification to Paragraph 8.2 PROGRESS AND COMPLETION 16.8.2.1 Add to paragraph 8.2.1: and that Contractor is capable of properly completing the Work within the contract time. 16.9 Modifications to ARTICLE 9 PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION 16.9.2 Modifications to Paragraph 9.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 16.9.2 Add to Subparagraph 9.2: 9.2 The schedule of values shall only be used after approval by Architect.



16.9.2.2 Add Subparagraph 9.2.1: 9.2.1 Initial Sworn Statements. Prior to commencement of the Work, the Contractor shall

deliver to the Owner, a contract or sworn statement, duly executed and acknowledged and in form satisfactory to the Owner, listing all subcontracts and the amount of each such subcontract, together with a similar sworn statement from each subcontractor and, where appropriate, from sub-subcontractors.

16.9.3 Modification of Paragraph 9.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 16.9.3.4 Add to Subparagraph 9.3.1.3: 9.3.1.3 Each application for payment shall be accompanied by the following, all in form and

substance satisfactory to the Owner: .1 A duly executed and acknowledged sworn statement showing all subcontractors with

whom the Contractor has entered into subcontracts, the amount of each such subcontract, the amount requested for any subcontractor in the requested progress payment and the amount to be paid to the Contractor from such progress payment, together with similar sworn statements from all subcontractors and, where appropriate, from sub-subcontractors; and

.2 Duly executed Waivers of Mechanic's and Material Liens establishing payment or

satisfaction of all such obligations. 16.9.4 Modification to Paragraph 9.4 CERTIFICATES FOR PAYMENT 16.9.4 Add Subparagraph 9.4.3: 9.4.3 If so directed by the Owner or Architect, the Contractor shall, within fifteen (15) days

from the date of Owner's remittance, submit partial waivers of lien signed by each Subcontractor designated by the Owner, in a form acceptable to the Owner, for the full amount of the sum included for said Subcontractor, in the Owner's remittance for the previous month. Failure to submit partial waivers of lien shall justify the withholding of future payments by the Owner until said delinquent waivers are received by the Owner.

16.9.4.3 Add Subparagraph 9.4.3: 9.4.3 The Owner agrees to make payments to the Contractor on account of the Contract

provided in the Agreement. .1 Following Substantial Completion: Following the date of Substantial Completion, the

Contractor may request the Architect to inspect the project and deliver to Contractor a list of work necessary to Final Completion. Promptly following certification by the Architect to the Owner that the work on such list has been satisfactorily completed, the Owner will pay to Contractor such additional sum as may be necessary to bring the total payments to Contractor to 98% of the total Contract Sum, adjusted as provided in the Contract Documents.



16.9.6 Modification to Paragraph 9.6 PROGRESS PAYMENTS 16.9.6.1 Add to Subparagraph 9.6.1: 9.6.1 Payments shall be made at the sole discretion of Owner with the advice and comment

from Architect. 16.11 Modification to Article 11 INSURANCE AND BONDS 11.1. Delete Article 11 and replace with the following: : 11.1 CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.1.1 The Contractor shall not commence Work under the Contract until it has obtained all

insurance required by the Contract Documents and such insurance has been approved by the Owner; nor shall the Contractor allow any subcontractor to commence work on its subcontract until all similar insurance required of the subcontractor has been so obtained and approved. Unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall provide insurance as follows:

.1 Liability and Property Damage Insurance - The Contractor shall take out and maintain

during the life of the Contract such Liability and Property Damage Insurance (construed as including Contractor's Contingent or Protective Insurance to protect the Contractor from damage claims arising from operations under the Contract) as shall protect it and the Owner from claims for damages for personal injury, including accidental death, as well as from claims for property damages, which may arise from operations under the Contract, whether such operations be by itself or by any subcontractor or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by either of them.

Contractor will maintain the following insurance: Broad Form Comprehensive General

Liability, (including Operations and Premises Liability, Independent Contractors Protective Liability (maintained in effect for a period of three years after the date of final payment), Personal Injury Liability, Broad Form Property Damage Liability endorsement, Explosion, Collapse and Underground Liability endorsement, Blanket Contractual Liability Insurance) Comprehensive Auto Liability, and Workers’ Compensation coverage, all of which shall be written on an occurrence basis for not less than the following limits of liability, or any limits required by law whichever is greater.

a. Workmen’s Compensation-Statutory/Employers-Liability $500,000 b. Comprehensive General Liability-Per Person (Occurrence) Aggregate Bodily & Personal Injury $1,000,000/$2,000,000 Property Damage $1,000,000/$2,000,000 Aggregate c. Automobile Liability-per Person (Occurrence) Aggregate Bodily Injury $1,000,000



Property Damage $1,000,000/$2,000,000 .2 All Certificates of Insurance and duplicate policies of an outsider, vendor or contractor,

shall contain the following clauses: (1) Any coverage afforded the Owner shall apply as primary and not excess to any

insurance issued in the name of the Owner. (2) The insurance company(s) issuing the policy or policies shall have no recourse

against the Owner for payment of any premiums or for assessments under any form of policy.

(3) The term 'insured' is used severally, not collectively, but the inclusion in this

policy of more than one insured shall not operate to increase the limit of the Owner's liability.

.3 All certificates are to provide 30 days notice of material change or cancellation.

Certificates of insurance must be provided no less than ten (10) working days before commencement of work to the Owner’s Risk Management Department. Insurance carriers are subject to the approval of the Owner. Coverages and limits are also subject to the approval of the Owner as to conformity with Contract requirements.

.4 In the event that claims in excess of the insured amounts provided are filed by reason of

any operations under the services provided by the Contractor, the amount of excess of such claims, or any portion thereof, may be withheld from payment due until such time as the Contractor shall furnish such additional security covering such claims as may be determined by the Owner.

.5 Coverage under Property Damage shall include specifically the Explosion, Collapse and

Underground Hazards, which covers damage to property arising directly or indirectly from explosion, damage or structural injury to buildings or adjacent structures arising from operations under this Contract, including excavation or tunneling and damage sustained by wires, conduits, mains, sewers and the like, occasioned by the Contractor's subsurface operations.

11.1.2 The Contractor shall require subcontractors, if any, not protected under the Contractor's

insurance policies, to take out and maintain insurance of such nature in adequate amounts. 11.1.3 All insurance shall be carried with insurance companies authorized to do business in the

State of Michigan. 11.1.4 Add the following Subparagraph 11.1.4: 11.1.4 The Contractor and all subcontractors, to which portions of the work under this Contract

are assigned, shall during the continuance of work under this Contract, including extra work in connection therewith, maintain the following insurance coverages:

.1 Workmen's Compensation and Employer's Liability Insurance in amounts sufficient, in



the opinion of the Contractor and the Architect, to protect the Owner, the Architect, the Contractor and the Subcontractors from any liability for bodily injury, sickness or disease (including death resulting at any time therefrom) of any of their employees, including any liability or damage which may arise by virtue of any statute or law in force or which may hereafter be enacted.

11.2 OWNER'S LIABILITY INSURANCE 11.2.1 The Owner shall be responsible for and at its option may maintain such insurance as will

protect it from its contingent liability to others for damages because of bodily injury, including death, which may arise from operations under this Contract, and any other liability for damages which the Contractor is required to insure under any provision of this Contract. This insurance is not for the benefit of the Contractor.

11.4 PROPERTY INSURANCE 11.4.1 The Owner shall secure and maintain installation - builders risk insurance for all of the work to

be performed on the facility site, against direct physical loss or damage to the work. The policy shall insure the interest of the Owner, the contractor and all subcontractors as their interest may appear at the time of loss or damage to the facility.

The policy shall be written on a 100% replacement cost basis and shall insure against all risks

of direct physical loss or damage to all materials, supplies, machinery, equipment, scaffolding, temporary structures and other property of a similar nature, all of which are to be used in or incidental to the erection of the building. The insurance required hereunder is not intended to cover the tools, equipment and other such personal property of Contractor or subcontractors. The risk of loss as to all such personal property shall be borne by the Contractor and subcontractors. Contractor and its subcontractors waive all rights against Owner for damage or loss of such personal property. The Contractor shall require similar waivers in writing from its subcontractors prior to their commencing operations.

11.4.3 The following Subrogation Clause shall appear in all Fire and Extended Coverage Insurance

Policies: .1 Subrogation Clause: It is hereby stipulated that this insurance shall not be invalidated

should the insured waive in writing prior to a loss any or all right or recovery against any party for loss occurring to the property described herein. Owner, Contractor and subcontractor shall, prior to commencement of construction, obtain in writing mutual waivers of subrogation from their respective property insurers, covering loss or damage to construction machinery, tools, equipment, supplies, temporary construction buildings or other buildings used in connection with the Project."

11.4.4 The insured loss, if any, is to be adjusted with and payable to the Owner, except where

payment of all or a proportion of the insurance is to be made to a mortgagee as his interest may appear. Contractor shall submit to Owner for prior approval, any documents concerning insurance premiums required under the Contract Documents to be paid by Contractor on behalf of the Owner. Owner shall be entitled to receive dividends, interest, price reductions, rebates and the like received from insurance companies by Contractor. Reimbursement to Owner for said item is to be made whether related to separate insurance premium return or proportional



return for several policies and whether or not made in subsequent years. 11.5.1 The Contractor shall finish bonds as described below, covering the faithful performance of the

Contract and the payments of all obligations arising thereunder. The Contract will not be signed until the Owner has received the proper bond specified under this Article, issued by a bonding company licensed to do business in the State where construction will take place, and on the current list of Company’s Holding Certificates of Authority as acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as acceptable reinsuring companies as published in Circular 570 (Amended) by the Audit Staff Bureau of Accounts, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certificate copy of the authority to act.

11.5.1.1 Furnish both AIA A312 Performance Bond and AIA A312 Payment Bond in the amount of 100%

of the Contract Price. 11.5.1.2 The performance Bond and Payment Bond shall be submitted in the exact form specified in

Section 11.5.1.1 above, and with the certificates specified in Section 11.5.1.3, below, and no other modifications addendum whatsoever shall be allowed.

11.5.1.3 Duly executed, notarized and updated Acknowledgements of both the Principal and Surety and

the Surety’s Power of Attorney must be attached to each of the two required bonds.

11.5.1.4 Bond amounts shall not exceed the single bond limit for the Contractor’s bonding company as set forth in the Federal Register current as of the bid date. 11.5.1.4.1 Upon receipt of Notice to Award, contractor is to submit Bonds to the Architect, prior to signing of the contract.

16.15 Modification to Article 15 CLAIMS AND DISPUTES 16.15.1.1 Add TO 15.1.1: Notwithstanding the foregoing to the contrary, Owner may elect to arbitrate or

litigate a Claim at any time in the event that, in the sole Opinion of Owner. 16.15.4 Modification to Article 15.1 ARBITRATION 15.4 Add the following the beginning of 15.4: Only in the event that Owner agrees in writing to elect

arbitration… END OF SECTION 008000

PARTNERS 15-175B SUMMARY 011000 - 1


SECTION 011000 – SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Work covered by the Contract Documents. 2. 3. Schedule. 4. 5. Use of premises. 6. 7. Owner's occupancy requirements. 8. 9. Specification formats and conventions.

1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. Project Identification: Hamtramck Public Schools – Kosciuszko Middle School – Food Service Upgrades

B. Project Location: Kosciuszko Middle School 2333 Burger

Hamtramck, MI 48212

C. Owner: Hamtramck Public Schools, 3201 Roosevelt, Hamtramck, MI 48212 1. Owner's Representative: Wayne Satterfield, Director of Buildings and Grounds – (313) 585-3708.

D. Architect: PARTNERS in Architecture, PLC, 65 Market Street, Mount Clemens, Michigan 48043. Phone: (586) 469-3600; Fax: (586) 469-3607

E. The Work includes (but not limited to) the following: 1. Architectural, Site Restoration, Structural, Mechanical, Electrical, and Food Service Equipment

modifications for the construction of a kitchen addition and renovations to the interior of the existing building to accommodate the proposed new equipment layout as shown on drawings.

1.3 WORK UNDER OTHER CONTRACTS

A. General: Cooperate fully with separate contractors so work on those contracts may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed under separate contracts.



1.4 SCHEDULE

A. The projected schedule milestones are as follows: 1. The project is scheduled to be awarded at the April 13, 2016 Board of Education Meeting. 2. Notice of award will be issued via “Letter of Intent” on April 15, 2016. 3. Shop drawing submittals and other required contract submittals shall begin immediately following

notice of award and be completed no later than May 6, 2016. 4. Construction may begin as soon as possible. 5. This project is to be completed as soon as possible but must be coordinated around the School’s

Operations and occupancy schedule. 6. Project is to achieve final completion no later than August 27, 2015.

1.5 WORK HOURS

A. Buildings are typically available to accommodate work hours between: 7:00am – 8:00pm; Monday – Friday.

B. Extended work hours beyond those specified above and weekend hours can be arranged with the District if needed (pending District’s approval).

1.6 USE OF PREMISES

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of premises for construction operations. Comply with schedule and work hours as designated above. Coordinate specifics with Owner.

B. Use of Site: Limit use of premises to work in areas designated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. Work areas shall be cleaned each day and ready for use and occupancy the following day. 1. Limits: Confine constructions operations to work areas within the building and in designated

exterior areas. Other areas inside or outside the building may be available for use, but must be approved by the District.

2. Owner Occupancy: The building will be fully occupied through June 16, 2016. The building may be occupied during summer construction.

3. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas and entrances serving premises clear and available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials.

1.7 OWNER'S OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS

A. Full Owner Occupancy: Owner will occupy site and existing building during entire construction period. Cooperate with Owner during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Owner usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Owner's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do

not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Owner and approval of authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Notify Owner not less than (72) hours in advance of activities that will affect Owner's operations.



1.8 SPECIFICATION FORMATS AND CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Format: The Specifications are organized into Divisions and Sections using the 33-division format and CSI/CSC's "MasterFormat" numbering system. 1. Division 1: Sections in Division 1 govern the execution of the Work of all Sections in the

Specifications.

B. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Abbreviated Language: Language used in the Specifications and other Contract Documents is

abbreviated. Words and meanings shall be interpreted as appropriate. Words implied, but not stated, shall be inferred as the sense requires. Singular words shall be interpreted as plural and plural words shall be interpreted as singular where applicable as the context of the Contract Documents indicates.

2. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. Requirements expressed in the imperative mood are to be performed by Contractor. Occasionally, the indicative or subjunctive mood may be used in the Section Text for clarity to describe responsibilities that must be fulfilled indirectly by Contractor or by others when so noted. a. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied

where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. END OF SECTION 011000

PARTNERS 15-175B ALTERNATES 012300 - 1


SECTION 012300 - ALTERNATES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for alternates.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Alternate: An amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the bidding requirements that may be added to or deducted from the base bid amount if Owner decides to accept a corresponding change either in the amount of construction to be completed or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract Documents.

1. Alternates described in this Section are part of the Work only if enumerated in the Agreement. 2. The cost or credit for each alternate is the net addition to or deduction from the Contract Sum to

incorporate alternate into the Work. No other adjustments are made to the Contract Sum.

1.3 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected adjacent work as necessary to completely integrate work of the alternate into Project.

1. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not indicated as part of alternate.

B. Notification: Immediately following award of the Contract, notify each party involved, in writing, of the status of each alternate. Indicate if alternates have been accepted, rejected, or deferred for later consideration. Include a complete description of negotiated revisions to alternates.

C. Execute accepted alternates under the same conditions as other work of the Contract.

D. Schedule: A schedule of alternates is included at the end of this Section. Specification Sections referenced in schedule contain requirements for materials necessary to achieve the work described under each alternate.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES

A. Alternate No. 1: REFINISH CORRIDOR FLOORING 106, 108, 111.

PARTNERS 15-175B ALTERNATES 012300 - 2


1. Base Bid: Existing painted floor finish to be patched and repaired at utility installation. 2. Alternate: Provide additional cost to strip existing painted floor finish, prepare existing concrete

floor to receive new epoxy floor finish with color flake install including floor base refinishing and re-setting of floor drain / clean-out covers.

B. Alternate No. 2: CONSTRUCT MASONRY SCREEN WALL AT GAS METER

1. Base Bid: No screening at gas meter. 2. Alternate: Provide additional cost to install new reinforced brick screen wall and concrete

foundation at gas meter installation area (3) sides.


PARTNERS 15-175B CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

012500 - 1


SECTION 012500 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Contract modifications.

1.2 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing Minor Changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's Supplemental Instructions."

1.3 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: Architect will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications. 1. Proposal Requests issued by Architect are for information only. Do not consider them instructions

either to stop work in progress or to execute the proposed change. 2. Within 7 days after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to

the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change. a. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total

amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

b. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

c. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change. d. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the

change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

B. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or unforeseen conditions require modifications to the Contract, Contractor may propose changes by submitting a request for a change to Architect. 1. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.

Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

2. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

3. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts. 4. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

PARTNERS 15-175B CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012500 - 2


5. Include an updated Contractor's Construction Schedule that indicates the effect of the change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

6. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Product Requirements" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

C. Proposal Request Form: Use AIA Document G709 for Proposal Requests.

1.4 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Owner's approval of a Proposal Request, Architect will issue a Change Order for signatures of Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701.

1.5 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA Document G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order. 1. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also

designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

B. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive. 1. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to

substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.


PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)


PARTNERS 15-175B PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1


SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

1.2 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the Schedule of Values with preparation of Construction Schedule.

1. Correlate line items in the Schedule of Values with other required administrative forms and schedules, including Application for Payment forms with Continuation Sheets, Submittals Schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule.

2. Submit schedule with two work scope sections for the kitchen addition food service renovations and a separate schedule for the Classroom 109 new finish restorations and alternates 1 and 2. Note demolition items for Classroom 109 to be included in kitchen addition and food service renovations work scope schedule of values.

3. Submit the Schedule of Values to Architect at earliest possible date but no later than seven days before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

B. Format and Content: Use the Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the Schedule of Values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

1. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the Schedule of Values:

a. Project name and location. b. Name of Architect. c. Architect's project number. d. Contractor's name and address. e. Date of submittal.

2. Submit draft of AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets . 3. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of

Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with the Project Manual table of contents. Provide several line items for principal subcontract amounts, where appropriate. Include separate line items under required principal subcontracts for operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project Record Documents, and demonstration and training in the amount of 5 percent of the Contract Sum.

4. Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum. 5. Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each part of the Work where

Applications for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.



6. Provide separate line items in the Schedule of Values for initial cost of materials, for each subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.

7. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the Schedule of Values for each allowance. Show line-item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

8. Each item in the Schedule of Values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

a. Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the Schedule of Values or distributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

9. Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the Schedule of Values before the next Applications for Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum.

1.3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

1. Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

B. Payment Application Times: Progress payments shall be submitted to Architect by the last day of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

C. Payment Application Forms: Use AIA Document G702/CMa and AIA Document G703 Continuation Sheets as form for Applications for Payment.

D. Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized to sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. Architect will return incomplete applications without action.

1. Entries shall match data on the Schedule of Values and Contractor's Construction Schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

2. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

E. Transmittal: Submit 4 signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to Architect by a method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. Each copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments if required.

1. Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate information about application.

F. Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien from every entity who is lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work covered by the payment.



1. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

2. When an application shows completion of an item, submit final or full waivers. 3. Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers. 4. Waiver Forms: Submit waivers of lien on forms, executed in a manner acceptable to Owner.

G. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

1. List of subcontractors and construction testing firms. 2. Schedule of Values. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Schedule of unit prices. 5. Submittals Schedule (preliminary if not final). 6. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 7. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 8. Copies of building permits. 9. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the

Work. 10. Initial progress report. 11. Report of preconstruction conference. 12. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.

H. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After issuing the Certificate of Substantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

1. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

I. Final Payment Application: Submit final Application for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including, but not limited, to the following:

1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,

fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims." 5. AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens." 6. AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment." 7. Evidence that claims have been settled. 8. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of

Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility for corresponding elements of the Work.PRODUCTS (Not Used)



PARTNERS 15-175B PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Project meetings. 2. Requests for Interpretation (RFIs).

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field-engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. RFI: Request from Contractor seeking interpretation or clarification of the Contract Documents.

1.3 COORDINATION

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations, included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

1. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own installation.

2. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

3. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. 4. Where availability of space is limited, coordinate installation of different components to ensure

maximum performance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair of all components, including mechanical and electrical.

B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

1. Prepare similar memoranda for Owner and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Preparation of Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Preparation of the Schedule of Values.



3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Project closeout activities. 7. Startup and adjustment of systems. 8. Project closeout activities.

1.4 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.

2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes

to everyone concerned, including Owner and Architect, within five days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Schedule a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. Hold the conference at Project site or another convenient location. Conduct the meeting to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.

1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend the conference. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:

a. Tentative construction schedule. b. Critical work sequencing and long-lead items. c. Designation of key personnel and their duties. d. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. e. Procedures for RFIs. f. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. g. Distribution of the Contract Documents. h. Use of the premises. i. Work restrictions. j. Construction waste management and recycling. k. Parking availability. l. Office, work, and storage areas. m. Security. n. Progress cleaning. o. Working hours.

3. Minutes: Record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Progress Meetings: Conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals. Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.



1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.

2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate to status of Project.

a. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Contractor's Construction Schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

1) Review schedule for next period.

3. Minutes: Record the meeting minutes. 4. Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to parties who should have

been present.

a. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's Construction Schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule concurrently with the report of each meeting.

1.5 REQUESTS FOR INTERPRETATION (RFIs)

A. Procedure: Immediately on discovery of the need for interpretation of the Contract Documents, and if not possible to request interpretation at Project meeting, prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

1. RFIs shall originate with Contractor. RFIs submitted by entities other than Contractor will be returned with no response.

2. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

B. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing interpretation and the following:

1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Contractor. 4. Name of Architect and Construction Manager. 5. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 6. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 7. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 8. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 9. Contractor's suggested solution(s). If Contractor's solution(s) impact the Contract Time or the

Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 10. Contractor's signature. 11. Attachments: Include drawings, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop

Drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation.



C. Hard-Copy RFIs: Construction Manager to provide form.

1. Identify each page of attachments with the RFI number and sequential page number.

D. Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and return it. Allow seven working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day.

1. The following RFIs will be returned without action:

a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. d. Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum. e. Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or RFIs with numerous errors.

2. Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for response will start again.

3. Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Division 1 Section "Contract Modifications."

a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 7 days of receipt of the RFI response.

E. On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

F. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly. Include the following:

1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Construction Manager. 3. Name and address of Architect. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were dropped and not submitted. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Architect's response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal

Request, as appropriate.




PARTNERS 15-175B CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following:

1. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 2. Daily construction reports. 3. Field condition reports.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for submitting the Schedule of Values.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

1. Critical activities are activities on the critical path. They must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

2. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network. 3. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

B. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

C. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

D. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.

E. Fragnet: A partial or fragmentary network that breaks down activities into smaller activities for greater detail.

F. Major Area: A story of construction, a separate building, or a similar significant construction element.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittals Schedule: Submit three copies of schedule. Arrange the following information in a tabular format:

1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title.



3. Submittal category (action or informational). 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.

B. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Submit two opaque copies of initial schedule, large enough to show entire schedule for entire construction period.

C. Daily Construction Reports: Submit two copies at bi-weekly intervals.

D. Field Condition Reports: Submit two copies at time of discovery of differing conditions.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate preparation and processing of schedules and reports with performance of construction activities and with scheduling and reporting of separate contractors.

B. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the Schedule of Values, list of subcontracts, Submittals Schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

1. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from parties involved. 2. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in

proper sequence.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of Final Completion.

1. Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

B. Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each principal element of the Work. Comply with the following:

1. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 30 days, unless specifically allowed by Architect.

2. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construction Schedule with Submittals Schedule.

3. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

C. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.



1. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase. 2. Work under More Than One Contract: Include a separate activity for each contract. 3. Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner. 4. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule:

a. Coordination with existing construction. b. Limitations of continued occupancies. c. Uninterruptible services. d. Use of premises restrictions. e. Seasonal variations. f. Environmental control.

5. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.

D. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and Final Completion and all Building, Mechanical, Electrical, Fire Safety, Health Department and Local Municipality inspections (rough and final).

E. Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission, prepare a time-impact analysis using fragnets to demonstrate the effect of the proposed change on the overall project schedule.

2.2 REPORTS

A. Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following information concerning events at Project site:

1. List of subcontractors at Project site. 2. Equipment at Project site. 3. Material deliveries. 4. High and low temperatures and general weather conditions. 5. Accidents. 6. Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses. 7. Meter readings and similar recordings. 8. Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction. 9. Services connected and disconnected. 10. Equipment or system tests and startups.

B. Field Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between field conditions and the Contract Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a request for interpretation (RFI). Include a detailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At monthly intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule one week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting.

1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting.

2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not limited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations.

3. As the Work progresses, indicate Actual Completion percentage for each activity.

B. Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing and inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know schedule responsibility.

1. Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices. 2. When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same

locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of the Work and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.

C. Two (2) Week Look-Ahead Schedule: Generate (2) Week Look-Ahead Schedule for review at each construction meeting. Update weekly.


PARTNERS 15-175B SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

B. See Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and reports, including Contractor's Construction Schedule.

C. See Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports and for mockup requirements.

D. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties.

E. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

F. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and maintenance manuals.

G. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for submitting videotapes of demonstration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information that requires Architect's responsive action.

B. Informational Submittals: Written information that does not require Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.

1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities.

1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and related activities that require sequential activity.

2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

a. Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.



B. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation" for list of submittals and time requirements for scheduled performance of related construction activities.

C. Processing Time: Allow enough time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

1. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.

2. Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial submittal.

3. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

D. Identification: Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal for identification.

1. Indicate name of firm or entity that prepared each submittal on label or title block. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches (150 by 200 mm) on label or beside title block to

record Contractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Architect. 3. Include the following information on label for processing and recording action taken:

a. Project name. b. Date. c. Name and address of Architect. d. Name and address of Contractor. e. Name and address of subcontractor. f. Name and address of supplier. g. Name of manufacturer. h. Submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1) Submittal number shall use Specification Section number followed by a decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., 06100.01). Resubmittals shall include an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., 06100.01.A).

i. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section. j. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. k. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. l. Other necessary identification.

E. Deviations: Highlight, encircle, or otherwise specifically identify deviations from the Contract Documents on submittals.

F. Additional Copies: Unless additional copies are required for final submittal, and unless Architect observes noncompliance with provisions in the Contract Documents, initial submittal may serve as final submittal.

1. Additional copies submitted for maintenance manuals will not be marked with action taken and will be returned.



G. Transmittal: Package each submittal individually and appropriately for transmittal and handling. Transmit each submittal using a transmittal form. Architect will discard submittals received from sources other than Contractor.

1. Transmittal Form: Use sample form at end of section. An electronic copy will be provided if requested.

H. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.

1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked "No Comments Noted or Comments Noted".

I. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of construction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

J. Use for Construction: Use only final submittals with mark indicating "No Comments Noted or Comments Noted" taken by Architect.

1.4 CONTRACTOR'S USE OF ARCHITECT'S CAD FILES

A. General: At Contractor's written request, copies of Architect's CAD files will be provided to Contractor for Contractor's use in connection with Project, subject to the following conditions:

1. Signing of a CAD Documents Transfer Agreement.

2. Payment of handling fee of $350.00 plus $100.00 per drawing, payable to Architect.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Action Submittals required by individual Specification Sections.

B. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

1. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard printed data are not suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

2. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable. 3. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Manufacturer's written recommendations. b. Manufacturer's product specifications. c. Manufacturer's installation instructions. d. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. e. Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring. f. Printed performance curves.



g. Operational range diagrams. h. Compliance with specified referenced standards. i. Testing by recognized testing agency.

4. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of Product Data, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies. Mark up and retain one returned copy as a Project Record Document.

C. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base Shop Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data.

1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable:

a. Dimensions. b. Identification of products. c. Fabrication and installation drawings. d. Roughing-in and setting diagrams. e. Wiring diagrams showing field-installed wiring, including power, signal, and control wiring. f. Shopwork manufacturing instructions. g. Templates and patterns. h. Schedules. i. Notation of coordination requirements. j. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. k. Relationship to adjoining construction clearly indicated. l. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. m. Wiring Diagrams: Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring.

2. Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm) but no larger than 30 by 40 inches (750 by 1000 mm).

3. Number of Copies: Submit three opaque (bond) and two reproducible copies of each submittal. Architect will return one reproducible copy.

D. Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of these characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal and actual component as delivered and installed.

1. Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one submittal package.

2. Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:

a. Generic description of Sample. b. Product name and name of manufacturer. c. Sample source. d. Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.

3. Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determine final acceptance of construction associated with each set.

4. Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.



a. Number of Samples: Submit three full sets of available choices where color, pattern, texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's product line. Architect will return two submittals with options selected.

5. Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identical with material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variations expected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively used materials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used for independent testing and inspection.

a. Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain one Sample set; remainder will be returned.

E. Product Schedule or List: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location.

1. Number of Copies: Submit five copies of product schedule or list, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will return two copies.

F. Submittals Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

G. Application for Payment: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

H. Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures."

2.2 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. General: Prepare and submit Informational Submittals required by other Specification Sections.

1. Number of Copies: Submit two copies of each submittal, unless otherwise indicated. Architect will not return copies.

2. Certificates and Certifications: Provide a notarized statement that includes signature of entity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

3. Test and Inspection Reports: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

B. Coordination Drawings: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

C. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Construction Progress Documentation."

D. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.



E. Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply with requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification (WPS) and Procedure Qualification Record (PQR) on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.

F. Installer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturer for this specific Project.

G. Manufacturer Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturing experience where required.

H. Product Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

I. Material Certificates: Prepare written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

J. Material Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Product Test Reports: Prepare written reports indicating current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency.

L. Research/Evaluation Reports: Prepare written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project.

M. Preconstruction Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.

N. Compatibility Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.

O. Field Test Reports: Prepare reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents.

P. Maintenance Data: Prepare written and graphic instructions and procedures for operation and normal maintenance of products and equipment. Comply with requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data."

Q. Design Data: Prepare written and graphic information, including, but not limited to, performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list of assumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.



R. Manufacturer's Instructions: Prepare written or published information that documents manufacturer's recommendations, guidelines, and procedures for installing or operating a product or equipment. Include name of product and name, address, and telephone number of manufacturer.

S. Manufacturer's Field Reports: Prepare written information documenting factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections. Include the following, as applicable:

1. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 2. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if

not, what corrective action was taken. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies

with requirements.

T. Insurance Certificates and Bonds: Prepare written information indicating current status of insurance or bonding coverage. Include name of entity covered by insurance or bond, limits of coverage, amounts of deductibles, if any, and term of the coverage.

U. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDSs): Submit information directly to Contractor; do not submit to Architect.

1. Architect will not review submittals that include MSDSs and will return them for resubmittal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.

B. Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name and location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor's approval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved for compliance with the Contract Documents.

3.2 ARCHITECT'S ACTION

A. General: Architect will not review submittals that do not bear Contractor’s approval stamp and will return them without action. If the Contractor reviews and approves the submittal and the Architect finds the submittal to be unsatisfactory, the additional review time required of the Architect will be charged to the Owner, at the current hourly rates, which will ultimately be deducted from the total contract amount, via Change Order.

B. Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or modifications required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stamp appropriately to indicate action taken, as follows: 1. No comments noted 2. Comments Noted



3. Revise and send record copies 4. Resubmit information 5. Rejected

C. Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it does not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.

D. Partial submittals are not acceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned without review.

E. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may not be reviewed and may be discarded.


EW COMPLETED AS INDICATED:FORMATION-PIA USE ONLY

PARTNERS r H in A chitecture, PLC S OP DRAWING & SAMPLES TRANSMITTAL

CONTRACTOR / CONST. MGR. PROJECT NAME: DATE SUBMITTAL #: RESUBMIT#: SUBMITTED:

SUB-CONRTACTOR / SUPPLIER CITY: TO: A M C

PROJECT #: S E

A/E ACTION TO CONTR.SPEC SPEC No. No. No. No. SUB-CONTRACTOR / DWG. DRAWING / ITEM DESCRIPTION ACTION REVIEW DATE NUMBER

SECTION # Subsection Prints Sepia Cat. Samp. MANUF. / SU NO. (ListPPLIER each drawing number per line.) CODE DATE RETURN COPIES

The undersigned certifies that the above submitted items have been reviewed in detail and are correct and in strict conformance with the contract documents execpt as otherwise noted.Review of items submitted does not relieve contractor from complying with all requirements of the contract documents.

REVICONTRACTORS COMMENTS: ROUTING IN

NC: No CommentPARTNERS REC'D

CN: Comments NotedSIGNATURE OUT TO CONS.

RR: Revise and Send Record CopyARCH / ENG. COMMENTS: REC'D FROM CONS.

RI: Resubmit InformationRET. TO CONTR.

XX: Rejected, Non-ComplianceSIGNATURSIGNATUREE

PARTNERS 15-175B QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

1. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.

2. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by Architect, Contractor, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

C. See all Sections for specific test and inspection requirements.

D. Refer to section 114000 for quality requirements for Foodservice equipment and installation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will comply with requirements.

B. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.

C. Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are used to verify selections made under sample submittals, to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualities of materials and execution, and to review construction, coordination, testing, or operation; they are not Samples. Approved mockups establish the standard by which the Work will be judged.

D. Laboratory Mockups: Full-size, physical assemblies that are constructed at testing facility to verify performance characteristics.

E. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed specifically for the Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

F. Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with industry standards.



G. Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, i.e., plant, mill, factory, or shop.

H. Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shall mean the same as testing agency.

J. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

1. Using a term such as "carpentry" does not imply that certain construction activities must be performed by accredited or unionized individuals of a corresponding generic name, such as "carpenter." It also does not imply that requirements specified apply exclusively to tradespeople of the corresponding generic name.

K. Experienced: When used with an entity, "experienced" means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in size and scope to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. General: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establish different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer uncertainties and requirements that are different to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

B. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports that include the following:

1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method.



7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results. 10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract

Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.

C. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this Article establish the minimum qualification levels required; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

C. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

D. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar to those indicated for this Project in material, design, and extent.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience and capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548; and with additional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and where required by authorities having jurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

1. NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7. 2. NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory

Accreditation Program.

G. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.



H. Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form of construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for the completed Work:

1. Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed. 3. Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship. 4. Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction. 5. Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the

completed Work. 6. Demolish and remove mockups when directed, unless otherwise indicated.

I. Laboratory Mockups: Comply with requirements of preconstruction testing and those specified in individual Sections in Divisions 2 through 16.

1.6 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

1. Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.

2. Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will be adjusted by Change Order.

B. Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor's responsibility. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authorities having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

1. Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to perform these quality-control services.

a. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing by Owner.

2. Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or inspecting will be performed.

3. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

4. Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

5. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

C. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Report results in writing as specified in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures."



D. Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

1. Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

2. Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are conducted.

3. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

4. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

5. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or accept any portion of the Work.

6. Do not perform any duties of Contractor.

F. Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.

Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 6. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.

G. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction to accommodate testing and inspecting.

1. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

1.7 SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS

A. Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified testing agency as required by authorities having jurisdiction, as indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

1. Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and reviewing the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.

2. Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

3. Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.

4. Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes a list of unresolved deficiencies.



5. Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.

6. Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damaged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

1. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sections. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible.

B. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

C. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility for quality-control services.


PARTNERS 15-175B REFERENCES 014200 - 1


SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.

B. "Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, and requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of the Contract.

C. "Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized," "selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed."

D. "Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, in Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated."

E. "Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, and rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work.

F. "Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. "Install": Operations at Project site including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. "Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. "Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shown on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to be built.

J. “Contractor”: The term “contractor” is used loosely throughout the project manual and thus can be defined as the “construction manger” , “trade contractor” or both.

1.2 INDUSTRY STANDARDS

A. Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements, applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directly into the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the Contract Documents by reference.

B. Refer to section 114000 for additional reference information relating to foodservice equipment and installation.



C. Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwise indicated.

D. Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industry standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with the Contract Documents.

1. Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies directly from publication source.

E. Abbreviations and Acronyms for Standards and Regulations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the organizations responsible for the standards and regulations in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

ADAAG Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) CFR Code of Federal Regulations DOD Department of Defense Military Specifications and Standards DSCC Defense Supply Center Columbus (See FS) FED-STD Federal Standard (See FS) FS Federal Specification FTMS Federal Test Method Standard (See FS)

1.3 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

A. Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

AA Aluminum Association, Inc. (The) AAADM American Association of Automatic Door Manufacturers AABC Associated Air Balance Council AAMA American Architectural Manufacturers Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials AATCC American Association of Textile Chemists and Colorists (The)



ABAA Air Barrier Association of America ABMA American Bearing Manufacturers Association ACI ACI International (American Concrete Institute) ACPA American Concrete Pipe Association AEIC Association of Edison Illuminating Companies, Inc. (The) AF&PA American Forest & Paper Association AGA American Gas Association AGC Associated General Contractors of America (The) AHA American Hardboard Association (Now part of CPA) AHAM Association of Home Appliance Manufacturers AI Asphalt Institute AIA American Institute of Architects (The) AISC American Institute of Steel Construction AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AITC American Institute of Timber Construction ALCA Associated Landscape Contractors of America (Now PLANET - Professional Landcare Network) ALSC American Lumber Standard Committee, Incorporated AMCA Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute AOSA Association of Official Seed Analysts, Inc. APA APA - The Engineered Wood Association APA Architectural Precast Association API American Petroleum Institute ARI Air-Conditioning & Refrigeration Institute ARMA Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers Association



ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers ASME ASME International ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM ASTM International (American Society for Testing and Materials International) AWCI AWCI International (Association of the Wall and Ceiling Industry International) AWCMA American Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) AWI Architectural Woodwork Institute AWPA American Wood-Preservers' Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association BHMA Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association BIA Brick Industry Association (The) BICSI BICSI BIFMA BIFMA International (Business and Institutional Furniture Manufacturer's Association International) BISSC Baking Industry Sanitation Standards Committee CCC Carpet Cushion Council CDA Copper Development Association CEA Canadian Electricity Association CFFA Chemical Fabrics & Film Association, Inc. CGA Compressed Gas Association CIMA Cellulose Insulation Manufacturers Association CISCA Ceilings & Interior Systems Construction Association CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute



CLFMI Chain Link Fence Manufacturers Institute CPA Composite Panel Association CPPA Corrugated Polyethylene Pipe Association CRI Carpet & Rug Institute (The) CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CSA CSA International (Formerly: IAS - International Approval Services) CSI Cast Stone Institute CSI Construction Specifications Institute (The) CSSB Cedar Shake & Shingle Bureau CTI Cooling Technology Institute (Formerly: Cooling Tower Institute) DHI Door and Hardware Institute EIA Electronic Industries Alliance EIMA EIFS Industry Members Association EJCDC Engineers Joint Contract Documents Committee EJMA Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. ESD ESD Association FIBA Federation Internationale de Basketball Amateur (The International Basketball Federation) FIVB Federation Internationale de Volleyball (The International Volleyball Federation) FMG FM Global (Formerly: FM - Factory Mutual System) FMRC Factory Mutual Research (Now FMG) FRSA Florida Roofing, Sheet Metal & Air Conditioning Contractors Association, Inc. FSA Fluid Sealing Association FSC Forest Stewardship Council GA Gypsum Association GANA Glass Association of North America



GRI (Now GSI) GS Green Seal GSI Geosynthetic Institute HI Hydraulic Institute HI Hydronics Institute HMMA Hollow Metal Manufacturers Association (Part of NAAMM) HPVA Hardwood Plywood & Veneer Association HPW H. P. White Laboratory, Inc. IAS International Approval Services (Now CSA International) IBF International Badminton Federation ICEA Insulated Cable Engineers Association, Inc. ICRI International Concrete Repair Institute, Inc. IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc. (The) IESNA Illuminating Engineering Society of North America IEST Institute of Environmental Sciences and Technology IGCC Insulating Glass Certification Council IGMA Insulating Glass Manufacturers Alliance ILI Indiana Limestone Institute of America, Inc. ISO International Organization for Standardization ISSFA International Solid Surface Fabricators Association ITS Intertek ITU International Telecommunication Union KCMA Kitchen Cabinet Manufacturers Association LMA Laminating Materials Association (Now part of CPA)



LPI Lightning Protection Institute MBMA Metal Building Manufacturers Association MFMA Maple Flooring Manufacturers Association, Inc. MFMA Metal Framing Manufacturers Association MH Material Handling (Now MHIA) MHIA Material Handling Industry of America MIA Marble Institute of America MPI Master Painters Institute MSS Manufacturers Standardization Society of The Valve and Fittings Industry Inc. NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NACE NACE International (National Association of Corrosion Engineers International) NADCA National Air Duct Cleaners Association NAGWS National Association for Girls and Women in Sport NAIMA North American Insulation Manufacturers Association NBGQA National Building Granite Quarries Association, Inc. NCAA National Collegiate Athletic Association (The) NCMA National Concrete Masonry Association NCPI National Clay Pipe Institute NCTA National Cable & Telecommunications Association NEBB National Environmental Balancing Bureau NECA National Electrical Contractors Association NeLMA Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NETA InterNational Electrical Testing Association NFHS National Federation of State High School Associations



NFPA NFPA (National Fire Protection Association) NFRC National Fenestration Rating Council NGA National Glass Association NHLA National Hardwood Lumber Association NLGA National Lumber Grades Authority NOFMA NOFMA: The Wood Flooring Manufacturers Association (Formerly: National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association) NRCA National Roofing Contractors Association NRMCA National Ready Mixed Concrete Association NSF NSF International (National Sanitation Foundation International) NSSGA National Stone, Sand & Gravel Association NTMA National Terrazzo & Mosaic Association, Inc. (The) NTRMA National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association (Now TRI) NWWDA National Wood Window and Door Association (Now WDMA) OPL Omega Point Laboratories, Inc. (Acquired by ITS - Intertek) PCI Precast/Prestressed Concrete Institute PDCA Painting & Decorating Contractors of America PDI Plumbing & Drainage Institute PGI PVC Geomembrane Institute PLANET Professional Landcare Network (Formerly: ACLA - Associated Landscape Contractors of America) PTI Post-Tensioning Institute RCSC Research Council on Structural Connections RFCI Resilient Floor Covering Institute RIS Redwood Inspection Service RTI (Formerly: NTRMA - National Tile Roofing Manufacturers Association) (Now TRI)



SAE SAE International SDI Steel Deck Institute SDI Steel Door Institute SEFA Scientific Equipment and Furniture Association SGCC Safety Glazing Certification Council SIA Security Industry Association SIGMA Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association (Now IGMA) SJI Steel Joist Institute SMA Screen Manufacturers Association SMACNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMPTE Society of Motion Picture and Television Engineers SPFA Spray Polyurethane Foam Alliance (Formerly: SPI/SPFD - The Society of the Plastics Industry, Inc.; Spray Polyurethane Foam Division) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau (The) SPRI Single Ply Roofing Industry SSINA Specialty Steel Industry of North America SSPC SSPC: The Society for Protective Coatings STI Steel Tank Institute SWI Steel Window Institute SWRI Sealant, Waterproofing, & Restoration Institute TCA Tile Council of America, Inc. TIA/EIA Telecommunications Industry Association/Electronic Industries Alliance TMS The Masonry Society TPI Truss Plate Institute, Inc. TPI Turfgrass Producers International TRI Tile Roofing Institute (Formerly: RTI - Roof Tile Institute)



UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc. UNI Uni-Bell PVC Pipe Association USAV USA Volleyball USGBC U.S. Green Building Council USITT United States Institute for Theatre Technology, Inc. WASTEC Waste Equipment Technology Association WCLIB West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau WCMA Window Covering Manufacturers Association (Now WCSC) WCSC Window Covering Safety Council (Formerly: WCMA - Window Covering Manufacturers Association) WDMA Window & Door Manufacturers Association (Formerly: NWWDA - National Wood Window and Door Association) WI Woodwork Institute (Formerly: WIC - Woodwork Institute of California) WIC Woodwork Institute of California (Now WI) WMMPA Wood Moulding & Millwork Producers Association WSRCA Western States Roofing Contractors Association WWPA Western Wood Products Association

B. Code Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

BOCA BOCA International, Inc. (See ICC) IAPMO International Association of Plumbing and Mechanical Officials ICBO International Conference of Building Officials (See ICC) ICC International Code Council NFPA National Fire Protection Association

C. Federal Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names,



telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.

CE Army Corps of Engineers CPSC Consumer Product Safety Commission DOC Department of Commerce DOD Department of Defense DOE Department of Energy EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAA Federal Aviation Administration FCC Federal Communications Commission FDA Food and Drug Administration GSA General Services Administration HUD Department of Housing and Urban Development LBL Lawrence Berkeley National Laboratory NCHRP National Cooperative Highway Research Program (See TRB) NIST National Institute of Standards and Technology OSHA Occupational Safety & Health Administration PBS Public Building Service (See GSA) PHS Office of Public Health and Science RUS Rural Utilities Service (See USDA) SD State Department TRB Transportation Research Board USDA Department of Agriculture USPS Postal Service

D. State Government Agencies: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other Contract Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities in the following list. Names, telephone numbers, and Web sites are subject to change and are believed to be accurate and up-to-date as of the date of the Contract Documents.



MBC Michigan Building Code 2009 MDOT Michigan Department of Transportation DLEG Michigan Department of Labor and Economic Growth BCCFS Michigan Bureau of Construction Codes and Fire Safety




PARTNERS 15-175B TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protection facilities.

B. See Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Architect, permanent or temporary roofing is complete, insulated, and weathertight; exterior walls are insulated and weathertight; and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. Water Service: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

B. Electric Power Service: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.


A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Installer of each permanent service shall assume responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Lumber and Plywood: Comply with requirements in Division 6 Section “Miscellaneous Carpentry."

B. Gypsum Board: Minimum 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) thick by 48 inches (1219 mm) wide by maximum available lengths; regular-type panels with tapered edges. Comply with ASTM C 36/C 36M.

C. Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

2.2 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

2.3 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations and classes of fire exposures.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

1. Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Division 1 Section "Summary."

B. Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are no longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.

3.2 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

1. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

B. Water Service: Use of Owner's existing water service facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.



C. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these facilities to condition existing before initial use.

D. Electric Power Service: Use of Owner's existing electric power service will be permitted, as long as equipment is maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner.

E. Telephone Service: Provide field superintendent with cellular telephone.

3.3 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following: 1. Maintain support facilities until near Substantial Completion. Remove before Substantial

Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permitted to use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

B. Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities. 2. Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Project Identification and Temporary Signs: Provide Project identification and other signs. Install signs where indicated to inform public and individuals seeking entrance to Project. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.

1. Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors. 2. Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.

E. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Comply with Division 1 Section "Execution Requirements" for progress cleaning requirements.

F. Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.

1. Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment" and not temporary facilities.

3.4 SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction in ways and by methods that comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoil contamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

B. Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.



C. Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress and completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Provide temporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

1. Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is not complete, insulate temporary enclosures.

D. Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed to protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241.

1. Prohibit smoking in construction areas. 2. Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire

ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project

site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instruct personnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

1. Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoid possibility of damage.

C. Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protection facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.

D. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

1. Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.

2. At Substantial Completion, clean and renovate permanent facilities used during construction period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."


PARTNERS 15-175B PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1


SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; product substitutions; and comparable products.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting warranties for Contract closeout.

C. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for warranties on products and installations specified to be warranted.

D. Refer to section 114000 for additional foodservice equipment product requirements.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from those required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.



1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

1. Substitution Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.1A. 2. Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as

applicable:

a. Statement indicating why specified material or product cannot be provided. b. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts

of the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will be necessary to accommodate proposed substitution.

c. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

d. Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication and installation procedures.

e. Samples, where applicable or requested. f. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and

names and addresses of architects and owners. g. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results

for compliance with requirements indicated. h. Research/evaluation reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project,

from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. i. Detailed comparison of Contractor's Construction Schedule using proposed substitution

with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating lack of availability or delays in delivery.

j. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum. k. Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in the

Contract Documents and is appropriate for applications indicated. l. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become

necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

3. Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within 7 (seven) days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 (fifteen) days of receipt of request, or 7 (seven) days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

a. Form of Acceptance: Change Order. b. Use product specified if Architect cannot make a decision on use of a proposed substitution

within time allocated.

B. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.




A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, product selected shall be compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options.

1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling:

1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

4. Inspect products on delivery to ensure compliance with the Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage:

1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight

enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Store cementitious products and materials on elevated platforms. 5. Store foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation

and concealment. 6. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and

weather-protection requirements for storage. 7. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.

1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

1. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

2. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

B. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution. Submit a draft for approval before final execution.



1. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly executed.

2. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using appropriate form properly executed.

3. Refer to Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

C. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, that are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, that are new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

2. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection. 5. Where products are accompanied by the term "match sample," sample to be matched is

Architect's. 6. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish

"salient characteristics" of products.

B. Product Selection Procedures:

1. Product: Where Specifications name a single product and manufacturer, provide the named product that complies with requirements.

2. Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements.

3. Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both products and manufacturers, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements.

4. Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements.

5. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with provisions in Part 2 "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by the other named manufacturers.

6. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.



a. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified requirements, comply with provisions in Part 2 "Product Substitutions" Article for proposal of product.

7. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected from manufacturer's colors, patterns, textures" or a similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements.

a. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "standard range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

b. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase "full range of colors, patterns, textures" or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Timing: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within (30) thirty days after the Notice of Award. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected at discretion of Architect.

B. Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

1. Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energy conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner must assume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, and similar considerations.

2. Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents. 3. Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce indicated

results. 4. Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted. 5. Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's Construction Schedule. 6. Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction. 7. Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work. 8. Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work. 9. Requested substitution provides specified warranty.



PARTNERS 15-175B EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 017000 - 1


SECTION 017000 - EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Construction layout. 2. General installation of products. 3. Progress cleaning. 4. Starting and adjusting. 5. Protection of installed construction. 6. Correction of the Work.

B. See Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Owner-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, and final cleaning.


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site improvements, utilities, and other construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services.

B. Existing Utilities: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construction indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities and other construction affecting the Work.

1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; and underground electrical services.

2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

C. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations.

1. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.



2. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

3. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed.

4. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to local utility that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Architect. Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. Use Architect’s form.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT

A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architect promptly.

B. General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.

1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.

2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required dimensions.

3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. 5. Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. 6. Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by

authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations.

D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations, column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer



survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations.

E. Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels. Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of each survey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference by Architect.

3.4 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, as indicated.

1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease

of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.

F. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.

G. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work.

1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Architect.

2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for

installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

H. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

I. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not considered hazardous.



3.5 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where more than one installer has worked. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully.

1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold materials more than 7 days during normal weather or 3 days if the temperature is

expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark

containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for proper execution of the Work.

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work

area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Burying or burning waste materials on-site will not be permitted. Washing waste materials down sewers or into waterways will not be permitted.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operability without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.6 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.



B. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation.

C. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

D. Manufacturer's Field Service: If a factory-authorized service representative is required to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, comply with qualification requirements in Division 1 Section "Quality Requirements."

3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK

A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching."

1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment.

B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition.

C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair.

D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired.

E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces.


PARTNERS 15-175B CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1


SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspection procedures. 2. Warranties. 3. Final cleaning.

B. See Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures" for requirements for Applications for Payment for Substantial and Final Completion.

C. See Division 1 Section "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data.

D. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

E. See Division 1 Section "Demonstration and Training" for requirements for instructing Owner's personnel.

F. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific closeout and special cleaning requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion, complete the following. List items below that are incomplete in request.

1. Prepare a list of items to be completed and corrected (punch list), the value of items on the list, and reasons why the Work is not complete.

2. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 3. Submit specific warranties, workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final

certifications, and similar documents. 4. Obtain and submit releases permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services

and utilities. Include occupancy permits, operating certificates, and similar releases. 5. Prepare and submit Project Record Documents, operation and maintenance manuals, Final

Completion construction photographs, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

6. Deliver tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items to location designated by Owner. Label with manufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

7. Complete startup testing of systems. 8. Submit test/adjust/balance records.



9. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction tools, and similar elements.

10. Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities. 11. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance. 12. Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting. 13. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection for Substantial Completion. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. All items on the list must be completed within sixty (60) calendar days of issuance. Within ten (10) days of receipt of Architect’s list of items, Contractor will submit a schedule to complete these items. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for Final Completion.

1.3 FINAL COMPLETION

A. Preliminary Procedures: Before requesting final inspection for determining date of Final Completion, complete the following:

1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Division 1 Section "Payment Procedures." 2. Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed

or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect. The certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance.

3. Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report and warranty. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and

systems. Submit demonstration and training videotapes.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection for acceptance. On receipt of request, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as

incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. All costs incurred by the Architect or the Architect’s Consultants to close out the project (after 60

calendar days have passed from issuance of punch list items), will be charged to the Owner at the current hourly rates and thus deducted from the final contract amount, via Change Order.

1.4 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Preparation: Submit three copies of list. Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construction operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.



1. Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from lowest floor to highest floor.

2. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.

1.5 WARRANTIES

A. Submittal Time: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the Work where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of the Project Manual.

1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper.

2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

C. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Provide final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a portion of Project:



a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, including landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreign substances.

b. Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreign deposits.

c. Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface. d. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. e. Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building. f. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of

stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.

g. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.

h. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. i. Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; shampoo if

visible soil or stains remain. j. Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Remove

glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Replace chipped or broken glass and other damaged transparent materials. Polish mirrors and glass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.

k. Remove labels that are not permanent. l. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred, exposed finishes and surfaces.

Replace finishes and surfaces that cannot be satisfactorily repaired or restored or that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

1) Do not paint over "UL" and similar labels, including mechanical and electrical nameplates.

m. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment, elevator equipment, and similar equipment. Remove excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.

n. Replace parts subject to unusual operating conditions. o. Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting from

water exposure. p. Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces of

diffusers, registers, and grills. q. Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency. Replace

burned-out bulbs, and those noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.

r. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

C. Pest Control: Engage an experienced, licensed exterminator to make a final inspection and rid Project of rodents, insects, and other pests. Prepare a report.

D. Comply with safety standards for cleaning. Do not burn waste materials. Do not bury debris or excess materials on Owner's property. Do not discharge volatile, harmful, or dangerous materials into drainage systems. Remove waste materials from Project site and dispose of lawfully.



E. If the Owner or Architect determines that the cleaning is not sufficient, the Owner or Architect will request that the cleaning be redone; or at the Owner’s option, the Owner will hire a professional cleaning company to perform the said work, and thus deduct the cost from the final Pay Application.


PARTNERS 15-175B PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017810 - 1


SECTION 017810 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for Project Record Documents, including the following:

1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data.

B. See Division 1 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements.

C. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific requirements for Project Record Documents of the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Number of Copies: Submit copies of Record Drawings as follows:

a. Initial Submittal: Submit two (2) set(s) of corrected Record Transparencies and one set(s) of marked-up Record Prints. Architect will initial and date each transparency and mark whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. Architect will return transparencies and prints for organizing into sets, printing, binding, and final submittal.

b. Final Submittal: Submit three (3) sets of marked-up Record Prints, and the following:

1) Record Transparencies: One set. 2) Record CAD Drawing Files and Plots: One set. 3) Copies printed from Record CAD Drawing Plots: Three. Print each Drawing,

whether or not changes and additional information were recorded.

B. Record Specifications: Submit two (2) copies of Project's Specifications, including addenda and contract modifications.

C. Record Product Data: Submit one (1) copy of each Product Data submittal.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of blue- or black-line white prints of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings.

1. Preparation: Mark Record Prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to prepare the marked-up Record Prints.

a. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later.

b. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

2. Mark the Contract Drawings or Shop Drawings, whichever is most capable of showing actual physical conditions, completely and accurately. If Shop Drawings are marked, show cross-reference on the Contract Drawings.

3. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

4. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

B. Format: Identify and date each Record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location.

1. Record Prints: Organize Record Prints and newly prepared Record Drawings into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.

2.2 RECORD SPECIFICATIONS

A. Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies from that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.

3. Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a record of selections made.

4. Note related Change Orders, Record Product Data, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.3 RECORD PRODUCT DATA

A. Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.



1. Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be readily identified and recorded later.

2. Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's written instructions for installation.

3. Note related Change Orders, Record Specifications, and Record Drawings where applicable.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS

A. Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneous records and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE

A. Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for Project Record Document purposes. Post changes and modifications to Project Record Documents as they occur; do not wait until the end of Project.

B. Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store Record Documents and Samples in the field office apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use Project Record Documents for construction purposes. Maintain Record Documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition, protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to Project Record Documents for Architect's reference during normal working hours.


PARTNERS 15-175B OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017820 - 1


SECTION 017820 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and

maintenance manuals, including the following:

1. Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment. 2. Maintenance manuals for the care and maintenance of products, materials, and finishes, systems

and equipment.

B. See Divisions 2 through 33 Sections for specific operation and maintenance manual requirements for the Work in those Sections.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manual: Submit two copies of each manual in final form at least 15 days before final inspection. Architect will return copy with comments within 15 days after final inspection.

1. Correct or modify each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit 3 copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUALS, GENERAL

A. Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain a title page, table of contents, and manual contents.

B. Title Page: Enclose title page in transparent plastic sleeve. Include the following information:

1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name, address, and telephone number of Contractor. 6. Name and address of Architect. 7. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.



D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

1. Binders: Heavy-duty, 3-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, in thickness necessary to accommodate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets.

a. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name, and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets.

2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Section number and title of Project Manual.

3. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software diskettes for computerized electronic equipment.

4. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text.

a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts.

b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and drawing locations.

2.2 OPERATION MANUALS

A. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and equipment descriptions, operating standards, operating procedures, operating logs, wiring and control diagrams, and license requirements.

B. Descriptions: Include the following:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. 4. Equipment function. 5. Operating characteristics. 6. Limiting conditions. 7. Performance curves. 8. Engineering data and tests. 9. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.



2.3 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:

1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and inspection procedures, types of cleaning agents, methods of cleaning, schedule for cleaning and maintenance, and repair instructions.

E. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

F. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUAL

A. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranty and bond information, as described below.

B. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual.

C. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including maintenance instructions, drawings and diagrams for maintenance, nomenclature of parts and components, and recommended spare parts for each component part or piece of equipment:

D. Maintenance Procedures: Include test and inspection instructions, troubleshooting guide, disassembly instructions, and adjusting instructions, and demonstration and training videotape if available, that detail essential maintenance procedures:



E. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service with standard time allotment.

F. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 MANUAL PREPARATION

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

B. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance data indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.

C. Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item using appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

D. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in Record Drawings to ensure correct illustration of completed installation.

1. Do not use original Project Record Documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.

E. Comply with Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.


PARTNERS 15-175B SELECTIVE DEMOLITION 024119-1


SECTION 024119 - SELECTIVE DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Demolition and removal of selected portions of building or structure. 2. Demolition and removal of selected site elements. 3. Salvage of existing items to be reused or recycled.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Remove: Detach items from existing construction and legally dispose of them off-site unless indicated to be removed and salvaged or removed and reinstalled.

B. Remove and Salvage: Carefully detach from existing construction, in a manner to prevent damage, and deliver to Owner.

C. Remove and Reinstall: Detach items from existing construction, prepare for reuse, and reinstall where indicated.

D. Existing to Remain: Existing items of construction that are not to be permanently removed and that are not otherwise indicated to be removed, removed and salvaged, or removed and reinstalled.

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Predemolition Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Predemolition Photographs: Submit before Work begins.

1.5 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Owner will occupy portions of building immediately adjacent to selective demolition area. Conduct selective demolition so Owner's operations will not be disrupted.

B. Conditions existing at time of inspection for bidding purpose will be maintained by Owner as far as practical.

C. Notify Architect of discrepancies between existing conditions and Drawings before proceeding with selective demolition.



D. Hazardous Materials: Hazardous materials are present in buildings and structures to be selectively demolished. A report on the presence of hazardous materials is on file for review and use. Examine report to become aware of locations where hazardous materials are present.

1. Hazardous material remediation is specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents. 2. Do not disturb hazardous materials or items suspected of containing hazardous materials except

under procedures specified elsewhere in the Contract Documents.

E. Storage or sale of removed items or materials on-site is not permitted.

F. Utility Service: Maintain existing utilities indicated to remain in service and protect them against damage during selective demolition operations.

1. Maintain fire-protection facilities in service during selective demolition operations.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during selective demolition, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PEFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before beginning selective demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Standards: Comply with ANSI/ASSE A10.6 and NFPA 241.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that utilities have been disconnected and capped before starting selective demolition operations.

B. Survey existing conditions and correlate with requirements indicated to determine extent of selective demolition required.

C. When unanticipated mechanical, electrical, or structural elements that conflict with intended function or design are encountered, investigate and measure the nature and extent of conflict. Promptly submit a written report to Architect.

D. Perform, Engage a professional engineer to perform an engineering survey of condition of building to determine whether removing any element might result in structural deficiency or unplanned collapse of any portion of structure or adjacent structures during selective building demolition operations.



E. Survey of Existing Conditions: Record existing conditions by use of measured drawings and preconstruction photographs.

3.2 UTILITY SERVICES AND MECHANICAL/ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

A. Existing Services/Systems to Remain: Maintain services/systems indicated to remain and protect them against damage.

1. Comply with requirements for existing services/systems interruptions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."

B. Existing Services/Systems to Be Removed, Relocated, or Abandoned: Locate, identify, disconnect, and seal or cap off indicated utility services and mechanical/electrical systems serving areas to be selectively demolished.

1. Owner will arrange to shut off indicated services/systems when requested by Contractor. 2. Arrange to shut off indicated utilities with utility companies. 3. If services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, provide temporary

services/systems that bypass area of selective demolition and that maintain continuity of services/systems to other parts of building.

4. Disconnect, demolish, and remove fire-suppression systems, plumbing, and HVAC systems, equipment, and components indicated to be removed.

a. Piping to Be Removed: Remove portion of piping indicated to be removed and cap or plug remaining piping with same or compatible piping material.

b. Piping to Be Abandoned in Place: Drain piping and cap or plug piping with same or compatible piping material.

c. Equipment to Be Removed: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment. d. Equipment to Be Removed and Reinstalled: Disconnect and cap services and remove,

clean, and store equipment; when appropriate, reinstall, reconnect, and make equipment operational.

e. Equipment to Be Removed and Salvaged: Disconnect and cap services and remove equipment and deliver to Owner.

f. Ducts to Be Removed: Remove portion of ducts indicated to be removed and plug remaining ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

g. Ducts to Be Abandoned in Place: Cap or plug ducts with same or compatible ductwork material.

C. Refrigerant: Remove refrigerant from mechanical equipment to be selectively demolished according to 40 CFR 82 and regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct selective demolition and debris-removal operations to ensure minimum interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

1. Comply with requirements for access and protection specified in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls."



B. Temporary Facilities: Provide temporary barricades and other protection required to prevent injury to people and damage to adjacent buildings and facilities to remain.

C. Temporary Shoring: Provide and maintain shoring, bracing, and structural supports as required to preserve stability and prevent movement, settlement, or collapse of construction and finishes to remain, and to prevent unexpected or uncontrolled movement or collapse of construction being demolished.

3.4 SELECTIVE DEMOLITION, GENERAL

A. General: Demolish and remove existing construction only to the extent required by new construction and as indicated. Use methods required to complete the Work within limitations of governing regulations and as follows:

1. Neatly cut openings and holes plumb, square, and true to dimensions required. Use cutting methods least likely to damage construction to remain or adjoining construction. Use hand tools or small power tools designed for sawing or grinding, not hammering and chopping, to minimize disturbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings to remain.

2. Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces to avoid marring existing finished surfaces.

3. Do not use cutting torches until work area is cleared of flammable materials. At concealed spaces, such as duct and pipe interiors, verify condition and contents of hidden space before starting flame-cutting operations. Maintain fire watch and portable fire-suppression devices during flame-cutting operations.

4. Locate selective demolition equipment and remove debris and materials so as not to impose excessive loads on supporting walls, floors, or framing.

5. Dispose of demolished items and materials promptly.

B. Removed and Salvaged Items:

1. Clean salvaged items. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning. Identify contents of containers. 3. Store items in a secure area until delivery to Owner. 4. Transport items to Owner's storage area designated by Owner. 5. Protect items from damage during transport and storage.

C. Removed and Reinstalled Items:

1. Clean and repair items to functional condition adequate for intended reuse. 2. Pack or crate items after cleaning and repairing. Identify contents of containers. 3. Protect items from damage during transport and storage. 4. Reinstall items in locations indicated. Comply with installation requirements for new materials and

equipment. Provide connections, supports, and miscellaneous materials necessary to make item functional for use indicated.

D. Existing Items to Remain: Protect construction indicated to remain against damage and soiling during selective demolition. When permitted by Architect, items may be removed to a suitable, protected storage location during selective demolition and cleaned and reinstalled in their original locations after selective demolition operations are complete.



3.5 DISPOSAL OF DEMOLISHED MATERIALS

A. General: Except for items or materials indicated to be recycled, reused, salvaged, reinstalled, or otherwise indicated to remain Owner's property, remove demolished materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in an EPA-approved landfill.

1. Do not allow demolished materials to accumulate on-site. 2. Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas. 3. Remove debris from elevated portions of building by chute, hoist, or other device that will convey

debris to grade level in a controlled descent. 4. Comply with requirements specified in Section 017419 "Construction Waste Management and

Disposal."

B. Burning: Do not burn demolished materials.

C. Disposal: Transport demolished materials off Owner's property and legally dispose of them.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent structures and improvements of dust, dirt, and debris caused by selective demolition operations. Return adjacent areas to condition existing before selective demolition operations began.


PARTNERS 15-175B CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033000-1


SECTION 033000 - CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, concrete materials, mixture design, placement procedures, and finishes, for the following:

1. Footings and non-exposed foundation walls. 2. Exposed foundation walls. 3. Slabs-on-grade. 4. Supported slabs.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 32 Section "Concrete Paving" for concrete pavement and walks.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of the following: blended hydraulic cement, fly ash and other pozzolans, ground granulated blast-furnace slag, and silica fume; subject to compliance with requirements.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Design Mixtures: For each concrete mixture. Submit alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.

1. Indicate amounts of mixing water to be withheld for later addition at Project site.

C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Placing drawings that detail fabrication, bending, and placement. Include bar sizes, lengths, material, grade, bar schedules, stirrup spacing, bent bar diagrams, bar arrangement, splices and laps, mechanical connections, tie spacing, hoop spacing, and supports for concrete reinforcement.

D. Material Test Reports: For the following, from a qualified testing agency, indicating compliance with requirements:



1. Aggregates. Include service record data indicating absence of deleterious expansion of concrete due to alkali aggregate reactivity.

E. Material Certificates: For each of the following, signed by manufacturers:

1. Cementitious materials. 2. Admixtures. 3. Curing compounds. 4. Floor and slab treatments. 5. Bonding agents. 6. Adhesives. 7. Vapor retarders. 8. Repair materials.

F. Floor surface flatness and levelness measurements to determine compliance with specified tolerances.

G. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

H. Minutes of preinstallation conference.


A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs on Project personnel qualified as ACI-certified Flatwork Technician and Finisher and a supervisor who is an ACI-certified Concrete Flatwork Technician.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

1. Manufacturer certified according to NRMCA's "Certification of Ready Mixed Concrete Production Facilities."

C. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent agency, qualified according to ASTM C 1077 and ASTM E 329 for testing indicated.

1. Personnel conducting field tests shall be qualified as ACI Concrete Field Testing Technician, Grade 1, according to ACI CP-1 or an equivalent certification program.

2. Personnel performing laboratory tests shall be ACI-certified Concrete Strength Testing Technician and Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade I. Testing Agency laboratory supervisor shall be an ACI-certified Concrete Laboratory Testing Technician - Grade II.

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant, obtain aggregate from one source, and obtain admixtures through one source from a single manufacturer.

E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents:

1. ACI 301, "Specification for Structural Concrete," 2. ACI 117, "Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials."



F. Concrete Testing Service: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform material evaluation tests and to design concrete mixtures.

G. Pre-installation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Management and Coordination."

1. Before submitting design mixtures, review concrete design mixture and examine procedures for ensuring quality of concrete materials. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cast-in-place concrete to attend, including the following:

a. Contractor's superintendent. b. Ready-mix concrete manufacturer. c. Concrete subcontractor. d. Architect and Engineer. e. Owner’s Testing Agency.

2. Review special inspection and testing and inspecting agency procedures for field quality control, concrete finishes and finishing, cold- and hot-weather concreting procedures, curing procedures, construction contraction and isolation joints forms and form removal limitations, vapor-retarder installation, anchor rod and anchorage device installation tolerances, floor and slab flatness and levelness measurement, concrete repair procedures, and concrete protection.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Steel Reinforcement: Deliver, store, and handle steel reinforcement to prevent bending and damage.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 FORM-FACING MATERIALS

A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints.

1. Plywood, metal, or other approved panel materials.

B. Rough-Formed Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit.

C. Void Forms: Biodegradable paper surface, treated for moisture resistance, structurally sufficient to support weight of plastic concrete and other superimposed loads.



D. Chamfer Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, 3/4 by 3/4 inch (19 by 19 mm), minimum.

E. Rustication Strips: Wood, metal, PVC, or rubber strips, kerfed for ease of form removal.

F. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated form-release agent that will not bond with, stain, or adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces.

1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials.

2.3 STEEL REINFORCEMENT

A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 (Grade 420), deformed.

B. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82, as drawn.

C. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185, plain, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

2.4 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES

A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire reinforcement in place. Manufacture bar supports from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice," of greater compressive strength than concrete and as follows:

1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI Class 1 plastic-protected steel wire or CRSI Class 2 stainless-steel bar supports.

2.5 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of the same type, brand, and source, throughout Project unless noted otherwise:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I gray or supplement with the following: a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or F (in footing mix only, mix 25% of cement content.). b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: (in footing mix only, max 35% of Cement

content).ASTM C 989, Grade 100 or 120.

B. Normal-Weight Aggregates: ASTM C 33, Class 3M coarse aggregate or better, graded. Provide aggregates from a single source with documented service record data of at least 10 years' satisfactory service in similar applications and service conditions using similar aggregates and cementitious materials.

1. Maximum Coarse-Aggregate Size: 1 inch (25 mm) nominal. 2. Fine Aggregate: Free of materials with deleterious reactivity to alkali in cement.

C. Water: ASTM C 94/C 94M and potable.



2.6 ADMIXTURES

A. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Provide admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and that will not contribute water-soluble chloride ions exceeding those permitted in hardened concrete. Do not use calcium chloride or admixtures containing calcium chloride.

1. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type A. 2. Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type B. 3. Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type D. 4. High-Range, Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type F. 5. High-Range, Water-Reducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type G. 6. Plasticizing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 1017/C 1017M, Type II.

2.7 VAPOR BARRIER/ RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarder: ASTM E 1745, Class A, not less than 15 mils thick. Include manufacturer's recommended adhesive or pressure-sensitive tape.

1. Products: a. Fortifiber Corporation; Moistop Ultra 15. b. Raven Industries Inc.; Vapor Block 15. c. Reef Industries, Inc.; Vapor Guard T85. d. Stego Industries, LLC; Stego Wrap, 15 mils.

B. Granular Fill: Clean mixture of crushed stone, crushed gravel, and manufactured or natural sand; ASTM D 448, Size 10, with 100 percent passing a 3/8-inch (9.5-mm) sieve, 10 to 30 percent passing a No. 100 (0.15-mm) sieve, and at least 5 percent passing No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve; complying with deleterious substance limits of ASTM C 33 for fine aggregates.

2.8 CURING MATERIALS

C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

1. Products:

a. Axim Concrete Technologies; Cimfilm. b. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; Aquafilm. c. Dayton Superior Corporation; Sure Film. d. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Eucobar. e. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; E-Con. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Sealtight Evapre. g. Sika Corporation, Inc.; SikaFilm. h. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Finishing Aid.

D. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class 2, burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf, weighing approximately 9 oz./sq. yd. (305 g/sq. m) when dry.



E. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

F. Water: Potable.

G. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, 18 to 25 percent solids, nondissipating, certified by curing compound manufacturer to not interfere with bonding of floor covering.

1. Products: a. Conspec Marketing & Manufacturing Co., Inc., a Dayton Superior Company; High Seal. b. Dayton Superior Corporation; Safe Cure and Seal (J-19). c. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Diamond Clear VOX. d. L&M Construction Chemicals, Inc.; Dress & Seal WB. e. MBT Protection and Repair, Div. of ChemRex; MasterKure-N-Seal VOC. f. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Vocomp-20. g. Sonneborn, Div. of ChemRex; Kure-N-Seal. h. Symons Corporation, a Dayton Superior Company; Cure & Seal 18 Percent E.

2.8 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Expansion- and Isolation-Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber.

B. Epoxy Bonding Adhesive: ASTM C 881, two-component epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces, of class suitable for application temperature and of grade to suit requirements, and as follows:

1. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.

2.9 REPAIR MATERIALS

A. Repair Overlayment: Cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thicknesses from 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

1. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as defined in ASTM C 219.

2. Primer: Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate, conditions, and application. 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3.2 to 6 mm) or coarse sand as

recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5000 psi (34.5 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

2.10 CONCRETE MIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Prepare design mixtures for each type and strength of concrete, proportioned on the basis of laboratory trial mixture or field test data, or both, according to ACI 301.



1. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mixture designs based on laboratory trial mixtures.

A. Cementitious Materials: Limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement in concrete as follows:

1. Fly Ash: 25 percent. 2. Combined Fly Ash and Pozzolan: 25 percent. 3. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 35 percent. 4. Combined Fly Ash or Pozzolan and Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: 50 percent portland

cement minimum, with fly ash or pozzolan not exceeding 25 percent.

B. Limit water-soluble, chloride-ion content in hardened concrete to 0.06 percent by weight of cement.

C. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Use water-reducing or high-range water-reducing admixture in concrete, as required, for placement and workability.

2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures, low humidity, or other adverse placement conditions.

3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and parking structure slabs, concrete required to be watertight, and concrete with a water-cementitious materials ratio below 0.50.

2.11 CONCRETE MIXTURES FOR BUILDING ELEMENTS

A. Footings and Non-exposed Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.56. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4

inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. 5 sack mix minimum, 470# cement.

B. Exposed Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4000 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4


4. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

5. 6 sack mix minimum, 564# cement.

C. Slabs-on-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 3,500 psi at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48.



3. Slump Limit: 4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4 inches (50 to 100 mm) before adding high-range water-reducing admixture or plasticizing admixture, plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm).

4. Air Content: Do not allow air content of troweled finished floors to exceed 3 percent.

D. Exterior Concrete (Supported Slabs): Proportion normal-weight concrete mixture as follows:

1. Minimum Compressive Strength: 4,000 psi (24.1 MPa) at 28 days. 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio: 0.48. 3. Slump Limit4 inches (100 mm) or 8 inches (200 mm) for concrete with verified slump of 2 to 4


1. Air Content: 6 percent, plus or minus 1.5 percent at point of delivery for 1-inch (25-mm) nominal maximum aggregate size.

2.12 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT

A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice."

2.13 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, mix, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M, and furnish batch ticket information.

1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F (30 and 32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-1/2 hours to 75 minutes; when air temperature is above 90 deg F (32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 FORMWORK

A. Design, erect, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI 301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until structure can support such loads.

B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures are of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated, within tolerance limits of ACI 117.

C. Limit concrete surface irregularities, designated by ACI 347R as abrupt or gradual, as follows:

1. Class B, 1/4 inch (6 mm) for smooth-formed finished surfaces. 2. Class C, 1/2 inch (13 mm) for rough-formed finished surfaces.

D. Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar.



E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Provide top forms for inclined surfaces steeper than 1.5 horizontal to 1 vertical.

1. Install keyways, recesses, and the like, for easy removal. 2. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material.

F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds.

G. Provide temporary openings for cleanouts and inspection ports where interior area of formwork is inaccessible. Close openings with panels tightly fitted to forms and securely braced to prevent loss of concrete mortar. Locate temporary openings in forms at inconspicuous locations.

H. Chamfer exterior corners and edges of permanently exposed concrete.

I. Form openings, chases, offsets, sinkages, keyways, reglets, blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items.

J. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood, sawdust, dirt, and other debris just before placing concrete.

K. Retighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment.

L. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent, according to manufacturer's written instructions, before placing reinforcement.

3.2 EMBEDDED ITEMS

A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use setting drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions, and directions furnished with items to be embedded.

1. Install anchor rods, accurately located, to elevations required and complying with tolerances in Section 7.5 of AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

2. Install dovetail anchor slots in concrete structures as indicated.

3.3 VAPOR RETARDERS

A. Plastic Vapor Retarders: Place, protect, and repair vapor retarders according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Lap joints 6 inches (150 mm) and seal with manufacturer's recommended tape.

2. Seal all penetrations with +/-24” square pieces of the vapor retarder and with slip-fit over penetrations and tape, including all four sides. Taping around penetration without this piece will not be permitted.




A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for placing reinforcement.

1. Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete.

B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale, earth, ice, and other foreign materials that would reduce bond to concrete.

C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars.

D. Set wire ties with ends directed into concrete, not toward exposed concrete surfaces.

E. Install welded wire reinforcement in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap edges and ends of adjoining sheets at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining sheet widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction. Lace overlaps with wire.

3.5 JOINTS

A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete.

B. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Architect.

1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction joints, unless otherwise indicated. Do not continue reinforcement through sides of strip placements of floors and slabs.

2. Form keyed joints as indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into concrete. 3. Locate joints for beams, slabs, joists, and girders in the middle third of spans. Offset joints in

girders a minimum distance of twice the beam width from a beam-girder intersection. 4. Locate horizontal joints in walls and columns at underside of floors, slabs, beams, and girders and

at the top of footings or floor slabs. 5. Space vertical joints in walls as indicated. Locate joints beside piers integral with walls, near

corners, and in concealed locations where possible. 6. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially

hardened concrete surfaces. 7. Use epoxy-bonding adhesive at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or

partially hardened concrete surfaces.

C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of concrete thickness as follows: 1. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with shatterproof abrasive or

diamond-rimmed blades. Cut 1/8-inch- (3.2-mm-) wide joints into concrete when cutting action will not tear, abrade, or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks.



D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated.

1. Extend joint-filler strips full width and depth of joint, terminating flush with finished concrete surface, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Install joint-filler strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, lace or clip sections together.

3.6 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is complete and that required inspections have been performed.

B. Do not add water to concrete during delivery, at Project site, or during placement unless approved by Architect.

C. Before test sampling and placing concrete, water may be added at Project site, subject to limitations of ACI 301.

1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mixture.

D. Deposit concrete continuously in one layer or in horizontal layers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause seams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously, provide construction joints as indicated. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation.

1. Deposit concrete in horizontal layers of depth to not exceed formwork design pressures and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints.

2. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment according to ACI 301. 3. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Insert and withdraw vibrators vertically at

uniformly spaced locations to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time necessary to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mixture constituents to segregate.

E. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, within limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete.

1. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into corners.

2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placement. 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull floats or darbies to form a uniform and open-textured surface plane,

before excess bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations.



F. Cold-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost, freezing actions, or low temperatures.

1. When average high and low temperature is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) for three successive days, maintain delivered concrete mixture temperature within the temperature range required by ACI 301.

2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen subgrade or on subgrade containing frozen materials.

3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt, or other materials containing antifreeze agents or chemical accelerators unless otherwise specified and approved in mixture designs.

G. Hot-Weather Placement: Comply with ACI 301 and as follows:

1. Maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at time of placement. Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option.

2. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement, and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep subgrade uniformly moist without standing water, soft spots, or dry areas.

3.7 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES

A. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material with tie holes and defects repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces not exposed to public view.

B. Smooth-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture imparted by form-facing material, arranged in an orderly and symmetrical manner with a minimum of seams. Repair and patch tie holes and defects. Remove fins and other projections that exceed specified limits on formed-surface irregularities.

1. Apply to concrete surfaces exposed to public view, to receive a rubbed finish, to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete.

C. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of walls, horizontal offsets, and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.

3.8 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS

A. General: Comply with ACI 302.1R recommendations for screeding, restraightening, and finishing operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces.

B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraighten, cut down high spots, and fill low spots. Repeat float passes and restraightening until surface is left with a uniform, smooth, granular texture.



1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel finish.

C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first troweling and consolidate concrete by hand or power-driven trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten until surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings.

1. Apply a trowel finish to surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry tile set over a cleavage membrane, paint, or another thin-film-finish coating system.

2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surface and an unleveled, freestanding, 10-foot- (3.05-m-) long straightedge resting on 2 high spots and placed anywhere on the surface does not exceed 3/16 inch (4.8 mm).

D. Trowel and Fine-Broom Finish: Apply a first trowel finish to surfaces where ceramic or quarry tile is to be installed by either thickset or thin-set method. While concrete is still plastic, slightly scarify surface with a fine broom.

1. Comply with flatness and levelness tolerances for trowel finished floor surfaces.

E. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platforms, steps, and ramps, and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Immediately after float finishing, slightly roughen trafficked surface by brooming with fiber-bristle broom perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Architect before application.

3.9 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS

A. Filling In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures, unless otherwise indicated, after work of other trades is in place. Mix, place, and cure concrete, as specified, to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete filling indicated or required to complete the Work.

3.10 CONCRETE PROTECTING AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and ACI 301 for hot-weather protection during curing.

B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete, but before float finishing.

C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during curing period, moist cure after loosening forms. If removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing for the remainder of the curing period.



D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces.

E. Cure concrete according to ACI 308.1, by one or a combination of the following methods:

1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials:

a. Water. b. Continuous water-fog spray. c. Absorptive cover, water saturated, and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and

edges with 12-inch (300-mm) lap over adjacent absorptive covers.

2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for curing concrete, placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and sealed by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cure for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape.

a. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings.

b. Moisture cure or use moisture-retaining covers to cure concrete surfaces to receive penetrating liquid floor treatments.

c. Cure concrete surfaces to receive floor coverings with either a moisture-retaining cover or a curing compound that the manufacturer certifies will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

a. After curing period has elapsed, remove curing compound without damaging concrete surfaces by method recommended by curing compound manufacturer unless manufacturer certifies curing compound will not interfere with bonding of floor covering used on Project.

4. Curing and Sealing Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and slabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period.

3.11 LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Sealing Coat: Uniformly apply a continuous sealing coat of curing and sealing compound to hardened concrete by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.12 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS

A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Architect. Remove and replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Architect's approval.



B. Patching Mortar: Mix dry-pack patching mortar, consisting of one part portland cement to two and one-half parts fine aggregate passing a No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing.

C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spalls, air bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discolorations that cannot be removed by cleaning.

1. Immediately after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) in any dimension in solid concrete, but not less than 1 inch (25 mm) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes and voids with bonding agent. Fill and compact with patching mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tie voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agent.

2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard portland cement so that, when dry, patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a test area at inconspicuous locations to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface.

3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural performance as determined by Architect.

D. Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for each surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness; use a sloped template.

1. Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts, honeycombs, rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0.25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unreinforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions.

2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days, correct high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by

cutting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete.

4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix, and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform, plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

5. Repair defective areas, except random cracks and single holes 1 inch (25 mm) or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective areas with clean, square cuts and expose steel reinforcement with at least a 3/4-inch (19-mm) clearance all around. Dampen concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mixture as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete.

E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Architect's approval, using epoxy adhesive, patching mortar and concrete.

F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used, subject to Architect's approval.



3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage a special inspector and qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Testing and Inspecting: Engage a qualified testing and inspecting agency to perform tests and inspections and to submit reports.

C. Inspections:

1. Steel reinforcement placement. 2. Headed bolts and studs. 3. Verification of use of required design mixture. 4. Concrete placement, including conveying and depositing. 5. Curing procedures and maintenance of curing temperature.

D. Concrete Tests: Testing of composite samples of fresh concrete obtained according to ASTM C 172 shall be performed according to the following requirements:

1. Testing Frequency: Obtain one composite sample for each day's pour of each concrete mixture exceeding 5 cu. yd. (4 cu. m), but less than 25 cu. yd. (19 cu. m), plus one set for each additional 50 cu. yd. (38 cu. m) or fraction thereof.

a. When frequency of testing will provide fewer than five compressive-strength tests for each concrete mixture, testing shall be conducted from at least five randomly selected batches or from each batch if fewer than five are used.

2. Slump: ASTM C 143/C 143M; one test at point of placement for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture. Perform additional tests when concrete consistency appears to change.

3. Air Content: ASTM C 231, pressure method, for normal-weight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

4. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064/C 1064M; one test hourly when air temperature is 40 deg F (4.4 deg C) and below and when 80 deg F (27 deg C) and above, and one test for each composite sample.

5. Unit Weight: ASTM C 567, fresh unit weight of structural lightweight concrete; one test for each composite sample, but not less than one test for each day's pour of each concrete mixture.

6. Compression Test Specimens: ASTM C 31/C 31M.

a. Cast and laboratory cure two sets of two standard cylinder specimens for each composite sample.

7. Compressive-Strength Tests: ASTM C 39/C 39M; test one set of two laboratory-cured specimens at 7 days and one set of two specimens at 28 days. a. A compressive-strength test shall be the average compressive strength from a set of two

specimens obtained from same composite sample and tested at age indicated.

8. When strength of field-cured cylinders is less than 85 percent of companion laboratory-cured cylinders, Contractor shall evaluate operations and provide corrective procedures for protecting and curing in-place concrete.



9. Strength of each concrete mixture will be satisfactory if every average of any three consecutive compressive-strength tests equals or exceeds specified compressive strength and no compressive-strength test value falls below specified compressive strength by more than 500 psi (3.4 MPa).

10. Test results shall be reported in writing to Architect, concrete manufacturer, and Contractor within 48 hours of testing. Reports of compressive-strength tests shall contain Project identification name and number, date of concrete placement, name of concrete testing and inspecting agency, location of concrete batch in Work, design compressive strength at 28 days, concrete mixture proportions and materials, compressive breaking strength, and type of break for both 7- and 28-day tests.

11. Nondestructive Testing: Impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestructive device may be permitted by Architect but will not be used as sole basis for approval or rejection of concrete.

12. Additional Tests: Testing and inspecting agency shall make additional tests of concrete when test results indicate that slump, air entrainment, compressive strengths, or other requirements have not been met, as directed by Architect. Testing and inspecting agency may conduct tests to determine adequacy of concrete by cored cylinders complying with ASTM C 42/C 42M or by other methods as directed by Architect.

13. Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

14. Correct deficiencies in the Work that test reports and inspections indicate dos not comply with the Contract Documents.

E. Measure floor and slab flatness and levelness according to ASTM E 1155 (ASTM E 1155M) within 24 hours of finishing.

3.14 PROTECTION OF LIQUID FLOOR TREATMENTS

A. Protect liquid floor treatment from damage and wear during the remainder of construction period. Use protective methods and materials, including temporary covering, recommended in writing by liquid floor treatments installer


PARTNERS 15-175B

HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

035416-1


SECTION 035416 - HYDRAULIC CEMENT UNDERLAYMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes hydraulic-cement-based underlayment.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Plans indicating substrates, locations, and average depths of underlayment based on

survey of substrate conditions.

C. Qualification data.


A. Installer Qualifications: Installer who is approved by manufacturer for application of underlayment

products required for this Project.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HYDRAULIC-CEMENT-BASED UNDERLAYMENTS

A. Underlayment: Hydraulic-cement-based, polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in

minimum uniform thicknesses of 1/8 inch (3 mm) and that can be feathered at edges to match adjacent

floor elevations.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated

into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Ardex; K-15 Self-Leveling Underlayment Concrete.

2. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, portland cement, or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as

defined by ASTM C 219.

3. Compressive Strength: Not less than 4100 psi (28 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to

ASTM C 109/C 109M.

4. Underlayment Additive: Resilient-emulsion product of underlayment manufacturer formulated for

use with underlayment when applied to substrate and conditions indicated.

B. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm); or coarse sand as recommended by

underlayment manufacturer.

PARTNERS 15-175B


035416-2


1. Provide aggregate when recommended in writing by underlayment manufacturer for underlayment

thickness required.

C. Water: Potable and at a temperature of not more than 70 deg F (21 deg C).

D. Primer: Product of underlayment manufacturer recommended in writing for substrate, conditions, and

application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLICATION

A. Prepare and clean substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Treat nonmoving substrate cracks according to manufacturer's written instructions to prevent

cracks from telegraphing (reflecting) through underlayment.

2. Fill substrate voids to prevent underlayment from leaking.

B. Concrete Substrates: Mechanically remove, according to manufacturer's written instructions, laitance,

glaze, efflorescence, curing compounds, form-release agents, dust, dirt, grease, oil, and other

contaminants that might impair underlayment bond.

1. Moisture Testing: Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with

installation only after substrates do not exceed a maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of

water/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.

C. Nonporous Substrates: For ceramic tile, quarry tile, and terrazzo substrates, remove waxes, sealants,

and other contaminants that might impair underlayment bond, and prepare surfaces according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Adhesion Tests: After substrate preparation, test substrate for adhesion with underlayment according to

manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Close areas to traffic during underlayment application and for time period after application recommended

in writing by manufacturer.

F. Coordinate application of components to provide optimum underlayment-to-substrate and intercoat

adhesion.

G. At substrate expansion, isolation, and other moving joints, allow joint of same width to continue through

underlayment.

H. Apply primer over prepared substrate at manufacturer's recommended spreading rate.

I. Apply underlayment to produce uniform, level surface.

1. Apply a final layer without aggregate to produce surface.

2. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations.

PARTNERS 15-175B


035416-3


J. Cure underlayment according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent contamination during

application and curing processes.

K. Do not install floor coverings over underlayment until after time period recommended in writing by

underlayment manufacturer.

L. Remove and replace underlayment areas that evidence lack of bond with substrate, including areas that

emit a "hollow" sound when tapped.

M. Protect underlayment from concentrated and rolling loads for remainder of construction period.


PARTNERS 15-175B UNIT MASONRY 042000-1


SECTION 042000 - UNIT MASONRY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Concrete masonry units (CMU's or Masonry Block). 2. Face brick.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel lintels and shelf angles for unit masonry.

2. Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints.

3. See Division 07 Section “Building Insulation” for cavity wall insulation.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement." Show elevations of reinforced walls.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type and color of exposed masonry unit and colored mortar.

D. Material Certificates: For each type and size of product indicated. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements.

E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar and grout. Include description of type and proportions of ingredients.

1. Include test reports for mortar mixes required to comply with property specification. Test according to ASTM C 109/C 109M for compressive strength, ASTM C 1506 for water retention, and ASTM C 91 for air content.

2. Include test reports, according to ASTM C 1019, for grout mixes required to comply with compressive strength requirement.


A. Masonry Standard: Comply with ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 unless modified by requirements in the Contract Documents.



1.4 MOCK-UP

A. Construct a multi-wythe masonry wall as a mock-up panel sized 8 feet long by 6 feet high, which includes mortar and accessories (cell vents, expansion joints, horizontal reinforcement, etc.), wall openings, flash-ings, dampproofing wall insulation, pea gravel, masonry block, cast stone and brick veneer.

B. Locate where directed. C. Mock-up will remain until project completion and will be used as a basis for quality control. D. Mock-up must be complete and in place and reviewed / accepted by the Architect, prior to beginning any

masonry work. E. Remove and discard mock-up when directed by Architect.


A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost or by freezing conditions. Comply with cold-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

B. Hot-Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MASONRY UNITS, GENERAL

A. Defective Units: Referenced masonry unit standards may allow a certain percentage of units to contain chips, cracks, or other defects exceeding limits stated in the standard. Do not use units where such defects will be exposed in the completed Work.

B. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide units that comply with requirements for fire-resistance ratings indicated as determined by testing according to ASTM E 119, by equivalent masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2.2 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (MASONRY BLOCK)

A. Shapes: Provide shapes indicated and for lintels, corners, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, bonding, and other special conditions.

B. Concrete Masonry Units: ASTM C 90. 1. Available products:

a. Grand Blanc Cement Products; 800-875-7500. b. National Block Company ; 734-721-4056



c. Best Block Company;

2. Size: Nominal face dimension of 8” x 16” and nominal depth as indicated on drawing. 3. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of

1900 psi (13.1 MPa). 4. Weight Classification: Normal weight. 5. Both hollow and solid block as indicated. 6. Exposed corners (including door jambs) to be radius profile typical unless otherwise noted.

C. Fire Rating: Provide CMU with fire rating up to 2 hours as required to achieve fire ratings of wall assemblies.

2.3 MASONRY LINTELS

A. Masonry Lintels: Prefabricated or built-in-place masonry lintels made from bond beam CMUs with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout.

2.4 BRICK

A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows:

1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished.

2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in sawed surfaces being exposed to view.

B. Face Brick: Facing brick complying with ASTM C 216.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. FB-##: Refer to ‘Material Finish / Color Schedule Section 000200’ for color selections.

2. Grade: SW. 3. Type: FBX. 4. Unit Compressive Strength: Provide units with minimum average net-area compressive strength of

22,000 psi. 5. Initial Rate of Absorption: Less than 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per

ASTM C 67. 6. Efflorescence: Provide brick that has been tested according to ASTM C 67 and is rated "not

effloresced." 7. Surface Coating: Brick with colors or textures produced by application of coatings shall withstand

50 cycles of freezing and thawing per ASTM C 67 with no observable difference in the applied finish when viewed from 10 feet (3 m).

8. Size (Actual Dimensions): 3-5/8 inches wide by 2 1/4 inches high by 7-5/8 inches long.

2.5 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS

A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or II, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. Refer to ‘Material Finish / Color Schedule Section 000200’ for color selections.



B. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C 207, Type S.

C. Portland Cement-Lime Mix: Packaged blend of portland cement and hydrated lime containing no other ingredients.

D. Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91.

E. Aggregate for Mortar: ASTM C 144.

1. For joints less than 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick, use aggregate graded with 100 percent passing the No. 16 (1.18-mm) sieve.

2. White-Mortar Aggregates: Natural white sand or crushed white stone. 3. Colored-Mortar Aggregates: Natural sand or crushed stone of color necessary to produce required

mortar color.

F. Aggregate for Grout: ASTM C 404.

G. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: ASTM C 395, epoxy-resin-based material formulated for use as pointing mortar for structural-clay tile facing units (and approved for such use by manufacturer of units); in color indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's colors.

H. Cold-Weather Admixture: Nonchloride, noncorrosive, accelerating admixture complying with ASTM C 494/C 494M, Type C, and recommended by manufacturer for use in masonry mortar of composition indicated.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Euclid Chemical Company (The); Accelguard 80. b. Grace Construction Products, W. R. Grace & Co. - Conn.; Morset. c. Sonneborn Products, BASF Aktiengesellschaft; Trimix-NCA.

I. Water: Potable.

2.6 REINFORCEMENT

A. Uncoated Steel Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M or ASTM A 996/A 996M, Grade 60 (Grade 420).

B. Masonry Joint Reinforcement, General: ASTM A 951/A 951M.

1. Interior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized, carbon steel. 2. Exterior Walls: Hot-dip galvanized steel. 3. Wire Size for Side Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 4. Wire Size for Cross Rods: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 5. Wire Size for Veneer Ties: W1.7 or 0.148-inch diameter. 6. Spacing of Cross Rods, Tabs, and Cross Ties: Not more than 16 inches (407 mm) o.c. 7. Provide in lengths of not less than 10 feet (3 m), with prefabricated corner and tee units.

C. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Single-Wythe Masonry: Either ladder or truss type with single pair of side rods.



D. Masonry Joint Reinforcement for Multiwythe Masonry:

1. Ladder type with 1 side rod at each face shell of hollow masonry units more than 4 inches (100 mm) wide, plus 1 side rod at each wythe of masonry 4 inches (100 mm) wide or less.

2. Adjustable (two-piece) type, either ladder or truss design, with one side rod at each face shell of backing wythe and with separate adjustable ties with pintle-and-eye connections having a maximum adjustment of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm). Size ties to extend at least halfway through facing wythe but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Ties have hooks or clips to engage a continuous horizontal wire in the facing wythe.

2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS

A. Materials: Provide ties and anchors specified in this article that are made from materials that comply with the following unless otherwise indicated.

1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B-2 coating.

2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel, with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B coating.

3. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Wire Ties, General: Unless otherwise indicated, size wire ties to extend at least halfway through veneer but with at least 5/8-inch (16-mm) cover on outside face. Outer ends of wires are bent 90 degrees and extend 2 inches (50 mm) parallel to face of veneer.

C. Individual Wire Ties: Rectangular units with closed ends and not less than 4 inches (100 mm) wide.

1. Wire: Fabricate from 3/16-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

D. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structural Steel Framing: Provide anchors that allow vertical or horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall.

1. Anchor Section for Welding to Steel Frame: Crimped 1/4-inch- (6.35-mm-) diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

2. Tie Section: Triangular-shaped wire tie, sized to extend within 1 inch (25 mm) of masonry face, made from 0.187-inch diameter, hot-dip galvanized steel wire.

E. Partition Top anchors: 0.105-inch- (2.66-mm-) thick metal plate with 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter metal rod 6 inches (152 mm) long welded to plate and with closed-end plastic tube fitted over rod that allows rod to move in and out of tube. Fabricate from steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

F. Rigid Anchors: Fabricate from steel bars 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) wide by 1/4 inch (6.35 mm) thick by 24 inches (610 mm) long, with ends turned up 2 inches (51 mm) or with cross pins unless otherwise indicated.

1. Corrosion Protection: Hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

G. Anchor Bolts: L-shaped steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M, Property Class 4.6); with ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) hex nuts and, where indicated, flat washers; hot-dip galvanized to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C; of dimensions indicated.



2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing complying with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" and as follows:

1. Metal Drip Edge: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and 1/2 inch (13 mm) out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed.

2. Metal Sealant Stop: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at least 3 inches (76 mm) into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior face of wall, bend metal back on itself for 3/4 inch (19 mm) and down into joint 1/4 inch (6 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod.

3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from stainless steel copper to shapes indicated.

B. Flexible Flashing: Use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following] [available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru-Wall

Flashing. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Phoenix Building Products; Type FCC-Fabric Covered Copper. 5) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 6) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.

C. Solder and Sealants for Sheet Metal Flashings: As specified in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

D. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MASONRY ACCESSORIES

A. Compressible Filler: Premolded filler strips complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade 2A1; compressible up to 35 percent; formulated from neoprene.

B. Preformed Control-Joint Gaskets: Made from styrene-butadiene-rubber compound, complying with ASTM D 2000, Designation M2AA-805 and designed to fit standard sash block and to maintain lateral stability in masonry wall; size and configuration as indicated.

C. Bond-Breaker Strips: Asphalt-saturated, organic roofing felt complying with ASTM D 226, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt).

D. Weep/Vent Products: Use[ one of] the following unless otherwise indicated:



1. Cellular Plastic Weep/Vent: One-piece, flexible extrusion made from UV-resistant polypropylene copolymer, full height and width of head joint and depth 1/8 inch (3 mm) less than depth of outer wythe, in color selected from manufacturer's standard.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Mortar Maze weep vent. 2) Blok-Lok Limited; Cell-Vent. 3) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Cell Vents. 4) Heckmann Building Products Inc.; No. 85 Cell Vent. 5) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; Quadro-Vent. 6) Wire-Bond; Cell Vent.

E. Cavity Drainage Material: Clean, pea gravel.

2.10 CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: As specified in Specification Section 072100 “Thermal Insulation”.

2.11 MASONRY CLEANERS

A. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength cleaner designed for removing mortar/grout stains, efflorescence, and other new construction stains from new masonry without discoloring or damaging masonry surfaces. Use product expressly approved for intended use by cleaner manufacturer and manufacturer of masonry units being cleaned.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Diedrich Technologies, Inc. b. EaCo Chem, Inc. c. ProSoCo, Inc. d. Or equal.

2.12 MORTAR AND GROUT MIXES

A. General: Do not use admixtures, including pigments, air-entraining agents, accelerators, retarders, water-repellent agents, antifreeze compounds, or other admixtures, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Do not use calcium chloride in mortar or grout. 2. Use portland cement-lime mortar unless otherwise indicated. 3. For exterior masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 4. For reinforced masonry, use portland cement-lime mortar. 5. Add cold-weather admixture (if used) at same rate for all mortar that will be exposed to view,

regardless of weather conditions, to ensure that mortar color is consistent.



B. Preblended, Dry Mortar Mix: Furnish dry mortar ingredients in form of a preblended mix. Measure quantities by weight to ensure accurate proportions, and thoroughly blend ingredients before delivering to Project site.

C. Mortar for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 270, Proportion Specification. Provide the following types of mortar for applications stated unless another type is indicated.

1. For masonry below grade or in contact with earth, use Type S. 2. For reinforced masonry, interior and exterior bearing walls, use Type S. 3. For mortar parge coats, use Type S. 4. For interior non-load-bearing partitions; and for other applications where another type is not

indicated, use Type N. 5. For interior non-load-bearing partitions, Type O may be used instead of Type N.

D. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product or select and proportion pigments with other ingredients to produce color required. Do not add pigments to colored cement products.

1. Pigments shall not exceed pigment-to-cement ratio as recommended by manufacturer to maintain specified properties.

E. Grout for Unit Masonry: Comply with ASTM C 476.

1. Use grout of type indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, of type (fine or coarse) that will comply with Table 1.15.1 in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for dimensions of grout spaces and pour height.

2. Provide grout with a slump of 8 to 11 inches (203 to 279 mm) as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

F. Epoxy Pointing Mortar: Mix epoxy pointing mortar to comply with mortar manufacturer's written instructions.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required to provide a continuous pattern or to fit adjoining construction, cut units with motor-driven saws; provide clean, sharp, unchipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of units is specified. Install cut units with cut surfaces and, where possible, cut edges concealed.

B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures.

C. Wetting of Brick: Wet brick before laying if initial rate of absorption exceeds 30 g/30 sq. in. (30 g/194 sq. cm) per minute when tested per ASTM C 67. Allow units to absorb water so they are damp but not wet at time of laying.

3.2 TOLERANCES

A. Dimensions and Locations of Elements:



1. For dimensions in cross section or elevation do not vary by more than plus 1/2 inch (12 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

2. For location of elements in plan do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/2 inch (12 mm).

3. For location of elements in elevation do not vary from that indicated by more than plus or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm) in a story height or 1/2 inch (12 mm) total.

B. MOCK-UP WALL 1. Construct mock-up wall immediately upon approval of materials. Mock-up must be completed and

accepted by Architect prior to commencement of masonry work.

C. Lines and Levels:

1. For bed joints and top surfaces of bearing walls do not vary from level by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

3. For vertical lines and surfaces do not vary from plumb by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

4. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external corners, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints, do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

5. For lines and surfaces do not vary from straight by more than 1/4 inch in 10 feet (6 mm in 3 m), 3/8 inch in 20 feet (9 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

D. Joints:

1. For bed joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm), with a maximum thickness limited to 1/2 inch (12 mm).

2. For head and collar joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus 3/8 inch (9 mm) or minus 1/4 inch (6 mm).

3. For exposed head joints, do not vary from thickness indicated by more than plus or minus 1/8 inch (3 mm).

3.3 LAYING MASONRY WALLS

A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at corners, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations.

B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch (100-mm) horizontal face dimensions at corners or jambs.

C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items.

D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar unless otherwise indicated.



E. Fill cores in hollow CMUs with grout 24 inches (600 mm) under bearing plates, beams, lintels, posts, and similar items unless otherwise indicated.

3.4 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING

A. Lay hollow brick and CMUs as follows:

1. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers, columns, and pilasters. 3. With webs fully bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on footings

where cells are not grouted.

B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cut joints flush for masonry walls to receive plaster or other direct-applied finishes (other than paint) unless otherwise indicated.

3.5 COMPOSITE MASONRY

A. Bond wythes of composite masonry together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.

a. Where bed joints of both wythes align, use ladder-type reinforcement extending across both withes.

b. Where bed joints of wythes do not align, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties.

B. Collar Joints: Solidly fill collar joints by parging face of first wythe that is laid and shoving units of other wythe into place.

C. Corners: Provide interlocking masonry unit bond in each wythe and course at corners unless otherwise indicated.

D. Intersecting and Abutting Walls: Unless vertical expansion or control joints are shown at juncture, bond walls together as follows:

1. Provide individual metal ties not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Provide continuity with masonry joint reinforcement by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

3.6 CAVITY WALLS

A. Bond wythes of cavity walls together using one of the following methods: 1. Masonry Joint Reinforcement: Installed in horizontal mortar joints.



a. Where one wythe is of clay masonry and the other of concrete masonry, use adjustable (two-piece) type reinforcement with continuous horizontal wire in facing wythe attached to ties to allow for differential movement regardless of whether bed joints align.

B. Keep cavities clean of mortar droppings and other materials during construction. Bevel beds away from cavity, to minimize mortar protrusions into cavity. Do not attempt to trowel or remove mortar fins protruding into cavity.

C. Coat cavity face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Bituminous Dampproofing." 1. Dampproofing to extend from face of footing up backup wythe to underside of thru wall flashing.

D. Apply air barrier to face of backup wythe to comply with Division 07 Section "Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers."

E. Installing Cavity-Wall Insulation: Place small dabs of adhesive, spaced approximately 12 inches (300 mm) o.c. both ways, on inside face of insulation boards, or attach with plastic fasteners designed for this purpose. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other confining obstructions in cavity, with edges butted tightly both ways. Press units firmly against inside wythe of masonry or other construction as shown.

3.7 MASONRY JOINT REINFORCEMENT

A. General: Install entire length of longitudinal side rods in mortar with a minimum cover of 5/8 inch (16 mm) on exterior side of walls, 1/2 inch (13 mm) elsewhere. Lap reinforcement a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm).

1. Space reinforcement not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. 2. Space reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) o.c. in foundation walls and parapet walls. 3. Provide reinforcement not more than 8 inches (203 mm) above and below wall openings and

extending 12 inches (305 mm) beyond openings in addition to continuous reinforcement.

B. Interrupt joint reinforcement at control and expansion joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. Provide continuity at wall intersections by using prefabricated T-shaped units.

D. Provide continuity at corners by using prefabricated L-shaped units.

3.8 ANCHORING MASONRY TO STRUCTURAL MEMBERS

A. Anchor masonry to structural memebrs where masonry abuts or faces structural steel or concrete to comply with the following:

1. Provide an open space not less than 1 inch (25 mm) wide between masonry and structural steel or concrete unless otherwise indicated. Keep open space free of mortar and other rigid materials.

2. Anchor masonry with anchors embedded in masonry joints and attached to structure. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. vertically and 36 inches

(915 mm) o.c. horizontally.



3.9 ANCHORING MASONRY VENEERS

A. Anchor masonry veneers to masonry backup with masonry-veneer anchors to comply with the following requirements: 1. Embed connector sections and continuous wire in masonry joints. Provide not less than 2 inches

(50 mm) of air space between back of masonry veneer and face of sheathing. 2. Locate anchor sections to allow maximum vertical differential movement of ties up and down. 3. Space anchors as indicated, but not more than 16 inches (406 mm) o.c. vertically and 24 inches

(610 mm) o.c. horizontally with not less than 1 anchor for each 2.67 sq. ft. (0.25 sq. m) of wall area. Install additional anchors within 12 inches (305 mm) of openings and at intervals, not exceeding 36 inches (914 mm), around perimeter.

4. Locate 1/4" diameter 7” x 7” hot-dip galvanized dovetail triangle tie located 24” o.c. horizontally at locations of all soldier course brick veneer with hammer-screw fastener into masonry block.

3.10 FLASHING, WEEP HOLES, CAVITY DRAINAGE, AND VENTS

A. General: Install embedded flashing and weep holes in masonry at shelf angles, lintels, ledges, other obstructions to downward flow of water in wall, and where indicated. Install vents at shelf angles, ledges, and other obstructions to upward flow of air in cavities, and where indicated.

B. Install flashing as follows unless otherwise indicated:

1. Prepare masonry surfaces so they are smooth and free from projections that could puncture flashing. Where flashing is within mortar joint, place through-wall flashing on sloping bed of mortar and cover with mortar. Before covering with mortar, seal penetrations in flashing with adhesive, sealant, or tape as recommended by flashing manufacturer.

2. At lintels and shelf angles, extend flashing a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) into masonry at each end. At heads and sills, extend flashing 6 inches (150 mm) at ends and turn up not less than 2 inches (50 mm) to form end dams.

3. Install metal drip edges beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal drip edge.

4. Install metal flashing termination beneath flexible flashing at exterior face of wall. Stop flexible flashing 1/2 inch (13 mm) back from outside face of wall and adhere flexible flashing to top of metal flashing termination.

C. Install weep holes in head joints in exterior wythes of first course of masonry immediately above embedded flashing and as follows:

1. Use specified weep/vent products to form weep holes. 2. Space weep holes 24 inches (600 mm) o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Cover cavity side of weep holes with plastic insect screening at cavities insulated with loose-fill

insulation.

D. Place pea is base of cavities. Pea gravel to be 3” deep.

E. Install vents in head joints in exterior wythes at spacing indicated. Use specified weep/vent products to form vents.



1. Close cavities off vertically and horizontally with blocking in manner indicated. Install through-wall flashing and weep holes above horizontal blocking.

3.11 REINFORCED UNIT MASONRY INSTALLATION

A. Temporary Formwork and Shores: Construct formwork and shores as needed to support reinforced masonry elements during construction.

1. Construct formwork to provide shape, line, and dimensions of completed masonry as indicated. Make forms sufficiently tight to prevent leakage of mortar and grout. Brace, tie, and support forms to maintain position and shape during construction and curing of reinforced masonry.

2. Do not remove forms and shores until reinforced masonry members have hardened sufficiently to carry their own weight and other loads that may be placed on them during construction.

B. Placing Reinforcement: Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602.

C. Grouting: Do not place grout until entire height of masonry to be grouted has attained enough strength to resist grout pressure.

1. Comply with requirements in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/TMS 602 for cleanouts and for grout placement, including minimum grout space and maximum pour height.

2. Limit height of vertical grout pours to not more than 60 inches (1520 mm).


A. Testing and Inspecting: Owner will engage special inspectors to perform tests and inspections and prepare reports. Allow inspectors access to scaffolding and work areas, as needed to perform tests and inspections. Retesting of materials that fail to comply with specified requirements shall be done at Contractor's expense.

B. Inspections: Level 1 special inspections according to the "International Building Code."

1. Begin masonry construction only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared mortar. 2. Place grout only after inspectors have verified compliance of grout spaces and of grades, sizes,

and locations of reinforcement. 3. Place grout only after inspectors have verified proportions of site-prepared grout.

C. Testing Prior to Construction: One set of tests.

D. Testing Frequency: One set of tests for each 5000 sq. ft. (464 sq. m) of wall area or portion thereof.

E. Clay Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 67 for compressive strength.

F. Concrete Masonry Unit Test: For each type of unit provided, according to ASTM C 140 for compressive strength.

G. Mortar Aggregate Ratio Test (Proportion Specification): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 780.



H. Grout Test (Compressive Strength): For each mix provided, according to ASTM C 1019.

3.13 REPAIRING, POINTING, AND CLEANING

A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints.

B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed masonry as follows:

1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; leave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes.

2. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water.

3. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 4. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written

instructions. 5. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of

stain on exposed surfaces.

3.14 MASONRY WASTE DISPOSAL

A. Excess Masonry Waste: Remove excess masonry waste and legally dispose of off Owner's property.


PARTNERS 15-175B CAST STONE 047200-1


SECTION 047200 - CAST STONE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Cast stone trim.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include dimensions of individual components.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for cast stone units. Include dimensions, details of reinforcement and anchorages if any, and indication of finished faces.

C. Samples: For each color and texture of cast stone required.

D. Colored Mortar Samples: For each mortar color required.

E. Qualification Data: For manufacturer.

F. Material Test Reports.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer of cast stone units similar to those indicated for this Project, with sufficient production capacity to manufacture required units.

1. Manufacturer is a producing member of the Cast Stone Institute.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Advanced Cast Stone, Inc. 2. American Artstone Co., Inc. 3. Architectural Art Stone, Inc. 4. Architectural Cast Stone Corp. 5. Architectural Cast Stone, Inc. 6. Architectural Concrete Company, Inc. 7. Architectural Molded Composites, Inc.



8. Architectural Ornamental Castings, Inc. 9. Architectural Ornaments, Inc. 10. Artisan Stone Company, Inc. 11. Cast Stone Systems, Inc. 12. Classic Cast Stone of Dallas, Inc. 13. Continental Cast Stone East; Russell, Inc. 14. Continental Cast Stone Manufacturing, Inc. 15. Custom Cast Stone, Inc. 16. Dura Art Stone. 17. DuraStone. 18. Pineapple Grove Designs. 19. Royal Stone. 20. Stone Castle Industries, Inc. 21. Techcrete Architectural Precast.

2.2 CAST STONE UNITS

A. Provide cast stone units complying with ASTM C 1364 using the vibrant dry tamp or wet-cast method.

1. Provide units that are resistant to freezing and thawing. 2. Slope exposed horizontal surfaces 1:12, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide raised fillets at backs of sills and at ends indicated to be built into jambs. 4. Provide drips on projecting elements, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Cure units by one of the following methods:

1. Cure units with steam in enclosed curing room at temperature of 105 deg F (41 deg C) or above and 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 6 hours.

2. Cure units with dense fog and water spray in enclosed warm curing room at 95 to 100 percent relative humidity for 24 hours.

3. Cure units to comply with one of the following:

a. Not less than 5 days at mean daily temperature of 70 deg F (21 deg C) or above. b. Not less than 6 days at mean daily temperature of 60 deg F (16 deg C) or above. c. Not less than 7 days at mean daily temperature of 50 deg F (10 deg C) or above. d. Not less than 8 days at mean daily temperature of 45 deg F (7 deg C) or above.

C. Acid etch units after curing to remove cement film from surfaces to be exposed to view.

D. Colors and Textures: Refer to 000200 Material Finish / Color Schedule for color selections.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Anchors and Dowels: Type 304 stainless steel.

B. Proprietary Acidic Cleaner: Manufacturer's standard-strength, general-purpose cleaner complying with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" and approved for intended use by cast



stone manufacturer and approved by cleaner manufacturer for use on cast stone and adjacent masonry materials.

2.4 MORTAR

A. Comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies" for mortar materials and mixes.

1. For setting mortar, use Type N. 2. For pointing mortar, use Type N. 3. Pigmented Mortar: Use colored cement product.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Employ an independent testing agency to sample and test cast stone units according to ASTM C 1364.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SETTING CAST STONE IN MORTAR

A. Install cast stone units to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

B. Set units in full bed of mortar with full head joints, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Fill dowel holes and anchor slots with mortar. 2. Fill collar joints solid as units are set. 3. Build concealed flashing into mortar joints as units are set. 4. Keep head joints in coping and other units with exposed vertical surfaces open to receive sealant. 5. Keep joints at shelf angles open to receive sealant.

C. Tool exposed joints slightly concave when thumbprint hard, using a jointer larger than joint thickness, unless otherwise indicated. Rake all sill and horizontal joints 1/4-inch and provide sealant in joints.

D. Provide expansion, control, and pressure-relieving joints of widths and at locations indicated. Keep joints free of mortar and other rigid materials.

E. Prepare joints indicated to receive sealant and apply sealant of type and at locations indicated to comply with applicable requirements in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.2 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES

A. Variation from Plumb: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.

B. Variation from Level: Do not exceed 1/8 inch in 10 feet (3 mm in 3 m), 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m), or 1/2 inch (12 mm) maximum.



C. Variation in Joint Width: Do not vary joint thickness more than 1/8 inch in 36 inches (3 mm in 900 mm) or one-fourth of nominal joint width, whichever is less.

D. Variation in Plane between Adjacent Surfaces (Lipping): Do not vary from flush alignment with adjacent units or adjacent surfaces indicated to be flush with units by more than 1/16 inch (1.5 mm), except due to warpage of units.

3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Remove and replace stained and otherwise damaged units and units not matching approved Samples. Cast stone may be repaired if methods and results are approved by Architect.

1. Replace units in a manner that shows no evidence of replacement.

B. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean cast stone as work progresses.

1. Remove mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. 2. Remove excess sealant immediately, including spills, smears, and spatter.

C. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured, clean exposed cast stone to comply with requirements in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."


PARTNERS 15-175B STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING 051200-1


SECTION 051200 - STRUCTURAL STEEL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes structural steel.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Structural Steel: Elements of structural-steel frame, as classified by AISC 303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Connections: Provide details of simple shear connections required by the Contract Documents to be selected or completed by structural-steel fabricator to withstand loads indicated and comply with other information and restrictions indicated.

1. Select and complete connections using AISC 360. 2. Use ASD; data are given at service-load level.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication of structural-steel components.

C. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer, fabricator, testing agency.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Mill test reports for structural steel, including chemical and physical properties.

F. Source quality-control reports.


A. Welding Qualifications: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M, "Structural Welding Code - Steel."

B. Comply with applicable provisions of the following specifications and documents:

1. AISC 303. 2. AISC 360.



3. RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A325 or A490 Bolts."

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Store materials to permit easy access for inspection and identification. Keep steel members off ground and spaced by using pallets, dunnage, or other supports and spacers. Protect steel members and packaged materials from corrosion and deterioration.

1. Do not store materials on structure in a manner that might cause distortion, damage, or overload to members or supporting structures. Repair or replace damaged materials or structures as directed.

B. Store fasteners in a protected place in sealed containers with manufacturer's labels intact.

1. Fasteners may be repackaged provided Owner's testing and inspecting agency observes repackaging and seals containers.

2. Clean and relubricate bolts and nuts that become dry or rusty before use. 3. Comply with manufacturers' written recommendations for cleaning and lubricating ASTM F 1852

fasteners and for retesting fasteners after lubrication.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STRUCTURAL-STEEL MATERIALS

A. W-Shapes: ASTM A 992/A 992M.

B. Channels, Angles, M, S-Shapes: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

C. Plate and Bar: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

D. Cold-Formed Hollow Structural Sections: ASTM A 500, Grade B, structural tubing.

E. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Type E or S, Grade B.

F. Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS requirements.

2.2 BOLTS, CONNECTORS, AND ANCHORS

A. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade C, (ASTM A 563M, Class 8S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers; all with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-washer type with plain finish.



B. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 490 (ASTM A 490M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH, (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers with plain finish.

1. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 490 (ASTM F 959M, Type 10.9), compressible-washer type with plain finish.

C. Zinc-Coated High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy-hex steel structural bolts; ASTM A 563, Grade DH (ASTM A 563M, Class 10S) heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts; and ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating. 2. Direct-Tension Indicators: ASTM F 959, Type 325 (ASTM F 959M, Type 8.8), compressible-

washer type with mechanically deposited zinc coating, baked epoxy-coated finish.

D. Tension-Control, High-Strength Bolt-Nut-Washer Assemblies: ASTM F 1852, Type 1, heavy-hex head assemblies consisting of steel structural bolts with splined ends, heavy-hex carbon-steel nuts, and hardened carbon-steel washers.

1. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating.

E. Unheaded Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable.

1. Configuration: Straight. 2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

F. Headed Anchor Rods: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, weldable, straight.

1. Nuts: ASTM A 563 (ASTM A 563M) heavy-hex carbon steel. 2. Plate Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M carbon steel. 3. Washers: ASTM F 436 (ASTM F 436M), Type 1, hardened carbon steel. 4. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

G. Threaded Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M, ASTM A 193/A 193M, Grade B7.

1. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class C.

H. Clevises and Turnbuckles: Made from cold-finished carbon steel bars, ASTM A 108, Grade 1035.

2.3 PRIMER

A. Primer: Comply with Division 09 painting Sections and Division 09 Section "High-Performance Coatings."

B. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25, Type I, zinc oxide, alkyd, linseed oil primer.

C. Primer: Fabricator's standard lead- and chromate-free, non-asphaltic, rust-inhibiting primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.



2.4 GROUT

A. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: ASTM C 1107, factory-packaged, nonmetallic aggregate grout, noncorrosive and non-staining, mixed with water to consistency suitable for application and a 30-minute working time.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Structural Steel: Fabricate and assemble in shop to greatest extent possible. Fabricate according to AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges" and AISC 360.

1. Camber structural-steel members where indicated. 2. Fabricate beams with rolling camber up. 3. Identify high-strength structural steel according to ASTM A 6/A 6M and maintain markings until

structural steel has been erected. 4. Mark and match-mark materials for field assembly. 5. Complete structural-steel assemblies, including welding of units, before starting shop-priming

operations.

B. Thermal Cutting: Perform thermal cutting by machine to greatest extent possible.

1. Plane thermally cut edges to be welded to comply with requirements in AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

C. Bolt Holes: Cut, drill, mechanically thermal cut, or punch standard bolt holes perpendicular to metal surfaces.

D. Finishing: Accurately finish ends of columns and other members transmitting bearing loads.

E. Cleaning: Clean and prepare steel surfaces that are to remain unpainted according to SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

2.6 SHOP CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Shop install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, Slip critical as required.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

2.7 SHOP PRIMING

A. Shop prime steel surfaces except the following:

1. Surfaces embedded in concrete or mortar. Extend priming of partially embedded members to a depth of 2 inches (50 mm).

2. Surfaces to be field welded.



3. Surfaces to be high-strength bolted with slip-critical connections. 4. Surfaces to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials (applied fireproofing). 5. Galvanized surfaces.

B. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces to be painted. Remove loose rust and mill scale and spatter, slag, or flux deposits. Prepare surfaces according to the following specifications and standards:

1. SSPC-SP 2, "Hand Tool Cleaning." 2. SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

C. Priming: Immediately after surface preparation, apply primer according to manufacturer's written instructions and at rate recommended by SSPC to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils (0.038 mm). Use priming methods that result in full coverage of joints, corners, edges, and exposed surfaces.

2.8 GALVANIZING

A. Hot-Dip Galvanized Finish: Apply zinc coating by the hot-dip process to structural steel according to ASTM A 123/A 123M.

1. Fill vent and drain holes that are exposed in the finished Work unless they function as weep holes, by plugging with zinc solder and filing off smooth.

2. Galvanize lintels attached to structural-steel frame and located in exterior walls.

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage an independent testing and inspecting agency to perform shop tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

1. Provide testing agency with access to places where structural-steel work is being fabricated or produced to perform tests and inspections.

B. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

C. Bolted Connections: Shop-bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

D. Welded Connections: In addition to visual inspection, shop-welded connections will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

1. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. 2. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld. Cracks

or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. 3. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. 4. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify, with steel Erector present, elevations of concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces and locations of anchor rods, bearing plates, and other embedments for compliance with requirements.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 ERECTION

A. Set structural steel accurately in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC 303 and AISC 360.

B. Base Bearing and Leveling Plates: Clean concrete- and masonry-bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen surfaces prior to setting plates. Clean bottom surface of plates.

1. Set plates for structural members on wedges, shims, or setting nuts as required. 2. Weld plate washers to top of baseplate. 3. Snug-tighten anchor rods after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not

remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of plate before packing with grout.

4. Promptly pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Neatly finish exposed surfaces; protect grout and allow to cure. Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions for shrinkage-resistant grouts.

C. Maintain erection tolerances of structural steel within AISC's "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges."

D. Splice members only where indicated.

E. Do not use thermal cutting during erection.

F. Do not enlarge unfair holes in members by burning or using drift pins. Ream holes that must be enlarged to admit bolts.

3.3 FIELD CONNECTIONS

A. High-Strength Bolts: Install high-strength bolts according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for type of bolt and type of joint specified.

1. Joint Type: Snug tightened, Pretensioned, Slip critical as required.

B. Weld Connections: Comply with AWS D1.1/D1.1M and AWS D1.8/D1.8M for tolerances, appearances, welding procedure specifications, weld quality, and methods used in correcting welding work.

1. Comply with AISC 303 and AISC 360 for bearing, alignment, adequacy of temporary connections, and removal of paint on surfaces adjacent to field welds.




A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to inspect field welds and high-strength bolted connections.

B. Bolted Connections: Bolted connections will be tested and inspected according to RCSC's "Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts."

C. Welded Connections: Field welds will be visually inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M.

1. In addition to visual inspection, field welds will be tested and inspected according to AWS D1.1/D1.1M and the following inspection procedures, at testing agency's option:

a. Liquid Penetrant Inspection: ASTM E 165. b. Magnetic Particle Inspection: ASTM E 709; performed on root pass and on finished weld.

Cracks or zones of incomplete fusion or penetration will not be accepted. c. Ultrasonic Inspection: ASTM E 164. d. Radiographic Inspection: ASTM E 94.

D. Correct deficiencies in Work that test reports and inspections indicate does not comply with the Contract Documents.

3.5 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean areas where galvanizing is damaged or missing and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780/A 780M.

B. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean exposed areas where primer is damaged or missing and paint with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

1. Clean and prepare surfaces by SSPC-SP 2 hand-tool cleaning or SSPC-SP 3 power-tool cleaning.

C. Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting are specified in Section 099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."


PARTNERS 15-175B STEEL DECKING 053100-1


SECTION 053100 - STEEL DECKING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Roof deck.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of deck, accessory, and product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout and types of deck panels, anchorage details, reinforcing channels, pans, cut deck openings, special jointing, accessories, and attachments to other construction.

C. Product certificates.

D. Welding certificates.

E. Field quality-control test and inspection reports.

F. Research/Evaluation Reports: For steel deck.


A. Welding: Qualify procedures and personnel according to AWS D1.3, "Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel."

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Where indicated, provide steel deck units identical to those tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Steel deck units shall be identified with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

C. AISI Specifications: Comply with calculated structural characteristics of steel deck according to AISI's "North American Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural Members."


A. Protect steel deck from corrosion, deformation, and other damage during delivery, storage, and handling.



B. Stack steel deck on platforms or pallets and slope to provide drainage. Protect with a waterproof covering and ventilate to avoid condensation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. ASC Profiles, Inc. 2. Canam Steel Corp.;The Canam Manac Group. 3. Consolidated Systems, Inc. 4. DACS, Inc. 5. D-Mac Industries Inc. 6. Epic Metals Corporation. 7. Marlyn Steel Decks, Inc. 8. New Millennium Building Systems, LLC. 9. Nucor Corp.; Vulcraft Division. 10. Roof Deck, Inc. 11. United Steel Deck, Inc. 12. Valley Joist; Division of EBSCO Industries, Inc. 13. Verco Manufacturing Co. 14. Wheeling Corrugating Company; Div. of Wheeling-Pittsburgh Steel Corporation.

2.2 ROOF DECK

A. Steel Roof Deck: Fabricate panels, without top-flange stiffening grooves, to comply with "SDI Specifications and Commentary for Steel Roof Deck," in SDI Publication No. 30, and with the following:

1. Galvanized Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Structural Steel (SS), Grade 33 (230), G60 (Z275) zinc coating.

2. Deck Profile: As indicated. 3. Profile Depth: As indicated. 4. Design Uncoated-Steel Thickness: As indicated.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard accessory materials for deck that comply with requirements indicated.

B. Mechanical Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, low-velocity, power-actuated or pneumatically driven carbon-steel fasteners; or self-drilling, self-threading screws.



C. Side-Lap Fasteners: Corrosion-resistant, hexagonal washer head; self-drilling, carbon-steel screws, No. 10 (4.8-mm) minimum diameter.

D. Flexible Closure Strips: Vulcanized, closed-cell, synthetic rubber.

E. Miscellaneous Sheet Metal Deck Accessories: Steel sheet, minimum yield strength of 33,000 psi (230 MPa), not less than 0.0359-inch (0.91-mm) design uncoated thickness, of same material and finish as deck; of profile indicated or required for application.

F. Galvanizing Repair Paint: ASTM A 780.

G. Repair Paint: Manufacturer's standard rust-inhibitive primer of same color as primer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine supporting frame and field conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install deck panels and accessories according to applicable specifications and commentary in SDI Publication No. 31, manufacturer's written instructions, requirements in this Section, and as indicated.

B. Place deck panels on supporting frame and adjust to final position with ends accurately aligned and bearing on supporting frame before being permanently fastened. Do not stretch or contract side-lap interlocks.

C. Place deck panels flat and square and fasten to supporting frame without warp or deflection.

D. Cut and neatly fit deck panels and accessories around openings and other work projecting through or adjacent to deck.

E. Provide additional reinforcement and closure pieces at openings as required for strength, continuity of deck, and support of other work.

F. Comply with AWS requirements and procedures for manual shielded metal arc welding, appearance and quality of welds, and methods used for correcting welding work.

G. Mechanical fasteners may be used in lieu of welding to fasten deck. Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to deck manufacturer's written instructions.

H. End Bearing: Install deck ends over supporting frame with a minimum end bearing of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm).



I. Roof Sump Pans and Sump Plates: Install over openings provided in roof deck and weld or mechanically fasten flanges to top of deck. Space welds or mechanical fasteners not more than 12 inches (305 mm) apart with at least one weld or fastener at each corner.

1. Install reinforcing channels or zees in ribs to span between supports and weld or mechanically fasten.

J. Miscellaneous Roof-Deck Accessories: Install ridge and valley plates, finish strips, end closures, and reinforcing channels according to deck manufacturer's written instructions. Weld or mechanically fasten to substrate to provide a complete deck installation.

1. Weld cover plates at changes in direction of roof-deck panels, unless otherwise indicated.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Field welds will be subject to inspection.

C. Testing agency will report inspection results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.

D. Remove and replace work that does not comply with specified requirements.

E. Additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance of corrected work with specified requirements.

3.4 REPAIRS

A. Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on both surfaces of deck with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Repair Painting: Wire brush and clean rust spots, welds, and abraded areas on both surfaces of prime-painted deck immediately after installation, and apply repair paint.


PARTNERS 15-175B METAL FABRICATIONS 055000-1


SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Miscellaneous steel framing and supports. 2. Loose bearing and leveling plates

B. Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section:

1. Loose steel lintels. 2. Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be

cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.


A. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on exterior metal fabrications by preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of connections, and other detrimental effects.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For the following: 1. Paint products. 2. Grout.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for metal fabrications.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and details of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METALS, GENERAL

A. Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes.



2.2 FERROUS METALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Rolled-Steel Floor Plate: ASTM A 786/A 786M, rolled from plate complying with ASTM A 36/A 36M or ASTM A 283/A 283M, Grade C or D.

C. Steel Tubing: ASTM A 500, cold-formed steel tubing.

D. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, standard weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.

E. Slotted Channel Framing: Cold-formed metal box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4.

1. Size of Channels: As indicated. 2. Material: Cold-rolled steel, ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, structural steel, Grade 33 (Grade 230);

0.0528-inch; (1.35-mm) minimum thickness; coated with rust-inhibitive, baked-on, acrylic enamel.

2.3 FASTENERS

A. General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide Type 304 stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-plated fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.

B. Cast-in-Place Anchors in Concrete: Either threaded type or wedge type unless otherwise indicated; galvanized ferrous castings, either ASTM A 47/A 47M malleable iron or ASTM A 27/A 27M cast steel. Provide bolts, washers, and shims as needed, all hot-dip galvanized per ASTM F 2329.

C. Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.

1. Material for Interior Locations: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941 (ASTM F 1941M), Class Fe/Zn 5, unless otherwise indicated.

2. Material for Exterior Locations and Where Stainless Steel is Indicated: Alloy Group 1 (A1) stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593 (ASTM F 738M), and nuts, ASTM F 594 (ASTM F 836M).

D. Slotted-Channel Inserts: Cold-formed, hot-dip galvanized-steel box channels (struts) complying with MFMA-4, 1-5/8 by 7/8 inches (41 by 22 mm) by length indicated with anchor straps or studs not less than 3 inches (75 mm) long at not more than 8 inches (200 mm) o.c. Provide with temporary filler and tee-head bolts, complete with washers and nuts, all zinc-plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5, as needed for fastening to inserts.

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply with Division 09 painting Sections.

B. Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complying with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat.

C. Epoxy Zinc-Rich Primer: Complying with MPI#20 and compatible with topcoat.



D. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatible with paints specified to be used over it.

E. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

F. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior and exterior applications.

G. Concrete: Comply with requirements in Division 03 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for normal-weight, air-entrained, concrete with a minimum 28-day compressive strength of 3000 psi (20 MPa).

2.5 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Use connections that maintain structural value of joined pieces.

B. Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.

C. Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or welds where possible. Locate joints where least conspicuous.

E. Fabricate seams and other connections that will be exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water. Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.

F. Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steel strap anchors not less than 24 inches (600 mm) o.c.

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete the Work.

B. Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated. Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.



2.7 MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM

A. Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown with continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field splices where possible.

B. Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with other work.

C. Galvanize all miscellaneous steel trim used within or on exterior walls.

D. Prime miscellaneous steel trim with zinc-rich primer used on the interior of the building.

2.8 LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction. Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.

2.9 LOOSE STEEL LINTELS

A. Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses in masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated.

B. Galvanize all loose steel lintels located within exterior walls.

2.10 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Finish metal fabrications after assembly.

2.11 STEEL AND IRON FINISHES

A. Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items located in exterior walls and as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and iron hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

B. Shop prime iron and steel items not indicated to be galvanized unless they are to be embedded in concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

1. Shop prime with primers specified in Division 09 painting Sections unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.

C. Preparation for Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."



1. Items Indicated to Receive Zinc-Rich Primer: SSPC-SP 6/NACE No. 3, "Commercial Blast Cleaning."

2. Other Items: SSPC-SP 3, "Power Tool Cleaning."

D. Shop Priming: Apply shop primer to comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. 1: Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting of Steel," for shop painting.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metal fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges and surfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.

B. Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to be left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, or abrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted or screwed field connections.

C. Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:

1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals.

2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended.

D. Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabrications are required to be fastened to in-place construction.

E. Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, or similar construction.

3.2 INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES

A. Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bond to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.

B. Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have been positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bearing plate before packing with grout.

C. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.




A. Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas. Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply with SSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

B. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizing to comply with ASTM A 780.


PARTNERS 15-175B MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY 061053-1


SECTION 061053 – MISCELLANEOUS CARPENTRY

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Framing with dimension lumber. 2. Wood blocking, cants, and nailers. 3. Wood furring and grounds.


A. Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product.


A. Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:

1. Preservative-treated wood. 2. Fire-retardant-treated wood. 3. Power-driven fasteners.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency is indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Review to inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. 2. Dress lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 19 percent unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction not in contact with ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with ground, and Use Category UC4a for items in contact with ground.

1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.



B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.

C. Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:

1. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.

2. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete.

3. Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or concrete walls.

4. Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches (460 mm) above the ground in crawlspaces or unexcavated areas.

5. Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.

2.3 FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS

A. Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame-spread index of 25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressive combustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extending more than 10.5 feet (3.2 m) beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

1. Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to accelerated weathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.

2. Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is not indicated.

B. Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.

C. Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of qualified testing agency.

D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following: 1. Concealed blocking. 2. Roof framing and blocking. 3. Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection

with roofing. 4. Plywood backing panels.

2.4 DIMENSION LUMBER FRAMING

A. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction, Stud, or No. 3 grade of any species.



2.5 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER

A. General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of other construction, including the following:

1. Blocking. 2. Nailers. 3. Cants. 4. Furring. 5. Grounds.

B. Dimension Lumber Items: Construction or No. 2 grade lumber of any species.

C. Concealed Boards: 19 percent maximum moisture content of any of the following species and grades:

1. Mixed southern pine or southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB. 2. Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.

2.6 FASTENERS

A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this article for material and manufacture.

1. Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area of high relative humidity, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153M.

B. Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002 length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened.

C. Power-Driven Fasteners: Fastener systems with an evaluation report acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, based on ICC-ES AC70.


A. Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubber or rubberized-asphalt compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to produce an overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch (0.6 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction," unless otherwise indicated.



B. Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry accurately to other construction. Locate nailers, blocking, grounds, and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.

C. Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backing panels. Install fire-retardant-treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agency exposed to view.

D. Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.

E. Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.

F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following:

1. Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.

3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection, inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.


PARTNERS 15-175B COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING 071416-1


SECTION 071416 - COLD FLUID-APPLIED WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Polyurethane waterproofing.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.


A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Show locations and extent of waterproofing. 2. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside

corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.


A. Sample warranty.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by waterproofing manufacturer.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace waterproofing that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-COMPONENT POLYURETHANE WATERPROOFING

A. Single-Component, Modified Polyurethane Waterproofing: ASTM C 836/C 836M and coal-tar free.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW-525. b. BASF; MasterSeal HLM 5000. c. Meadows, W.R., Inc.; Hydralastic 836. d. Tremco Incorporated; TREMproof 201/60. e. Henry Company; Henry 787.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. Primer: Manufacturer's standard primer, sealer, or surface conditioner; factory-formulated acrylic latex, polyurethane, or epoxy.

B. Sheet Flashing: 50-mil- (1.3-mm-) minimum, nonstaining, uncured sheet neoprene.

1. Adhesive: Manufacturer's recommended contact adhesive.

C. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Manufacturer's recommended fiberglass mesh or polyester fabric.

D. Joint Sealant: Multicomponent polyurethane sealant, compatible with waterproofing; and as recommended by manufacturer for substrate and joint conditions.

1. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene foam.

2.3 PROTECTION COURSE

A. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced-asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows: 1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal, for vertical applications; 1/4 inch (6 mm), nominal, elsewhere. 2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer.

2.4 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANELS

A. Nonwoven-Geotextile-Faced, Molded-Sheet Drainage Panel: Composite subsurface drainage panel consisting of a studded, nonbiodegradable, molded-plastic-sheet drainage core; with a nonwoven, needle-punched geotextile facing with an apparent opening size not exceeding No. 70 (0.21-mm) sieve laminated to one side of the core and a polymeric film bonded to the other side; and with a vertical flow rate of 9 to 18 gpm per ft. (112 to 220 L/min. per m).



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, acid residues, and other penetrating contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.

D. Remove fins, ridges, and other projections, and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

E. Prepare surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at expansion joints, drains, sleeves, and corners according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

F. Apply waterproofing in two separate applications, and embed a joint reinforcing strip in the first preparation coat when recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

G. Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471. Before coating surfaces, remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

H. Install sheet flashing and bond to deck and wall substrates where required according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions.

3.2 WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Apply waterproofing according to manufacturer's written instructions and to recommendations in ASTM C 1471.

B. Unreinforced Waterproofing Applications:

1. Apply one or more coats of waterproofing to obtain a seamless membrane free of entrapped gases and pinholes, with a dry film thickness of 90 mils (2.25 mm).

C. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing before starting subsequent construction operations. 1. For vertical applications, set protection course in nominally cured membrane, which will act as an

adhesive. If membrane cures before application of protection course, use adhesive.

3.3 MOLDED-SHEET DRAINAGE PANEL INSTALLATION

A. Place and secure molded-sheet drainage panels, with geotextile facing away from wall or deck substrate, according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use adhesive or another method that does not penetrate



waterproofing. Lap edges and ends of geotextile to maintain continuity. Protect installed molded-sheet drainage panels during subsequent construction.

1. For vertical applications, install protection course before installing drainage panels.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Do not permit foot or vehicular traffic on unprotected membrane.

B. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

C. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended in writing by manufacturer of affected construction.


PARTNERS 15-175B THERMAL INSULATION 072100-1


SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Extruded polystyrene foam-plastic board.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 075419 "Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Roofing" for roofing insulation materials.




A. Product test reports.

B. Research reports.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 EXTRUDED POLYSTYRENE FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD

A. Extruded polystyrene boards in this article are also called "XPS boards."

B. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type X (for use in exterior walls): ASTM C 578, Type X, 15-psi (104-kPa) minimum compressive strength; unfaced; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Chemical Company (The); “STYROFOAM Brand CAVITYMATE SC” Insulation or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Owens Corning.

2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Minimum R Value: 10. 4. Provide with manufacturer’s standard shiplap edge.

5. Fire Propagation Characteristics: Passes NFPA 285 testing as part of an approved assembly.



C. Extruded Polystyrene Board, Type VI (use underslab and interior footing perimeter): ASTM C 578, Type VI, 40-psi (276-kPa) minimum compressive strength; maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Dow Chemical Company (The) ; STYROFOAM Brand HIGHLOAD 40 Insulation. or a comparable product by one of the following:

a. DiversiFoam Products. b. Kingspan Insulation. c. Owens Corning. d. Soprema, Inc.

2. Thickness: 2 inches. 3. Minimum R Value: 10.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Insulation for Miscellaneous Voids: 1. Spray Polyurethane Foam Insulation: ASTM C 1029, Type II, closed cell, with maximum flame-

spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

B. Insulation Anchors, Spindles, and Standoffs: As recommended by manufacturer.

C. Adhesive for Bonding Insulation: Product compatible with insulation and air and water barrier materials, and with demonstrated capability to bond insulation securely to substrates without damaging insulation and substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness or to achieve R-value.



3.2 INSTALLATION OF SLAB INSULATION

A. On vertical slab edge and foundation surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line.

B. On horizontal surfaces, loosely lay insulation units according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger end joints and tightly abut insulation units.

1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) in from exterior walls.

3.3 NSTALLATION OF CAVITY-WALL INSULATION

A. Foam-Plastic Board Insulation: Install pads of adhesive spaced approximately 24 inches (610 mm) o.c. both ways on inside face and as recommended by manufacturer. Fit courses of insulation between wall ties and other obstructions, with edges butted tightly in both directions. Press units firmly against inside substrates.

1. Supplement adhesive attachment of insulation by securing boards with two-piece wall ties designed for this purpose and specified in Section 042000 "Unit Masonry."

B. Miscellaneous Voids: Install insulation in miscellaneous voids and cavity spaces where required to prevent gaps in insulation using the following materials: 1. Spray Polyurethane Insulation: Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions.


PARTNERS 15-175B FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726-1


SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Vapor-retarding, fluid-applied air barriers.


A. Air-Barrier Performance: Air-barrier assembly and seals with adjacent construction shall be capable of performing as a continuous air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

B. Air-Barrier Assembly Air Leakage: Maximum 0.04 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.6 lbf/sq. ft., when tested according to ASTM E 2178.

C. Air/vapor barrier membrane components and accessories must be obtained as a single-source from the membrane manufacturer to ensure total system compatibility and integrity.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For air-barrier assemblies.

1. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strips, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie-ins with adjoining construction.

C. Product certificates.

D. Qualification data.

E. Product test reports.


A. Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved by manufacturer.



B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assemblies and incorporate air barrier membrane.

1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of air barrier

before external insulation and cladding is installed.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project Site.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Provide manufacturer’s standard 10-year material warranty.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HIGH-BUILD AIR BARRIERS, VAPOR RETARDING

A. High-Build, Vapor-Retarding Air Barrier: synthetic polymer membrane with an installed dry film thickness, according to manufacturer's written instructions, of 47 mils or thicker over smooth, void-free substrates.

1. Synthetic Polymer Type:

a. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Henry Company; Air-Bloc 06WB or a comparable product by one of the following:

1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc. 2) Grace Construction Products; W.R. Grace & Co. -- Conn. 3) Rubber Polymer Corporation, Inc. 4) W. R. Meadows, Inc.

2. Physical and Performance Properties: 1) Air permeability: 0.001 CFM/ft2 @ 1.6 lbs/ft2. to ASTM E2178 and ASTM E283 and

have no increased air leakage when subjected to a sustained wind load of 10.5 lbs/ft2 for 1 hour and gust wind load pressure of 62.8 lbs/ft2 for 10 seconds when tested at 1.6 lbs/ft2 to ASTM E331,

2) Water vapor permeance: 0.02 perms to ASTM E96, 3) Wet Film Thickness: 90 mils, 4) Elongation: 2000% to ASTM D 412

B. Requirement: Provide primers, transition strips, termination strips, joint reinforcing fabric and strips, joint sealants, counterflashing strips, flashing sheets and metal termination bars, termination mastic, substrate patching materials, adhesives, tapes, foam sealants, lap sealants, and other accessory materials that are recommended in writing by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrier assembly and that are compatible with primary air-barrier material and adjacent construction to which they may seal.



2.2 ACCESSORYMATERIALS

A. General: Accessory materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Self-Adhered transition membrane shall an SBS modified bitumen, self-adhering sheet membrane complete with thermoplastic film.

C. Alternate self-adhering membrane for all window and window sill flashings, door openings, inside and outside corners and other transitions shall be a SBS modified bitumen, self-adhering sheet membrane complete with surface layer of metallic aluminum film that many sealants adhere well to.

D. Liquid-applied flashing alternate to self-adhered flashing membranes for all window, door, MEP penetrations, inside/outside and dissimilar material connections shall be a moisture-curing single component STPe liquid-applied flashing compatible with a variety of substrates liquid and self-adhered air barrier membranes.

E. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

F. Primer: Adhesive for self-adhering membranes at all temperatures shall be a synthetic rubber based adhesive, quick setting.

G. Joint Treatment, penetration and termination Sealant shall be sealant recommended by air membrane barrier manufacturer for intended use; a moisture cure, medium modulus polymer modified sealing compound.

H. Insulation adhesive shall be recommended by air membrane barrier manufacturer for intended use; a synthetic, trowel applied, rubber based adhesive.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, fill, and seal substrate and joints and cracks in substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions and details. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids in concrete with substrate-patching material.

D. Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.

E. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.



F. Bridge isolation joints expansion joints and discontinuous wall-to-wall, deck-to-wall, and deck-to-deck joints with air-barrier accessory material that accommodates joint movement according to manufacturer's written instructions and details.

G. Where curing compounds are used they must be clear resin based without oil, wax or pigments.

H. Do not proceed with application of air barrier membrane when rain is expected within 24 hours.

I. Condition materials to room temperature prior to application to facilitate handling.

J. New concrete should be cured for a minimum of 14 days and must be dry before air barrier membranes are applied.

K. Mechanical fasteners used to secure sheathing boards or penetrate sheathing boards shall be set flush with sheathing and fastened into solid backing.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install materials according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions and details to form a seal with adjacent construction and ensure continuity of air and water barrier.

1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.

2. Install transition strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate.

3. Unless manufacturer recommends in writing against priming, apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.

4. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

B. JOINT TREATMENT 1. Seal joints ¼ inch and less between panels of exterior grade gypsum, gypsum sheathing, plywood,

OSB or cementitious panels with joint treatment sealant over the face of the panel joint. a. Apply sealant along the butt joint and trowel smooth to form a continuous layer over the joint

extending 1/2 inches on both sides to a uniform thickness of 1/8 inch thick. 2. Seal gaps and voids or irregular joints greater than ¼ inch between panels of exterior grade

gypsum, gypsum sheathing, plywood, OSB or cementitious panels with a strip of self-adhered air/vapor barrier transition membrane lapped a minimum of 1-1/2 inches on both sides of the joint. a. Prime surfaces as per manufacturers’ instructions and allow to dry. b. Align and position self-adhering air/vapor barrier transition membrane, remove protective

film and press firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2 inches overlap at all end and side laps of membrane.

c. Roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to ensure seal. 3. Alternately, joints not exceeding 1/8 inch can be sealed with yellow open weave glass fabric.

a. Apply yellow open weave glass fabric centered over joint followed by a 1/8 inch (120mils) thick trowel application of air/vapor barrier membrane.

b. Allow to dry prior to application of primary air/vapor barrier membrane.

C. INSIDE AND OUTSIDE CORNERS



1. Seal inside and outside corners of sheathing boards with a strip of self-adhering air/vapor barrier transition membrane extending a minimum of 3 inches on either side of the corner detail. a. Prime surfaces as per manufacturers’ instructions and allow to dry. b. Align and position self-adhering transition membrane, remove protective film and press

firmly into place. Ensure minimum 2 inches overlap at all end and side laps of membrane. c. Roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to ensure seal.

D. LIQUID-APPLIED FLASHING OPTION 1. Use for door and window openings, MEP penetrations and dissimilar material connections.

a. Apply liquid flashing to all material joints and tool smooth. b. Apply liquid flashing in a serpentine fashion to the entire window opening and tool smooth to

a minimum 25 mils wet film thickness. Spread material to cover the inside of rough openings and extend 4 inches onto adjacent surfaces. Create a slight positive slope towards the exterior of sill conditions by applying more material to the interior side of sills to create a taper towards the exterior while maintaining a minimum 25 mils wet film thickness.

c. Apply liquid flashing to MEP penetrations with a maximum of ½ inch annular space. Extend liquid flashing a minimum 4 inches onto penetrating item and surrounding surfaces to a minimum of 25 mils dry film thickness.

d. Apply liquid flashing to inside/outside corners and dissimilar material connections. Extend a minimum 4 inches onto adjacent surfaces a minimum of 4 inches and a minimum wet film thickness of 25 mils dry film thickness.

e. Apply fluid-applied membrane air barrier onto liquid flashing a minimum of 2 inches.

E. TRANSITON AREAS 1. Tie-in to structural beams, columns, floor slabs and intermittent floors, parapet curbs, foundation

walls, roofing systems and at the interface of dissimilar materials as indicated in drawings with self-adhered air/vapor barrier transition membrane. a. Prime surfaces as per manufacturers’ instructions and allow to dry. b. Align and position self-adhering air/vapor barrier transition membrane, remove protective

film and press firmly into place. Provide minimum 3 inch lap to all substrates. c. Ensure minimum 2 inch overlap at all end and side laps of membrane. d. Roll all laps and membrane with a counter top roller to ensure seal.

F. WINDOWS AND ROUGH OPENINGS 1. Window flashing materials are to be installed per the project construction documents or per

industry standards including but not limited to ASTM E2112. Sheet or liquid applied window flashing membrane shall extend a minimum of 3” onto face of wall. Sheet or liquid applied flashing membrane shall extend into the rough opening per the project construction documents and to sufficiently provide continuity between the fenestration and field of wall.

G. PRIMARY AIR/VAPOR BARRIER 1. Apply by spray or flat trowel a complete and continuous unbroken film of liquid air/vapor and rain

barrier membrane to an approximate wet film thickness of 80 mils (47 mils dry). a. For temperatures below 40 degrees F apply one component glycol-based air/vapor barrier

membrane at a rate recommended by manufacturer. 2. Spray-apply or trowel around all projections and penetrations ensuring a complete and continuous

air barrier membrane. 3. Allow air barrier membrane to dry as per manufacturers recommendations prior to placement of

insulating materials.



H. Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.

I. Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply transition strip so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames, with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

J. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

K. High-Build Air Barriers: Apply continuous unbroken air-barrier material to substrates according to the following thickness. Apply air-barrier material in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

1. Vapor-Retarding, High-Build Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by manufacturer to comply with performance requirements, but not less than 47 mils, applied in one or more equal coats.

L. Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by testing agency.

M. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air-barrier components.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF INSULATION

A. A. Coordinate with Cavity Wall Insulation Section 072100 for insulating materials.

B. Apply insulation adhesive in a serpentine pattern over the air barrier membrane. 1. Dab Method: Apply walnut-sized dabs of insulation adhesive spaced 6 inches on center to

substrate. Apply insulation using sufficient hand pressure to compress dabs up to 2 inches in diameter.

2. Bead Method: Apply ¼ inch beads 6 inches on center in a serpentine pattern.

C. Immediately embed insulation into the adhesive and press firmly into place to ensure full contact. Apply additional adhesive if allowed to skin over.


A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Inspections: Air barrier materials and installation are subject to inspection for compliance with requirements.

C. Tests: As determined by testing agency from among the following tests:



1. Air-barrier dry film thickness. 2. Air-Leakage-Location Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for evidence of air leakage

according to ASTM E 1186, chamber pressurization or depressurization with smoke tracers. 3. Air-Leakage-Volume Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for air-leakage rate according to

ASTM E 783. 4. Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for required adhesion to substrate

according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.

D. Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.

1. Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.

2. Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.

E. Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Remove masking materials after installation.

C. Damp substrates must not be inhibited from drying out. Do not expose the backside of the substrate to moisture or rain.

D. Cap and protect exposed back-up walls against wet weather conditions during and after application of membrane. Drying time varies depending on temperature and relative humidity. Protect air barrier Work against wet weather conditions for a minimum of 24 hours.

E. Air barrier membranes are not designed for permanent exposure. Good practice calls for covering as soon as possible.


PARTNERS 15-175B POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

075419 - 1


SECTION 075419 - POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Adhered polyvinyl-chloride (PVC) roofing system. 2. Roof insulation.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.


A. Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.



B. Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products:

1. Sheet roofing, of color required. 2. Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.


A. Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.

B. Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.

PARTNERS 15-175B POLYVINYL-CHLORIDE (PVC) ROOFING 075419 - 2



A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing system manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's special warranty.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period, with no dollar limit.

1. Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation, fasteners for roofing system from same manufacturer as membrane roofing or manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.


A. Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.

B. Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D 3746 or ASTM D 4272.

C. Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the following uplift pressures:

1. Corner Uplift Pressure: 120 lbf/sq. ft. 2. Perimeter Uplift Pressure: 90 lbf/sq. ft. 3. Field-of-Roof Uplift Pressure: 50 lbf/sq. ft.

D. Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testing identical products by a qualified testing agency.

E. Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.70 and an emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.

F. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

G. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


075419 - 3


2.3 PVC ROOFING

A. PVC Sheet: ASTM D 4434/D 4434M, Type III, fabric reinforced. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Johns Manville; JM

PVC 60 MIL / 60 MIL MIN or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. b. Duro-Last Roofing, Inc. c. Flex Membranes International. d. GAF Materials Corporation. e. GenFlex Roofing Systems. f. Johns Manville. g. Mule-Hide Products Co., Inc. h. Sarnafil Inc.

2. Thickness: 60 mils (1.5 mm), nominal. 3. Exposed Face Color: White.

2.4 AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use and compatible with roofing.

1. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the

following limits for VOC content:

a. Plastic Foam Adhesives: 50 g/L. b. Gypsum Board and Panel Adhesives: 50 g/L. c. Multipurpose Construction Adhesives: 70 g/L. d. Fiberglass Adhesives: 80 g/L. e. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Adhesives: 250 g/L. f. PVC Welding Compounds: 510 g/L. g. Adhesive Primer for Plastic: 650 g/L h. Single-Ply Roof Membrane Sealants: 450 g/L. i. Nonmembrane Roof Sealants: 300 g/L. j. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. k. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. l. Other Adhesives and Sealants: 250 g/L.

3. Adhesives and sealants that are not on the exterior side of weather barrier shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of Public Health's (formerly, the California Department of Health Services') "Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers."

B. Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard sheet flashing of same material, type, reinforcement, thickness, and color as PVC sheet.



C. Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard low VOC membrane adhesive for adhering roof membrane to insulation, cover boards, vertical substrate board.

D. Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard of thickness required for application. Polyester mat 90 oz./yd.² adhered or mechanically fastened.

E. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

F. Rainscreen Drainage Mat: 1/8” min. 1/4” max nominal thick polymer core fused filaments bonded to moisture resistant filter fabric with 90% open cavity. 1. Comply with: ASTM C 165-00 compressive properties.

ASTM D 4533 Tear shear of geotextiles. ASTM E 84 surface burning characteristics Class B. Fed Stnd. 191A method 5874 cold cracking resistance.

2. Provide fastening materials and bonding adhesives per manufacturer’s recommendation. 3. Provide manufacturer’s recommended isolation materials for asphaltic surfaces. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering

products that may be incorporated into the work include, but not limited to the following: a. Home Slicker 10 by Benjamin Obdyke. b. Water Way ™ by Stuco-Flex International, Inc. c. Water Alley 18 by Demand Products, Inc.

G. Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide metal termination bars, metal battens, pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings, preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, and other accessories.

2.5 VERTICAL SUBSTRATE BOARDS

A. Substrate Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/4 inch (6 mm) thick.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing. b. Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck DuraGuard. c. National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing. d. USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.

B. Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facer on both major surfaces.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Atlas Roofing Corporation.


075419 - 5


b. Carlisle SynTec Incorporated. c. Dyplast Products. d. Firestone Building Products. e. GAF Materials Corporation. f. Hunter Panels. g. Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company. h. Johns Manville. i. Rmax, Inc.

C. Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inches (1:48) unless otherwise indicated.

D. Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated for sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.

2.6 INSULATION ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistance provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roof insulation to cover boards to wood blocking and vertical flashings to substrate, wood blocking, and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

B. Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to single component urethane adhesive to another insulation layer.

C. Cover Board: Perlite Board Insulation: ASTM C 728, rigid, mineral-aggregate thermal insulation board composed of expanded perlite, cellulosic fibers, binders, and waterproofing agents with top surface seal coated, ½”.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. GAF Materials Corporation. b. Johns Manville.

D. Insulation Substrate Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer’s recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulation to substrate with asphalt vapor barrier. Two part urethane adhesive JM (RSUA) or similar recommended by insulation manufacturer.

E. Protection Mat: Woven or nonwoven polypropylene, polyolefin, or polyester fabric, water permeable and resistant to UV degradation, type and weight as recommended by roofing system manufacturer for application.

2.7 ASPHALT MATERIALS

A. Roofing Asphalt: ASTM D 312, Type III or Type IV.

B. Asphalt Primer: ASTM D 41/D 41M.



2.8 WALKWAYS

A. Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads, approximately 1/2 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from entering completed sections of roofing system at end of workday or when rain is forecast. Remove and discard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.

3.2 INSULATION INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or left exposed at the end of the workday.

B. Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.

C. Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness is 2.7 inches (68 mm) or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from joints of previous layer a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction.

1. Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and install composite board insulation for top layer.

D. Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:

1. Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft. (0.3 L/sq. m), and allow primer to dry.

2. Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus 25 deg F (14 deg C) of equiviscous temperature.

3. Set each layer of insulation in insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and maintaining insulation in place.

E. Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggered between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) in each direction. Loosely butt cover boards together and adhere to insulation.

1. Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.


075419 - 7


3.3 ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION

A. Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.

1. Install sheet according to ASTM D 5036.

B. Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required by manufacturer. Stagger end laps.

C. Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allow to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.

D. In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeter of roofing.

E. Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheet flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

1. Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of sheet.

2. Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas. 3. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.

F. Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clamping ring.

3.4 BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Install isolation membrane per manufacturer’s requirements.

C. Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partially dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.

D. Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.

E. Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and end laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.

F. Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings and mechanically anchor to substrate through termination bars.

3.5 VENTILATING EXTENDED BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. Install isolation membrane per manufacturer’s requirements to from a breathable separation from residual asphalt materials as required by the rain screen materials manufacturer.



B. Install venting rain screen with filament side to masonry construction. Secure with mechanical fasteners or bonding adhesives to hold rain screen material in place until fully secured with sheathing fasteners. Provide venting filaments or compatible mortar net material to form closure top and bottom of installation.

C. Cut and fit vertical substrate board over rain screen material with pressure treated 1 by 4 nailers as indicted on drawings. Mechanically fasten substrate board to the existing masonry wall with manufacture recommended fasteners and plate. Seam substrate board joints. Prime substrate board for PVC base flashing fully adhered installation per manufacturers requirements.

D. Provide additional horizontal 1by 4 flashing nailer strips and fastening for installation of extended base flashing over 36” per base flashing manufacturer requirements. Lap upper flashing section over lower section and seal per flashing manufacturer’s requirements.

3.6 WALKWAY INSTALLATION

A. Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhere walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.

3.7 PROTECTING AND CLEANING

A. Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remaining construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describing its nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.

B. Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repair substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.

C. Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.


PARTNERS 15-175B SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200-1


SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Manufactured reglets and counterflashing. 2. Formed roof-drainage sheet metal fabrications. 3. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details. 2. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. 3. Include identification of finish for each item. 4. Include pattern of seams and details of termination points, expansion joints and expansion-joint

covers, direction of expansion, roof-penetration flashing, and connections to adjoining work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

C. Fabricator Qualifications: Employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

1. Build mockup of typical roof edge, including fascia, fascia trim, metal panel and other detailed accessories, approximately 10 feet (3.0 m) long.




A. Maintenance data.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing and trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unless more stringent requirements are indicated.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

2.2 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, dead soft, fully annealed; 2B (bright, cold rolled) finish.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M. 1. Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:

a. Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.



2.3 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

B. Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils (0.76 mm) thick, consisting of a slip-resistant polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneath metal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer. 1. Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F (116 deg C) or higher. 2. Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F (29 deg C) or

lower.

C. Slip Sheet: Rosin-sized building paper, 3 lb/100 sq. ft. (0.16 kg/sq. m) minimum.


A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.

B. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item.

1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.

a. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened.

b. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

2. Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel. 3. Fasteners for Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to

ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329 or Series 300 stainless steel.

C. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch (13 mm) wide and 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick.

D. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polyurethane polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

E. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.



2.5 MANUFACTURED REGLETS

A. Reglets: Units of type, material, and profile indicated, formed to provide secure interlocking of separate reglet and counterflashing pieces, and compatible with flashing indicated with factory-mitered and -welded corners and junctions and with interlocking counterflashing on exterior face, of same metal as reglet.

1. Material: Stainless steel, 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.

2.6 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown and recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop to greatest extent possible.

1. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 2. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true

to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 3. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed

on faces exposed to view.

B. Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

C. Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for proper installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.

D. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

E. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by cited sheet metal standard for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

F. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

2.7 LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Copings: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections. Fabricate joint plates of same thickness as copings. Furnish with continuous cleats to support edge of external leg and interior leg. Miter corners, fasten and seal watertight. Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

1. Fabricate from the Following Materials: a. Galvanized Steel: 0.034 inch thick (22 gauge).



B. Base Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick (24 gauge).

C. Counterflashing and Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.019 inch (0.48 mm) thick.

D. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch (0.71 mm) thick (24 gauge).

E. Roof-Drain Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

2.8 WALL SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Through-Wall Flashing: Fabricate continuous flashings in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long, but not exceeding 12-foot- (3.6-m-) long, sections, under copings, at shelf angles, and where indicated. Fabricate discontinuous lintel, sill, and similar flashings to extend 6 inches (150 mm) beyond each side of wall openings. Form with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams where flashing is discontinuous. Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Stainless Steel: 0.016 inch (0.40 mm) thick.

B. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Fabricate head, sill, jamb and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings. Form head and sill flashing with 2-inch- (50-mm-) high, end dams. Fabricate from the following materials: 1. Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch (0.56 mm) thick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches (50 mm).

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Prime substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches (90 mm). Roll laps and edges with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.




A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement so that completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.

2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.

3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches (300 mm) apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners.

4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks.

5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA.

1. Coat back side of stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.

2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at maximum of 10 feet (3 m) with no joints within 24 inches (600 mm) of corner or intersection.

1. Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm) deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

2. Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) for nails and not less than 3/4 inch (19 mm) for wood screws.

E. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimize possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.

F. Seal joints as required for watertight construction. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."

3.3 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.



B. Copings: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in cited sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. 1. Anchor interior leg of coping with washers and screw fasteners through slotted holes at 24-inch

(600-mm) centers.

C. Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flared for elastomeric sealant, extending a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Install stainless-steel draw band and tighten.

D. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches (100 mm) over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) and bed with sealant.

E. Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofing and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrate roof.

3.4 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Flashing: Installation of through-wall flashing is specified in Division 4 Section "Unit Masonry Assemblies."

C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, jamb, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches (100 mm) beyond wall openings.


A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean off excess sealants.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.


PARTNERS 15-175B PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 078413-1


SECTION 078413 - PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes through-penetration firestop systems for penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items.

B. All penetrations through corridor walls, corridor ceilings, storage rooms or other fire rated walls (as determined by Architect) shall be firestopped.

C. Penetrations through horizontal assembles.


A. General: For penetrations through fire-resistance-rated constructions, including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.

B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings determined per ASTM E 814: 1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings indicated, but not

less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not more than 3.0

cfm/sq. ft (0.01524cu. m/s x sq. m) at both ambient temperatures and 400 deg F (204 deg C).

C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, traffic, moisture, and physical damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these conditions both during and after construction. 1. For piping penetrations for plumbing and wet-pipe sprinkler systems, provide moisture-resistant

through-penetration firestop systems. 2. For penetrations involving insulated piping, provide through-penetration firestop systems not

requiring removal of insulation.

D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined per ASTM E 84.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For each through-penetration firestop system, submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency, showing each type of construction condition penetrated, relationships to adjoining construction, and type of penetrating item. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's

illustration for a particular through-penetration firestop condition, submit illustration, with



modifications marked, approved by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire-resistance-rated assembly.

C. Qualification Data: For Installer.


A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire-resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing

and inspecting agency is UL, or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for firestop systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

2. Through-penetration firestop systems are identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Part 1 Performance Requirements" Article. Provide rated systems bearing classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency.

D. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are installed according to specified requirements.

E. Do not cover up through-penetration firestop system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until each installation has been examined by Owner's inspecting agency and Fire Marshal, if required by authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration firestop systems indicated for each application in the Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule or on Drawings that are produced by one of the following manufacturers: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.

2.2 FIRESTOPPING

A. Compatibility: Provide through-penetration firestop systems that are compatible with one another; with the substrates forming openings; and with the items, if any, penetrating through-penetration firestop systems, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.



B. Accessories: Provide components for each through-penetration firestop system that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. Use only components specified by through-penetration firestop system manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestop systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. General: Install through-penetration firestop systems to comply with Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and with firestop system manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/damming/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials

and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestop systems.

C. Install fill materials for firestop systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items

as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating

items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform

surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

D. Identification: Identify through-penetration firestop systems with preprinted metal or plastic labels. Attach labels permanently to surfaces adjacent to and within 6 inches (150 mm) of edge of the firestop systems so that labels will be visible to anyone seeking to remove penetrating items or firestop systems. Use mechanical fasteners for metal labels. Include the following information on labels: 1. The words "Warning - Through-Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb. Notify Building

Management of Any Damage." 2. Contractor's name, address, and phone number. 3. Through-penetration firestop system designation of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 4. Date of installation. 5. Through-penetration firestop system manufacturer's name. 6. Installer's name.


A. Inspecting Agency: Owner will engage an independent inspecting agency to inspect through-penetration firestops. Independent inspecting agency shall comply with ASTM E 2174 requirements including those related to qualifications, conducting inspections, and preparing test reports.

B. Where deficiencies are found, repair or replace through-penetration firestop systems so they comply with requirements.



C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with requirements.

3.3 THROUGH-PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to alpha-alpha-numeric designations listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. Firestop Systems for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing : 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L 1036.

C. Firestop Systems for Nonmetallic Pipe, Conduit, or Tubing : 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L 2097.

D. Firestop Systems for Electrical Cables : 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L 3081.

E. Firestop Systems for Cable Trays : 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L 4004.

F. Firestop Systems for Insulated Pipes: 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-L 5053.


PARTNERS 15-175B JOINT SEALANTS 079200-1


SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes joint sealants for the following applications, including those specified by reference to this Section:

1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Mildew-resistant joint sealants. 4. Latex joint sealants.


A. Provide elastomeric joint sealants that establish and maintain watertight and airtight continuous joint seals without staining or deteriorating joint substrates for both exterior and interior applications.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each joint-sealant product indicated.

B. Samples: For each type and color of joint sealant required, provide Samples with joint sealants in 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide joints formed between two 6-inch- (150-mm-) long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

C. Compatibility and adhesion test reports.


A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants to joint-sealant manufacturers for testing according to manufacturer's standard test method to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates.

B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing elastomeric sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates according to the method in ASTM C 1193 that is appropriate for the types of Project joints.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Installer's Warranty: Installer's standard form in which Installer agrees to repair or replace elastomeric joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products listed in other Part 2 articles.

2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide interior sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

C. 1. Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

2.3 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to the following:

a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. Pecora Corporation. c. Polymeric Systems, Inc. d. Sika Corporation. e. Tremco Incorporated.

B. Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50, Uses T and NT.




C. Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, Uses T and NT.


D. Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Uses T and NT.


2.4 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Silicone, S, NS, 100/50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 100 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, Use NT.


B. Silicone, S, NS, 50, NT: Single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.


2.5 MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS

A. Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to prevent mold and mildew growth.



B. Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.


a. Dow Corning Corporation. b. GE Construction Sealants; Momentive Performance Materials Inc. c. Soudal USA. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.6 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS

A. Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.


a. BASF Corporation-Construction Systems. b. May National Associates, Inc.; a subsidiary of Sika Corporation. c. Pecora Corporation. d. Tremco Incorporated.

2.7 JOINT-SEALANT BACKING

A. General: Provide sealant backings of material and type that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing.

B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin, and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance:

C. Elastomeric Tubing Sealant Backings: Neoprene, butyl, EPDM, or silicone tubing complying with ASTM D 1056, nonabsorbent to water and gas, and capable of remaining resilient at temperatures down to minus 26 deg F (minus 32 deg C). Provide products with low compression set and of size and shape to provide a secondary seal, to control sealant depth, and to otherwise contribute to optimum sealant performance.

D. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint where such adhesion would result in sealant failure. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.


A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.

B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint



substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates.

C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants. 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant.

a. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, blast cleaning, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air.

2. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. a. Clean nonporous surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm

substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants.

B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates, where recommended in writing by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.

B. Install sealant backings of type indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace

them with dry materials.

C. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints.

D. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.



2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum

sealant movement capability.

E. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor

sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint configuration per Figure 5A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated.

F. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.3 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE

A. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

B. Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in unit masonry. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 100/50, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

a. Custom color to be used at brick veneer.

C. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in tile flooring. b. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.

D. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:



a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Tile control and expansion joints. c. Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of unit masonry, walls and partitions. d. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors.

E. Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject to significant movement.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors.

F. Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.

1. Joint Locations:

a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints where indicated. c. Other joints as indicated on Drawings.

2. Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Owner from manufacturer's full range of colors


PARTNERS 15-175B HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

081113 - 1


SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Standard hollow metal doors and frames.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Include elevations, door edge details, frame profiles, metal thicknesses, preparations for hardware, and other details.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required.

E. Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings.


A. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure as close to neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

1. Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F above ambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Amweld Building Products, LLC. 2. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 3. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Deansteel Manufacturing Company, Inc.

PARTNERS 15-175B HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 2


6. Firedoor Corporation. 7. Fleming Door Products Ltd.; an Assa Abloy Group company. 8. Habersham Metal Products Company. 9. Kewanee Corporation (The). 10. Mesker Door Inc. 11. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 12. Security Metal Products Corp. 13. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 14. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, CS, Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, CS, Type B.

C. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized.

1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153, Class B.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.

E. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches, as measured according to ASTM C 143.

F. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I.

G. Glazing: Division 08 Section "Glazing."

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat.

2.3 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1. Design: Flush panel. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard kraft-paper honeycomb, polystyrene, polyurethane,

polyisocyanurate, mineral-board, or vertical steel-stiffener core.

a. Fire Door Core at rated openings: As required to provide fire-protection and temperature-rise ratings indicated.

3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Manufacturer's standard. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Closed with flush or inverted 0.042-inch-thick, end closures or channels of

same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."


081113 - 3


B. Interior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

C. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet; galvanized. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level:

1. Level 2 and Physical Performance Level B (Heavy Duty), Model 1 (Full Flush).

D. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.4 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. Heavy-Duty Frames: SDI A250.8, Level 2.

1. Physical Performance: Level B according to SDI A250.4.

2. Interior Frames:

a. Materials: Uncoated, steel sheet, minimum thickness of 0.053 inch. b. Sidelite Frames: Fabricated from same thickness material as adjacent door frame. c. Construction: Full profile welded.

3. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet; galvanized.

a. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. b. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. c. Frames for Level 2 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet.

4. Exposed Finish: Prime.

B. Hardware Reinforcement: ANSI/SDI A250.6.

2.5 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors:

1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch (1.0 mm) thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches (51 mm) wide by 10 inches (254 mm) long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch (4.5 mm) thick.

2. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, minimum thickness of 0.042 inch (1.0 mm), and as follows:

1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners.



2.6 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, same material as door face sheet.

2.7 ACCESSORIES

A. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch-wide steel.

B. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.8 FABRICATION

A. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors. 2. Astragals: Provide overlapping astragal on one leaf of pairs of doors where required by NFPA 80

for fire-performance rating or where indicated.

C. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible.

2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated.

3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per

anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows:

a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows:

1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches or

fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

b. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c.

6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers.

a. Single-Door Frames: Three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Two door silencers.


081113 - 5


D. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door

hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series

specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 26

electrical Sections.

E. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints.

1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work.

2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently.

3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames.

4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of

installation indicated.

2.9 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

1. Shop Primer: ANSI/SDI A250.10.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hollow Metal Frames: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11.

1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged.

a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80. b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field

splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly

set and secured.



f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents.

2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors.

a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

3. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout.

4. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

5. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members.

6. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances:

a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head.

b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.

c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall.

d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

B. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary.

1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors:

a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 1/2 inch.

2. Fire-Rated Doors: Install doors with clearances according to NFPA 80.

C. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Division 08 Section "Glazing" and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.


081113 - 7



A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.


PARTNERS 15-175B STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS 081433-1


SECTION 081433 - STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior fire-rated, stile and rail wood doors. 2. Finishing stile and rail wood doors.



B. Shop Drawings: For stile and rail wood doors. Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; and other pertinent data.

C. Samples: Represent typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. Finish Sample with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Use only materials that comply with referenced standards and other requirements specified.

2.2 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Pre-finished, “Stile and Rail Wood Doors” by Eggers Industries. or equal product by one of the following:

1. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc. 2. Ampco, Inc. 3. Buell Door Company Inc. 4. Graham; an Assa Abloy Group company. 5. Ideal Architectural Doors & Plywood. 6. Marshfield Door Systems 7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc.; a Masonite company. 8. Oshkosh Architectural Door Company. 9. Vancouver Door Company. 10. VT Industries Inc.



2.3 INTERIOR FIRE-RATED, STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOORS

A. Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252 or UL 10C.

1. Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

2. Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.

B. Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based on testing according to UL 1784.

C. Interior Fire-Rated Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Fire-rated (20-minute rating) doors complying with WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.

1. Stile & Rail Pattern: Eggers Industries - #E327.

2. Grade: Premium. 3. Finish: Transparent. 4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, quarter sawed/sliced stiles and rails, plain

sawed/sliced panels. 5. Door Construction for Transparent Finish: 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick stiles and rails and veneered

raised panels not less than 1-1/8 inches (29 mm) thick.

a. Stile and Rail Construction: Veneered, structural composite lumber or veneered, edge- and end-glued clear lumber Select veneers for similarity of grain and color, and arrange for optimum match between adjacent pieces. Use veneers not less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) thick.

b. Raised-Panel Construction: Veneered, shaped, wood-based panel product with veneer conforming to raised-panel shape.

D. Interior Fire-Rated Stile and Rail Wood Doors: Fire-rated (45-minute rating) doors complying with the WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.

1. Stile & Rail Pattern: Eggers Industries - #E327.

2. Grade: Premium. 3. Finish: Transparent. 4. Wood Species and Cut for Transparent Finish: Red oak, quarter sawed/sliced stiles and rails, plain

sawed/sliced panels. 5. Interior Fire-Rated Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch- (44-mm-) thick, edged and veneered mineral-

core stiles and rails and 1-1/8-inch- (29-mm-) thick, veneered mineral-core raised panels. 6. Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved screw-

holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.



2.4 STILE AND RAIL WOOD DOOR FABRICATION

A. Fabricate stile and rail wood doors in sizes indicated for field fitting.

B. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels unless otherwise indicated:

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/2 inch (13 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide not more than 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to

extent permitted by labeling agency.

C. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied.

D. Glazed Openings: Factory install glazing in doors, complying with Section 088000 "Glazing." Install glass using manufacturer's standard elastomeric glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920. Secure glass in place with removable wood moldings. Miter wood moldings at corner joints.

2.5 FINISHING

A. Finish wood doors at factory that are indicated to receive transparent finish.

B. For doors indicated to be factory finished, comply with the WDMA I.S.6A, "Industry Standard for Architectural Stile and Rail Doors," and with other requirements specified.

C. Transparent Finish:

1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: WDMA TR-4 conversion varnish. 3. Staining: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 4. Effect: Semifilled finish, produced by applying an additional finish coat to partially fill the wood

pores. 5. Sheen: Satin.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

B. Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referenced quality standard, and as indicated.



1. Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80. 2. Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted with fire-rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal edges of doors, edges of cutouts, and mortises after fitting and machining.

1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch (3 mm) at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 3/8 inch (10 mm) from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering unless otherwise indicated. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch (6 mm) from bottom of door to top of threshold unless otherwise indicated.

a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges. 3. Bevel fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) on lock edge; trim stiles and rails only to

extent permitted by labeling agency.


PARTNERS 15-175B ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113-1


SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.



B. Samples: For each type of access door and frame and for each finish specified.

C. Product Schedule: For access doors and frames.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B.

2.2 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Karp Associates, Inc. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company. f. MIFAB, Inc. g. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. h. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Face of door flush with frame, with exposed flange and concealed hinge. 3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch (1.52 mm), 16 gage, factory finished. 5. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 6. Latch and Lock: Cam latch, prepared for mortise cylinder to match Owner’s keying system.



2.3 FIRE-RATED ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

A. Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:


a. Acudor Products, Inc. b. Babcock-Davis. c. JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group. d. Karp Associates, Inc. e. Larsens Manufacturing Company. f. MIFAB, Inc. g. Milcor; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc. h. Nystrom, Inc.

2. Description: Door face flush with frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation enclosed in sheet metal; with exposed flange, self-closing door, and concealed hinge.

3. Locations: Wall and ceiling. 4. Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction. 5. Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch (0.91 mm), 20 gage, factory finished. 6. Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door. 7. Latch and Lock: Self-latching door hardware, prepared for mortise cylinder to match Owner’s

keying system.

2.4 MATERIALS

A. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.

B. Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

C. Frame Anchors: Same material as door face.

D. Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

B. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish mounting holes, attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

C. Latch and Lock Hardware:



1. Quantity: Furnish number of latches and locks required to hold doors tightly closed. 2. Mortise Cylinder Preparation: Where indicated, prepare door panel to accept cylinder specified in

Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

2.6 FINISHES

A. Painted Finishes: Comply with coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, and applying and baking finish. 1. Factory Finished: Apply manufacturer's standard baked-enamel or powder-coat finish immediately

after cleaning and pretreating, with minimum dry-film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) for topcoat.

a. Color: White.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.


PARTNERS 15-175B SIDE-FOLDING GRILLES 083513-1


SECTION 083513 – SIDE-FOLDING GRILLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Side-Folding Grilles.



B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.




A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Minimum of five years of experience in producing side-folding grilles of the type specified.

B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's approval.

1.5 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Stacking: 1. Minimum stacking shall be 1.05 inches/linear foot (87.5 mm/meter) of opening plus 3.5 inches (89

mm) for each locking member. 2. Grille support must be designed to carry the weight of a fully stacked door at any point along its

length.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Warranty: Two years from date of substantial completion.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SIDE-FOLDING GRILLES

A. Description: Top-supported, heavy duty, horizontal-sliding, manually operated, side-folding open aluminum grille.

B. Basis of Design: Provide Cornell Iron Works “GlideGard Model ESG-32”, or equal product by the following:

1. The Cookson Company, Inc. 2. Or approved equal.

C. Curtain: 1. Vertical Tubes: 5/16 inch (8 mm) diameter, 6063 T5 aluminum alloy, 3.5 inches (89 mm) on center. 2. Tube Spacers: 7/16 inch (11 mm) outside diameter aluminum tubes to maintain horizontal chain

spacing. 3. Horizontal Bars: Aluminum bars, 6 inches x 3/4 inch (152 mm x 19 mm), Bars to be vertically

spaced at 12 inches (305 mm) o.c. in a brick pattern. 4. Hinge Panels: 2 inch (51 mm) high continuous interlocking aluminum panels at the top and bottom

of the closure. 5. Leading End Member: 1 5/16 x 2 3/8 x 1/8 inch (33 x 60 x 3 mm) thick extruded aluminum tube

with recess for attaching curtain sections. a. Provide concealed masterkeyable, cylinder operated hook-bolt #7 member with lock

operable from both sides of curtain that engages a full height wall channel. Provide rubber bumper at the edge of the locking member.

6. Trailing End Member: 1 5/16 x 2 3/8 x 1/8 inch (33 x 60 x 3 mm) thick extruded aluminum tube with recess for attaching curtain sections. a. Provide #8 fixed end member.

D. Trolleys: 1 1/8 inch (29 mm) diameter nylon tired ball bearing wheels; two wheel assembly at each hanger; three wheel assembly at all vertical members.

E. Track: 1.3 x 1.8 inch (33 x 46 mm) thick extruded aluminum section with continuous recess for splice tongues and pins.

F. Finishes: Clear anodized.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Pocket Door: 1. Door:

a. Material: A36 HR steel. b. Thickness: USS 12-gauge. c. Finish: Phosphate treatment followed by a baked-on polyester powder coat, color as

selected from manufacturer’s standard color range, minimum 32 colors. 1) Minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness; ASTM-D-3363 pencil hardness:

H or better. 2. Frame:



a. Material: A36 HR steel. b. Thickness: USS 12-gauge steel. c. Finish: Phosphate treatment followed by a baked-on polyester powder coat, color as

selected from manufacturer’s standard color range, minimum 32 colors. 1) Minimum 2.5 mils (0.065 mm) cured film thickness; ASTM-D-3363 pencil hardness:

H or better. d. Hinges: 3: non-mortise type. e. Lock: 1” security mortise cylinder.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate with every fourth vertical rod as a hanger rod. Provide tube spacers at each hanger rod to maintain chain spacing.

B. Hinge Panels: Continuous rows between top two and bottom two chain sets.

C. Intermediate Members: Spacing not to exceed 13 feet (3.05 M) on center and located at each curve.

D. Bi-Parting Grilles: Attach strike channel to appropriate curtain section.

2.4 OPERATION

A. Manual push-pull.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine header substrates upon which side-folding grilles will be installed and verify conditions are in accordance with approved shop drawings. Header, floor or sill to be level across entire grille opening.

B. Coordinate with responsible entity to perform corrective work on unsatisfactory substrates and floor or sill levels.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install side-folding grilles complying with manufacturer's written installation instructions. Install track in one piece.

B. Standard Floor Clearances: Follow manufacturer’s instructions.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Following completion of installation, including related work by others, lubricate, test, and adjust side-folding grilles for ease of operation.



3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces soiled by work as recommended by manufacturer.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate proper operation to Owner's Representative.

B. Instruct Owner's Representative in maintenance procedures.


PARTNERS 15-175B DOOR HARDWARE

087100 - 1


087100 – DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 Refer to "General and Special Conditions", and "Instructions to Bidders", Division 1 of Specifications. Requirements of these Sections and the project drawings shall govern work in this section.

1.2 Work Included:

A. Furnish all items of Finish Hardware specified, scheduled, shown or required herein except those items specifically excluded from this section of the specification.

B. Related work:

1. Division 00 00 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements 2. Division 01 00 00 – General Requirements 3. Division 06 00 00 – Wood, Plastics, and Composites 4. Division 08 00 00 – Openings 5. Division 10 00 00 – Specialties 6. Division 11 00 00 – Equipment 7. Division 26 00 00 – Electrical 8. Division 27 00 00 – Communications 9. Division 28 00 00 – Electronic Safety and Security

C. Specific Omissions: Hardware for the following is specified or indicated elsewhere, unless specifically listed in the hardware sets:

1. Cabinet Hardware. 2. Signs, except as noted. 3. Folding partitions, except cylinders where detailed. 4. Sliding aluminum doors 5. Chain link and wire mesh doors and gates 6. Access doors and panels 7. Overhead and Coiling doors

1.3 Quality Assurance

A. Requirements of Regulatory Agencies:

1. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations of the governmental authorities having jurisdiction where such requirements exceed the requirements of the Specifications.

2. Furnish finish hardware to comply with the requirements of the regulations for public building accommodations for physically handicapped persons of the governmental authority having jurisdiction and to comply with Americans with Disabilities Act.

PARTNERS 15-175B DOOR HARDWARE 087100 - 2


3. Provide hardware for fire-rated openings in compliance with NFPA 80 and state and local building code requirements. Provide only hardware that has been tested and listed by UL for types and sizes of doors required and complies with requirements of door and door frame labels.

B. Hardware Supplier:

1. Shall be an established firm dealing in contract builders’ hardware. He must have adequate inventory, qualified personnel on staff and be located within 100 miles of the project. The distributor must be a factory-authorized dealer for all materials required. The supplier shall be or have in employment an Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC).

C. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier:

1. Shall be an experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.

2. Shall prepare data for electrified door hardware, including shop drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer’s standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this project.

3. Shall have experience in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.

D. Pre-installation Meeting:

1. Before hardware installation, General Contractor/Construction Manager will request a hardware installation meeting be conducted on the installation of hardware; specifically that of locksets, closers, exit devices, overhead stops and coordinators. Manufacturer's representatives of the above products, in conjunction with the hardware supplier for the project, shall conduct the meeting. Meeting to be held at job site and attended by installers of hardware for aluminum, hollow metal and wood doors. Meeting to address proper coordination and installation of hardware, per finish hardware schedule for this specific project, by using installation manuals, hardware schedule, templates, physical product samples and installation videos.

2. When any electrical or pneumatic hardware is specified this meeting shall also include the following trades/installers: Electrical, Security, Alarm systems and Architect.

3. Convene one week or more prior to commencing work of this Section. 4. The Hardware Supplier shall include the cost of this meeting in his proposal.

E. Manufacturer:

1. Obtain each type of hardware (latch and locksets, hinges, closers, etc.) from a single manufacturer, although several may be indicated as offering products complying with requirements.

2. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.


087100 - 3


1.4 Submittals:

A. Hardware Schedule

1. Submit number of Hardware Schedules as directed in Division 1. 2. Follow guidelines established in Door & Hardware Institute Handbook (DHI) Sequence and Format

for the Hardware Schedule unless noted otherwise. 3. Schedule will include the following:

a. Door Index including opening numbers and the assigned Finish Hardware set. b. Preface sheet listing category only and manufacturer's names of items being furnished as

follows:

CATEGORY SPECIFIED SCHEDULED

Hinges Manufacturer A Manufacturer B

Lock sets Manufacturer X Manufacturer X

Kick Plates Open Manufacturer Z

c. Hardware Locations: Refer to Article 3.1 B.2 Locations. d. Opening Description: Single or pair, number, room locations, hand, active leaf, degree of

swing, size, door material, frame material, and UL listing. e. Hardware Description: Quantity, category, product number, fasteners, and finish. f. Headings that refer to the specified Hardware Set Numbers. g. Scheduling Sequence shown in Hardware Sets. h. Product data of each hardware item, and shop drawings where required, for special

conditions and specialty hardware. i. Electrified Hardware system operation description. j. "Vertical" scheduling format only. "Horizontal" schedules will be returned "Not Approved." k. Typed Copy. l. Double-Spacing. m. 8-1/2 x 11 inch sheets n. U.S. Standard Finish symbols or BHMA Finish symbols.

B. Product Data:

1. Submit, in booklet form Manufacturers Catalog cut sheets of scheduled hardware. 2. Submit product data with hardware schedule.

C. Samples:

1. Prior to submittal of the final hardware schedule and prior to final ordering of finish hardware, submit one sample, if required, of each type of exposed hardware unit, finished as required and tagged with full description for coordination with schedule.

2. Samples will be returned to the supplier. Units, which are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review and field comparison procedures may, after final check of operation, be used in the work, within limitations of keying coordination requirements.

D. Key Schedule:

1. Submit detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final keying instructions have been followed.

2. Submit as a separate schedule.



E. Electrified Hardware Drawings:

1. Submit elevation drawings showing relationship of all electrical hardware components to door and frame. Indicate number and gage of wires required. a. Include wiring drawing showing point to point wire hook up for all components. b. Include system operations descriptions for each type of opening; describe each possible

condition.

F. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, the factory order acknowledgement numbers for the various hardware items to be used on the project. The factory order acknowledgement numbers shall help to facilitate and expedite any service that may be required on a particular hardware item. General Contractor/Construction Manager shall keep these order acknowledgement numbers on file in the construction trailer.

1.5 Product Delivery, Storage, and Handling:

A. Label each item of hardware with the appropriate door number and Hardware Schedule heading number, and deliver to the installer so designated by the contractor.

1.6 Warranties:

A. Refer to Division 1 for warranty requirements.

B. Special Warranty Periods:

1. Closers shall carry manufacturer's 30-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

2. Locksets shall carry manufacturer's 3-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

3. Exit Devices shall carry manufacturer's 3-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

4. Continuous gear hinges shall carry manufacturer's lifetime warranty to be free from defects in material and workmanship.

5. Balance of items shall carry a manufacturer's 1-year warranty against manufacturing defects and workmanship.

C. During the warranty period, replace defective work, including labor, materials and other costs incidental to the work.

PART 2 - PRODUCT

2.1 Furnish each category with the products of only one manufacturer unless specified otherwise; this requirement is mandatory whether various manufacturers are listed or not.


087100 - 5


2.2 Provide the products of manufacturer designated or if more than one manufacturer is listed, the comparable product of one of the other manufacturers listed. Where only one manufacturer or product is listed, it is understood that this is the owner’s Building Standard and "no substitution" is allowed.

A. Hinges:

1. Furnish hinges of class and size as listed in sets. 2. Numbers used are Ives (IVE). 3. Products of a BHMA member are acceptable.

B. Locksets and Latchsets - Mortise Type:

1. Locksets shall be manufactured from heavy gauge steel, minimum lockcase thickness 1/8”, containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion resistance.

2. Locks are to have a standard 2 ¾” backset with a full ¾” throw two-piece stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Deadbolt shall be a full 1” throw, constructed of stainless steel.

3. Lockcase shall be easily handed without chassis disassembly by removing handing screw on lockcase and installing in opposite location on reverse side. Changing of door hand bevel from standard to reverse hand shall be done by removing the lockcase scalp plate, and pulling and rotating the latchbolt 180 degrees.

4. Lock trim shall be through-bolted to the door to assure correct alignment and proper operation. Lever trim shall have external spring cage mechanism to assist in support of the lever weight. Thumb turns shall have “EZ” thumbturn equal to Schlage L583-363.

5. Function numbers are Schlage. a. Schlage L9000

6. Lockset Trim: a. Schlage 03N

7. Provide strikes with extended lips where required to protect trim from being marred by latch bolt. Provide strike lips that do not project more than 1/8" beyond door frame trim at single doors and have 7/8" lip to center at pairs of 1-3/4" doors.

C. Exit Devices:

1. Exit devices shall be touchpad style, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel, or aluminum, plated to the standard architectural finishes to match the balance of the door hardware.

2. All exit devices shall incorporate a fluid damper, which decelerates the touchpad on its return stroke and eliminates noise associated with exit device operation. Touchpad shall extend a minimum of one half of the door width. All latchbolts to be deadlatching type, with a self-lubricating coating to reduce wear.

3. End-cap will be sloped to deflect any impact from carts and they shall be flush with the external mechanism case. End caps that overlap and project above the mechanism case are unacceptable. End cap shall utilize a two-point attachment to the mounting bracket.

4. Touchpad shall match exit device finish, and shall be stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes. Only compression springs will be used in devices, latches, and outside trims or controls.

5. Plastic templates shall be included with each exit device to facilitate a quick, easy and accurate installation.

6. Strikes shall be roller type and come complete with a locking plate to prevent movement. 7. All rim and vertical rod exit devices shall have passed a 5 million(5,000,000) cycle test based on

ANSI A156.3, 1994, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing lab.



8. All mortise exit devices shall have passed a 10 million(10,000,000)cycle test based on ANSI A156.3, 1994, Grade 1 test standards and certified by an independent testing lab.

9. Provide cylinder dogging on panic exit hardware where noted in hardware sets. 10. Exit devices shall be UL listed panic exit hardware. All exit devices for fire rated openings shall be

UL labeled fire exit hardware. 11. Lever trim for exit devices shall be vandal-resistant type, which will travel to a 90-degree down

position when more than 35 pounds of torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set. 12. Von Duprin 98 Series. Series and function numbers as listed in sets. 13. Trim:

a. As specified in sets. b. Levers to match lockset design where specified.

D. Closers:

1. Door closers shall have fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with a high strength cast iron cylinder. Cylinder body shall be 1 ½” in diameter, and double heat treated pinion shall be 11/16” in diameter with double D slab drive arm connection.

2. Hydraulic fluid shall be of a type requiring no seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to –30 degrees F.

3. Spring power shall be continuously adjustable over the full range of closer sizes, and allow for reduced opening force for the physically handicapped. Hydraulic regulation shall be by tamper-proof, non-critical valves. Closers shall have separate adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.

4. All closers shall have solid forged steel main arms (and forged forearms for parallel arm closers). 5. All surface mounted mechanical closers shall be certified to exceed ten million (10,000,000) full load

cycles by a recognized independent testing laboratory. 6. Closers will have Powder coating finish certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing by ETL, an

independent testing laboratory used by BHMA for ANSI certification. 7. Refer to door and frame details and furnish accessories such as drop plates, panel adapters, spacers

and supports as required to correctly install door closers. State degree of door swing in the hardware schedule.

8. LCN Series as listed in sets.

E. ADA Special Closers:

1. Where “Low Energy Power Operated Door” as defined by ANSI Standard A156.19 is indicated for doors required to be accessible to the disabled, provide electrically powered operators complying with the ADA requirements for opening force and time to close standards.

2. Full closing force shall be provided when the power or assist cycle ends. 3. Modular design, adjustments easily accessible from the front, UL listed for use on labeled doors. 4. Shall have “Second Chance” function to accommodate momentary resistance, “Breakaway” function

in the electronically controlled clutch, “Soft Start” motor control function and “Maintain Hold-Open Switch” to hold the door open at 90 degree.

5. Shall have built in 12V and 24V power supply for actuators, card readers, electric strikes and magnetic door locks, inputs for both swing and stop side sensors and available to accept either 120VAC or 220VAC input power. All wiring connections between operator modules made by easy-to-handle electrical connectors. Shall comply with both UL and NEC requirements for Class 1 and Class 2 wiring by providing separate conduits for each.


087100 - 7


6. Shall have seven independent electronic adjustments to tailor the operator for specific site conditions. Opening speed, holding force at 90 deg., sequential trigger and time delay, hold-open time at 90 deg., opening force, clutch “breakaway” force setting, electric strike trigger and time delay.

7. Shall have separate and independent adjustments for back check, main speed and latch speed. 8. LCN Series as listed in sets. 9. Furnish actuators and other controls as shown in Hardware Sets.

F. Kick Plates:

1. Furnish .050 inches thick, beveled four sides, countersunk fasteners, 10" high x door width less 2" at single doors and less 1" at pairs. Where glass or louvers prevent this height, supply with height equal to height of bottom rail less 2”.

2. Any BHMA manufacturing product meeting above is acceptable.

G. Wall Stops:

1. Length to exceed projection of all other hardware. Provide with threaded studs and expansion shields for masonry wall construction. Install with slope at top. a. Ives WS33(X) b. BHMA L12011 or L12021

H. Door Holding Magnets:

1. Electrically controlled, fail-safe, holds door open until current is interrupted. 2. Units will have 35 lbs of holding force. 3. Units will be “tri-voltage”, 12VDC, 24VAC/DC & 120VAC. 4. Furnish model to hold door away from wall to allow for any trim or levers on pull side of door.

a. LCN SEM 7800 series

I. Miscellaneous:

1. Furnish items not categorized in the above descriptions but specified by manufacturer’s names in Hardware Sets.

J. Fasteners:

1. Furnish fasteners of the proper type, size, quantity and finish. Use machine screws and expansion shields for attaching hardware to concrete or masonry, and wall grip inserts at hollow wall construction. Furnish machine screws for attachment to reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum doors and frames. Furnish full thread wood screws for attachment to solid wood doors and frames. "TEK" type screws are not acceptable.

2. Sex bolts will not be permitted on reinforced metal doors or wood doors where blocking is specified.

2.3 Finishes:

A. Generally, Dull Chrome, US26D / BHMA 626. Provide finish for each item as indicated in sets.

2.4 Templates and Hardware Location:



A. Furnish hardware made to template. Supply required templates and hardware locations to the door and frame manufacturers.

B. Furnish metal template to frame/door supplier for continuous hinge.

C. Refer to Article 3.1 B.2, Locations, and coordinate with templates.

2.5 Cylinders and Keying:

A. All cylinders for this project will be supplied by one supplier regardless of door type and location.

B. The Finish Hardware supplier will meet with Architect and/or Owner to finalize keying requirements and obtain keying instructions in writing. 1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.

C. Provide a cylinder for all hardware components capable of being locked.

D. Provide cylinders master and grand master keyed to the existing Schlage Everest system according to Owner's instructions. Provide change keys, master keys and grand master keys as required by Owner.

E. Provide cylinders with construction cores or keying for use during the construction period. When so directed, and in the presence of the Owner's security department or representative, convert construction cores or keying to the final system. 1. Supplier shall include the cost of this service in his proposal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 Installation

A. General:

1. Install hardware according to manufacturers installations and template dimensions. Attach all items of finish hardware to doors, frames, walls, etc. with fasteners furnished and required by the manufacture of the item.

2. Provide blocking/reinforcement for all wall mounted Hardware. 3. Reinforced hollow metal doors and frames and reinforced aluminum door and frames will be drilled

and tapped for machine screws. 4. Solid wood doors and frames: full thread wood screws. Drill pilot holes before inserting screws. 5. Continuous gear hinges attached to hollow metal doors and frames and aluminum doors and frames:

12-24 x 1/2" #3 Phillips Keenform self-tapping. Use #13 or 3/16 drill for pilot. 6. Continuous Gear Hinges require continuous mortar guards of foam or cardboard 1/2" thick x frame

height, applied with construction adhesive. 7. Install weather-strip gasket prior to parallel arm closer bracket, rim exit device or any stop mounted

hardware. Gasket to provide a continuous seal around perimeter of door opening. Allow for gasket when installing finish hardware. Door closers will require special templating. Exit devices will require adjustment in backset.


087100 - 9


B. Locations:

1. Dimensions are from finish floor to center line of items. 2. Include this list in Hardware Schedule.

CATEGORY DIMENSION Hinges Door Manufacturer's Standard Levers Door Manufacturer's Standard Exit Device Touchbar Per Template Wall Stops/Holders At Head

C. Field Quality Inspection:

1. Inspect material furnished, its installation and adjustment, and to instruct the Owner's personnel in adjustment, care and maintenance of hardware.

2. Locksets and exit devices shall be inspected after installation and after the HVAC system is in operation and balanced, to insure correct installation and proper operation.

3. Closers shall be inspected and adjusted after installation and after the HVAC system is in operation and balanced, to insure correct installation and proper operation.

4. A written report stating compliance, and also recording locations and kinds of noncompliance, shall be sent to the Architect with copies to the Contractor, hardware distributor, hardware installer and building owner.

D. Technical and Warranty Information:

1. At the completion of the project, the technical and warranty information coalesced and kept on file by the General Contractor/Construction Manager shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. In addition to both the technical and warranty information, all factory order acknowledgement numbers supplied to the General Contractor/Construction Manager during the construction period shall be given to the Owner or Owner’s Agent. The warranty information and factory order acknowledgement numbers shall serve to both expedite and properly execute any warranty work that may be required on the various hardware items supplied on the project.

2. Submit to General Contractor/Construction Manager, two copies each of parts and service manuals and two each of any special installation or adjustment tools. Include for locksets, exit devices, door closers and any electrical products.

3.2 Hardware Sets:

HARDWARE SET NO. 01

EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070L 03N 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER (MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM) 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA FIRE/LIFE WALL MAG SEM7850 689 LCN



DOOR MAY BE HELD-OPEN ELECTRO-MAGNETICALLY. UPON ACTIVATION OF THE BUILDING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM, THE DOOR WILL CLOSE AND POSITIVELY LATCH. COORDINATE WITH ALL RELATED TRADES.

HARDWARE SET NO. 02

EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK L9070L 03N 626 SCH 1 EA CYLINDER (MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM) 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS33X 626 IVE

HARDWARE SET NO. 03

EACH TO HAVE: 3 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 5 X 4.5 652 IVE 1 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 98-L-F-03-SNB 626 VON 1 EA CYLINDER (MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM) 626 1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA MC 689 LCN 1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 1 EA WALL STOP WS33X 626 IVE

HARDWARE SET NO. 04

EACH TO HAVE: 6 EA HW HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE 2 EA FIRE EXIT HARDWARE 9827-L-F-LBR-03-499F-SNB 626 VON 2 EA CYLINDER (MATCH EXISTING SYSTEM) 626 2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4111 EDA MC 689 LCN 2 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 1" LDW B-CS 630 IVE 2 EA WALL STOP WS33X 626 IVE


PARTNERS 15-175B GLAZING 088000-1


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section: 1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit that contains dehydrated air or a specified gas.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Samples: 12-inch- (300-mm-) square, for each type of glass product indicated, other than monolithic clear float glass.

C. Glazing Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

D. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Test Report: From glazing sealant manufacturer.


A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Submit to elastomeric glazing sealant manufacturers, for testing according to ASTM C 1087, samples of each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member that will contact or affect elastomeric glazing sealants:

B. Glazing for Fire-Rated Door and Window Assemblies: Glazing for assemblies that comply with NFPA 80 and that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 257.

C. Safety Glazing Products: Comply with testing requirements in 16 CFR 1201 and ANSI Z97.1.

D. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA Laminated Division's "Laminated Glass Design Guide" and GANA's "Glazing Manual."



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form, made out to Owner and signed by coated-glass manufacturer agreeing to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate as defined in "Definitions" Article, f.o.b. the nearest shipping point to Project site, within specified warranty period indicated below.


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection:

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, products specified.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.

B. Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

C. Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition A (uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

2.3 FIRE-PROTECTION-RATED GLAZING (FG-11, FG-12)

A. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing: Listed and labeled by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on positive-pressure testing according to NFPA 257 or UL 9, including the hose-stream test, and shall comply with NFPA 80.

B. Fire-Protection-Rated Glazing Labeling: Permanently mark fire-protection-rated glazing with certification label of a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name; test standard; whether glazing is permitted to be used in doors or openings; if permitted in openings, whether or not glazing has passed the hose-stream test; whether or not glazing meets 450 deg F (250 deg C) temperature-rise limitation; and the fire-resistance rating in minutes.

C. Fire-Protection and Safety Rated (20 Minute) Glass - (FG-11): Minimum 20 minute, fire-protection-rated glass; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category I and II.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Superlite I-20” as manufactured by SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions or comparable product by one of the following:



a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Technical Glass Products. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

D. Fire-Protection and Safety Rated (45 Minute) Glass - (FG-12): Minimum 45 minute, fire-protection-rated glass; and complying with 16 CFR 1201, Category I and II.

1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide “Superlite II XL-45” as manufactured by SAFTI FIRST Fire Rated Glazing Solutions or comparable product by one of the following:

a. AGC Glass Company North America, Inc. b. Technical Glass Products. c. Vetrotech Saint-Gobain.

2.4 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of material indicated below, complying with standards referenced with name of elastomer indicated below, and of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal:

1. Neoprene, ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM, ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone, ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber, ASTM C 1115. 5. Any material indicated above.

2.5 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General: Provide products of type indicated, complying with the following requirements:

1. Compatibility: Select glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.

3. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

B. Elastomeric Glazing Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied chemically curing sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates.

1. Single-Component Neutral-Curing Silicone Glazing Sealants:

a. Products:

1) Tremco Spectrum II 2) Silglaze II 2800



3) Dow Corning 795

b. Type and Grade: S (single component) and NS (nonsag). c. Class: 50. d. Use Related to Exposure: NT (nontraffic). e. Uses Related to Glazing Substrates: M, G, A, and, as applicable to glazing substrates

indicated, O.

C. Glazing Sealants for Fire-Resistive Glazing Products: Identical to products used in test assemblies to obtain fire-protection rating.

2.6 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based elastomeric tape with a solids content of 100 percent; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; packaged on rolls with a release paper backing; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; packaged on rolls with release liner protecting adhesive; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid

sealant.

2.7 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Identical to product used in test assembly to obtain fire-resistance rating.



2.8 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to glaze openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

2.9 MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE (MG-10, MG-11)

A. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units (MG-10): Class 1 (clear) annealed or Kind HS (heat-strengthened) float glass where heat strengthening is required to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading of individual glass lites and to comply with system performance requirements.

1. Thickness: ¼” (6.0 mm).

B. Uncoated Clear Float-Glass Units (MG-11): Class 1 (clear) Kind FT (fully tempered) float glass.

1. Thickness: ¼” (6.0 mm).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.

C. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

D. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

E. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

F. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

G. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.



3.2 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

F. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

G. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.3 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Drive-in Wedge Gaskets: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure-glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

E. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.


A. Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.



B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

C. Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.


PARTNERS 15-175B NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216-1


SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior partitions. 2. Suspension systems for interior ceilings and soffits.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated.

2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40 (Z120), hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch (0.683 mm) or as required by performance

requirements for horizontal deflection. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide one of the following:

1. Single Long-Leg Runner System: ASTM C 645 top runner with 2-inch- (51-mm-) deep flanges in thickness not less than indicated for studs, installed with studs friction fit into top runner and with continuous bridging located within 12 inches (305 mm) of the top of studs to provide lateral bracing.

2. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series. 2) Superior Metal Trim; Superior Flex Track System (SFT).



D. Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch (0.683 mm).

E. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches (38 by 38 mm), 0.068-inch- (1.72-mm-) thick,

galvanized steel.

F. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm). 2. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

G. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission. 1. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

H. Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch (1.34-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge-type steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel

thickness of 0.0329 inch (0.8 mm). 3. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter

wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

I. Z-Shaped Furring: With slotted or nonslotted web, face flange of 1-1/4 inches (32 mm), wall attachment flange of 7/8 inch (22 mm), minimum uncoated-metal thickness of 0.0179 inch (0.455 mm), and depth required to fit insulation thickness indicated.

2.2 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- (1.59-mm-) diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- (1.21-mm-) diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch (4.12 mm) in diameter.

C. Carrying Channels: Cold-rolled, commercial-steel sheet with a base-metal thickness of 0.0538 inch (1.367 mm) and minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges.

1. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

D. Furring Channels (Furring Members):

1. Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.0538-inch (1.367-mm) uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) wide flanges, 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep.

2. Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0269 inch (0.683 mm).



b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

3. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch (22 mm) deep.

a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0296 inch (0.752 mm).

4. Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) deep members designed to reduce sound transmission.

a. Configuration: Asymmetrical or hat shaped.

E. Grid Suspension System for Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; 640-C Drywall Furring System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.


A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.

1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide one of the following:

1. Asphalt-Saturated Organic Felt: ASTM D 226/D 226M, Type I (No. 15 asphalt felt), nonperforated. 2. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration

without foam displacement, 1/8 inch (3.2 mm) thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION


A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing

installation.

B. Install framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, with connections securely fastened.

C. Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

D. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.



E. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

3.2 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts that penetrate partitions above ceiling.

1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.

2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch (13-mm)

clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead

structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads.

4. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Z-Shaped Furring Members:

1. Erect insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," vertically and hold in place with Z-shaped furring members spaced 24 inches (610 mm) o.c.

2. At exterior corners, attach wide flange of furring members to wall with short flange extending beyond corner; on adjacent wall surface, screw-attach short flange of furring channel to web of attached channel. At interior corners, space second member no more than 12 inches (305 mm) from corner and cut insulation to fit.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3 mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.



3.3 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

B. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

C. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:

1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices.

a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.

4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

D. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3 mm in 3.6 m) measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.


PARTNERS 15-175B GYPSUM BOARD 092900-1


SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Interior gypsum board.



B. Samples: For each texture finish indicated on same backing indicated for Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.2 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Complying with ASTM C 36/C 36M or ASTM C 1396/C 1396M, as applicable to type of gypsum board indicated and whichever is more stringent.

1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. American Gypsum Co. b. BPB America Inc. c. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum. d. Lafarge North America Inc. e. National Gypsum Company. f. PABCO Gypsum. g. Temple. h. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.



1. Thickness: 1/2 inch (12.7 mm). 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Abuse-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M gypsum board, tested according to ASTM C 1629/C 1629M. 1. Core: 5/8 inch (15.9 mm), Type X. 2. Surface Abrasion: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 3. Indentation: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 4. Soft-Body Impact: ASTM C 1629/C 1629M, meets or exceeds Level 1 requirements. 5. Long Edges: Tapered. 6. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274. 7. Use at all wall locations 8’-0” and below.

2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.

1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized-steel sheet.

2. Shapes:

a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound. f. Expansion (control) joint. g. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape:

1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat, use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

1. Prefilling: At open joints and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges,

use setting-type taping compound.

a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.

3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use setting-type, sandable topping compound.




A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended for directly adhering gypsum panels to continuous substrate.

C. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002 unless otherwise indicated.

1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch (0.84 to 2.84 mm) thick.

2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS

A. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

B. Comply with ASTM C 840.

C. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- (6.4- to 12.7-mm-) wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

D. For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Prefill open joints and damaged surface areas.

F. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

G. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:

1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view unless otherwise indicated.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."

3. Level 5: Where indicated on Drawings.

a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099123 "Interior Painting."



3.2 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.


PARTNERS 15-175B ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS 095123-1


SECTION 095123 - ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes acoustical tiles and concealed suspension systems for ceilings.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed finish.

C. Product test reports.

D. Research/evaluation reports.

E. Maintenance data.


A. Acoustical Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing laboratory, or an NVLAP-accredited laboratory.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics:

1. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide acoustical tile ceilings identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

a. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

2. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Acoustical tiles complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials, when tested per ASTM E 84.

a. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Acoustical Ceiling Units: Full-size tiles equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.



2. Suspension System Components: Quantity of each concealed grid and exposed component equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILINGS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Tile Standard: Comply with ASTM E 1264.

B. Metal Suspension System Standard: Comply with ASTM C 635.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Zinc-coated carbon-steel wire; ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.

1. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch- (2.69-mm) diameter wire.

E. Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners.

2.2 ACOUSTICAL TILES FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING (ACT-1)

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG ”Clean Room” or comparable product by Armstrong or Certainteed.

B. Color: White

C. Modular Size: 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” 1. USG - Clean Room #56099

D. Edge: Square edge.


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG “Radar High Durability” or comparable product by Certainteed or USG.

B. Color: White

C. Modular Size: 2’ x 2’ x 5/8” 1. USG – Radar High Durability #2227



D. Edge: Tegular edge.


A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG ”Clean Room” or comparable product by Armstrong or Certainteed.

B. Color: White

C. Modular Size: 2’ x 4’ x 5/8” 1. USG - Clean Room #56091



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG “Radar High Durability” or comparable product by Certainteed or USG.

B. Color: White

C. Modular Size: 2’ x 4’ x 5/8” 1. USG – Radar High Durability #2407



A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG “Radar High NRC / High CAC” or comparable product by Certainteed or USG.

B. Color: White

C. Modular Size: 2’ x 4’ x 3/4” 1. USG – Radar High NRC / High CAC #22541


2.7 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL TILE CEILING

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide USG “Donn DX / DXL” or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. Chicago Metallic Corp. 2. Armstrong.

B. Color: White.



PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical tiles to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width tiles at borders.

C. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members, plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers, use trapezes or equivalent devices. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires.

1. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck; anchor into concrete slabs.

2. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical tile ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical tiles. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. and not more than 3 inches (75 mm) from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet (3.2 mm in 3.6 m). Miter corners accurately and connect securely. Provide

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

F. Install acoustical tiles in coordination with suspension system and exposed moldings and trim. Place splines or suspension system flanges into kerfed edges so tile-to-tile joints are closed by double lap of material.


PARTNERS 15-175B RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513-1


SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Resilient base. 2. Resilient molding accessories.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size Samples but not less than 12 inches (300 mm) long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive resilient products.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 RESILIENT BASE (RB-#)

A. Resilient Base:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Roppe Corporation “Pinnacle Rubber Wall Base” or equal product by the following:

a. Allstate Rubber Corp.; Stoler Industries.



b. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. c. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. d. Endura Rubber Flooring; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. e. Estrie Products International; American Biltrite (Canada) Ltd. f. Flexco, Inc. g. Johnsonite h. Mondo Rubber International, Inc. i. Musson, R. C. Rubber Co. j. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc. k. PRF USA, Inc. l. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861.

1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Style: Cove (base with toe).

A. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

B. Height: As noted on drawings.

C. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

D. Outside Corners: Preformed.

E. Inside Corners: Preformed.

F. Finish: Low luster.

G. Colors and Patterns: Refer to ‘Material Finish / Color Schedule Section 000200’ for color selections.

2.2 RESILIENT MOLDING ACCESSORY

A. Resilient Molding Accessory:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Roppe Corporation Resilient Molding Accessories or equal products by the following:

a. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. b. Flexco, Inc. c. Johnsonite d. R.C.A. Rubber Company (The). e. VPI, LLC; Floor Products Division.

B. Nosing for resilient floor covering, Reducer strip for resilient floor covering and Transition strips.

C. Material: Rubber.

D. Profile and Dimensions: As indicated on drawings.



E. Colors and Patterns: Refer to ‘Material Finish / Color Schedule Section 000200’ for color selections.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Metal Edge Strips: Extruded aluminum with mill finish of width shown, of height required to protect exposed edges of tiles, and in maximum available lengths to minimize running joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates for Accessories: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.

1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. 4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with

installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

D. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.



3.2 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

3.3 RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.

B. Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughout length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of carpet and resilient floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads before applying liquid floor polish.

1. Apply two coat(s).

C. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.


PARTNERS 15-175B RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519-1


SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Vinyl composition floor tile (VCT).

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.

C. Maintenance data.


A. Qualification Data: For Installer and waterjet cutting company.


A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer in spaces to receive floor tile.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer.

C. Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.

E. Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.



PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE (VCT-#)

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Armstrong “Imperial Texture Standard Excelon” or a comparable product from the following:

1. Mannington Commercial

2. Congoleum Corporation. 3. Tarkett, Inc.

B. Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.

C. Wearing Surface: Smooth.

D. Thickness: 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 12 by 12 inches (305 by 305 mm).

F. Colors and Patterns: Refer to ‘Material Finish / Color Schedule Section 000200’ for color selections.

2.2 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer for applications indicated. 1. Basis of Design: Subject to compliance with manufacturer’s requirements, provide Ardex “Feather

Finish” or equal.

B. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit floor tile and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24):

a. VCT Tile Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L.

C. Floor Polish: Provide protective liquid floor polish products as recommended by manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.



1. Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners. 2. Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that

contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Do not use solvents.

3. Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

4. Moisture Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor covering manufacturer and as follows. Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing.

a. Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test, ASTM F 1869. Proceed with installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb of water/1000 sq. ft. (1.36 kg of water/92.9 sq. m) in 24 hours.

C. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate. 1. At existing concrete slabs scheduled to receive resilient floor tile, skimcoat entire existing surface

with trowelable leveling and patching compound.

D. Do not install floor tiles until they are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

E. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.

B. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

1. Lay tiles square with room axis or as indicated.

C. Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence as manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

1. Lay tiles with grain running in one direction.

D. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

E. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.



G. Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce a completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesive spreader marks, and other surface imperfections.


A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of floor tile.

B. Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying:

1. Apply two coats to vinyl composition tile.

2. Apply two coats of Sincol 100 floor finish or as required to attain desired gloss. Spread at recommended spread rate, allow drying time between coats as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.


PARTNERS 15-175B EXTERIOR PAINTING 099113-1


SECTION 099113 - EXTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following exterior substrates:. 1. Galvanized metal.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.

3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.



1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 2 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. Colors: As indicated in Material Finish / Color Schedule.

2.2 METAL PRIMERS

A. Cementitious Galvanized-Metal Primer: MPI #26.

1. VOC Content: E Range of E1.

2.3 EXTERIOR LATEX PAINTS

A. Exterior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #11 (Gloss Level 5).


PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

C. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.



1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates and paint systems indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

E. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 EXTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. Galvanized-Metal Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI EXT 5.3A.

a. Prime Coat: Cementitious galvanized-metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Exterior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Exterior latex (semigloss).


PARTNERS 15-175B INTERIOR PAINTING 099123-1


SECTION 099123 - INTERIOR PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes surface preparation and the application of paint systems on the following interior substrates: 1. Concrete masonry units (CMU). 2. Steel. 3. Galvanized metal. 4. Gypsum board. 5. Concrete.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each finish and for each color and texture required.

C. Product List: Printout of current "MPI Approved Products List" for each product category specified in Part 2, with the proposed product highlighted.


A. MPI Standards:

1. Products: Complying with MPI standards indicated and listed in "MPI Approved Products List." 2. Preparation and Workmanship: Comply with requirements in "MPI Architectural Painting

Specification Manual" for products and paint systems indicated. 3. Finishes are to be as follows:

a. All soffits and gypsum board ceilings are to receive a ‘G1” flat finish. b. All gypsum board walls are to receive a ‘G3’ egg shell finish. c. All masonry block / door frames are to receive a ‘G5’ semi-gloss finish.

B. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in Part 3.

a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. (9 sq. m). b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required.

2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated.



3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples.

a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that are from same production run (batch mix) as materials applied and that are packaged for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Quantity: Furnish an additional 5 percent, but not less than 2 gal. of each material and color applied.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility:

1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.

2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:

1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 4. Flat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 5. Nonflat Topcoat Paints: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 6. Anti-Corrosive and Anti-Rust Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L. 7. Floor Coatings: VOC not more than 100 g/L. 8. Shellacs, Clear: VOC not more than 730 g/L. 9. Shellacs, Pigmented: VOC not more than 550 g/L. 10. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L. 11. Zinc-Rich Industrial Maintenance Primers: VOC content of not more than 340 g/L. 12. Pre-Treatment Wash Primers: VOC content of not more than 420 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop:



1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings).

2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following:

a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: As indicated in Material Finish / Color Schedule.

2.2 BLOCK FILLERS

A. Interior/Exterior Latex Block Filler: MPI #4.


B. Interior/Exterior Epoxy Block Filler: MPI #116. 1. VOC Content: E Range of E2.

2.3 PRIMERS/SEALERS

A. Interior Latex Primer/Sealer: MPI #50.




2.4 METAL PRIMERS

A. Quick-Drying Alkyd Metal Primer: MPI #76.


2.5 LATEX PAINTS

A. Interior Latex (Flat): MPI #53 (Gloss Level 1).


B. Interior Latex (Eggshell): MPI #52 (Gloss Level 3).


C. Interior Latex (Semigloss): MPI #54 (Gloss Level 5).


D. EPOXY PAINT

1. Interior/Exterior Epoxy (water based): MPI #115

2. Pigmented Epoxy / Polyamide: MPI #77

2.6 QUICK-DRYING ENAMELS

A. Quick-Drying Enamel (Semigloss): MPI #81 (Gloss Level 5).


2.7 ALKYD PAINTS

A. Interior Alkyd (Semigloss): MPI #47 (Gloss Level 5).

1. VOC Content: E Range of E2. 2. Environmental Performance Rating: EPR 1.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.



B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows:

1. Concrete: 12 percent. 2. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent. 3. Wood: 15 percent. 4. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 5. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry.

1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION AND APPLICATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual" applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants.

1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

C. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

D. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in equipment rooms and occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work:

a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Uninsulated plastic piping. c. Pipe hangers and supports. d. Tanks that do not have factory-applied final finishes. e. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and

outlets. f. Duct, equipment, and pipe insulation having cotton or canvas insulation covering or other

paintable jacket material. g. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

2. Electrical Work: a. Telephone backer boards. b. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.



E. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

F. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.3 INTERIOR PAINTING SCHEDULE

A. CMU Substrates:

1. Latex System: MPI INT 4.2A.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior latex block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (semigloss).

2. Epoxy System: MPI INT 4.2G.

a. Prime Coat: Interior/exterior epoxy block filler. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior alkyd matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior/Exterior epoxy (water based).

B. Steel Substrates:

1. Quick-Drying Enamel System: MPI INT 5.1A. (Use on Hollow Metal Frames, Steel Lintels)

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Quick-drying enamel matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Quick-drying enamel (semigloss).

2. Latex System: MPI INT 5.1.Q. (Use on Exposed Steel Roof Framing and Roof Deck)

a. Prime Coat: Quick-drying alkyd metal primer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

C. Gypsum Board Substrates (Ceilings and Soffits):


a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer. b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (flat).

D. Gypsum Board Substrates (Walls):


a. Prime Coat: Interior latex primer/sealer.



b. Intermediate Coat: Interior latex matching topcoat. c. Topcoat: Interior latex (eggshell).

F. Concrete Substrates:

1. Kitchen and Corridor: Epoxy System

a. Prime Coat: Pigmented Epoxy / Polyamide b. Intermediate Coat: Pigmented Epoxy / Polyamide. c. Top Coat: Pigmented Epoxy / Polyamide.

2. Concrete Floors in Kitchen and Corridor: Epoxy System with color flakes and clear coat.

a. Basis of Design: Provide “100% solids epoxy floor system with as manufactured by Perfor-mance Floor (586.468.3400) or approved equal. System shall have color flakes uniformly broadcast across floor area (medium coverage) and shall have clear epoxy top coat. System shall have a minimum thickness of 9.7 mils, per coat. 1). Preparation: Diamond grind existing concrete floor surfaces and glazed masonry base to remove all existing paint. Prepare existing surfaces as well as new surface to receive epoxy system per manufacturer’s recommendations. Recommendations by the Society for Protec-tive Coatings (SSPC) shall also be followed. 2). Crack Fill: Fill cracks and holes larger than ½” with acceptable crack filler, prior to installa-tion of epoxy system.

b. Initial Coat: Provide “Performance Floor 100% solids epoxy with flake broadcast”. c. Top Coat: Provide “Performance Polyurea Clear Coat Epoxy”. d. Color: Match architect’s sample.


PARTNERS 15-175B VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS 101100-1


SECTION 101100 - VISUAL DISPLAY UNITS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Visual display board assemblies.



B. Shop Drawings: For visual display units.

1. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachment to other work. 2. Show locations of panel joints.

C. Samples: For each type of visual display unit indicated.

D. Product Schedule: For visual display units.


A. Product test reports.

B. Sample warranties.



1.5 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheets: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace porcelain-enamel face sheets that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.




PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

2.2 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARD ASSEMBLY

A. Visual Display Board Assembly: Factory fabricated.

1. Assembly: Markerboard and tackboard. 2. Corners: Square. 3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings.

B. Markerboard Panel: Porcelain-enamel-faced markerboard panel on core indicated.

1. Color: White.

C. Tackboard Panel: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard panel on core indicated.

1. Fabric Wrapped Edge: Wrap edge of tackboard panel with fabric facing. 2. Color and Pattern: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

D. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; standard size and shape. 1. Aluminum Finish: Clear anodic finish.

E. Joints: Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect.

F. Combination Assemblies: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed trim between abutting sections of visual display panels.

2.3 MARKERBOARD PANELS (MBD)

A. Porcelain-Enamel Markerboard Panels: Balanced, high-pressure, factory-laminated markerboard assembly of three-ply construction, consisting of moisture-barrier backing, core material, and porcelain-enamel face sheet with low-gloss finish. Laminate panels under heat and pressure with manufacturer's standard, flexible waterproof adhesive.

1. Face Sheet Thickness: 0.021 inch (0.53 mm) uncoated base metal thickness. 1. Particleboard Core: 1/2 inch (13 mm) thick; with 0.015-inch- (0.38-mm-) thick, aluminum sheet

backing.



2. Laminating Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard moisture-resistant thermoplastic type.

3. Manufacturers:

a. AARCO Products, Inc. b. ADP/Lemco, Inc. c. Best-Rite Manufacturing. d. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. e. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.

2.4 MARKERBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Provide at Classroom Markerboards: 1. Marker tray: Manufacturer's standard, continuous, extruded aluminum, box type with slanted front,

grooved tray, and cast-aluminum end closures. 2. Map Rail: Provide the following accessories:

a. Display Rail: Continuous and integral with map rail; fabricated from cork approximately 1 to 2 inches (25 to 50 mm) wide.

b. End Stops: Located at each end of map rail. c. Map Hooks: Two map hooks for every 48 inches (1220 mm) of map rail or fraction thereof. d. Paper Holder: Extruded aluminum; designed to hold paper by clamping action. e. Flag Holder: One for each room.

B. Provide at Markerboards in areas other than Classrooms: 1. Marker tray: Manufacturer's standard, extruded aluminum, satin anodized finish, magnetic marker

tray. Size: 24” long. Provide one tray for each marker board.

2.5 TACKBOARD PANELS (TBD)

A. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tack Assembly: 1/8-inch- (3-mm-) thick, vinyl-fabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 3/8-inch- (9.5-mm-) thick fiberboard backing.

1. Manufacturers:

a. AARCO Products, Inc. b. ADP/Lemco, Inc. c. Best-Rite Manufacturing. d. Claridge Products & Equipment, Inc. e. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc.

2.6 MATERIALS

A. Porcelain-Enamel Face Sheet: PEI-1002, with face sheet manufacturer's standard two- or three-coat process.

B. Natural-Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics indicated.



C. Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II, burlap weave; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

D. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.

E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1.

F. Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.

G. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208 cellulosic fiber insulating board.

H. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

I. Adhesives for Field Application: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining adhesive for use with specific type of panels, sheets, or assemblies; and for substrate application; as recommended in writing by visual display unit manufacturer.

2.7 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

B. Factory-Fabricated Visual Display Board Assemblies: Attach concealed clips, hangers, and grounds to wall surfaces and to visual display board assemblies with fasteners at not more than 16 inches (400 mm) o.c. Secure tops and bottoms of boards to walls.


PARTNERS 15-175B PANEL SIGNAGE 101423-1


SECTION 101423 - PANEL SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Room-identification signs.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For Room-identification signs.

1. Include fabrication and installation details and attachments to other work. 2. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and

accessories. 3. Show message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including raised characters and Braille, and

layout for each sign at least half size.

C. Samples: Provide fully assembled full size sample for each type of sign product with colors and textures as specified.

D. Sign Schedule: Use same designations specified or indicated on Drawings or in sign schedule.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Accessibility Standard: Comply with applicable provisions in [the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities and ICC A117.1 for signs.

2.2 SIGNS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide 9/16” thickness Modular Standard Sign System (as indicated on drawings) as manufactured by 2/90 Sign Systems Inc. (provide with tamper-resistant ends with spanner fasteners) or a comparable product by one of the following:

1. ACE Sign Systems, Inc. 2. Advance Corporation. 3. APCO Graphics, Inc. 4. ASE, Inc. 5. ASI Sign Systems, Inc.



6. Best Sign Systems, Inc. 7. Fossil Industries, Inc. 8. Mohawk Sign Systems. 9. Stamprite Supersine; a division of Stamp Rite Inc.

B. Interior Panel Sign: Provide sign with smooth panel surfaces constructed with to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, uniform surfaces; with message and characters having uniform faces, sharp corners, and precisely formed lines and profiles; and as follows:

1. Laminated-Sheet Sign: Photopolymer face sheet with raised graphics laminated over subsurface graphics to acrylic backing sheet to produce composite sheet. a. Subsurface Graphics: Subsurface ADA. b. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2. Sign-Panel Perimeter: Finish edges smooth.

a. Edge Condition: Square cut. b. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square.

3. Frame: Vertical retainers.

a. Material: Aluminum. b. Profile: Square. c. Corner Condition in Elevation: Square. d. Finish and Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

4. Mounting: Surface mounted to wall with concealed anchors. 5. Size: As indicated on drawings. 6. Text: As indicated on drawings. Confirm with Owner prior to fabrication. 7. Lower Insert Material: Subsurface ADA 8. Upper Insert Material: Subsurface ADA 9. Window Insert: Paper as selected from manufacturer’s full range and clear Protective Lens. Color

of channels of window insert as selected from manufacturer’s full range. 10. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8mm) above surface with

contrasting colors as selected from manufacturer’s full range.

C. Refer to Signage Schedule for list of all signs.

2.3 PANEL-SIGN MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Type UVF (UV filtering).

2.4 ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners and Anchors: Manufacturer's standard as required for secure anchorage of signage, noncorrosive and compatible with each material joined, and complying with the following:



1. Use concealed fasteners and anchors. 2. Furnish stainless steel fasteners. 3. Exposed Metal-Fastener Components, General:

a. Fabricated from same basic metal and finish of fastened metal unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard sign assemblies according to requirements indicated.

1. Mill joints to a tight, hairline fit. Form assemblies and joints exposed to weather to resist water penetration and retention.

2. Provide welds and brazes behind finished surfaces without distorting or discoloring exposed side. Clean exposed welded and brazed connections of flux, and dress exposed and contact surfaces.

3. Conceal connections if possible; otherwise, locate connections where they are inconspicuous. 4. Internally brace signs for stability and for securing fasteners. 5. Provide rebates, lugs, and brackets necessary to assemble components and to attach to existing

work. Drill and tap for required fasteners. Use concealed fasteners where possible; use exposed fasteners that match sign finish.

B. Subsurface-Applied Graphics: Apply graphics to back face of clear face-sheet material to produce precisely formed image. Image shall be free of rough edges.

C. Subsurface-Engraved Graphics: Reverse engrave back face of clear face-sheet material. Fill resulting copy with manufacturer's standard enamel. Apply opaque manufacturer's standard background color coating over enamel-filled copy.

D. Brackets: Fabricate brackets, fittings, and hardware for bracket-mounted signs to suit sign construction and mounting conditions indicated. Modify manufacturer's standard brackets as required. 1. Stainless-Steel Brackets: Factory finish brackets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate and install signs where indicated using mounting methods indicated and according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Install signs level, plumb, true to line, and at locations and heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance.

2. Install signs so they do not protrude or obstruct according to the accessibility standard. 3. Before installation, verify that sign surfaces are clean and free of materials or debris that would

impair installation. 4. Corrosion Protection: Coat concealed surfaces of exterior aluminum in contact with grout, concrete,

masonry, wood, or dissimilar metals, with a heavy coat of bituminous paint. 5. Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or

possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent wall. Locate to allow approach within 36 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within the



swing of the door. Coordinate exact location with overall plan layout to be submitted for review with shop submittal.

B. Mounting Methods: 1. Brackets: Remove loose debris from substrate surface and install backbar or bracket supports in

position so that signage is correctly located and aligned.

C. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films after construction is complete prior to turning over project to Owner.


PARTNERS 15-175B FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS 104413-1


SECTION 104413 - FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes fire protection cabinets for fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: For fire protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified.

D. Maintenance data.


A. Fire-Rated, Fire Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 for fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.

B. Coordinate size of fire protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicated are accommodated.

C. Coordinate sizes and locations of fire protection cabinets with wall depths.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.

B. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 666, Type 304.

C. Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class 1 (clear).

2.2 FIRE PROTECTION CABINET

A. Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.



1. Basis-of-Design: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s Manufacturing Co., Architectural Series, Model #SS-2409-R3, or equal by one of the following:

a. Fire End & Croker Corporation;. b. J. L. Industries, Inc., a division of Activar Construction Products Group;. c. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc;. d. Modern Metal Products, Division of Technico Inc.; Insert product name or designation. e. Moon-American;. f. Potter Roemer LLC;. g. Watrous Division, American Specialties, Inc.

B. Cabinet Construction: Nonrated. Provide fire-rated cabinets when located in fire-rated walls.

C. Cabinet Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

D. Semirecessed Cabinet: Cabinet box partially recessed in walls of sufficient depth to suit style of trim indicated; with one-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surrounding wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend). Provide where walls are of insufficient depth for recessed cabinets but are of sufficient depth to accommodate semirecessed cabinet installation. 1. Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch (64-mm) backbend depth.

E. Cabinet Trim Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

F. Door Material: Stainless-steel sheet.

G. Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.

H. Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).

I. Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trim style, and door material and style indicated.

J. Accessories:

1. Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to fire protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or baked-enamel finish.

2. Door Lock: Cam lock that allows door to be opened during emergency by pulling sharply on door handle.

3. Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, and location.

a. Identify fire extinguisher in fire protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER.”

1) Location: Applied to cabinet door. 2) Application Process: Engraved. 3) Lettering Color: Black. 4) Orientation: Vertical.

K. Finishes:



1. Manufacturer's standard baked-enamel paint for the following: a. Interior of cabinet.

2. Stainless Steel: No. 4.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. Fire Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub), with trim, frame, door, and hardware to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated. Miter and weld joints and grind smooth.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine walls and partitions for suitable framing depth and blocking where semirecessed cabinets will be installed and prepare recesses as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.

B. Install fire protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, at heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Fire Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.

D. Adjust fire protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devices operate properly.

E. Replace fire protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.


PARTNERS 15-175B FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-1


SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Operation and maintenance data.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.


A. NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable Fire Extinguishers."

B. Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fire extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10. b. Faulty operation of valves or release levers.

2. Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

A. Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire protection cabinet and mounting bracket indicated.

PARTNERS 15-175B FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416-2


1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Larsen’s Manufacturing Co. “MP5-A” fire extinguisher (U.O.N) or comparable product by one of the following:

a. Amerex Corporation. b. Ansul Incorporated; Tyco International Ltd. c. Badger Fire Protection; a Kidde company. d. Buckeye Fire Equipment Company. e. Fire End & Croker Corporation. f. J. L. Industries, Inc.; a division of Activar Construction Products Group. g. Kidde Residential and Commercial Division; Subsidiary of Kidde plc. h. Moon-American. i. Pem All Fire Extinguisher Corp.; a division of PEM Systems, Inc. j. Potter Roemer LLC. k. Pyro-Chem; Tyco Safety Products.

2. Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B.

3. Kitchen Fire Extinguisher: Provide Larsen’s “WC-6L” or comparable product by one of the manufacturer’s listed in paragraph 2.1.A.1 for Kitchen location. UL-rated 2A:K in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.

1. Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.

B. Install fire extinguishers in locations indicated and in compliance with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. All fire Extinguishers to be installed in cabinets at locations shown on drawings.


PARTNERS 15-175B MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

109001 - 1


SECTION 109001 – MISCELLANEOUS SPECALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. List products

B. Related sections;

1. Division 01 for project bidding, conditions of the contract, and pertinent sections as applicable to the products specified shall apply to this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, product specific operational clearance requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work, required operational clearances.

1. Show anchoring type and substrate requirements. 2. Include general installed height, spacing, clearance from adjacent structure or equipment, 3. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring. 4. Mechanical utility connections

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified or available.

D. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer as required for product specified.

E. Product Test Reports: For referenced product association standard, Underwriters Laboratory standard, ASTM standard, etc.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: For product specified including but not limited to mechanical parts, electrical power and control systems, product finish and care requirements, routine maintenance procedures, to be included in the Operation and Maintenance manuals.

G. Warranties: Sample of manufacturers warranties.


A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of specified products.

PARTNERS 15-175B MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES 109001 - 2


B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: For compliance with fire resistance and surface burning requirements specified, or required based on project use and classification for applicable code compliance as determined by authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

1.4 WARRANTY

A. For each product specified: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace products or components that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.


1.5 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver items in manufacture’s original unopened protective packaging.

B. Store materials in original protective packaging to prevent physical damage, soiling, or wetting.

C. Handle so as to prevent damage to finish surfaces.

D. Leave protective adhered film in place on product surfaces until substantial completion to prevent damage to finished surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Basis-of –Design Product: Listed product manufacturer and model numbers represent the minimum requirements for products specified. Manufacturers offering similar products in form, function, quality, and finish may be incorporated into the work with architects/owners documented approval prior to bid.

1. Product alternatives: Subject to compliance with the specified requirements and basis of design product need to be submitted 72 hour prior to the bid day and time for preapproval including comparative product data, available finish selections, functional data testing, and other applicable information matching or exceeding the specified product subject to the architects interpretation.

2.2 PRODUCT

A. Ladder Dock

1. Ladder Dock by Ladder Port; 7081 Dan McGuire Drive, Brighton, MI 481116; 800-770-8851. 2. Provide paint to match sheet metal coping.

PARTNERS 15-175B MISCELLANEOUS SPECIALTIES

109001 - 3


B. Building Expansion Joint

1. Provide expanding foam laminated backer with field-applied non-sag sealant similar to “Backerseal” by Masco.net or similar product.

2. Match final joint sealant with control joint sealant color for exterior brick.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 INSPECTION

A. Inspect area and surfaces of product installation for proper structurally sound condition to support product installation. Report condition or interference which would adversely affect the installation or functioning of the product being installed

B. Coordinate product installation and functional clearances with other new construction and or equipment and or associated utility installations.

C. Sequence installation so as to not interfere with other construction or equipment installation or construction finishing operation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install product per manufactures requirements with manufacturer approved fastening methods and materials.

B. Set product level and flush with adjacent construction and finishes to provide a complete and functional installation. Coordinate associated utility connection and function to provide a fully functioning product system.

C. Remove protective film or temporary guards, clean product and adjacent installation area, adjust product installation and function to provide a complete and functional installation.


PARTNERS 15-175B FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT 114000 - 1


SECTION 114000 – FOOD SERVICE EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Foodservice Equipment: Standard manufactured and custom fabricated items. B. Inclusive of Job: The work under this section consists of providing all labor, material, products, and

equipment that are necessary and required for the complete installation of the food service equipment, as indicated on drawings, and as herein specified.

1.02 RELATED SECTIONS A. Architectural Documents: All work described in these documents must be carefully coordinated with

the work of those other trades directed by the terms and conditions of the Architect's and Engineer's documents. The drawings and specifications of the Architect shall direct the Foodservice Equipment Contractor with respect to the project schedule, contract issues, coordination and payment requirements. These documents can be obtained by contacting the Architect.

B. Contract: All work by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall be performed under the contract

and payment terms and conditions as defined in the American Institute of Architects document: A101 Standard Form of Agreement Between Owner and Contractor, 1987 edition, modified by substituting the words "Foodservice Consultant" in place of the word "Architect" and amended to include all of the work as outlined in the project documents of the Foodservice Consultant, for primary requirements, and Architect, for building and engineering reference information. Execute this contract agreement after notice of award of contract, prior to start of work, but not later than 15 days after Notice to Proceed. Provide a copy of the contract to Food Service Designs.

1.03 COORDINATION WITH OTHER TRADES A. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Furnish loose to the Mechanical Contractor; gas hoses, pressure regulators, vacuum breakers,

water filters, faucets, waste valves, overflows, swirl sprays, solenoid valves and floor troughs where specified.

2. F.E.C. shall coordinate location of grease traps with the Mechanical Contractor. Grease traps

must be easily accessible for cleaning and maintenance. Under no circumstances will legs, bases, cross bracing, supports or undershelves be cut or modified in the field. Modifications or adjustments will be made at the factory.

3. F.E.C. shall coordinate location of soda chases with installing trades. All chases will be located

under counters and cabinets and free of obstructions. Under no circumstances will any part of the chase be exposed or counters modified in field.

4. F.E.C. shall coordinate roll down shutter doors with installing trades. The tracks must be



2

incorporated into backsplashes, counters, tables, equipment, etc. for a clean and finished look. Under no circumstances will counters be modified in field.

B. The Mechanical Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Make all final utility connections between the rough-in point and the equipment. 2. Provide all final interconnections including; faucets, sink drains, sink waste valves, overflow

connections, disposer piping, trough veyors, hot food wells and floor troughs. 3. Provide traps, connecting pipe, valves, stops, floor drains, floor sinks, grease traps, and all other

hardware, supplies and parts necessary for the performance of work under this contract; unless specified otherwise in the item specification. All exposed plumbing above the counter and in direct line of site shall be stainless steel or chrome plated.

4. Properly install all drain assemblies and shut-off valves for sinks, hot food wells, etc. All drain

assemblies must be installed per all local health department prevailing codes. 5. All work must meet all applicable state and local codes and conditions. 6. Provide and obtain all permits, licenses and approvals required. Permit fees will be paid by the

Mechanical Contractor. C. The Electrical Contractor shall perform the following: 1. Make all final connections between the rough-in point and the equipment. 2. Provide all final interconnections including; disposers, cold pans, food wells, walk-ins, ventilation

systems, serving counters, etc. 3. Furnish all safety cut-outs, line disconnect devices, shunt trip breakers, power panels, power

cords, receptacles, outlets, conduit, wire and other electrical controls, fittings, and connections necessary for food service equipment, with the exception of controls, disconnects and fittings integral to the food service equipment, which shall be furnished by the Food service Equipment Contractor.

4. All work must meet all applicable state and local codes and conditions. 5. Provide and obtain all permits, licenses and approvals required. Permit fees will be paid by the

Electrical Contractor. D. The Other Contractors shall perform the following: 1. The Other Trades shall provide necessary flues and/or vents of size and capacity required to

operate fixtures. Roof openings, flashing and sealing for food service ventilation shall be provided by the Other Trades.

2. The Other Trades shall provide necessary sleeves or chases of size and capacity required for

refrigeration lines and wiring harnesses. Roof openings, flashing and sealing for food service refrigeration lines shall be provided by the Other Trades.



1.04 DEFINITIONS AND ABBREVIATIONS A. General Explanation: Certain terms and abbreviations used in Contract Documents are defined

generally in this article. Definitions and explanations of this section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the work to the extent not stated more explicitly in another provision of Contract Documents.

B. F.E.C.: Food service Equipment Contractor. "F.E.C." abbreviates "Food service Equipment

Contractor." C. G.C.: General Contractor. "G.C." abbreviates "General Contractor." As read, work by the General

Contractor refers to work by the General Contractor and their subcontractors. D. B.I.B.: Base Item Bid. "B.I.B." abbreviates "Base Item Bid." The Base Item Bid is material, product,

or equipment identified in the specifications as the standard to be provided. In the Item Specifications for foodservice equipment, each item identifies a single manufacturer as the Base Item Bid. The Base Item Bid is to be distinguished from Contractor's Options, Alternates, and Substitutions.

E. Alternate: A different material, product, equipment, specialty, system, or other part of the work than

that which is the Base Item Bid, and for which the Owner desires a comparative quotation. An alternate carries no presumption of being equal to the Base Item Bid. Rather, it represents a different product, system, specialty or approach under consideration for use in the work. Alternates are governed by the terms and conditions of Part 1.06 of this Section.

F. Furnish: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "furnish" shall mean and intend supply

and delivery to project site, unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, calibration and operator training as appropriate in each instance.

G. Install: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "install" shall mean and intend that the

contractor shall perform all work as outlined in the Contract Documents, shall assemble all specified equipment of the contract in one piece in the required locations of the building, and shall make necessary connections as specified within these Contract Document Specifications.

H. Provide: Except as otherwise defined in greater detail, term "provide" shall mean and intend furnish

and install, tested and clean, complete and ready for intended use, as appropriate in each instance. I. Indicated: The term "indicated" is a cross-reference to graphics, notes or schedules on drawings, to

other paragraphs, or schedules in the specifications, and to similar means of recording requirements in Contract Documents. Use of terms such as "shown," "noted," "scheduled," and "specified" used in lieu of "indicated," is intended only to help reader locate cross-reference and not limitation of location is intended.

J. Directed, Requested, etc.: Where not otherwise explained, terms such as "directed," "requested,"

"selected," "approved," "required," "accepted," and "permitted" mean "directed by Food Service Designs," "requested by Food Service Designs," and the like. However, no such implied meaning shall extend responsibility of Food Service Designs into Contractor's area of supervision.

K. Project Site, Job Site: The space available to Contractor for performance of the Work, either

exclusively or in conjunction with others performing other work as part of the Project.



4

L. Or: Used in inclusive sense to indicate alternatives of any item or any combination or items in a list unless otherwise indicated.

M. Include: The word include and its forms is not meant to limit provisions to a list nor to exclude other,

unnamed items from a list which it precedes. The phrase, "but not limited to," may be assumed to follow uses of the word include and including.

N. Installer: The entity (person or firm) engaged by Contractor or its subcontractor for performance of a

particular unit of work at project site, including installation, erection, application and similar required operations. It is a general requirement that such entities (Installers) be expert in operations they are engaged to perform.

O. RPZ: Abbreviates reduced pressure zone backflow preventer. P. Cross Connection: Means a connection or arrangement of piping or appurtenances through which a

backflow could occur. Cross connections may be made “directly” or “indirectly”. Q. Backflow: Means water of questionable quality, wastes, or other contaminants entering a public water

supply system due to a reversal of flow. Backflow can occur by either backpressure or backsiphonage conditions.

R. Backpressure: Backpressure conditions occur when the downstream pressure exceeds the upstream

pressure. S. Backsiphonage: Backsiphonage is caused by a vacuum or partial vacuum in a water supply system. 1.05 INDEMNIFICATION, INSURANCE AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS

Prior to commencement of construction, the Contractor shall advise all insurance agents and companies retained by the Contractor of the conditions and provisions of this Contract pertaining to indemnification, insurance and waivers of subrogation. Failure of the Contractor to so notify the aforesaid agents and companies shall in no way relieve the insurance companies policies from their obligations under this contract. All insurances required and maintained under these provisions shall be considered primary insurance as respects the owner and it's agents, officials and employees, and any other insurance or self-insurance maintained by them shall be considered excess and shall not contribute with the policies to be maintained by the Contractor.

A. The contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless the owner and it's agents, officials and employees,

against and from all claims, judgments, losses, damages, demands, payments, recoveries, legal proceedings, orders, and decrees of every nature and description, including attorneys' fees, arising out of or resulting from the Contractor's or subcontractors' performance or nonperformance of the Contract.

The Contractor shall waive any rights of subrogation against the owner and it's agents, officials and employees, for personal injury or property damage arising from the Contractor's performance or nonperformance of the Contract. In the event of any payment by any insurer of the Contractor under any policy of insurance, the insurer of the Contractor shall not be subrogated to any of the Contractor's rights of recovery therefore against the Owner. The Contractor waives any and all rights of recovery against the Owner for losses occurring to any property insured by the Contractor arising from this



Contract. To the extent that there is property insurance coverage for damage to the Work, the Owner agree to waive their right of subrogation against the Contractor and any subcontractors.

B. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor entering into a contract under these specifications thereby

agrees to be held wholly responsible for the faithful execution of the same and for all damages occurring from a failure to do so; and no expense or trouble through oversight, concealment, or otherwise, shall relieve the Foodservice Equipment Contractor from such a responsibility. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor will, as a prerequisite for this contract, possess insurance as follows:

Workers Compensation Statutory Limits Employer's Liability $ 500,000.00 min. General Liability, Commercial Form

(including Premises Operations Contractual (Indemnification) Insurance, Products and Completed Operations Hazard - maintained to beneficiary occupancy, Broad Form Property Damage, Independent Contractors Protective)

Bodily Injury and Ea. occurrence $ 500,000.00 min. Property Damage, Combined Single Aggregate $ 1,000,000.00 min. Limit Products/Completed Aggregate $ 1,000,000.00 min. Operations Personal Injury Aggregate $ 500,000.00 min. Automobile Liability, Comprehensive Form (including Owned, Hired, and Non-Owned) Bodily Injury Ea. person $ 500,000.00 min. Ea. accident $ 500,000.00 min. Property Damage Ea. occurrence $ 500,000.00 min. Excess Liability, Umbrella Form (including excess third party liability) Bodily Injury Ea. occurrence $ 1,000,000.00 min. Property Damage Aggregate $ 1,000,000.00 min. Combined C. The Contractor shall provide, in addition to the project bid prices, separate pricing for the following

insurances: 1. Builder's Risk or Installation Floater

Coverage, with an insurer approved by the Owner, to be in force from date that work on the project begins to date of final completion and acceptance by the Owner. Coverage shall be written to cover "All Risks" of physical loss, including flood, theft, vandalism and malicious mischief. The



6

coverage shall include personal property and fixtures to be installed, whether or not in place, stored elsewhere, or in transit at the risk of the insured(s).

a) Coverage shall be on a non-reporting 100% replacement value basis with any co-insurance

requirement being waived by an agree amount endorsement. b) The policy shall include, as named insured, the Owner, as their interests may appear. D. The Owner may, at its option, elect to accept either or both coverages as specified in Section 1.06 B &

C above at the cost provided by the Contractor, or decline either or both coverages supplied by the Contractor and deduct the appropriate allowances from the project price bid. The Owner may, at its option, elect decision by the Owner to forego the purchase of either or both indemnity which the Owner may have with respect to the work performed under the Contract.

E. Safety and Compliance with Laws and Regulations: The Contractor shall at all times observe and

comply with all Federal, State, local and/or municipal laws, ordinances, rules and regulations which may in any manner affect the equipment and materials used in the proposed Project, those employed on the Project, and the conduct of the Project. The Contractor shall save harmless and indemnify the Owner and their agents, officials and employees, against any claim or liability arising from the violation of any Federal, State, local and/or municipal laws, ordinances, rules and regulations, whether the violations are by the Contractor or any subcontractors.

1. The Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety

precautions and programs in connection with the performance of the Contract. 2. The Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner of any damages or loss arising our of or in

connection with the performance of the Contractor, or any subcontractors, and shall cooperate with any insurer in the investigation, remediation and settlement of any damage or loss.

The above Contractual (Indemnification) and Excess (Umbrella) Liability Insurance must name Food Service Designs, the Architects, the Owner, and their officials and employees, as additional insured. Any of the above insurance must be written by a company licensed to do business in Michigan during the Contract. Certificates of Insurance must be submitted to each insured and must contain transcripts from the proper office of the insurer, evidencing the additional insured, the extent of insurance, the location and operations to which the insurance applies, the expiration date, plus the mandatory provision that coverages will not expire or be canceled without at least 30 days prior written notice to each insured by certified or registered mail. Insurance coverage shall remain in effect for a period of ninety (90) days from the date of final project acceptance.

Do not commence Contract work until these minimum insurance requirements are active. Establishment of these minimum requirements shall not be construed to mean same are adequate for the type and method of work to be performed and/or that the Foodservice Equipment Contractor rely on the type and limits for the Contractor's operations. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor is totally responsible to broaden the scope and limits as necessary for the potential maximum exposure and risk involved.



1.06 SPECIFIED MANUFACTURERS & ALTERNATES A. Specified Products & Materials: Certain, definite brands of materials, products, and equipment are

specified as the standard of quality. These brands constitute the base item bid (abbreviated hereinafter as B.I.B.) Where one or more additional brands are named as B.I.B., the bid may be based on any one of the named brands.

B. Voluntary Alternates: Bidders are encouraged to suggest and quote other brands of the same quality

that they may desire to substitute. It is not the intention to discriminate against other brands or manufacturers whose materials, products or equipment is equal or better to what has been specified. Rather, the naming of a specific brand is intended to establish a definite standard. These shall be submitted as Voluntary Alternates.

1. Voluntary Alternates must be proposed independently of the base bid. and mandatory alternate

bid. 2. The Owner reserves the right to accept or reject any alternate bid. Bids must be based on B.I.B.

items as specified, not per mandatory or voluntary alternates. C. Substitutions: Substitutions will not be accepted. Requests for substitutions will be considered before

award of Contract when extensive revisions to contract documents are not required and changes are in keeping with general intent of Contract Documents, when fully documented and properly submitted, when any conditions stated elsewhere in the bid documents are satisfied, and when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, all as judged by Food Service Designs.

1. Where the required product, material, or method cannot be provided within Contract Time, but not

as a result of F.E.C.'s failure to pursue the work promptly or coordinate various activities properly; 2. Where required product, material, or method cannot be provided in a manner which is compatible

with other materials of the work, or cannot be properly coordinated therewith, or cannot be warranted as required, or cannot be used without adversely affecting Owner's insurance coverage on completed work, or will encounter other substantial non-compliances which are not possible to otherwise overcome except by making requested substitution, which F.E.C. thereby certifies to overcome such non-compatibility, non-coordination, non-warranty, non-insurability or other non-compliance as claimed;

3. Where substantial advantage is offered Owner, in terms of cost, time, energy conservation or other

valuable considerations, after deducting offsetting responsibilities Owner may be required to bear, including additional compensation to Food Service Designs for redesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other work by Owner or separate contractors, and similar considerations.

4. Request for a substitution constitutes representation that F.E.C. has investigated proposed

substitution and determined that it meets or exceeds specified product in all respects unless deficiencies are conspicuously noted; will provide same warranty for substitution as for specified product; will coordinate installation and make other changes which may be needed for work to be complete in all respects and do so at his expense; and waives claims for additional costs which may subsequently become apparent. Where such modifications require work by others, such as but not limited to the Owner, to the General Contractor, to Other Trades, to the Architect, Engineer, or Food Service Designs, the cost of said work will be billed ("back charged") against the F.E.C.'s contract.



8

5. Only one request for substitution will be considered for any single product. If substitution is not

accepted, provide specified product. 6. F.E.C.'s submittal of (and Food Service Designs' acceptance of) shop drawings, product data, or

samples which relate to work not complying with requirements of contract documents, does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for a substitution, nor approval thereof.

7. No substitutions will be permitted subsequent to award of Contract except under emergency

conditions such as the sudden and unexpected discontinuance of an item of equipment by the manufacturer. Determination of what conditions warrant emergency substitutions shall be at Food Service Designs' judgment.

a. Identification of product or equipment being replaced by substitution, including related

specification section and drawing numbers, product data, drawings, and catalog sheets and fully documented to show compliance with requirements for substitutions.

8. Because of the practice of certain foodservice equipment manufacturers of offering rebates, gifts,

"spiffs," bonuses, premiums, and other benefits to foodservice equipment dealers as well as individual sales people, and because the eligibility for such benefits may have an influence on the decision by a F.E.C. to propose a substitution, the receipt of and the eligibility for such benefits must be explicitly described. For each proposed substitution, provide statement fully answering the following questions:

a. Is your firm eligible for any benefit, including but not restricted to, rebate programs based on

quantities purchased in a given period, reductions in future prices, discounts, cash rewards, or credits, should the proposed substitution be accepted?

b. Is any individual in your firm eligible for a cash payment, gift, reward, "spiff," or any other form

of benefit if the proposed substitution is accepted? 9. Be prepared to attest to accuracy and completeness of this disclosure if requested by Food

Service Designs. Said attestation shall be in the form of a written statement from an officer of the manufacturer attesting to the accuracy and completeness of the F.E.C.'s disclosure. Where the manufacturer is represented by another firm for marketing purposes (commonly referred to as a manufacturer's rep), an officer of the representing firm also shall provide a signed statement attesting to the accuracy and completeness of the F.E.C.'s disclosure. Refusal or inability to provide said statements when requested shall be considered a withdrawal of the proposed substitution.

The fact that a F.E.C. or individual related to him are eligible for benefits should the proposed substitution be accepted does not provide sufficient cause for the proposed substitution to be declined. However, where there is a difference in judgment between the Owner or Food Service Designs and the F.E.C. as to whether the proposed substitution is in fact an equal to the B.I.B., said benefits will be considered in the decision of whether to accept the proposed substitution.

10 The substitution may require changes in the other parts of the work. By acceptance of a proposed

substitution no representation is made that the nature or extent of such modifications have been determined except as specifically identified by the F.E.C. in his proposal. All changes to the work required by the proposed substitution, whether or not they are identified in the proposal or



subsequently become apparent, shall be completed at the expense of the F.E.C. 11 Should a substitution be accepted and should the substitute material, product, or equipment prove

to be defective or otherwise unsatisfactory for the service intended, as evaluated by Food Service Designs and within the guarantee period as defined in these specifications, the Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall replace this material, product or equipment at no cost to the Owner, with that originally specified.

12 If a substitution is accepted it is the F.E.C.'s responsibility to insure the electrical and mechanical

requirements are correct for the substituted item. D. Inability to Meet Project Requirements Without Modification: If base item bid products or equipment

must be altered to meet the Specifications, and Bidders make no mention that these alterations cannot be made, it will be interpreted that the bids include the alterations as specified. If Bidders cannot make the alterations that would be required, they must condition their bids with a cover letter stating in what ways the specifications cannot be met and why.

1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Distribution: Submittals shall be in conformance to the requirements set forth below; all submittals

shall be to the parties designated by the General Contractor; copied to Food Service Designs. B. The review of submittals is only for compliance to design intent. Food Service Designs SHALL NOT

BE RESPONSIBLE FOR CHECKING DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENT REQUIREMENTS OR CHANGES FROM EARLIER SUBMISSIONS UNLESS CONSPICUOUSLY AND SPECIFICALLY NOTED. Where such changes are indicated on shop drawings, note the drawing changes conspicuously and clearly describe the changes in the transmittal that accompanies the drawing.

The number of copies to be submitted and the deadline for submittal shall be as determined by Food Service Designs. If the number of copies is not specified, eight (8) copies shall be provided. The F.E.C. will be responsible for distribution of drawings and material documents to parties designated by the General Contractor.

C. Product Data: Submit buy out brochures, each item shall have a cover sheet with the following

information; Item number, manufacturer, quantity, model numbers, service connection requirements, performances, materials, furnished accessories, power and fuel requirements, water and drainage requirements and other similar information. Second sheet shall be a manufacturers cut-sheet showing technical data, and installation recommendations, service connection requirements, performances, materials, model numbers, furnished accessories, power and fuel requirements, water and drainage requirements and other similar information.

1. Where equipment is fabricated, provide cover sheet with the following information; Item number,

manufacturer, quantity, the words “SEE MANUFACTURERS SHOP DRAWINGS”, service connection requirements, materials, furnished accessories, power and fuel requirements, water and drainage requirements and other similar information.

D. Shop Drawings of Fabricated Equipment: Submit dimensioned fabrication drawings for custom

fabricated equipment including plans, elevations, and sections, showing materials and gauges used. Cross sections and elevations shall be detailed to a scale of 1-1/2" = 1'-0". Show complete details and



10

dimensions of each item of equipment. Drawings shall be based upon and follow the design drawings and these specifications, without reference to field measurements.

E. Utility Drawings: Submit drawings indicating; item numbers, equipment schedule including item

number, quantity and description of each item, specific points and types of final connection for all utility requirements for foodservice equipment. Utility connections shall be located both horizontally and vertically and indicate details of connection required on each item. Prepare these drawings at 1/4" = 1'-0" scale. Submit separate drawings for equipment lay-out, electrical, plumbing and ventilation.

F. Setting Drawings and Templates: Submit setting drawing and templates for installation of anchorage

devices and for any item where so required in the specifications. Submit setting drawings and templates at full scale.

G. Verifying Field Conditions: When field measurements have been taken, revise mechanical, electrical

and ventilation and fabrication drawings to reflect accurately project conditions. Submit in a timely manner for final review, in quantities as specified for original submittals. It is the F.E.C.'s responsibility to make sure all trades are using the most current drawings.

H. Operator's Manuals: Submit three (3) sets of dimensional prints, data sheets, manuals and

instructions for properly operating equipment. Instructions for operating each piece of equipment, together with written guarantee and warranty for each piece of equipment shall be bound in a booklet, and presented to Food Service Designs. These shall be submitted prior to final payment or as determined by Food Service Designs.

1. Provide a list; Provide item number quantity, description, manufacturer, model number, of each

piece of equipment and service agency contact, complete with name, and phone numbers. 2. Provide manuals, and instructions for each piece of equipment. 3. Provide manufacturers written guarantee and warranty forms for each piece of equipment. 4. Provide as part of the manual three (3) sets of as-built drawings of each drawing that was supplied

by the F.E.C. I. Samples: Submit samples of materials and products where indicated. 1. Submit three of each sample, two of which shall be returned. 2. Samples shall be of sufficient size and quantity to illustrate the functional characteristics of the

product with integral related parts and attachment devices; and to clearly express the full range of color, texture, and pattern.

3. Do not use products in the work until required sample review is complete. J. Final Distribution: F.E.C. shall be responsible for distributing the most current, up to date information

which include, all shop drawings, utility drawings, buy-out books and all other documentation to all parties.



1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: The manufacturer must be able to show that it has been regularly

engaged in manufacturing of food service equipment of types, capacities, and sizes required, and that its products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five years.

B. Foodservice Equipment Contractor's Qualifications: Only those firms who can meet the following

qualifications will be considered for this work: 1. The F.E.C. shall have at least five years successful experience furnishing and installing

foodservice equipment on projects similar in size and scope to that required for this project. 2. The F.E.C. shall be the recognized distributor for the items of equipment specified herein, if of

other manufacture than his own. 3. F.E.C. shall have the financial resources to enable him to handle the work in a satisfactory manner

and to deliver the required items of equipment so as not to delay the progress of the work. 4. The F.E.C. shall be fully capable of fulfilling the terms and conditions of the warranty provisions

required by this contract. 5. The F.E.C. shall be capable of providing a performance bond when and if required. 6. Upon demand, the Foodservice Equipment Contractor being considered for possible negotiation

shall submit to Food Service Designs evidence of his ability to fulfill these requirements. C. Fabricator's Qualifications: Where specified units require custom fabrication, provide units fabricated

by shop with a minimum of five years of experience in similar work. Fabricate all custom equipment items at same shop. Where units cannot be fully shop-fabricated, complete fabrication work at project site must conform to specification.

Approved Fabricators are:

Midwest Stainless, 32433 West 8 Mile, Livonia, MI. 48152, (248)-476-4502 American Stainless, 1600 W Yale Avenue, Englewood, CO 80110, (303) 783-0005 Great Lakes Stainless, 1305 Stepke Court, Traverse City, MI. 49684, (231)-943-7648 Professional Restaurant Service, 14057 Stephens Rd., Warren, MI 48089 (586) 772-7652

Other fabricators to be considered must be submitted to Food Service Designs for approval in writing prior to submitting bid, or offered as a voluntary alternate and listed separately from the base bid.

1.09 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. Sanitary Construction and NSF Standards: Comply with applicable National Sanitation Foundation

(NSF) standards and recommended criteria. Provide each principal item of food service equipment with a NSF "Seal of Approval".

B. UL Labels: Where available, provide UL labels on prime electrical components of food service

equipment. Provide UL "recognized marking" on other items with electrical components, signifying



12

listing by UL, where available. C. ANSI Standards: Comply with applicable ANSI standards for electric powered and gas-burning

appliances, for piping to compressed gas cylinders, and for plumbing fittings including vacuum breakers and air gaps to prevent siphonage in water piping.

D. NFPA Codes: Install food service equipment in accordance with the following National Fire Protection

Codes (NFPA) Codes: NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.

NFPA 96 - Removal of Smoke and Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment. E. ASME Boiler Code: Construct steam generating and closed steam heated equipment to comply with

American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; Section IV for units not exceeding 15 PSI or 250 degrees F, Section I for higher pressure or temperature units.

F. Health Code: Install food service equipment in accordance with local health department applicable

regulations. G. Architectural Millwork: Casework construction shall be of custom grade in accord with the standards

of the Architectural Woodworking Institute, or better. Casework will be considered any construction or fabrication requiring the use of wood or laminate.

H. Overlapping and Conflicting Requirements: Where compliance with two or more industry standards or

sets of requirements is specified, and overlapping of those different standards or requirements establishes different or conflicting minimums or levels of quality, the most stringent requirement (whether most costly or not) is intended and will be enforced, unless specifically detailed language written into contract documents clearly indicates that a less stringent requirement may be fulfilled. Refer instances of uncertainty as to apparent conflicts of standards to Food Service Designs before proceeding.

I. Minimum Quality or Quantity: In every instance, quality level or quantity shown or specified is intended as minimum for the work to be performed or provided. Except as otherwise specifically indicated, actual work may either conform exactly to that minimum (within specified tolerance levels), or may exceed that minimum (within reasonable limits). Refer instances of uncertainty as to quality or quantity intended to Food Service Designs before proceeding.

1.10 STORAGE, DELIVERY AND HANDLING A. Storage: F.E.C. shall provide at his own expense a safe and secure area in which foodservice

equipment can be stored. Provide adequate protection from damage to or loss of foodservice equipment. Store foodservice equipment in their original containers.

1. Should the Owner provide a facility for the receiving and storage of foodservice equipment, the

F.E.C. shall nevertheless retain full responsibility for the condition of the equipment, shall fully insure it and name the Owner as additionally insured, and shall hold the Owner harmless from any damages or loss that should occur while stored in the Owner's premises.

B. Delivery: Do not deliver foodservice equipment until project conditions permit prompt installation. If



the Owner, Food Service Designs or General Contractor determine that the site is not ready for any equipment shipped to same, the F.E.C. will retain said equipment in his storage facilities until the site is ready for installation. Deliver food service equipment to the project site in factory-fabricated containers designed to project equipment and finish until final installation.

1. Any piece of equipment that proves impractical for delivery in one piece may be delivered in

sections, but all working surfaces shall be fitted and field welded, with working surfaces ground and polished on premises, so that upon completion each item of equipment will have true, smooth and even surfaces. Butt jointing and filling with solder will not be permitted.

C. Handling: Handle food service equipment carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosures, and

finish. Do not remove covering until required to clean, test, calibrate and demonstrate, the unit. Do not install damaged food service equipment; replace and return damaged components to equipment manufacturer.

D. Scheduling and Timeliness: Delivery and storage of all equipment shall be done at such time when

construction, finish and mechanical work have progressed to a point permitting such installation. The details of setting and installation shall be so arranged that work of other contractors shall progress without being unnecessarily interfered with, or damaged.

E. Protection of Equipment: All equipment shall be received at the building or construction site fully

insured. It will be the responsibility of the Foodservice Equipment Contractor to protect the equipment until completely installed, connected, and approved by Food Service Designs, subsequent to the completion of the contract work.

1.11 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Verification: Check electrical characteristics, and water, steam, and gas pressure. F.E.C. shall

provide pressure regulating valves where required for proper operation of equipment. B. Existing Food Service Equipment (if applicable): F.E.C. shall tag or mark all equipment scheduled to

be re-used. This shall be done prior to disconnecting of the equipment. The F.E.C. shall be held accountable for any missing equipment for failure to tag or mark the equipment. All existing equipment shall be removed from the facility prior to construction or at a date specified by the Owner or Food Service Designs.

1. Equipment scheduled for reuse shall be taken to the F.E.C.'s storage area, and stored until it can be transported to the project site and installed. During the time said equipment is in the F.E.C.'s possession, it shall be protected from loss and damage, and shall be delivered to the project site in perfect operating condition.

a) Equipment shall be cleaned. b) Painted when specified. c) Repaired or modified to its best working condition when specified. 2. Equipment not scheduled for reuse shall be removed to location(s) designated by the Owner by

others not by the F.E.C. With the Owner's concurrence, the F.E.C. may submit an offer to purchase all or part of the remaining equipment; and/or a cost proposal for removing and disposing



14

of scrap equipment. 3. Disconnects of existing equipment shall be completed by Other Trades. C. Protection of Work and Property: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor will be held responsible for

any damage to Owner's property caused by delivering, uncrating or installing of the Kitchen Equipment. If any damage is caused by the Foodservice Equipment Contractor, his agents, or subcontractors, the Owner's property shall be restored to its original condition at the expense of the Foodservice Equipment Contractor.

D. Use of Premises: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall confine the storage of equipment,

materials, tools, and all other things related to his work to space allotted to him by the Owner. PART 2 -- PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL STANDARDS OF QUALITY A. Quality of Material: Unless otherwise specified or shown on drawings, all material shall be new, of

best quality, perfect and without flaws. It shall be of the best of their respective kind, equal to the standards of manufacture used by the Southern Equipment Company of St. Louis, Missouri; S. Blickman & Company, Weehawken, New Jersey; or Ruslander & Son, Inc., Buffalo, New York. All labor shall be performed in a thorough workmanlike manner. Work to be performed by qualified, efficient, skilled mechanics of the trades involved.

2.02 MATERIALS A. New Materials: All materials shall be new, of first grade, no seconds will be acceptable. B. Gauge: Gauges herein specified shall refer to United States Standard Gauge for sheet metal and

plate. C. Stainless steel: All stainless steel shall be of the gauge specified (U.S. Standard) 18.8 composition

which is generally known as Type 302 or Type 304, and shall have a Number 4 Finish (125-150 grit) as manufactured within the continental limits of the United States. Each piece of equipment shall be specified by gauge with either a general specification form or under the item specifications. All sheets shall have a genuine mill finish of not less than 150 grit on one side and not less than 80 grit on the back side. All stainless steel sheets shall bear the manufacturers trade mark, designation of type, and heat number. All stainless steel sheets shall have the following content:

Chromium - 18 percent minimum Nickel - 8 percent minimum Carbon - .2 percent maximum

Straight chrome iron or copper bearing straight chrome steel is not acceptable. All stainless steel sheets shall be stretcher leveled. All sheets shall be free of buckles, warps, and surface imperfections. A hard ground finish will not be acceptable.

D. Stainless steel sheets: shall be of cold rolled stock.



E. Stainless steel pipe and tubing: ASTM A 554, Type 304 with No. 4 polished finish; shall be seamless

or welded, of gauge specified, of true roundness. Seamless tubing shall be thoroughly and properly annealed, pickled and ground smooth. Welded tubing shall be thoroughly heat-treated and properly quenched to eliminate carbide precipitation. V-Clad shall not be permitted.

F. Galvanized iron: Wherever specified, galvanized iron shall be of an approved grade of either low

carbon steel or copper bearing steel. All sheets are to be commercial quality, stretcher leveled, and re-rolled to insure a smooth surface.

G. Galvanized Sheet Steel: ASTM A 526, except ASTM A 527 for extensive forming; ASTM A 525, G90

zinc coating, chemical treatment. H. Sheet Steel: ASTM A 569 hot-rolled carbon steel. I. Aluminum: ASTM B 209 sheet and plate, ASTM B 221 extrusions, 0.40-mill clear anodized finish

where exposed, unless otherwise indicated. J. Galvanized Iron: Shall be approved grade of either pure wrought iron or copper bearing steel. K. White Metal: Corrosion-resistant metal containing not less than 21 percent nickel. Make castings free

from pit marks, runs, checks, burrs, and other imperfections; rough grind, polish, and buff to bright luster.

L. Plastic Materials and Components: Provide plastic materials and components which conform to NSF

51. M. High Pressure Decorative Laminate (HPDL): HPDL shall be selected by the Architect from

manufacturer's standard palette of colors, unless otherwise indicated. Provide HPDL conforming to NEMA Standard LD3-1985.

1. Where the use of HPDL with a wear resistant finish is indicated, provide such (e.g. Nevamar's ARP

Surface, Wilsonart "Tufsurf 2," etc.) of a nominal thickness of .060" 2. Where the use of HPDL of solid color or "color through" is indicated, provide such (e.g. "Solicor" by

Wilsonart). 3. F.E.C. shall provide fire rated laminate where required by code. N. Hardwood Work Surfaces: Laminated edge-grained hard maple (Acer saccharum), NHLA First Grade

with knots, holes and other blemishes culled out, kiln dried at eight percent or less moisture, waterproof glue, machined, sanded, and finished with NSF-approved oil-sealer.

O. High Density Particle board. Where indicated in counter or cabinet construction, provide high density

Particle board such as "Novoply." 1. F.E.C. shall provide fire rated laminate where required by code. P. Plywood. Where cabinet or counter construction calls for plywood, use birch grade paint finish

standard or grade as indicated.



16

Q. Sound Deadening: Sound deaden underside of table with premium type mastic, that "skins" on surface

when dry. Surface of mastic coating shall be smooth, equal to the standard for hot-rolled steel finish, 3M Coating #1000 E/C or equivalent.

1. Apply two (2) coatings of sound deadening material to underside of tops, drain boards, dishtables,

counters, and sinks. 2. Apply sound deadening during fabrication. Touch up on project site if required. R. Sealants: ASTM C 920, Type S Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT. Provide sealant that when fully cured

and washed meets requirements of Food and Drug Administration Regulation 21 CFR 177.2600 for use in areas where it comes in contact with food.

1. Color: As selected by Food Service Designs from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Backer Rod: Closed-cell polyethylene rod stock, larger than joint width. S. Gaskets: Solid or hollow (not cellular) neoprene or PVC; light gray, minimum of 40 Shore A hardness,

self-adhesive or prepared for either adhesive application or mechanical anchorage. 2.03 MANUFACTURED OR FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. Wall Anchors: Wherever it is necessary to mount fixtures that are supported from the wall, the fixtures

shall be securely attached thereto by means of stainless steel tapped screws into stainless steel face and anchor type grounds that are built into the walls. Furnish these grounds to other trades at proper time so other trades can build them into the walls as work progresses. Itemized specifications note fixtures requiring such grounds. It is the responsibility of the F.E.C. to coordinate and provide these anchors in a timely manner.

B. Chair Carriers: Furnish chair carriers as needed for hanging wall-mounted equipment. Provide

guarantee that chair carriers are of sufficient strength and quantity to support specified load. Chair carrier shall be of all-welded stainless steel construction and mounted within half or full wall so that weight of table and equipment is transferred to floor. Chair carriers may be fabricated or purchased from outside manufacturer. Provide Food Service Designs with drawings of this item for approval prior to fabrication and installation.

C. Floor Anchors: Wherever it is necessary to mount fixtures to the floor, the fixtures shall be securely

attached thereto by means of stainless steel tapped screws D. Faucets: Furnish all faucets including spray rinse units and wall brackets. Drill and finish fixtures in

preparation for installation. Provide loose to installing contractors. Faucet nozzles are to be centered over sink drain.

1. Deck mounted faucets with 4" centers shall be T & S Brass & Bronze Works #B-0225 or approved

equal, ½" inlet. 2. Deck mounted faucets with 8" centers shall be T & S Brass & Bronze Works #B-0221 or approved

equal, ½" inlet.



3. Backsplash mounted faucets shall be T & S Brass & Bronze Works B-0231 or approved equal, ½" inlet.

4. Potsink faucets shall be T & S Brass & Bronze Works B-0291 or approved equal, 3/4" inlet. 5. Wall mounted pot and kettle tilting faucet; dual temp. - T & S, B-0597; single temp. - T & S, B-

0592, ½" inlet. 6. Built-in dipperwell, faucet and sink - Fisher Faucets #304. 7. Pre-Rinse faucets; deck mounted - T & S, B-0113, splash mounted - T & S, B-0133 or approved

equal. 8. Other faucets such as swing spouts for kettles, et cetera, are also included in this contract. Types

required will be stated in itemized specifications. E. Potable Water Protection & Vacuum Breakers: Furnish all protection devices unless otherwise

indicated in the item specifications. Drill and finish fixtures in preparation for installation. Provide loose to installing contractors.

1. Air Gap: The distance of a water inlet or opening above the maximum high water level or overflow

rim in a fixture, device, or container. A “safe air gap” is at least 2 times the diameter of the water inlet pipe, but not less than 1 inch and need not be more than 12 inches.

2. Reduced Pressure Principle Devise (RPZ): It consists of 2 independently acting internally loaded

check valves separated by a reduced pressure zone. A differential pressure relief valve is located within the zone to maintain the reduced pressure and also discharge water to atmosphere during periods of backflow. This device is used as protection for all direct or indirect cross connections. The device may be subject to back pressure or back siphonage of toxic chemicals, sewage, or other lethal substances.

3. Pressure Vacuum Breaker: This device allows air to enter the waterline when the pressure in the

public system or the service line is reduced to 0 or below. The device has a vacuum relief valve which is internally loaded, normally by means of a spring. May be installed for use under continuous line pressure. Must be installed at least 12" above the highest outlet it is to serve.

4. Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker: Allows air to enter the waterline when the pressure in the public

system or the service line is reduced to 0 or below, however, since the vacuum relief is not internally loaded the device must be installed on a discharge side of the shut off valve. Should not be subjected to continuous flows for periods of more than 12 hours and must be installed at least 6" inches above the highest outlet it is to serve.

5. Double Check Valve Assembly: Consists of (2) two independently acting internally loaded check

valves. This device may be used for back pressure or back siphonage situations, only if the cross connection protection is from substances that do not constitute a health hazard.

F. Rotary Waste Valves: Provide two-inch, heavy cast-bronze body, removable flat stainless steel

strainer, twist handle waste outlet, and one-piece connected chrome-plated brass overflow, unless otherwise stated in the item specifications. Provide waste and overflow by Fisher Faucets, 6100 series, or approved equal.



18

G. Casters: Provide four-inch minimum diameter wheel casters, with 1-1/8 inch tread width, conforming to NSF standards, unless otherwise noted in item specifications. Provide sealed, self-lubricating bearings, cadmium-plated or bright zinc-plated steel disc wheels, and solid synthetic rubber tires. Provide foot brakes on (2) two casters per unit unless otherwise specified.

2.04 ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS - GENERAL A. Electric Heating Equipment: Verify to project conditions. B. Wiring: In general, equipment shall be provided with all necessary internal wiring, properly carried

externally where required, for termination in junction box, motor starter, et cetera. All wiring provided under this contract shall be in full accordance with the latest edition of the National Electric Code. Further, all wiring provided shall be contained in a metallic raceway, approved by engineer, consisting of a specially fabricated wireway as in the case of work built into counter work, or in conduit of proper material, or Greenfield flexible conduit, all with necessary provisions for grounding continuity. All conductors provided shall have proper temperature ratings.

C. Thermal overload protection: All motors of equipment provided shall have the thermal overload

protection provided. D. Control equipment: Provide all necessary electrical control equipment and wiring, except as otherwise

outlined, mounted on equipment where practicable, or where shown on plan. E. Cover plates: All receptacles to have 1040 stainless steel or chrome plated brass cover plates with

stainless steel or chrome plated brass screw for all outlets provide in equipment. F. Cords: Flexible cords to be provided on equipment shall have grounding conductor and shall be of

best quality available to industry, equal to Simplex-Tryex, selenium neoprene. G. Motor starters: Provide required starters for all motors. Motor starters required for foodservice

equipment and not provided by Other Trades shall be thermal overload protective type, manual wherever possible, equal to New Series Allen Bradley Bulletin #709 magnetic with necessary accessory equipment where required for proper operation. Where required fully magnetic type W.P.B. station shall be furnished. All manual and magnetic type motor starters provided under this contract for 3 phase motors shall be 3 thermal element type, requiring special coordination with starter manufacturer. This requirement is not repeated elsewhere in the detailed specifications.

H. Motor Thermal Protection: In instances in which motor thermal protection cannot be built-in where

specified into motors provided with equipment, the Food service Equipment Contractor shall provide externally mounted overload devices of proper number of poles and capacity equal to Turnbull "TT" or Allen Bradley, and shall carry wiring from motor terminals to these devices in manner approved by inspection authorities as being in full accord with applicable electrical codes and engineers plans.

I. Wire: Except as otherwise required, all wire provided shall be type THW dual rating. Wire in counter

raceways to be heat resistant type, AVA or equal. J. Openings: Provide proper openings through all equipment and shelves for piping and electrical

conduits. All openings are to located as close to the rear of the counter and sized just big enough for the pipe or wire. All openings shall be smooth, so not to damage or cut the piping or electrical wires.



K. Panelboards: Panelboards shall be UL listed and properly sized in compliance with National Electric Code.

L. Floor Based Electrical Connections: shall be made in a manner that will allow portable equipment

connected to the floor electrical supply to pass over the point of connection without interference. M. Code Compliance: All electric work to be performed in accordance with the National Electric Code

and local regulations. N. Other Conditions: If not provided by other contractors, F.E.C. to provide all electrical parts including

but not limited to contactor strips, line shunts, relays, disconnects (both mechanical and electrical), loose parts and labor required for installation of same not provided by other contractors and pertinent to the installation of equipment under this section. A non-limiting example of this type of equipment would be contactor strips required for the proper operation of fire protection systems.

2.05 STEAM PRESSURE, STEAM THERMOSTATS, STEAM COILS A. Steam Pressure: All steam operated pressure vessels such as Kettles, Steamers, Urns, et cetera,

shall be constructed to A.S.M.E. and the Code requirements of the State in which the project occurs and shall bear labels and certificates of compliance therewith.

B. Steam Thermostats: Provide steam thermostats or temperature regulators for steam heated

equipment if required for proper operation of the piece of equipment, or if so required in the Itemized Specifications.

C. Steam Coils: All steam coils shall be installed in sufficient quantity to provide ample heat at the

available steam pressure (Verify project conditions). They shall be tested for 100 pounds per square inch working pressure.

1. In fixtures having coils under more than one shelf, all coils shall be connected together with inlet

and outlet extended down through base of fixture to point indicated on drawings for installation of stop valves and final connection.

2. Unless otherwise specified, coils are to be 7/8" O.D. hard copper tubing with brass fittings. Where

immersed in water, coils are to be mounted on strap type brackets or feet with a clearance of not less than 1" below coils for cleaning purposes. These feet are to be soldered water-tight to the bottom of the pan in which coils are mounted. Couplings shall be welded or braised in the bottom or sides of fixtures for steam inlet and outlet, and shall extend through fixture ready for final connections.

3. Boiler permits shall acquired by the installing contractor and all fee's shall be paid by the installing

contractor. 2.06 LOCKS A. Cabinets and Refrigerated Units: Provide integral locks on all cabinets and refrigerated units. Locks

shall be of sufficient strength to prevent unauthorized entry into the locked space. Locks shall be of the key and cylinder type with tamper-proof mechanisms. Furnish Owner with three (3) sets of keys to



20

each lock at the conclusion of the project, accurately labeled and turned over to the Owner all at one point in time. This lock standard applies to all cabinets unless otherwise indicated in item specifications.

2.07 FABRICATION, GENERAL A. Welds: All workmanship shall be done with welded rod of same composition as sheets or parts

welded. Welds shall be strong, ductile, with excess metal ground off and finished smooth to match adjacent surface. Welds shall be free of imperfections as pits, runs, spatter, cracks, et cetera, and shall have the same color as adjacent sheet surfaces. All joints in top fixtures, tables, drainboard, exposed shelving, sinks, et cetera, shall be electrically welded. Butt welds made of spot welding straps under seams and filling in with solder will not be acceptable. It is the intention of these specifications that all welded joints shall be homogeneous with the sheet metal itself. Where sheet sizes necessitate a joint, such joints shall be welded. Tops of fixtures shall be fabricated at the factory with welded joints to reduce field welding.

Under no circumstances are any welds to be spray painted. All welds are to be ground and polished smooth.

B. Field Joints (Welded): Where field joints are necessary, the tops shall be continuous. Items shall be

made in maximum length sections as possible and with as few joints as necessary. Provide proper joint preparation and location. Access shall be provided, where possible, to the back side of the welds. Joints shall be located to provide the minimum length of seam. Field joints are to be provided only for the convenience of installation and shall be held to an absolute minimum. Show proposed field welds on shop fabrication drawings.

C. Field Joints (Bolted): Bolted field joints, if specified as acceptable, are to be drawn tight leaving a hair-

line seam and shall not have any exposed screws or rivets. Joints shall be neatly and carefully fabricated to make the very best appearing joint possible. After equipment is set in place, all field joints shall be tightly pulled together leaving only a hair-line seam. The alignment of the joints shall be made in such a manner that they shall be tightened both horizontally and vertically. Show proposed bolted field joints on shop fabrication drawings.

D. Surfaces: All surfaces shall be completely free of burrs, rough edges, slag, or any other debris. E. Other Exposed Surfaces: All coved corners, legs, table tops and all other exposed surfaces to be

ground smooth and polished to a #4 finish. F. Exposed Joints: All exposed welded joints including field joints shall be suitably ground flush with the

adjoining material and neatly finished to harmonize and appear the same. G. Depressions: Wherever material has been depressed or sunken in by the welding operation, such

depressions shall be suitably hammered and peened flush with the adjoining surfaces and, if necessary, again ground to eliminate low spots. All ground surfaces shall then be polished or buffed to match adjoining surfaces consistent with good workmanship.

H. Discoloration, etc. Care shall be exercised in all grinding operations to avoid excessive heating of the

metal and metal discoloration. In all cases the grain of rough grinding shall be removed by successive finer polishing operations.



I. Finished Texture: The texture of the final polishing operation shall be uniform and smooth consistent

with reasonable care and good workmanship. The general finish of all metal shall be of high grade. J. Break Bends: Wherever break bends occur, they shall be free of open texture or orange peel

appearance; and where such break does not mar the uniformity of the appearance of the material, all such marks shall be removed by suitable grinding, polishing, and finishing.

K. Sheared Edges: Wherever sheared edges occur, they shall be free of burrs, projections, and fins to

obviate all danger of cutting and laceration when the hand is drawn over such sheared edges. L. Miters and Bullnose Corners: Where miters or bullnose corners occur, they shall be neatly finished

with the under edge of the material neatly ground to a uniform condition and in no case will overlapping material be acceptable.

M. Finish: It is the intention of these specifications to describe fabrication of a quality finish consistent

with the highest grade of manufacturing practices in the industry. Edges of tops and overshelves shall be highly polished or "Hi-Lited" where required by the Item specifications. Final approval of surface finishes shall be by Food Service Designs.

2.08 PIPE CHASES A. Pipe Chase Panels: Where top arrangement of enclosed base tables make it necessary for plumbing

and supply piping to be passed through the base, this piping shall be enclosed in a suitable pipe chase with easily removable access panels. These access panels are not to be held in place with screws or latches, but are to be formed up in a pan shape, removable without the use of tools. The foregoing only applies to fixtures where an access is required from the front of the fixture, as in the case of pipe chases at end of fixtures containing bottom and intermediate shelves need not be enclosed unless specifically called for in the Itemized Specifications. Unless otherwise specified, shelves in these fixtures will be turned up a minimum of 3" at the edge of the pipe chase.

B. Access Panels: Where access panels are specified, the panels shall be used for access to drains and

electrical junction boxes only. The access panels are used for cleaning and maintenance only they shall not be used for electrical, plumbing, chases and rough-in penetrations. The access panel shall be made of matching material and removable with out tools.

C. Consult with Piping Contractors: In detailing fixtures, consult with piping contractors to be certain that

due space allowance is made for traps and other controls, particularly under lower shelves. D. Shelf Penetration: Where plumbing and supply piping pass through shelves on open base tables,

shelves shall be neatly punched or die-stamped for the piping. Show the location of such pipe chases, or stamped pipe openings, on plan and/or detail drawings. Provide sufficient size to accommodate all necessary risers so that additional holes need not be cut in the field. Coordinate with plumbing contractors, cautioning them that all piping must be run through chases or slots as provided.

E. Utilities Housing: All utilities for counters and fabricated equipment will be housed in chases

constructed for same, pre-wired to minimize field wiring and plumbing.



22

2.09 SANITARY CONSTRUCTION A. Approvals: All fabricated equipment is to be constructed in strict compliance with the standards of the

National Sanitation Foundation as outlined in their bulletin on Food Service Equipment entitled "Standard No. 2" dated September, 1978, and in full compliance with the Public Health Regulations of the locality in which the installation is to be made. All fabricated equipment shall have the seal of approval of the National Sanitation Foundation and if required by code UL approval seal of approval.

2.10 SINKS A. Construction: Sinks and frames shall be constructed of 14 gauge stainless steel. The front shall

extend up 2-3/4" higher than the drainboard line and shall be finished with a 1-3/4" wide channel rim, running full length, with ends of sink frame constructed for welding to drain boards where such are specified. Sink bowls, unless otherwise indicated in item specifications, shall be 14 gauge stainless steel fully welded to frames so that no joint is visible. Where required, provide sinks with drain boards, backsplashes, heaters, or water circulation systems.

1. Where drain boards are required, they shall be electrically welded to the sink frame to provide an

integral unit. 2. Where the sink is free standing without drain boards, the channel rims shall continue around both

ends with the corners of the channel edge rounded to conform with the radius of the inside vertical corner of the sink. Corners shall be electrically welded.

3. Where a backsplash is required, the rear of the backsplash shall extend to the specified height

above the drainboard work surface, with the top edge returning to the wall at a 45 degree angle and forming a 2-1/4" clear pipe chase.

4. The ends of the sinks shall be electrically welded to the body of the sink with all vertical and

horizontal corners formed on a 3/4" radius with welds ground and polished smooth to a #4 finish. 5. Bottom of sinks shall be depressed and slope to a twist handle waste with handle constructed of

3/8" stainless steel rod extending to the front of the sink. This twist handle drain shall have a built-in connection for an overflow pipe. Rear of overflow connection to have a polished nickel allow front plate and shall be completely connected to the drain with nickel plated brass tubing. The Twist handle shall be supported by a stainless steel bracket welded to the underside of the sink.

6. Provide at top center rear of each compartment, below the drainboard line, a polished cast nickel

bronze overflow with 1-1/4" O.D. brass tubing connection to outlet at back of drain. 7. Where multiple sink bowls are welded to a frame, a minimum 2" between bowls shall be provided

to prevent temperature transfer and front of sinks shall be clad in 14 gauge stainless steel frontispiece.

8. Where sinks are specified to set into counter tops, the sinks shall be electrically welded to top with

continuous weld, ground smooth so that no seam is visible and surfaces match. Drop in sinks with hardware fasteners will not be accepted unless specifically called for in the Item Specifications.



9. All interior and exterior horizontal and vertical bonds and corners shall be rounded on a 3/4" radius with all joints welded.

10. Mount fill faucets in backsplash. Single compartment sinks shall be fitted with two (2) holes on 8"

centers over the center compartment. Where sinks have two or more compartments, provide two (2) holes on 8" centers over the partition(s). Fit sink(s) with combination chromium plated swing spout faucet(s).

B. Drain boards: Construct of #14 gauge polished stainless steel welded integral to the body of the sink

with continuous rolled rims and splash of the same height and design as the sink. Roll rim heights at the shallow end shall be 1" high sloping approximately ½" to the sink body, unless otherwise specified. All drain boards shall have horizontal corners coved on 1/4" radius with the vertical corners coved on 1/4"radius. Drain boards must slope in the direction of the sink, so water will not pool.

C. Legs: Sink legs shall be as specified under "Table and Sink Legs". Legs shall be attached with a #14

gauge stainless steel gusset to the underside of the sink body. The gusset shall be conical shaped and provided with an allen head dog point set screw.

D. Additional Considerations: Where so indicated by the Item Specifications, provide sinks as follows: 1. Where "plug and chain drain" is specified, sink bowls shall slope to a drain which shall be a

standard 1-1/2" drain with plug and chain. 2. Where "basket strainer drain" is specified, sink shall be fitted with a 1-1/2" cup strainer assembly. 3. Where "sink compartment heater" is specified, sink compartment shall be heated with electric

immersion elements with low water cutout and thermostatic control, as manufactured by Hatco or approved equal, and of sufficient wattage to assure 180oF rinse water.

2.11 COUNTER AND TABLE TOPS - METAL CONSTRUCTION A. Tops and Edges: Counter and table tops shall be fabricated with type of edge as specified. The

definite choice as to the type of edge profile to be used shall be made before the time of bidding. If unspecified, the edge will be metal edge profile No.3. All tops, unless otherwise specified, shall be 14 gauge stainless steel.

B. Top Bracing: Tops shall be braced with 1-1/2" x 1-1/2" x 1/8" galvanized angles and 1-1/2" x 3" x 1-

1/2" #14 gauge galvanized channels. On open base tables, one channel shall be placed at each pair of legs. A longitudinal angle shall be placed between the channels for additional top support.

C. Underbracing: Underbracing, will be constructed of stainless steel channels, size same as in A & B

above. When stainless steel underbracing is utilized, the above sized channel will be used throughout for underbracing.

D. Top Fastening: Tops shall be fastened to the framing members with protruding studs. Studs shall be

welded to the underside of the table top and fastened by means of chrome plated lock washers and acorn nuts.



24

E. Backsplashes: Backsplashes shall be of the height specified with the standard height being 6" on serving counters, 10" overall on worktables and 10" on dishtables. The splash shall be returned 2" on a 45o angle. All corners of tops formed by bending and/or welding shall have a radius of 3/4".

2.12 SOUND DEADENING A. Application: Apply sound deadening material to all tables, counters, sinks, etc. per section 2.02. 2.13 TABLE AND SINK LEGS A. Materials: All legs for open base tables, sinks, and dishtables shall be constructed of stainless steel,

14 gauge, seam welded and polished to a #4 finish, unless otherwise specified. Cross rails, where required, shall be of 1-1/4" #14 gauge wall welded tubing of stainless steel. Cross rails shall be welded to legs with the resulting welds ground and polished to a smooth finish. All legs shall be fitted with a stainless steel adjustable bullet foot having a minimum of 1" adjustment. All feet furnished shall be vermin proof having closed bottoms of stainless steel with unexposed threads and a minimum clearance between the foot and the leg of 1/32".

B. Tops: Tops of legs shall be welded to 14 gauge stainless steel section of channel, closing top of leg,

and this channel section shall be sized to nest inside table reinforcing channel and then is bolted in place with stainless steel bolts and lock washers through both vertical channel legs and gusset if open leg type table. Wherever threads of bolts and screws on the inside of fixtures, which are either visible or might come in contact with the hand or wiping cloth, such bolts and screw threads shall be capped with suitable lock washer and chrome plated brass or bronze acorn nut. Where screw threads are not visible or readily accessible, they might be capped with a standard lock washer and steel nut treated to prevent rusting or corroding.

C. Gussets: All gussets shall be fully enclosed stainless steel and provided at all leg locations. These

gussets shall be one hundred percent (100%) welded to channels in a water-proof, vermin-proof manner. Where gussets occur at angle iron framework provide triangular 12 gauge stainless steel corner plates, welded to bottom edge of angle frame, and weld gusset to triangular plate. These gussets shall have 16 gauge stainless steel exterior case complete with galvanized interior case. Legs shall slip fit into internal case and be held in place with stainless steel set screw.

D. Cabinet and warmer legs: All cabinets, warmers, and/or other enclosed bodies unless otherwise

specified are to be mounted on round pattern adjustable legs. Legs shall be of 1-5/8" o.d. stainless steel seamless tubing having a stainless steel adjustable bullet shaped foot with a minimum of 1" of adjustment. Legs shall not be less than 6" high overall. Legs shall be welded to a 14 gauge die-formed stainless steel mounting plate. This plate shall telescope into a 14 gauge galvanized channel welded to the underside of the body. This channel shall extend the full length of the cabinet. The leg mounting plate shall slide in the channel to permit relocation and removal of the leg. The die forming plate shall have a center embossing for the 1-5/8" o.d. leg tubing and shall have a clinch nut inset screw for locking the leg in place.

E. When to Omit Front Cross Rails: Only where indicated, legs are to be without lower tubing cross-

bracing in order to provide space for mobile item storage.



F. Lower Shelves: Where lower shelves are specified, these shelves shall be permanently welded to legs except when removable shelves are specified, and the stainless steel tubing cross rails will be omitted.

G. Quantity: Unless otherwise specified, tables and open base fixtures up to 6'-0" in length shall have

four (4) legs. Tables from 6'-0" to 12'-0" in length shall have six (6) legs and tables from 12'-0" in length to 18'-0" in length shall have eight (8) legs or more as required to make a substantial fixture to accommodate special construction.

2.14 CABINETS - BASE UNITS; METAL CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Standards: To be constructed to standards indicated in section 2.02 of these

specifications. All casework to be stainless steel construction, unless otherwise noted. B. Countertops: All countertops to be 14 gauge stainless steel, unless noted otherwise. Provide square

rim edge, unless noted otherwise. 4" high splash at all back and side walls, unless noted otherwise. Countertops to be constructed to sizes and profiles shown on plans.

C. Support: All cabinets having a clear span below, shall be capable of sustaining a 300-pound load at

the front edge of the counter at midspan. D. Base: Cabinet bases shall be mounted on 12 gauge galvanized steel channel. All base cabinets shall

have a 6" high toe space. The finish base applied thereto shall be the same base as in the rest of the room, and shall be applied thereto by that respective contractor, other than the Food Service Equipment Contractor).

E. Legs: Cabinet legs shall be of stainless steel with adjustable stainless steel feet, Welded to counter

support. F. Hardware: The following hardware is specified to establish the desired design and level of quality.

Alternative manufacturers of equivalent products may be used. Fabricator shall utilize the correct quantity and spacing of hardware items as recommended by the specific manufacturers:

1. Door Hinges: BLUM Premium Concealed Hinge, 125 degree opening, US26D finish. 2. Door Locks: HAFELE Inlaid Lock, US26D finish. 3. Door Catch: Adjustable heavy duty tension chrome plated catch, Component Hardware model

M27-2490 or approved equal.. Provide non magnetic type. G. Shelves: Provide shelving per section 2.16 of these specifications. 2.15 CABINETS - BASE UNITS; MILLWORK CONSTRUCTION A. Construction Standards: All casework to be constructed to standard indicated in section 1.09-G of

these specifications. All casework to be plastic laminate construction, unless otherwise noted. All plastic laminate cabinets are to be one color, unless otherwise noted. All cabinets shall utilize flush overlay construction.



26

B. Countertops: All countertops to be plastic laminate (different color from cabinets), unless noted otherwise. Provide 1-1/2" shelf edge, and 4" high splash at all back and side walls. All Corian to be FOUNTAINHEAD or Laminate to be FORMICA 2000 countertops to be constructed to sizes and profiles shown utilizing standard colors and finishes; provide fusion seaming.

C. Support: All cabinets having a clear span below, shall be capable of sustaining a 300-pound load at

the front edge of the counter at midspan. D. Base: All cabinet bases shall be mounted on 12 gauge galvanized steel channel. All base cabinets

shall have a 6" high toe space. The finish base applied thereto shall be the same base as in the rest of the room, and shall be applied thereto by that respective contractor, other than the Food Service Equipment Contractor.

E. Hardware: The following casework hardware is specified to establish the desired design and level of

quality. Alternative manufacturers of equivalent products may be used. Casework fabricator shall utilize the correct quantity and spacing of hardware items as recommended by the specific manufacturers:

1. Door Hinges: BLUM Premium Concealed Hinge, 125 degree opening, US26D finish. 2. Door Locks: HAFELE Inlaid Lock, US26D finish. 3. Adjustable Shelf Brackets and Standards: KV Recessed Pilaster and Supports, US26D finish. 4. Door Catch: Adjustable heavy duty tension chrome plated catch, Component Hardware model

M27-2490 or approved equal.. Provide non magnetic type. 2.16 UNDERSHELVING (METAL)

If undershelving is not specified provide all tables, dishtables and sinks with tubular undershelves running the full length of unit.

A. Stationary Shelving: Stationary shelving under open base tables shall set approximately 8" above the

floor with all edges rolled down on a 3/4" radius approximately 1-3/4". The profile of these shelves shall match metal edge profile No. 1. Where shelving intersects the leg, the joint shall be formed without openings. The shelving shall be attached by welding the underside. Where shelving abuts walls, turn edge up 2", round corners and finish smooth. Shelving shall be 16 gauge stainless steel.

B. Removable shelving: Removable shelving under open base tables will be supported on 1-1/4"

stainless steel tubing. The resulting shelving shall be rolled down over the rails in maximum 20" wide sections. Where shelving abuts walls, turn edge up 2", round corners and finish smooth. Shelves shall be turned down 90o square where the resulting sections abut one another. Shelving shall be 18 gauge stainless steel.

C. Tubular Shelves: Tubular shelving under open base tables will be set approximately 8" above the floor

on 6" centers, where shelving intersects the leg or a cross brace it shall be fully welded and polished smooth, the joint shall be formed without openings.

D. Enclosed Shelving: Enclosed cabinet shelving shall be of 18 gauge stainless steel, back and ends

turned up 1-1/2" against body panels and spot welded. Front edge shall be turned down 1-1/2" and returned ½" on 75o angle on intermediate shelf. Lower shelf to be turned down 1-1/2" on front and back 11/16".



E. Enclosed Shelving, Construction: Enclosed cabinet removable shelving shall be made in maximum 20" wide sections having all edges flanged down 1-1/2". The corners of these shelves shall be left open so as to provide an easy to clean corner. Heated cabinet shelves shall be perforated with ½" diameter holes spaced on 3" centers. These shelves shall be removable and supported on angle framework as specified.

F. Elevated Shelving: Elevated Shelving 12" wide or less shall be of 16 gauge stainless steel or 14

gauge stainless steel in widths greater than 12". The front and ends shall be rolled down on a 3/4" radius - 1-1/2" diameter roll approximately 180o. This shall be metal edge profile No. 3. Where shelves are up against the wall or adjacent to fixtures, the edges shall be turned up 1-1/2". All flanges shall be coved on a minimum 1/8" radius with the intersecting turned up flanges at the back and ends also coved. The corners shall be welded, ground, and polished to form a fillet of the same radius as other bends.

G. Table Mounted Shelves: Table mounted shelves shall be supported from the top of the fixtures on 1-

1/4" o.d. diameter stainless steel tubular uprights attached to the shelving with stainless steel feruled plates and/or stainless steel triangular brackets. The feruled plates shall be spot welded to the underside of the shelves and the stainless steel brackets shall be attached with stainless steel studs, lock washers, and acorn nuts. Tubular supports shall be attached to the counter top without visible bolts and/or screws. It is extremely important that on dishtables the supports be located so as not to be placed in working areas. Supports on dishtables shall be extended through the return of the backsplash to a bracket below the working surface of the table. This bracket, whenever possible, shall be bracketed to an existing table leg.

2.17 WALL SHELVING A. Stainless Steel Wall Mounted Shelves: Wall mounted shelves shall be supported on #14 gauge

stainless steel cantilever type brackets. These brackets shall be steady and shall be provided with two holes for securely anchoring to the masonry at the job site. Triangular shapes brackets shall be attached to the underside of the shelf with studs, lock washers, and chrome plated acorn nuts.

2.18 PROTECTOR CASES A. Protector Cases: Protector case shall be of the size shown on plan and shall be approved by Food

Service Designs and Health Department codes and standards. B. Top shelf: Top shelf shall be 16 gauge stainless steel serving shelf with the front being formed down

on a slope to match the slope of the front glass and bracket. The rear and ends of the serving shelf to be turned down 1-3/4" on a 90o angle. The rear edge of the shelf shall be returned approximately 1". This channel shall form a housing for a built-in fluorescent light or heatlamp, where so specified. This channel shall accommodate Tombstone type fluorescent lamp holders which shall have the wiring completely enclosed and extended through tubular support into the base of the fixture, to a remote switch. All corners of the shelf shall be welded, ground, and polished smooth. The protector shelf shall be approximately 16" high

C. Uprights: Shelf shall be mounted on 16 gauge round stainless steel uprights unless otherwise

specified. The uprights will be designed so as to be adjustable up-down 8", in a concealed manner without visible means of attachment.



28

D. Glass units: Provided with a removable polished stainless steel trim for holding the glass. This trim

and bracket shall be provided with a cushioning material so as to prevent glass from cracking when it is being fastened in place. All exposed edges of the protector glass shall be trimmed with stainless steel channel. The bracket shall slope approximately 15o from vertical. Front glass to be 1/4" thick polished plate glass. The end of the protector shelf shall be enclosed with 1/4" thick polished plate glass having all exposed edges trimmed with stainless steel channel where specified. This trim is to be completely welded, with no rough or unpolished edges or seams.

E. Lights: Where lights are specified under the item, a base mounted switch will be provided. This switch

shall be mounted in a recessed stainless steel pan, located on or in counter as directed by Food Service Designs. A ballast and ballast box shall be provided in the base of the counter as required.

F. Heat Lamps: Where heat lamps are specified under the item, remote infinite controls will be provided.

These controls shall be mounted in a recessed stainless steel pan, located on or in counter as directed by Food Service Designs. A ballast and ballast box shall be provided in the base of the counter as required.

2.19 DRAWERS A. Construction: All drawers shall be 18 gauge stainless steel body measuring 20" x 20" x 5" deep, or of

size called for in Item Specifications. B. Insert: Drawer pan insert shall be constructed of stainless steel and die-stamped with bottom corners

rolled on a 1" radius and vertical corners rounded on a 2" radius, removable with-out the use of tools, measuring 20" x 20" x 5" deep, or of size called for in Item Specifications.

C. Slides: #14 gauge stainless steel channel type slides formed with nylon tired ball bearing rollers.

Slide shall be of telescoping channels with a minimum of four rollers per pair. Slide shall be welded to the drawer face and cross bracing forming a cradle to accept the removable drawer body. This slide shall be pitched to allow the drawer to close via gravity. Complete drawer frame and slide assembly will be removable for cleaning.

D. Fronts and pulls: Fronts or Face shall be double pan construction shaped of #16 gauge stainless steel

having all sides turned back with the corners welded. . The face shall be supplied with a stainless steel recessed grip with hand pull, chrome plated pull. Double panel faces will be sound deadened and insulated. Front shall be attached to drawer body with brackets.

E. Locks: Locks will be supplied as specified in item specifications. Locks shall be of sufficient strength

to prevent unauthorized entry into the locked space. Locks shall be of the key and cylinder type with tamper-proof mechanisms. Furnish Owner with three (3) sets of keys to each lock at the conclusion of the project, accurately labeled and turned over to the Owner all at one point in time.

F. Bumpers and Stops: All drawers shall have rubber bumpers for quiet operation and shall have

positive stops to prevent accidental withdrawal.



2.20 WORK TABLE TOPS - WOOD; CUTTING BOARDS A. Wood Work Table Tops: Wood tops shall be of the highest quality northern grown hard rock maple.

Thickness shall be as specified. Tops shall be constructed of selected strips of edge grain maple electronically bonded to exact dimension with one clear finely finished face. Hardwood curbs or riser to be supplied with 1" radius cove.

B. Cutting Boards, "Richlite": When "Richlite" cutting surfaces are specified, cutting boards will be

N.S.F. approved phenolic fiber laminate tops under the trademark "Richlite." Coved risers are ½" thick with a ½" radius cove. Standard height of risers is 4".

C. Cutting Boards: N.S.F approved thermoplastic tops and cutting boards can be used in areas where

cutting or carving surfaces are required. Material shall not warp, crack, bend, chip or peel. Material shall be high density polyethylene; pure natural polypropylene; copolymer natural polypropylene. Material shall be acceptable to N.S.F., U.S.D.A & F.D.A. specifications.

2.21 REFRIGERATED BASES A. Controls: F.E.C. shall provide all switches, controls, valves, thermostats and all necessary hardware

for a complete system. 2.22 FOOD WARMERS AND PLATE SHELF A. Heating Wells: Electric food warmers consist of the number of wells as shown on plan. Heating wells

shall be of one piece die-stamped heavy gauge type 302 stainless steel. Wells shall be heated with 1600 watt stainless steel heating element connected to a thermostat equipped with an off position. Each well shall have a pilot light indication when the well is on. Food warmers shall be installed the counter top having a die-formed headed edge which shall flange down into the food well and be attached with stainless steel flat head screws. The joint between the counter top and the food well shall be sealed with high temperature sealastic to prevent any escape of vapors.

B. Food Well Controls: Food well controls shall be mounted on the operator's side of the counter or shall

be mounted in a stainless steel recessed panel below the plate shelf as required per item specifications. Food warmers are to be supplied in 115-208-230 volt electrical characteristics. Food wells are to be completely interwired terminating in two or three leads. Wire sizes shall be as specified and required under the National Electric Code.

C. Plate Shelf: Plate shelf: Each food warmer, where required, shall be stainless steel with a dish shelf

mounted to the rear of the food wells and below counter top. This shelf shall be fabricated of #16 gauge stainless steel and shall be approximately 9-1/2" wide front to back. This dish shelf shall be so formed in contour as per detail drawing providing apron for mounting of food well controls and pilots. The plate shelf will also provide a necessary electrical chase for all wiring. Note: If counter containing food wells is to be constructed so that dish carts will roll underneath, shelf is not to be constructed unless specified, and then constructed in such a manner so as not to interfere with the dish cart passage.

D. Drain Valve: All drain valves are to be mounted in a stainless steel recessed pan mounted in the

apron of the counter.



30

2.23 COLD PANS A. Non- Refrigerated Cold Pans: Shall be of the size shown on drawing. Cold pans shall have an interior

liner of 20 gauge polished stainless steel having all interior corners coved on a minimum 1/4" radius. The exterior of the cold pan shall be constructed of 18 gauge stainless steel. The bottom of the interior pan shall be creased to 1" chrome plated drain. The bottom and sides of the cold pan shall be provided with a minimum of 2" foamed-in-place insulation. The foam insulation shall have a 1.9 pound density and shall have a "K" factor of .12. Where the counter top is turned down into the cold pan, the metal contact shall be broken with breaker strips. Provide cold pan with 1" condensate drain.

B. Refrigerated Cold Pan: Refrigerated cold pan shall be constructed as outlined above having stainless

steel interior pan covered with 3/8" o.d. copper refrigeration coils in a serpentine pattern approximately 2" o.d. fastened to the underside of the inner liner for mechanical refrigeration. These coils shall be die-formed and shaped so as to provide good contact between the copper coil and the stainless steel liner. A conductive mastic will be applied between the coils and the liner so as to insure uniform transfer of heat from the pan to the coil. The exterior of the pan will be provided with a valve box for cold pan expansion valve. Extend coil leads to the refrigeration condensing unit. Cold pan controls are to be mounted in a recessed stainless steel pan mounted where shown on plans or stated in the item specifications. Provide cold pan with 1" condensate drain.

2.24 WALK-IN REFRIGERATORS AND FREEZERS A. Condensation drains: Drain lines shall have a trap to prevent humidity from entering unit. B. Freezer Compartments: Any drain lines located in freezer compartments shall be fully insulated and

wrapped with heat tape to prevent condensation from freezing. END OF GENERAL SECTION



Mark Items Below For Dickinson West - Area C ITEM 1 Milk Cooler - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Beverage Air MODEL: ST58-NS FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 2 Storage Shelving - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: Six (6) MANUFACTURER: Metro MODEL: Chrome FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 3 Reach-In Freezer - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Victory MODEL: FSA-2D-S1 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



32

ITEM 4 Utility Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SC50-NU FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 5 Cold Food Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SCSC-60B FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 6 Hot Food Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SH6-NU FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



ITEM 7 Cashier Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SCS-36 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 8 Open Number ITEM 9 Hot Cart - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Crescor MODEL: H-137-SUA-12D FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 10 Reach-In Refrigerator - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Victory MODEL: RSA-2D-S1 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



34

ITEM 11 Milk Coolers - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: Three (3) MANUFACTURER: Beverage Air MODEL: ST58-NS FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 12 Open Number Mark Items Below For Kosciuszko Middle School - Area A & B ITEM 13 Utility Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SC84-NU FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 14 Condiment Dispensers - N.I.F.E.C. ITEM 15 Cashier Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SCS-30 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11.



2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 16 Cold Food Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SCSC-60B FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 17 Hot Food Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SH6-NU FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 18 Hot Cart - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Crescor MODEL: H-137-SUA-12D FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



36

ITEM 19 Utility Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SC96-NU FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 20 Milk Cooler - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Beverage Air MODEL: ST58-NS FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 21 Hand Sink - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: 7-PS-50 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 22 Open Number



ITEM 23 Cashier Counter - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Delfield MODEL: SCS-30 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 24 Open Number ITEM 25 Milk Cooler - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Beverage Air MODEL: ST58-NS FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 26 Reach-In Refrigerator - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Continental MODEL: R1 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



38

ITEM 27 Airscreen Merchandiser - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Federal MODEL: RSSM-578SC FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 28 Wall Mounted Trayslide - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Custom FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 29 Refrigerated Preptable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Randell MODEL: 9040-K-7M with SMCVRHGCP60 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 30 Mobile Worktable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: 314S-3072



FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 31 Heated Sandwich Slide - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Hatco MODEL: GRSDS-41D FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 32 Hand Sink - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advacne/Tabco MODEL: 7-PS-50 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 33 Open Number ITEM 34 Hand Sink - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advacne/Tabco MODEL: 7-PS-50 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11.



40

2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 35 3 Compartment Sink - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advacne/Tabco MODEL: 94-83-60-24RL FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 36 Wall Mounted Overshelves - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Metro MODEL: Wall Mount Shelves w/33” Posts FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 37 Mobile Dish Racks - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Metro MODEL: Chrome FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



ITEM 38 Clean Dishtable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: SSCD-96R FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 39 Wall Mounted Overshelf- Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: WS-12-48 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 40 Dish-machine Condensate Canopy & Ventilation System QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Vent-Tech FEATURES: 1) Sized to properly ventilate the dishmachine. 2) Unit shall be constructed of 16 gauge stainless steel. 3) Unit to be all welded construction with smooth angles and ground and

polished joints. 4) F.E.C. to provide canopy, trim, ductwork exhaust fan & curb. 5) Install canopy where shown on drawings. 6) Unit must meet dishmachine manufacturers dimensional and performance

requirements for this item. 7) Provide condensate drip pan as shown on detail drawing.



42

8) Provide stainless steel trim at ceiling if required. 9) F.E.C. to provide drain tubing to floor drain. 10) Coordinate installation of this item with other trades. 11) F.E.C. to provide full system with installation. 12) All ductwork to be provided and installed by mechanical contractor.

13) E.C. to provide all parts and labor necessary to inter-wire roof - top exhaust fan to lighted wall switch or vent fan control per plan.

ALTERNATES: None ITEM 41 Dishwasher - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Hobart MODEL: AM15 Select FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 42 Disposer, Controls & Pre-Rinse - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Salvajor (Kansas City, MO) T&S (Travelers Rest, SC) - Pre-Rinse MODEL: Disposer: 200-CA-18-ARSS 208V/3PH Electrical Pre-Rinse: B-0133, B-0109 wall bracket FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 43 Soiled Dishtable - Relocate/Existing



QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: SSSD-96L FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 44 Wall Mounted Overshelf - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: WS-12-48 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 45 Open Number ITEM 46 Mobile Worktables - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: Four (4) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: SS-306 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



44

ITEM 47 Reach-In Freezer - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Victory MODEL: FSA-2D-S1 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 48 Reach-In Refrigerator - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Victory MODEL: RSA-2D-S1 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 49 Preptable w/Sinks & Drawers - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: 314S-30101-10R FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



ITEM 50 Wall Mounted Overshelf - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: WS-12-108 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 51 20 Qt. Mixer - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Globe MODEL: SP20 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 52 Wall Mounted Overshelf - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: WS-12-96 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 53 Worktable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke



46

MODEL: 314S-3096-R10 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 54 Slicer - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Globe MODEL: G12A FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 55 Hand Sinks - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: Two (2) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: 7-PS-50 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 56 Open Number ITEM 57 Worktable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: 314S-3060-5R



FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 58 Wall Mounted Overshelf - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Advance/Tabco MODEL: WS-12-60 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 59 Double Deck Convection Ovens - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Bakers Pride MODEL: GDCO-G2 FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 60 Double Deck Combi-Ovens - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Unox MODEL: XAVC-06FS-GPR With Filter Systems FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None



48

ITEM 61 Floor Trough w/Grate - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Custom FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 62 FUTURE Tilt Braising Pan QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Groen MODEL: BPP-30G ALTERNATES: None ITEM 63 Range - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: SouthBend MODEL: P32D-XX FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None ITEM 64 Hood & Ventilation System QUANTITY: One (1) System MANUFACTURER: Vent-Tech FEATURES: 1) All exposed exterior surfaces of exhaust canopy shall be constructed of 18

gauge 304 stainless steel. 2) Interior of hood shall be constructed of 18 gauge 304 stainless steel.



3) Construction of hood shall be in accordance with NFPA 96 requirements. 4) Hood to be provided with incandescent lights, pre-wired to J-box by

manufacturer, quantity as listed on hood drawing. 5) Hood shall be shaped as shown on plan. Multiple section hoods must be

provided with an open capture area. 6) Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall coordinate installation of proper

structural, architectural and mechanical details of this item with their own work.

7) It is the intent of this specification that the Foodservice Equipment Contractor

will supply and physically install a complete ventilation system; properly installed, fully operational, and in compliance with all State, Local and City Building, Fire and Health codes. Mechanical Contractor to provide and install all parts & piping required for gas connection.

8) System will be provided with, but not limited to, the following: ventilator

hood(s), duct collars, fans and starters, curbs, MUA furnace, duct, duct insulation, and disconnects.

9) All seams and joints are to heli-arc welded, ground and polished to blend with

the base metal. Weld metals are to be of same composition as base metal. 10) Caulk hood to wall(s) to seal all gaps. 11) Hood to be provided with structural hanging brackets; factory welded. 12) Foodservice Equipment Contractor is to provide all necessary threaded rods,

brackets and all hardware required to hang hood where shown on plan. 13) All ventilation controls shall be located in face of hood. 14) Location of J-boxes for control wiring and lighting shall be closely coordinated

with other contractors so that all J-boxes are accessible after project construction is complete.

15) Provide with stainless steel baffle-type grease extractors, UL listed and easily

removable for cleaning without the use of tools. 16) Two (2) weeks prior to foodservice inspection, Foodservice Equipment

Contractor shall provide a complete certified statement of balance. Statement shall indicate static pressure across hood, State Certification of entire hood system as-built, CFM exhausted and supply CFM. Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall send additional copies of this report to State and Local Health Departments, Fire Marshal and Architect.

17) Hood shall be bottom and front-discharge type with built-in exhaust and

supply air collars.



50

18) Foodservice Equipment Contractor will carefully inspect the architectural and

mechanical drawings, and make visits to the site as the project proceeds to make certain that the hood and ductwork design is coordinated so as not to impede the progress of the project, that ducts and all planned collar and make-up air unit connections can be made within the planned spaces and mechanical chases provided for the system.

19) Ductwork is provided as a part of this item. Ductwork will be constructed and

installed per NFPA 96, and shall be provided with clean-outs as required by all applicable codes. Foodservice Equipment Contractor will closely coordinate the location of the cleanouts and damper access panels with other trades and the Architect so that ceiling and wall access panels can be planned.

20) Ductwork: Exhaust duct shall be 400 series 18 gauge stainless steel with fully

welded seams, and shall be liquid-tight. Supply duct shall be 18 gauge aluminized steel with stitch welded seams. All duct shall be approved for this use by applicable agencies.

21) Painting of exposed rooftop ventilation system equipment including exhaust

fan, curbs and equipment rails shall be by Foodservice Equipment Contractor. Paint shall be epoxy based and shall be applied over a primer approved for use with such paint in accordance with the manufacturers instructions.

22) Color is to be Slate Gray, unless otherwise specified by the Architect. 23) All exterior ductwork to be insulated and weatherproofed. Furthermore, all

exterior duct runs and shrouds shall have breaks on exposed sides and top. 24) Ventilator fan to be manufactured by Penn (Philadelphia-PA) or equal and

shall have a sone rating medium or less. 25) Fan to be sized so that the entire ventilation system can be balanced and

operated in accordance with all applicable codes. Provide grease collection devices installed on all exhaust fans.

26) Curb(s) and equipment rails shall be prefabricated and sized for fan and

proper ductwork. Pitch curbs and equipment rails to match roof deck. Provide internal vibration isolation and caps on equipment rails.

27) Make-up air unit to be provided with indirect gas fired furnace. 28) Make-up air unit(s) to be designed so that the incoming air grill is 10'-0" away

from any roof vent or exhaust. System price shall include all necessary duct extensions and painted metal supports required for rooftop heater, duct and intake. The F.E.C. shall supply base supports for all of the rooftop ventilation equipment. These supports shall be constructed of aluminized steel and shall be suitable for supporting the ventilation equipment. These supports shall be provided to the roofing contractor for installation and flashing prior to



the roof membrane installation. These supports to be painted to match roof top equipment.

29) Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall advise other trades, within two (2)

weeks of this contract, of ventilator configuration, including dimensional and weight information so that other trades can coordinate proper structural, architectural and mechanical details of this item with their own work.

30) Provide motorized inlet damper and intake filters in make up air unit. 31) Within three (3) weeks of contract award, Foodservice Equipment Contractor

to advise other trades of valve, line and load sizes and loose parts provided as a part of this item.

32) All hood controls shall be mounted on face of hood in stainless steel

enclosure, and shall include a switch for hood lights, switches and pilot lights for fans and furnace, dirty filter light, and supply air temperature controller.

33) Within three (3) weeks of contract award, Foodservice Equipment Contractor

shall advise other contractors of date of manufacture and delivery of all components of this system. In addition, F.E.C. shall provide the name of the firm installing the system. NOTE: The entire ventilation system must be available for installation on the site no less than 10 weeks prior to facility completion. Failure to meet this requirement will result in a $100 penalty for every calendar day the system is late.

34) Exhaust fan(s) shall be interlocked to make-up air unit(s), and shall be UL

listed for grease laden air. 35) Verify all utilities and air volumes. 36) Make certain that ventilation equipment and hood are delivered to site in time

to fit through access passages to kitchen and rooftop. 37) Gas fired make-up air units shall be design certified to appropriate ANSI

standards. 38) Wall behind hood must be a non-combustible or limited combustible wall. 39) Provide 18 gauge stainless steel wall panel on wall under entire length &

ends of hood. Wall paneling shall be joined together with t-strips and sealed with silicon caulk.

11) F.E.C. to provide closure panels from top of hood to ceiling as required. ALTERNATES: None



52

ITEM 65 Fire Protection System QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Ansul Fire Protection – Fire Systems of Michigan MODEL: R-102 FEATURES: 1) Provide a complete fire protection system, properly sized, consisting of

releasing mechanism, wall mounting rack, agent tank, detectors, nozzles, remote pull stations, propellant, and all necessary components required for code approved installation. Note that this installation will require that the pull stations must be mechanically linked to system.

2) Furnish required mechanical fuel shut-off valve(s) that will automatically cut-

off fuel to the equipment located beneath the hood in the event of fire; system interconnected to equipment. Provide with two (2) micro switches for each system.

3) Provide certificate of charge and test by a States authorized Ansul dealer 2

weeks prior to final foodservice inspection. 4) Unit to be installed in conformance with NFPA-96, UL300 and all applicable

codes. 5) System shall be capable of automatic and manual mechanical operation. 6) Systems designed to protect ventilation systems, including ductwork, and

equipment under hood, unless otherwise specified. 7) E.C. is to wire micro switch to shut down hood make up air only, fan is to

remain on to remove smoke. 8) Piping shall not be run horizontally with-in the exposed hood capture area. 9) Any and all plumbing exposed to view shall be stainless steel or chrome

plated. This requirement includes all fixtures, elbows, et cetera. 10) Provide required UL-300 extinguishing nozzles for all grease producing

equipment. 11) E.C. to provide and install shunt trip breakers to shut down every electrical

outlet under hood. ALTERNATES: None



ITEM 66 Worktable - Relocate/Existing QUANTITY: One (1) MANUFACTURER: Duke MODEL: 314S-3048-5R FEATURES: 1) F.E.C. to relocate existing unit(s) per General Standards section 1.11. 2) F.E.C. shall clean and inspect unit. ALTERNATES: None PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify Project Conditions: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor, before beginning his work, shall

examine the space and existing conditions, and shall report to Food Service Designs any conditions which prevents him from executing his work as required under the contract.

B. Take Field Dimensions: The F.E.C. shall take all field dimensions and shall be responsible thereafter. C. Coordinate with Other Trades: The F.E.C. shall coordinate the locations of chases, grease traps,

troughs, floor recesses, roll-up doors and passage ways to insure that the locations are correct and not conflicting with equipment, columns, footings, equipment bases, legs, et cetera.

D. Verify Installation: The F.E.C. shall verify that products furnished under this Section for installation

and under another Specification section have been correctly installed. 1. F.E.C. is solely responsible for delivering the food service equipment. The F.E.C. shall visit the site

to insure that large pieces of equipment will fit through doors, into elevators, down steps, et cetera. 2. F.E.C. shall make certain that all equipment is delivered to the site in time to fit through access

passages to their final locations. E. Coordinate Counter Detailing: In detailing fixtures, the F.E.C. shall consult with piping contractors to

be certain that due space allowance is made for traps and other controls, particularly under lower shelves of cabinets and counters.

F. Walk-in Refrigeration: The F.E.C. shall verify the size of the space allocated for walk-in cooler and

freezer units. If a recessed floor is being used, verify the size and slope of the recess. Floor is to be level. Do not proceed if conditions are unsatisfactory for a proper installation. Follow manufacturer's recommendations in determining relevant requirements. F.E.C. shall make certain that refrigeration systems supplied is of sufficient capacities to maintain proper temperatures.

G. Base and Curb Dimensions: F.E.C. shall measure to verify that curbs and bases are level, properly



54

sized and correctly located. Do not proceed if conditions are unsatisfactory. H. Utility Rough-In Points: F.E.C. shall measure to determine the precise location of utility rough-in

points; verify against plans and drawings. Revise shop drawings to show actual locations of utility services.

I. Timing of Examinations: F.E.C. shall examine field conditions in a timely manner, so as not to

impede the progress of the project. Perform on-site inspection of utilities as they are roughed-in to make certain that specified locations are appropriate and in keeping with the design. This inspection shall be made before floors are poured or walls covered. The F.E.C. shall be responsible thereafter.

J. Equipment Operations: F.E.C. will make certain that all equipment specified will operate in the correct

direction. If any piece of equipment will not function correctly where drawn, the F.E.C. will be responsible for advising Food Service Designs of the conflict. The F.E.C. has final responsibility for making certain that the equipment will function in the direction intended.

3.02 INSTALLATION A. Notice to Proper Authorities: Foodservice Equipment Contractor, at such time so as not to impede the

progress of the project, shall give to the proper authorities all notices as required by law relative to the work in his charge including the Public Health Department or State Regulatory Agencies, and State Fire Marshal; obtain all official permits, licenses, et cetera, and pay such proper and legal fees to public officers and others as may be necessary for the faithful performance of the work.

B. Sealing, Closed Bases: Certain fixtures and counters will have closed bases. The Foodservice

Equipment Contractor shall erect these items, using approved mastic or silicone compound to effectively seal out all space for vermin and eliminate spaces for water to stand.

1. Openings for pipes in walls or bottom of food compartments shall be tightly sealed against the

entry of vermin. 2. Reinforcing and framing members that are not totally enclosed or within walls are to be used in

such a manner as to be easily cleanable. 3. All framing members shall be constructed and installed so as to eliminate raceways, for harboring

of vermin. 4. The ends of all hollow sections shall be sealed. 5. Where fixed panels are applied to the outside or inside or set into an angle or other reinforced body

or counter frame, the method of fastening shall be such as to minimize projections and openings. C. Access Panels: Access panels are to be used for access to drains and junction boxes ONLY. They

are used for cleaning drains and accessing the junction boxes. They are not to be used for any plumbing or electrical chases. The plumbing and electrical lines shall be drilled or punched through sides, tops, shelves and bottom of counters and cabinets. These holes will be the same diameter as the pipe or conduit and sealed with silicone. The penetrations shall be made as far back and off to the sides as possible. Piping shall not interfere with the operation of equipment or storage of product. All piping shall be secured in-place.

D. Set in Place: Set each item of non-mobile and non-portable equipment securely in place; level and



adjust to correct height. E. Support Equipment: Anchor equipment to supporting substrate where indicated or where needed for

sustained operation and use without shifting or dislocation. Conceal anchorages where possible. F. Anchors and Chair Carriers: Where indicated or needed for safety of equipment operator, anchor

equipment to floor or wall with stainless steel screws or bolts. G. Coordination with Other Trades: Deliver to other contractors all loose plumbing parts; floor troughs,

steam fitting, ventilation and electrical parts that are a part of the equipment or the work under this contract, or required for their proper installation, and give instructions for their proper installation of each item.

H. Level Counters and Tables: Adjust counter tops and other work surfaces to level tolerance of 1/16

inch maximum offset, and maximum variation from level or indicated slope of 1/16 inch per four (4) foot.

I. Field Joints: Complete field-assembly joints in work (joints which cannot be completed in shop) by

welding, bolting-and-gasketing, or similar methods as required. Set or trim gaskets flush, except for "T" gaskets as indicated. Field joints in fabricated equipment shall be welded, and work surfaces ground and polished on premises, so that upon completion each item of equipment will have true, smooth and even surfaces. Filling with solder is not permitted.

J. Connected Equipment: As distinct from field joints, where a single item of equipment must be shipped

and brought into the project site in two or more sections that are welded into one unit, there are instances when two separate pieces of equipment are to be connected. For example, a dishwashing machine and the clean dishtable need to be attached. The F.E.C. shall make these connections rigid and strong by bolting the units together and sealing the joint with minimal amounts silicone caulking. Under no circumstances shall caulking alone, or excessive caulking to fill voids, be acceptable. Joints are to be watertight.

K. Enclosed Spaces: Treat spaces that shall be inaccessible after equipment installation, by covering

horizontal surfaces with powdered borax at rate of 4 ounces per square foot. L. Closure Plates and Strips: Install where required, with joints coordinated with units of equipment. M. Cut-Outs: The F.E.C. shall provide cut-outs in Foodservice equipment where needed to run soda,

plumbing, electric, gas, or steam lines through equipment items for final connections. These cutouts are to be made at the factory when possible. If a field cut-out is required it will be made just large enough for the piping and in a concealed location. All cut-outs will be sealed and vermin proof. F.E.C. shall provide rubber grommets where electrical cords penetrate metal.

N. Sealants and Gaskets: Install all around each unit to make joints air-tight, watertight, vermin-proof,

and sanitary for cleaning purposes. Where necessary, use backer rod to shape sealant bead properly, at 1/4 inch depth. Shape exposed surfaces of sealant slightly concave, with edges flush with faces of materials at joint. At internal-corner joints, apply sealant or gaskets to form a sanitary cove, of not less than 3/8 inch radius.

O. Existing/Relocated Equipment: F.E.C. shall remove existing/relocated equipment from storage and



56

set in place. Final connections shall be by other trades. Test each existing item for proper operation, and deliver to Owner in proper working condition or in specified condition.

P. Refrigeration Lines: F.E.C. shall connect refrigeration lines from all evaporator coils to condensing

units. F.E.C. is to locate; refrigerant lines, evaporator coils, condensing units and all necessary components. All penetrations shall be sealed.

Q. Existing Refrigeration Removal: Existing refrigeration equipment that is not scheduled to be reused

shall be removed and disposed of properly by the F.E.C. The F.E.C. shall capture refrigerant and dispose of in a lawful manner.

3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Supervision: Foodservice Equipment Contractor is to provide a competent field supervisor during the

installation of this part of the Work. 1. The field supervisor shall attend scheduled progress meetings. 2. The field supervisor shall supervise the installation of the equipment and connections and will

counsel with other contractors in regard to those connections and installation. 3. This representative will work closely with the site supervisor of the Owner; and will establish with

the site supervisor of the Owner his schedule of Foodservice equipment installation that will be satisfactory to all contractors affected by his work; a copy of this schedule sent, within two (2) weeks of contract award, to Food Service Designs.

4. If the F.E.C. falls behind in the performance of his work, as determined by Food Service Designs,

the F.E.C. supervisor will perform his work according to the priorities established by the Owner. 5. The F.E.C. supervisor shall instruct the operators of each piece of equipment in its proper use;

training to the satisfaction of Owner; repeat visits to the site may be required and should be anticipated.

B. Weather, Labor Issues, etc.: Foodservice Equipment Contractor is cautioned to anticipate the

required work required for this project. Consideration should be given to weather, labor issues, factory production schedules, and other issues relating to the performance of his work or work under the Foodservice Equipment contract. No additional monies will be paid for delayed work resulting from the Foodservice Equipment Contractor's failure to anticipate the scope of the work required for this project.

C. Equipment Fit: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor will make certain that all equipment specified

will fit into the spaces provided. If any piece of equipment will not fit where drawn, the F.E.C. will be responsible for advising Food Service Designs of the conflict. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor has final responsibility for making certain that equipment will fit as shown and specified.

1. Where racks or storage shelving are specified to be a certain length, height, and width, the

Foodservice Equipment Contractor will verify that the specified racks will fit as shown and specified, and will not interfere with plumbing lines, evaporators, electric conduit or other obstructions to the placement of the rack as shown.

2. Should the F.E.C. find that any item may not fit as drawn, he must send a letter to Food Service



Designs describing the situation and the proposed solution. Verbal communication does not constitute adequate notification of said problem.

D. Installation: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall install the equipment at the site in full

compliance with all applicable codes, rules and regulations of the Local, State, and Federal governing agencies. If, because of jurisdictional trade agreements or other conditions, any work specified to be performed under this contract must be done by others, the Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall sub-let such work to those who may be qualified to do such work or make other arrangements at his own expense as may be approved by Food Service Designs.

E. Delivery of Fabricated items: If it becomes necessary to schedule construction so that all partitions

will be erected prior to the delivery of the Foodservice Equipment, bidders are cautioned that all equipment must be fabricated so that it can be handled through finished door openings.

It is recommended that the F.E.C. document the condition of the fabricated equipment upon installation at the site with detailed photographs. If photographs are to be used, they must be taken after installation with color film. One (1) set each of the photographs should be forwarded to Food Service Designs and the Owner for record. The photographs will be accepted by Food Service Designs as a record of the condition of the equipment at installation and may be used to assign responsibility when damages are noted in site inspections.

F. Inspections by Regulatory Authorities: The authorized representative of State and Local municipal

inspectors and/or Food Service Designs shall have access to the work at all times wherever it is in progress or preparation. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall arrange a convenient time and access for such inspection.

G. Inspection By Food Service Designs: Food Service Designs shall have free access to the

Foodservice Equipment Contractor's shop or shops during the construction of this equipment for the purpose of making inspections to see that plans, specifications and detail drawings are being adhered to carefully. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall correct any errors found during these inspections to the extent and within the scope of the plans, specifications, detail drawings, and within the conditions of this contract.

H. Condemnation Procedures: Material delivered to the site shall be carefully inspected by the

Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall, within 24 hours after receiving written notice from Food Service Designs to that effect, proceed to remove from the grounds or building all materials, fixtures, or apparatus condemned by Food Service Designs whether the same shall be worked or un-worked, or take down and remove all portions of the work which Food Service Designs shall deem as failing to conform to the drawings and specifications and to the conditions of the contract.

3.04 TESTING A. Testing: Delay start-up of food service equipment until service lines have been tested, balanced, and

adjusted for pressure, voltage, and similar considerations; and until water and steam lines have been cleaned and treated for sanitation. Before testing, lubricate each equipment item in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Testing shall be performed by a certified service agency.

1. Test each item of operational equipment to establish that it is operating properly, and that controls

and safety devices are functioning. 2. Replace equipment or components of equipment which are found to be defective in its operation,



58

including units which are below capacity or operating with excessive noise or vibration. 3.05 CLEANING A. Cleaning During Project Progress: Clean up all debris made by F.E.C. personnel as work progresses,

leaving all work spaces as clear as reasonable. At the close of each work day, secure the work site so to prevent injury or accident to others. The Foodservice Equipment Contractor will be responsible for injuries resulting from failure to secure the work environment.

B. Remove Coverings and Clean: After completion of installation and completion of other major work in

food service areas, remove protective coverings and clean food service equipment internally and externally.

C. Restore Damaged Finishes: Restore exposed and semi-exposed finishes to remove abrasions and

other damages; polish exposed-metal surfaces and touch-up painted surfaces. Replace work which cannot be successfully restored.

D. Final Cleaning: After testing and start-up, and before the time of Substantial Completion, clean and

sanitize Foodservice equipment, and leave in condition ready for use in Foodservice. The F.E.C. shall contact the Owner to visually inspect the cleaned Foodservice equipment, and shall have the Owner sign a statement prepared by the F.E.C. A copy of the signed statement will be sent to Food Service Designs. If the F.E.C. fails to provide a copy with the Owners signature, the equipment will be cleaned again, until an Owners signed copy is received.

3.06 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING A. Demonstration: In the presence of the foodservice staff, demonstrate that each item functions as

specified. B. Instruction: Provide comprehensive on-site instruction in the proper operation and typical use of each

piece of equipment. Instruction shall be provided to the Owner or designated person(s) at or near a date set by owner at the completion of this project. Instruction shall be to the satisfaction of the Owner. Repeat visits to the site may be required and should be anticipated.

3.07 WARRANTIES AND GUARANTEES A. Period of Guarantee and Remedies: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall guarantee

materials and workmanship for a period of 12 months from the date of acceptance by the Owner and shall leave the work in perfect order at completion. Should defects develop within the guarantee period, the Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall, upon written notice of same, remedy the defects and reimburse the Owner for all damage to the other work, whether caused by the defects or by the work of correcting the defects. Guarantee shall cover all labor, parts travel and incidental expense.

1. All equipment for a period of 12 months. 2. All refrigerator compressors shall be for 5 years. B. Performance Bond and the Guarantee: Performance Bond will be furnished if required by the Owner

and shall be a part of this contract shall remain in effect until the expiration of the guarantee period as assurance of the Foodservice Equipment Contractor's obligation to fulfill this stipulation.

C. Guarantees Extending Beyond Eighteen Months: Guarantees, if any, extending beyond said one year



period shall be specifically indicated in the Specifications, and may be fulfilled by the assignment of the bond or written warranty of the manufacturer.

3.08 PUNCH LIST A. Pre-Punch List: The Foodservice Equipment Contractor shall prepare an internal punch list and

complete said list prior to completion of the project. This shall be done to minimize the final punch list and the time to complete the final punch list. Should defects arise F.E.C. shall repair, replace, or notify proper authorities. Under no circumstances shall the F.E.C. not inform or repair any defects found in there internal punch list.

B. Punch List: Food Service Designs shall visit the project to prepare a punch list of the Foodservice

Equipment Contractor's installation. Food Service Designs must prepare a punch list prior to the Health Department site inspection. The F.E.C. is responsible for notifying Food Service Designs.

C. Final Punch List: The Food service Equipment Contractor shall complete all punch lists in a timely

manner acceptable to the Owner. When complete, F.E.C. shall contact Food Service Designs in writing, to inspect that all work is completed. If Food Service Designs is required to make additional trips to the site after final inspection the F.E.C. will pay all costs incurred for each additional visit.

3.09 FINAL SUBMITTAL A. Final Submittal: The Food Service Equipment Contractor shall submit to the Owner in a timely manner

prior to opening the facility, all final submittal listed below. These shall be submitted in one (1) package at one time.

1. Three (3) operation and maintenance manuals, per section 1.07. 2. All keys, three (3) for each lock and each key labeled. 3. Three (3) copies of every drawing (as built), this includes all shop drawings, and rough-in drawings. 4. Three (3) additional copies of the buy-out brochure (as built). 3.10 CLARIFICATION A. Questions: Questions concerning the Foodservice equipment and these specifications, either before

bidding or after the award of the Foodservice equipment contract should be addressed to:

Food Service Designs, LLC 9201 Funston St.

White Lake, Michigan 48386 (248) 410-3459

B. Discrepancies: It is intended that the F.E.C. will provide the work described in the Foodservice

documents for this project, and shown on Foodservice drawings. Where there is a discrepancy between the drawings and the written documents, the F.E.C. will provide, item for item, those items that are indicated on one, but not the other. For example, a table will be provided if shown on plan but not indicated in written specifications. The F.E.C. shall provide the greater of the two, unless noted on the bid form. No additional monies will be granted to the F.E.C. if they fail to note the discrepancies on the bid form.

C. Interpretations: Final binding interpretations regarding Foodservice work contained in the Foodservice



60

bid documents and subsequent contract will be the responsibility of Food Service Designs. END OF SECTION 114000

PARTNERS 15-175B

Hamtramck Public Schools Kosciuszko MS Kitchen

200010 - 1


SECTION 200010 - BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 APPLICATION

A. This section applies to all mechanical work. The contractors involved shall check all sections of the

specifications in addition to the particular section covering their specific trade. Each distinct section of

the specifications aimed for one trade may have detailed information with regards to other trades,

therefore, it is imperative that all sections be reviewed to get a complete picture of all other trades'

functions and work required

B. The mechanical contractor is responsible for the installation and operation of the plumbing, fire

protection, hvac systems, and temperature control systems.

C. The mechanical contractor is responsible for receiving, unloading and placement of all of the owner

provided equipment.

1.3 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings are diagrammatic and show general location and arrangement of all the equipment and

piping.

B. Do not scale drawings for measurements.

C. Field verifications of actual existing conditions are required by the contractor since actual locations,

distances, and levels will be governed by actual field conditions. All measurements shall be verified at

the site.

D. Examine the drawings of other trades and verify the conditions governing the work on the job site.

Arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, traps, valves and accessories as may be required to

meet such conditions.

E. If during field verification, the contractor identifies that there may require substantial changes from the

original plans, the contractor shall notify the architect for agreement on necessary adjustment before the

installation is started

F. Discrepancies shown between plans, or between plans and actual field conditions, or between plans and

specifications shall promptly be brought to the attention of the architect for a decision.

G. Drawings and specifications are intended to cover the completed installation of systems to function as

described. The omission of the expressed reference to any item of labor and material necessary to

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 2


comply with practice codes, ordinances, etc., shall not relieve the contractor from providing such

additional labor and material at no cost to Owner.

H. The drawings show the location and general arrangement of equipment, piping and related items. They

shall be followed as closely as elements of the construction will permit.

I. Deviations from the drawings, with the exception of minor changes in routing and other such incidental

changes that do not affect the functioning or serviceability of the systems, shall not be made without the

written approval of the Architect.

J. The architectural and structural drawings take precedence in all matters pertaining to the building

structure, mechanical drawings in all matters pertaining to mechanical trades and electrical drawings in

all matters pertaining to electrical trades. Where there are conflicts or differences between the drawings

for the various trades, report such conflicts or differences to the Architect for resolution.

1.4 PERMITS

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all required permits, licenses, inspections, approvals and fees for mechanical

work shall be secured and paid for by the contractor. All work shall conform to all applicable codes, rules

and regulations.

1.5 CODES

A. All work shall be executed in accordance with the rules and regulations set forth in local and state codes.

Prepare any detailed drawings or diagrams, which may be required by the governing authorities. Where

the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials for construction in excess of code requirements, the

drawings and/or specifications shall govern.

1. Michigan Mechanical Code, 2012.

2. Michigan Plumbing Code, 2012.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide 40 hours of instruction to the owner's designated personnel in the maintenance and operation of

equipment and systems.

B. Provide complete maintenance and operating instructional manuals covering all mechanical equipment

herein specified, together with parts lists. Maintenance and operating instructional manuals shall be job

specific to this project. Generic manuals are not acceptable. Four (4) copies of all literature shall be

furnished for owner and shall be bound in book or ring binder form. Maintenance and operating

instructional manuals shall be provided when construction is approximately 75% complete.

1.7 WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE

A. Contractor shall guarantee all work installed by him or his subcontractors to be free from defect in

material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of final acceptance of the work, unless a

longer period is stipulated under specific headings. Contractor shall repair or replace at no additional cost

to the owner, any material or equipment developing defects and shall also make good any damage

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 3


caused by such defects or the correction of defects. Repairs or replacements shall bear additional

guarantee, as originally called for, dated from the final acceptance of the repair or replacement. This

requirement shall be binding even though it will exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some

manufacturers. Contractor shall submit his own and each equipment manufacturers written certificates,

warranting that each item of equipment furnished complies with all requirements of the drawings and

specifications. Note that guarantee shall run from date of final acceptance of the work, not from date of

installation of a device or piece of equipment.

1.8 SUBMITTALS

A. Types of submittals include the following:

1. Shop Drawings

2. Product Data Sheets

3. Samples

4. Manufacturers Instructions

5. Maintenance Data

6. Warranty

B. Installation of any item that requires submittal approval by the engineer shall be installed at the

contractors risk. The contractor, at his cost, shall remove all work installed prior to approval of the

submittal.

C. The engineer will not be responsible for errors in quantities, or dimensions required to fit the job

condition, details of fabrication to insure proper assembly at the job, or for errors resulting from mistakes

in submittals.

D. For underground piping, record dimensions and invert elevations of all piping, including all offsets,

fittings, cathodic protection and accessories. Locate dimensions from benchmarks that will be preserved

after construction is complete.

E. Product data cut sheets shall be submitted on the material and equipment as requested in these

specifications.

1.9 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record drawings shall be maintained by the contractor up to date as the project progresses.

B. Recording all deviations from the contract documents, indicate exact locations of all buried services both

inside and outside of the building; include concealed piping and equipment in the entire contract. Final

record drawings shall reflect the as-built conditions.


A. Other referenced standards:

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 4


1. Comply with referenced standards, guidelines, data sheets from various associations, including

NFPA, ANSI, ASTM, ASME, ASHRAE

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SLEEVES AND ESCUTCHEONS

A. Provide sleeves wherever pipes pass through exterior wall, and floors. Sleeves shall be schedule 40

steel pipe cut to length. Sleeves shall terminate flush with walls, partitions and ceilings in finished areas.

All sleeves through floor shall extend 2" above floor. Provide cast brass nickel-plated escutcheons with

positive catches on each visible sleeve penetration. Sleves are to be sealed at each installation with a

3M approved sealant. The space between the inside of the sleeve and the outside of the pipe or conduit

with in the sleeve shall be sealed at each installation with a 3M approved sealant.

2.2 DIELECTRIC UNIONS

A. Dielectric unions shall be used to connect dissimilar metals (such as steel and copper) to prevent

electrolytic action.

2.3 FILTERS

A. Provide and maintain filters in air handling systems throughout the construction period and prior to final

acceptance of the building. Do not run air handling equipment without all prefilters and final filters as

specified. Immediately prior to final building acceptance by the owner, contractor shall replace all

disposable type air filters with new.

2.4 BUILDING ATTACHMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK SUPPORTS

A. General Requirements:

1. Provide building attachments required for supporting mechanical work, suitably selected and

installed for the loads applied with a minimum additional safety factor of 3.

2. Where specified attachments are not suitable for conditions, submit to Engineer for approval,

proposal for alternate building attachments.

3. Approved Manufacturers: Grinnell, or equivalent products by Michigan Hanger and B-Line.

4. Provide supplemental trapeze supports where necessary. Design trapeze to support all trades.

Coordinate loads, and supports with all trades. Size trapeze for maximum deflection of 1/64 of the

span.

B. Attachments to Structural Steel:

1. Support mechanical work from building structural steel where possible and approved. No welding or

bolting to structural steel is permitted unless authorized by Architect. C-clamps are not permitted.

a. Center beam clamp - for loads over 120 lb.: Malleable center hung Grinnell Fig. 228.

b. Side beam clamp with retaining clips - for loads up to 120 lb.

C. Cast in Place Concrete Inserts:

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 5


1. Provide inserts selected for applied load of present load plus 100% for future, and coordinated with

concrete work. Except as detailed on drawings, inserts shall be Unistrut or Grinnell. Plan, lay out

and coordinate setting of inserts prior to concrete pour. Use Grinnell Fig. 285 lightweight concrete

insert for loads up to 400# or Grinnell Fig. 281 Wedge Type concrete insert for loads up to 1200#

D. Drilled Insert Anchors:

1. Where mechanical work cannot be supported from structural steel, or cast in place concrete inserts,

provide drilled concrete insert anchors. Submit for approval, project specific installation drawings

for all loads over 100 lbs. Install inserts in web of beam if possible and approved. Insert depth shall

not exceed two thirds the thickness of the concrete. Where existing concrete appears to be

deteriorating, or where applied load at insert exceeds 1000 lbs., conduct test of concrete to

determine derated capacity of insert. Anchors may be adhesive or expansion type up to 1000 lbs.,

and shall be adhesive type for loads over 1000 lbs.

2. Manufacturers: Hilti

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Demolition of mechanical equipment shall include all existing piping, valves, controls, supports and

equipment where such items are not required for reuse. Mechanical equipment not specified for reuse

shall be removed by the mechanical contractor from the site.

B. Existing piping and ductwork: when encountered during the course of work, protect, brace and support

existing piping and ductwork where required for proper execution of the work.

C. Interruption of existing active piping and ductwork: when the course of work makes shut-down of services

unavoidable, the mechanical contractor shall schedule the shut-down at such time as approved by the

owners representative, which will cause least interference with established operating routine.

D. Arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings as duct transitions traps, valves and accessories

necessary to complete all construction in an orderiy fashion.

E. Install all equipment in strict accordance all directions and recommendations furnished by the

manufacturer.

3.2 ACCESSIBILITY

A. Do not locate traps, controls, unions, pull boxes, etc. in any system at a location that will be inaccessible

after construction is completed. Maintain accessibility for all components in mechanical, electrical, and

plumbing systems.

3.3 ACCESS PANELS:

A. Furnish access panels to access valves, traps, control valves or devices, dampers, damper motors, etc.

Access panels shall be sized as necessary for ample access, or as indicated on drawings, but no smaller

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 6


than 12" x 12" where devices are within easy reach of operator, and at least 24"x24" when operator must

pass through opening in order to reach the devices. Architectural Trades shall install access panels

coordinated with Mechanical Trades.

B. Access panels in fire rated walls or ceiling must be U.L. labeled for intended use. Unless otherwise

indicated on plans, access doors shall be hinged flush type steel framed panel, 14 gauge minimum for

frame, and with anchor straps. Only narrow border shall be exposed. Hinges shall be concealed type.

Locking device shall be flush type and screw driver operated. Metal surfaces shall be prime coated with

rust-inhibitive paint. Panels shall be compatible with architectural adjacent materials Manufacturer:

Milcor, Bilco.

C. Coordinate location with architect prior to installation.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. All cutting required shall be done by the contractor whose work is involved, without extra cost the owner.

All patching and restoration including the furnishing and installation of access panels in ceiling, walls; etc.

Within the building lines shall be done by the respective, responsible contractor. No cutting of structural

steel, concrete, or wood shall be done without prior approval and explicit directions of the architect

patched by the respective, responsible contractor.

B. The contractor, under whose jurisdiction the work may fall, shall provide labor, material, and tools

required to cut, repair, protect, cap, or relocate existing pipes, conduits, or utilities interfering with or

uncovered during work, per regulations of the authorities having jurisdiction.

3.5 ROUGH-IN FOR CONNECTION TO EQUIPMENT

A. It shall be the responsibility of each contractor to study the architectural, structural, electrical, and

mechanical drawings, conferring with the various trades involved and checking with the supplier of

equipment in order to properly rough-in for all equipment.

3.6 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT

A. All material and equipment shall be new and of the best quality used for the purpose in good commercial

practice, and shall be the standard product of reputable manufacturers. The material and equipment

must meet approval of state and local codes in the area it is being used. Roof decks shall not be used to

support piping, conduit, equipment, devices, etc.

3.7 SEAL PENETRATIONS

A. Seal the space around pipes in sleeves and around duct openings through walls, floors and ceilings.

Provide adequate clearance to allow for proper sealing.

3.8 FIRE STOPPING

A. Provide UL classified firestopping system for mechanical penetrations through rated walls and floors to

maintain the fire rating.

PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 7


3.9 CONTROL WIRING

A. All control wiring for mechanical and electrical equipment, including motor starters, shall be 120 volt

maximum and wired with one side of the coil grounded and the operating contacts in the north side of the

circuit. All control wiring shall be installed in conduit.


PARTNERS 15-175B


200010 - 8


PARTNERS 15-175B


200020 - 1


SECTION 200020 - ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS FOR MECHANICAL WORK

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Basic electrical requirements for mechanical work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Mechanical equipment is to be furnished with motors, electrical controls and protective devices, and

integral operating devices which are normally included by the manufacturer or required by the Contract

Documents.

B. The Mechanical Trades shall provide all control wiring, 120 volts and less, for the equipment and devices

furnished under Division 21, 22, and 23 of these specifications, including all wiring devices, conduit, etc.

C. Power wiring 120 volts and greater shall be by the Electrical Trades.


A. All electrical devices provided by Mechanical Trades, and all electrical devices furnished as part of the

mechanical equipment shall be UnderwritersLaboratories (UL) listed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.


PARTNERS 15-175B


200020 - 2


PARTNERS 15-175B


220553 - 1


SECTION 220553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Pipe Markers.

1.2 REFERENCE STANDARDS

A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers; 2007.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corp.

B. Champion-America, Inc.

C. Seton Identification Products.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

2.3 TAGS

A. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

B. Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Comply with ASME A13.1.

PARTNERS 15-175B


220553 - 2


B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install plastic nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with

sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic tape pipe markers complete around pipe in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

E. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic tape pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch

diameter and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with

axis of piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops,

adjacent to each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each

obstruction.

F. Install ductwork with plastic nameplates. Identify with air handling unit identification number and area

served. Locate identification at air handling unit, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure,

and at each obstruction.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Identify all mechanical equipment, piping, and ductwork with nameplates, tags and markers.


PARTNERS 15-175B


220719 - 1


SECTION 220719 - PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.


A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014.

C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.

D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved

2013).

E. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal

Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2014.

F. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.

G. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless

Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).

H. ASTM D1056 - Standard Specification for Flexible Cellular Materials--Sponge or Expanded Rubber;

2014.

I. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

J. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.

K. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National

Fire Protection Association; 2006.

L. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters

Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for

each service, and locations.

PARTNERS 15-175B


220719 - 2


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION

A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when

tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers:

1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com.

2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.

3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.

2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F.

3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

4. Density: 3.5 lb/cu. ft

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. White kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission

when tested in accordance with ASTM E 96 of 0.02 perm-inches.

D. Tie Wire:

1. 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

E. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

1. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive shall be compatible with the insulation and as recommended by the

insulation manufacturer

F. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

G. Fibrous Glass Fabric:

1. Cloth: Untreated; 9 oz/sq yd weight.

2. Blanket: 1.0 lb/cu ft density.

3. Weave: 5x5.

H. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, white color.

PARTNERS 15-175B


220719 - 3


2.3 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.

b. Protto

c. Ceelco

2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.

c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance withASTM E96/E96M.

d. Thickness: 10 mil.

e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install in accordance with NAIMA National Insulation Standards.

C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal

laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding

staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent

pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

E. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward

clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.

Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

PARTNERS 15-175B


220719 - 4


F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Plumbing Systems:

1. Domestic Hot Water Supply and Return

a. Glass Fiber Insulation:

1) Pipe Size Range: 1/2-3 inch.

2) Thickness: 1 inch.

2. Domestic Potable and non Potable Cold Water:

a. Glass Fiber Insulation:

1) Pipe Size Range: 3 inch.

(a) Thickness: 1 inch.


PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 1


SECTION 221005 - PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems.

1. Sanitary sewer.

2. Domestic water.

3. Gas.

4. Pipe hangers and supports.

5. Valves.

6. Flow controls.

7. Check.

8. Strainers.


A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2011.

B. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).

C. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society

of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

D. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).

F. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing

Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

G. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-Coated, Welded

and Seamless; 2012.

H. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel

for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2015.

I. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014).

J. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2014.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 2


K. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.

L. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper

Alloy Tube; 2010.

M. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy

Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010).

N. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping

Systems; 2012.

O. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe

and Fittings; 2014.

P. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010).

Q. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings;

2014.

R. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works

Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5).

S. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651).

T. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm

Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2009.

U. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings

for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2011

V. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and

Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.

W. MSS SP-71 - Cast Iron Swing Check Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers

Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.

X. MSS SP-80 - Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves; Manufacturers Standardization Society of

the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2013.

Y. MSS SP-85 - Cast Iron Globe & Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers

Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011.

Z. MSS SP-110 - Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint, Grooved and Flared Ends;

Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2010.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 3


AA. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014.

AB. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.


A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standards.

B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations.

C. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX.

1.4 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS

A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan plumbing code.

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices.

C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of

backflow prevention devices.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves.

C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the

work, and isolating parts of completed system.


A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply

with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 4


2.2 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 (latest edition) bearing collective trademark of CISPI, hubless.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: CISPI 310 (latest edition) bearing the markings of NSF International, neoprene gasket and

stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies.

B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665 or ASTM D3034.

1. Fittings: PVC.

2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 solvent cement.

2.3 SANITARY SEWER AND VENT PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301 (latest edition) bearing collective trademark of CISPI,, hubless, service weight.

1. Fittings: Cast iron.

2. Joints: CISPI 310 (latest edition) bearing the markings of NSF International, neoprene gaskets and

stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies.

2.4 DOMESTIC WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type K (A), Drawn (H).

1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder.

2.5 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.

2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded.

3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene

tape.

2.6 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type.

2. Joints: Threaded or welded to ASME B31.1.

2.7 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 5


1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using

MSS SP-58 recommendations.

2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers.

3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure.

4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp.

B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods.

5. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

6. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

7. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

8. Floor Support: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and concrete pier or

steel support.

9. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

C. Plumbing Piping - Water:

1. Conform to ASME B31.9.

2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

5. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron pipe roll, double

hanger.

6. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded supports or spacers and hanger rods.

7. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded

supports or spacers and hanger rods, cast iron roll.

8. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

9. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

10. Wall Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp

with adjustable steel yoke and cast iron pipe roll.

11. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

12. Floor Support for Cold Pipe: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, lock nut, nipple, floor flange, and

concrete pier or steel support.

13. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes to 4 Inches: Cast iron adjustable pipe saddle, locknut, nipple, floor

flange, and concrete pier or steel support.

14. Floor Support for Hot Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable cast iron pipe roll and stand, steel

screws, and concrete pier or steel support.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 6


15. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated.

2.8 GLOBE VALVES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com.

2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.

3. Nibco, Inc: www.nibco.com.

4. Milwaukee Valve Company: www.milwaukeevalve.com.

B. Up To and Including 3 Inches:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body, bronze trim, handwheel, bronze disc, solder ends.

C. 2 Inches and Larger:

1. MSS SP-85, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, renewable

bronze plug-type disc, renewable seat, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6

inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor.

2.9 BALL VALVES

A. Manufacturers:


2. Conbraco Industries, Inc: www.apollovalves.com.



B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body,

chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever

handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union.

2.10 FLOW CONTROLS

A. Manufacturers:


2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.

3. Griswold Controls: www.griswoldcontrols.com.

4. Taco, Inc: www.taco-hvac.com.

B. Construction: Class 125, Brass or bronze body with union on inlet and outlet, temperature and pressure

test plug on inlet and outlet, blowdown/backflush drain.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 7


C. Calibration: Control flow within 5 percent of selected rating, over operating pressure range of 10 times

minimum pressure required for control, maximum minimum pressure 3.5 psi.

2.11 SWING CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:


2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.



B. Up to 2 Inches:

1. MSS SP-80, Class 125, bronze body and cap, bronze swing disc with rubber seat, solder ends.

C. Over 2 Inches:

1. MSS SP-71, Class 125, iron body, bronze swing disc, renewable disc seal and seat, flanged or

grooved ends.

2.12 SPRING LOADED CHECK VALVES

A. Manufacturers:


2. Hammond Valve: www.hammondvalve.com.

3. Crane Co.: www.cranecpe.com.


B. Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, stainless steel springs, bronze disc, Buna N seals, wafer style ends.

2.13 STRAINERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Mueller Steam Specialties

2. Nibco, Inc.

3. Watts Water Technologies

4. Zurn Industries, LLC.

B. Size 2 inch and Under:

1. Class 150, lead free, threaded bronze body 300 psi CWP, Y pattern with 1/32 inch stainless steel

perforated screen.

C. Size 1-1/2 inch to 4 inch:

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 8


1. Class 125, flanged iron body, Y pattern with 1/16 inch stainless steel perforated screen.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cast iron soil pipe installed in accordance to

CISPI's Handbook.

B. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals.

C. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls.

D. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space.

E. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.

F. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and

access to valves and fittings.

G. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed.

H. Establish elevations of buried piping outside the building to ensure not less than 4 ft of cover.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.

J. Provide support for utility meters in accordance with requirements of utility companies.

K. Install valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.

L. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder,

and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF

372.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 9


M. PVC Pipe: Underground installation in compliance to ASTM D-2321. Make solvent-welded joints in

accordance with ASTM D2855.

N. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors.

O. Inserts:

1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork.

2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced

concrete beams.

3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches.

4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface.

5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through-bolt with

recessed square steel plate and nut above slab.

P. Pipe Hangers and Supports:

1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9.

2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled.

3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work.

4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow.

5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement

without disengagement of supported pipe.

6. Support vertical piping at every other floor. Support riser piping independently of connected

horizontal piping.

7. Where several pipes can be installed in parallel and at same elevation, provide multiple or trapeze

hangers.

8. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping.

9. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports located in crawl spaces,

pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.

10. Support cast iron drainage piping at every joint.

3.4 APPLICATION

A. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections.

B. Install brass male adapters each side of valves in copper piped system. Solder adapters to pipe.

C. Install gate valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

D. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services.

E. Provide spring loaded check valves on discharge of water pumps.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 10


F. Provide flow controls in water recirculating systems where indicated.

3.5 TOLERANCES

A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to

drain at minimum of 1/8 inch per foot slope.

B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points.

3.6 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM

A. Disinfect water distribution system in accordance with Section 331300.

B. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.

C. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or

acid (hydrochloric).

D. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80

mg/L residual.

E. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of

outlets.

F. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours.

G. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment.

H. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.

I. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry,

and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Pipe Hanger Spacing:

1. Metal Piping:

a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches:

1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft.

2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches.

b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches:

1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft.

2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.

c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches:


PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 11


2. Plastic Piping:

a. All Sizes:


2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.


PARTNERS 15-175B


221005 - 12


PARTNERS 15-175B


221006 - 1


SECTION 221006 - PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Floor drains.

B. Cleanouts.

1.2 RELATED REQUIREMENTS

A. Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping.

B. Section 224000 - Plumbing Fixtures.

C. Section 223000 - Plumbing Equipment.


A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001

(R2007).

B. ASME A112.21.2M - Roof Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 1983.

C. ASSE 1013 - Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventers and Reduced Pressure Fire Protection

Principle Backflow Preventers; American Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011.

D. ASSE 1019 - Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Freeze Resistant Automatic Draining Type; American

Society of Sanitary Engineering; 2011 (ANSI/ASSE 1019).

E. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012.

F. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate assembly and

support requirements.

PARTNERS 15-175B


221006 - 2



A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage.

PART 2 PRODUCTS


A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372

for maximum lead content.

2.2 DRAINS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Mifab Manufacturing Inc.: www.mifab.com

2. Josam Company: www.josam.com.

3. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company.

4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.

B. Floor Sink (FS-2):

1. Square lacquered cast iron body with integral seepage pan, epoxy coated interior, aluminum dome

strainer, clamp collar, half grate.

2.3 CLEANOUTS (CO)

A. Manufacturers:


2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.

3. Josam Company: www.josam.com.

4. Zurn Industries, Inc.:

B. Cleanouts at Exterior Surfaced Areas :

1. Round cast nickel bronze access frame and non-skid cover.

C. Cleanouts at Exterior Unsurfaced Areas :

1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover.

D. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas:

1. Adjustable floor cleanout, Lacquered cast iron body with agas and watertight ABS tapered thread

plug, and round scoriated secured top (finish: polished nickel bronze) adjustable to floor finish.

Coordinate floor finishes with architect prior to order.

2. Zurn Industries, Inc.:; Model Z-1400

PARTNERS 15-175B


221006 - 3


E. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas :

1. Lacquered cast iron body, gas and water tight ABS tapered thread plug, and round stainless steel

access cover with vandal proof securing top.

2. Zurn Industries, Inc.: Wall; Model Z-1441 or Z-1446

F. Cleanouts at Interior Unfinished Accessible Areas : Calked or threaded type. Provide bolted stack

cleanouts on vertical rainwater leaders.

1. Zurn Industries, Inc.:

2.4 SUMPS AND INTERCEPTORS

A. Manufacturers:


2. ACO International: www.aco-technologies.com.

3. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com.

4. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com.

B. Grease Interceptors:

1. Construction:

a. Material: Precast concrete.

b. Rough-in: Fully recessed flush with floor (deep rough-in) with anchor flange.

c. Accessories: Multi-weir baffle assembly, integral deep seal trap, removable integral flowcontrol, sediment bucket.

d. Cover: Steel, epoxy coated, non-skid with gasket, securing handle, and enzyme injection port,recessed for floor finish.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install approved potable water protection devices where contamination of domestic water may occur;

This includes fire sprinkler system.

C. Install approved potable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic

water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation,

irrigation systems, interior and exterior hose bibs.

D. Pipe relief from backflow preventer to nearest drain.


PARTNERS 15-175B


221006 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


223000 - 1


SECTION 223000 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pumps.

1. Circulators.


A. UL 1453 - Standard for Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters; Underwriters


B. ANSI Z21.10.3

C. CSA 4.3

D. ASME, Section IV

E. ANSI/ASHRAE 15-1994, Section 8.13.6

F. NEC

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data (Pumps):

1. Indicate pump type, capacity, power requirements.

2. Provide certified pump curves showing pump performance characteristics with pump and system

operating point plotted. Include NPSH curve when applicable.

3. Provide electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement

part numbers and availability, and service depot location and telephone number.

C. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer.


A. Performance (Pumps): Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor

binding and cavitation, are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, operate within 25 percent

of midpoint of published maximum efficiency curve.

PARTNERS 15-175B


223000 - 2


1.5 CERTIFICATIONS

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Provide five year manufacturer warranty for domestic water heaters and in-line circulator.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IN-LINE CIRCULATOR PUMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong Pumps Inc: www.armstrongpumps.com.

2. ITT Bell & Gossett: www.bellgossett.com.

3. Taco.

B. Casing: Bronze, rated for 125 psig working pressure, with stainless steel rotor assembly.

C. Impeller: Bronze.

D. Shaft: Alloy steel with integral thrust collar and two oil lubricated bronze sleeve bearings.

E. Seal: Carbon rotating against a stationary ceramic seat.

F. Drive: Flexible coupling.

G. Performance:

1. See schedules.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install plumbing equipment in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, as required by code, and

complying with conditions of certification, if any.

B. Coordinate with plumbing piping and related electrical work to achieve operating system.

C. Pumps:

PARTNERS 15-175B


223000 - 3


1. Ensure pumps operate at specified system fluid temperatures without vapor binding and cavitation,

are non-overloading in parallel or individual operation, and operate within 25 percent of midpoint of

published maximum efficiency curve.


PARTNERS 15-175B


223000 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


230553 - 1


SECTION 230553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Nameplates.

B. Tags.

C. Pipe Markers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification.

B. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function,

and valve manufacturer's name and model number.

C. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com.

B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com.

C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

2.2 NAMEPLATES

A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters.

1. Letter Color: White.

2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch.

3. Background Color: Black.

2.3 TAGS

A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background

color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter.

B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230553 - 2


C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame.

2.4 PIPE MARKERS

A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1.

B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe

covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed.

C. Underground Plastic Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape, minimum 6

inches wide by 4 mil thick, manufactured for direct burial service.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient

adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer.

B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain.

C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe.

E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with

plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags.

F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates.

G. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates.

H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags.

I. Identify air terminal units and radiator valves with numbered tags.

J. Identify piping, concealed or exposed, with plastic pipe markers. Use tags on piping 3/4 inch diameter

and smaller. Identify service, flow direction, and pressure. Install in clear view and align with axis of

piping. Locate identification not to exceed 20 feet on straight runs including risers and drops, adjacent to

each valve and Tee, at each side of penetration of structure or enclosure, and at each obstruction.


PARTNERS 15-175B


230553 - 3


PARTNERS 15-175B


230553 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


230593 - 1


SECTION 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems.

B. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.


A. ASHRAE Std 111 - Measurement, Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing of Building HVAC Systems;

American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2008.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures.

B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed

and the specific approach for each system and component.

1. Include at least the following in the plan:

a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be

performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used.

b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be

tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each.

c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawingsduring the process.

d. Final test report forms to be used.

e. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution.

C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing

of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance.

1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report.

2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for

Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals.

3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration.

4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use

that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111.

5. Units of Measure: Report data in I-P (inch-pound) units only.

6. Include the following on the title page of each report:

a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency.

d. Project name.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230593 - 2


e. Project location.

f. Project Engineer.

g. Project Contractor.

h. Report date.

PART 2 PRODUCTS - NOT USED

PART 3 EXECUTION


A. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following:

B. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to

Substantial Completion of the project.

C. TAB Agency Qualifications:

1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.

3.2 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following

conditions:

1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition.

2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable.

3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.

4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters.

5. Duct systems are clean of debris.

6. Fans are rotating correctly.

7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open.

8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed.

9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place.

10. Air outlets are installed and connected.

B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance.

C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.

3.3 PREPARATION

A. Provide additional balancing devices as required.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230593 - 3


3.4 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES

A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or

minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems.

B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent and minus 5 percent of design to space.

Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within plus or minus 10 percent of design.

3.5 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING

A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions.

B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be

restored. Set and lock memory stops.

C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption

has been rectified.

D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to

electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

3.6 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE

A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air

quantities.

B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct.

C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets.

D. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create

objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers

and splitters.

E. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary

branch air quantities by damper regulation.

F. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet.

G. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, and

total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters.

3.7 SCOPE

A. Test, adjust, and balance the following:

PARTNERS 15-175B


230593 - 4


1. Packaged Roof Top Heating/Cooling Units

2. Fans

3. Air Inlets and Outlets

3.8 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED

A. Electric Motors:

1. HP/BHP

2. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load

3. RPM

B. Air Moving Equipment:

1. Location

2. Manufacturer

3. Model number

4. Serial number

5. Air flow, specified and actual

6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

7. Inlet pressure

8. Discharge pressure

9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

10. Fan RPM

C. Exhaust Fans:

1. Location

2. Manufacturer

3. Model number

4. Serial number

5. Air flow, specified and actual

6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual

7. Inlet pressure

8. Discharge pressure

9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

10. Fan RPM


PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 1


SECTION 230713 - DUCT INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Duct insulation.

B. Duct Liner.


A. Section 233100 - HVAC Ducts and Casings: Glass fiber ducts.


A. ASTM C518 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the

Heat Flow Meter Apparatus; 2010.

B. ASTM C553 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Blanket Thermal Insulation for Commercial and

Industrial Applications; 2013.

C. ASTM C612 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation; 2014.

D. ASTM C916 - Standard Specification for Adhesives for Duct Thermal Insulation; 2014.

E. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

F. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.

G. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National

Fire Protection Association; 2006.

H. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

I. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters


1.4 SUBMITTALS



B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures necessary to ensure acceptable

workmanship and that installation standards will be achieved.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 2



A. Applicator Qualifications: Company specializing in performing the type of work specified in this section

and approved by manufacturer.


A. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labelled with manufacturer's identification, including

product density and thickness.

B. Protect insulation from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and mechanical damage,

by storing in original wrapping.


A. Maintain ambient temperatures and conditions required by manufacturers of adhesives, mastics, and

insulation cements.

B. Maintain temperature during and after installation for minimum period of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION


tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.

2.2 GLASS FIBER, FLEXIBLE WRAP

A. Manufacturer:


2. Johns Manville: www.jm.com.

3. Owens Corning Corporation: www.ocbuildingspec.com.

4. CertainTeed Corporation: www.certainteed.com.

B. Insulation: ASTM C553; flexible, noncombustible blanket.

1. 'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.

2. Maximum Service Temperature: 1200 degrees F.

3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent by weight.

C. Insulation shall be 1.5 lb/cu. ft. density. Refer to Schedule below for thickness.

D. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 3


1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Secure with pressure sensitive tape.

E. Vapor Barrier Tape:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive

rubber based adhesive.

F. Tie Wire: Annealed steel, 16 gage, 0.0508 inch diameter.

2.3 GLASS FIBER, RIGID (EXTERIOR BOARD DUCT INSULATION)

A. Manufacturer:





B. Insulation: ASTM C612; rigid, noncombustible blanket.

1. 'K' value: 0.31 at 75 degrees F, when tested in accordance with ASTM C518.


3. Maximum Water Vapor Sorption: 5.0 percent.

C. Vapor Barrier Jacket:

1. Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film.

2. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.029 ng/Pa s m (0.02 perm inch), when tested in accordance with

ASTM E96/E96M.

3. Secure with two coats of vapor barrier mastic and glass tape.

D. Vapor Barrier Tape:

1. Kraft paper reinforced with glass fiber yarn and bonded to aluminized film, with pressure sensitive

rubber based adhesive. The use of duct tape is prohibited.

2.4 DUCT LINER

A. Manufacturers:



3. Owens Corning Corp; Model Fiberglas Duct Liner Board: www.owenscorning.com.


B. Insulation: ASTM C 1071; flexible, noncombustible blanket with poly vinyl acetate polymer impregnated

surface and edge coat.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 4


1. Apparent Thermal Conductivity: Maximum of 0.31 at 75 degrees F.

2. Service Temperature: Up to 250 degrees F.

3. Rated Velocity on Coated Air Side for Air Erosion: 5,000 fpm, minimum.

4. Maximum Velocity on Coated Air Side: 5,000 fpm.

5. Minimum Noise Reduction Coefficients:

6. 1 inch Thickness: 0.45.

C. Adhesive: Waterproof, fire-retardant type, ASTM C916.

D. Liner Fasteners: Galvanized steel, self-adhesive pad with integral head.

1. Density: 1.5 lb/cu ft

2. Liner shall meet Anti-Bacterial Requirements of ASTM C 1071, ASTM G 21 and ASTM G 22

3. Liner shall be cleanable in accordance with NAIMA "Duct Cleaning Guide."

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that ducts have been pressure and leak tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean, foreign material removed, and dry.

3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Insulated ducts conveying air below ambient temperature:

1. Provide insulation with vapor barrier jackets.

2. Finish with tape and vapor barrier jacket.

3. Continue insulation through walls penetrtions and at hanger connections.

4. Insulate entire system including fittings, joints, flanges, fire dampers, flexible connections, and

expansion joints.

D. Exterior Applications: Provide insulation with vapor barrier jacket. Cover with with calked aluminum

jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal duct section.

E. External Duct Insulation Application:

1. Secure insulation with vapor barrier with wires and seal jacket joints with vapor barrier adhesive or

tape to match jacket.

2. Secure insulation without vapor barrier with staples, tape, or wires.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 5


3. Install without sag on underside of duct. Use adhesive or mechanical fasteners where necessary to

prevent sagging. Lift duct off trapeze hangers and insert spacers.

4. Seal vapor barrier penetrations by mechanical fasteners with vapor barrier adhesive.

5. Stop and point insulation around access doors and damper operators to allow operation without

disturbing wrapping.

F. Duct and Plenum Liner Application:

1. Adhere insulation with adhesive for 90 percent coverage.

2. Secure insulation with mechanical liner fasteners. Refer to SMACNA (DCS) for spacing.

3. Seal and smooth joints. Seal and coat transverse joints.

4. Seal liner surface penetrations with adhesive.

5. Duct dimensions indicated are net inside dimensions required for air flow. Increase duct size to

allow for insulation thickness.

6. Provide nosing on all exposed fibergalss edges.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Exhaust Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings:

1. Flexible Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inches thick.

B. Relief Ducts Within 10 ft of Exterior Openings:


C. Outside Air Intake Ducts:


D. Outside Air and Exhaust Air Plenums:


2. Rigid Glass Fiber Duct Insulation: 1 inch thick.

E. Return Air Ductwork (located in plenum/conditioned space):

1. Duct Liner: 1 inches thick (first ten feet only) from unit.

F. Supply Ductwork (located in plenum or unconditioned spaces):


G. Supply Ductwork (located exposed in conditioned space):

1. No Insulation Required


PARTNERS 15-175B


230713 - 6


PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 1


SECTION 230719 - HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Piping insulation.

B. Jackets and accessories.


A. Section 078400 - Firestopping.

B. Section 221005 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.

C. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts.


A. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

B. ASTM B209M - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate [Metric]; 2014.

C. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal

Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013.

D. ASTM C195 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulating Cement; 2007 (Reapproved

2013).

E. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2015.

F. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless

Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013).

G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014.

H. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2014.

I. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters


1.4 SUBMITTALS



PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 2


B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation procedures that ensure acceptable workmanship and

installation standards will be achieved.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with not less than three years of documented experience.


A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness.


A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product.

B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION


tested in accordance with ASTM E84 or UL 723.

2.2 GLASS FIBER

A. Manufacturers:


2. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufinsulation.com.

3. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com.


B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible.

1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F.


3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume.

C. Tie Wire: 0.048 inch stainless steel with twisted ends on maximum 12 inch centers.

D. Vapor Barrier Lap Adhesive: Compatible with insulation.

1. Compatible with insulation.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 3


E. Insulating Cement/Mastic: ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

1. ASTM C195; hydraulic setting on mineral wool.

F. Indoor Vapor Barrier Finish:

1. Vinyl emulsion type acrylic, compatible with insulation, black color.

2.3 JACKETS

A. PVC Plastic.

1. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color.

a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F.

b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F.

c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with

ASTM E96/E96M.

d. Thickness: 10 mil.

e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive.

2. Covering Adhesive Mastic: Compatible with insulation.

a. Compatible with insulation.

B. Aluminum Jacket: ASTM B209 (ASTM B209M) formed aluminum sheet.

1. Thickness: 0.016 inch sheet.

2. Finish: Smooth.

3. Joining: Longitudinal slip joints and 2 inch laps.

4. Fittings: 0.016 inch thick die shaped fitting covers with factory attached protective liner.

5. Metal Jacket Bands: 3/8 inch wide; 0.015 inch thick aluminum.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials.

B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed.

3.2 INSTALLATION



C. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 4


D. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings,

valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, and expansion joints. Maintain continuous

thermal and vapor-retarder integrity, unless otherwise noted.

E. Insulate pipe elbows using preformed fitting insulation or mitered fittings made from same material and

density as adjacent pipe insulation. Each piece shall be butted tightly against adjoining piece and bonded

with adhesive. Fill joints, seams, voids, and irregular surfaces with insulating cement finished to a

smooth, hard, and uniform contour that is uniform with adjoining pipe insulation.

F. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal

laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding

staples and vapor barrier mastic.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent

pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

3. Do not bury hangers in the insulation. Insulation vapor barrier shall not be broken.

G. For hot piping conveying fluids 140 degrees F or less, do not insulate flanges and unions at equipment,

but bevel and seal ends of insulation.

H. For hot piping conveying fluids over 140 degrees F, insulate flanges and unions at equipment.

I. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature:

1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with

self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward

clinch expanding staples.

2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe.

Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers.

J. Inserts and Shields:

1. Application: Piping 2 inches diameter or larger.

2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts.

3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket.

4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining

insulation; may be factory fabricated.

5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material

suitable for the planned temperature range.

K. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at

supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 078400.

L. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of

like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 5


Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of

UV resistant finish for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation without jacketing.

3.3 SCHEDULE

A. Heating Systems:

1. Low Pressure Steam Piping:

a. Pipe Size Range: 3/4-2 inch

1) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch

b. Pipe Size Range: 2 1/2-8 inch

1) Thickness: 2 inch

2. Low Pressure Steam Condensate:

a. Pipe Size Range: 3/4-2 inch

1) Thickness: 1 1/2 inch

b. Pipe Size Range: 2 1/2-6 inch

1) Thickness: 2 inch


PARTNERS 15-175B


230719 - 6


PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 1


SECTION 230913 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL DEVICES FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Thermostats.

B. Control valves.

C. Automatic dampers.

D. Damper operators.

E. Time clocks.


A. AMCA 500-D - Laboratory Methods for Testing Dampers for Rating; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2012.

B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2014.

C. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical


D. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems; National Fire

Protection Association; 2012.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide description and engineering data for each control system component. Include

sizing as requested. Provide data for each system component and software module.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this

section with minimum three years documented experience.

1.5 WARRANTY

A. See Section 017800 - Closeout Submittals, for additional warranty requirements.

B. Correct defective Work within a five year period after Substantial Completion.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 2


C. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty for control air compressors.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 EQUIPMENT - GENERAL

A. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as

suitable for the purpose specified and indicated.

2.2 CONTROL PANELS

A. Unitized cabinet type for each system under automatic control with relays and controls mounted in

cabinet and temperature indicators, pressure gages, pilot lights, push buttons and switches flush on

cabinet panel face.

B. NEMA 250, general purpose utility enclosures with enamelled finished face panel.

C. Provide common keying for all panels.

2.3 CONTROL VALVES

A. Globe Pattern:

1. Up to 2 inches: Bronze body, bronze trim, rising stem, renewable composition disc, screwed ends

with backseating capacity repackable under pressure.

2. Over 2 inches: Iron body, bronze trim, rising stem, plug-type disc, flanged ends, renewable seat

and disc.

3. Steam Systems:

a. Rate for service pressure of 125 psig at 250 degrees F.

b. Replaceable plugs and seats of stainless steel. Pressure drop across any steam valve at

maximum flow shall be as shown on the Drawings.

c. Size for 10 psig inlet pressure and 5 psig pressure drop.

d. Valves shall have modified linear characteristics.

B. Butterfly Pattern:

1. Iron body, bronze disc, resilient replaceable seat for service to 180 degrees F wafer or lug ends,

extended neck.

C. Electronic Operators:

1. Valves shall spring return to normal position as indicated on freeze, fire, or temperature protection.

2. Select operator for full shut off at maximum pump differential pressure.

2.4 DAMPERS

A. Performance: Test in accordance with AMCA 500-D.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 3


B. Frames: Galvanized steel, welded or riveted with corner reinforcement, minimum 12 gage, 0.1046 inch.

C. Blades: Galvanized steel, maximum blade size 8 inches wide, 48 inches long, minimum 22 gage, 0.0299

inch, attached to minimum 1/2 inch shafts with set screws.

D. Blade Seals: Synthetic elastomeric inflatable mechanically attached, field replaceable.

E. Jamb Seals: Spring stainless steel.

F. Shaft Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.

G. Linkage Bearings: Oil impregnated sintered bronze.

H. Leakage: Less than one percent based on approach velocity of 2000 ft/min and 4 inches wg.

I. Maximum Pressure Differential: 6 inches wg.

J. Temperature Limits: -40 to 200 degrees F.

2.5 DAMPER OPERATORS

A. General: Provide smooth proportional control with sufficient power for air velocities 20 percent greater

than maximum design velocity and to provide tight seal against maximum system pressures. Provide

spring return for two position control and for fail safe operation.

1. Provide sufficient number of operators to achieve unrestricted movement throughout damper range.

2. Provide one operator for maximum 36 sq ft damper section.

B. Pilot Positioners: Starting point adjustable from 2 to 12 psig and operating span adjustable from 5 to 13

psig.

C. Electric Operators:

1. Spring return, adjustable stroke motor having oil immersed gear train, with auxiliary end switch.

2.6 THERMOSTATS

A. Line Voltage Thermostats:

1. Integral manual On/Off/Auto selector switch, single or two pole as required.

2. Dead band: Maximum 2 degrees F.

3. Cover: Locking with set point adjustment, with thermometer.

4. Rating: Motor load.

B. Room Thermostat Accessories:

1. Thermostat Covers: Vandal proof clear plastic.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 4


2. Insulating Bases: For thermostats located on exterior walls.

C. Fire Thermostats:

1. UL labeled, factory set in accordance with NFPA 90A.

2. Normally closed contacts, manual reset.

D. Heating/Cooling Valve Top Thermostats:

1. Proportional acting for proportional flow, molded rubber diaphragm, remote bulb liquid filled

element, direct and reverse acting at differential pressure to 25 psig, cast housing with position

indicator and adjusting knob.

2.7 TIME CLOCKS

A. Seven day programming switch timer with synchronous timing motor and seven day dial, continuously

charged Ni-cad battery driven power failure 8 hour carry over and multiple switch trippers to control

systems for minimum of two and maximum of eight signals per day with two normally open and two

normally closed output switches.

B. Solid state programmable time control with a minimum of 7 separate programs, 24 hour battery carry

over, duty cycling.

2.8 TRANSMITTERS

A. Pressure Transmitters:

1. One pipe direct acting indicating type for gas, liquid, or steam service, range suitable for system,

proportional electronic output.

B. Temperature Transmitters:

1. One pipe, directly proportional output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus 1/2

percent of range for 200 degree F span and plus or minus 1 percent for 50 degree F span, with 50

degrees F temperature range, compensated bulb, averaging capillary, or rod and tube operation on

20 psig input pressure and 3 to 15 psig output.

C. Humidity Transmitters:

1. One pipe, directly proportioned output signal to measured variable, linearity within plus or minus 1

percent for 70 percent relative humidity span, capable of withstanding 95 percent relative humidity

without loss of calibration.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify existing conditions before starting work.

B. Verify that systems are ready to receive work.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 5


C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.

D. Sequence work to ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar

components in other systems.

E. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as

air handling units and air terminal units.

F. Ensure installation of components is complementary to installation of similar components.

G. Coordinate installation of system components with installation of mechanical systems equipment such as

air handling units and air terminal units.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Check and verify location of thermostats with plans and room details before installation. Locate 60

inches above floor. Align with lighting switches and humidistats. Refer to Section 262726.

C. Mount freeze protection thermostats using flanges and element holders.

D. Mount outdoor reset thermostats and outdoor sensors indoors, with sensing elements outdoors with sun

shield.

E. Provide guards on thermostats in entrances.

F. Provide mixing dampers of opposed blade construction arranged to mix streams. Provide pilot

positioners on mixed air damper motors. Provide separate minimum outside air damper section adjacent

to return air dampers with separate damper motor.

G. Provide isolation (two position) dampers of parallel blade construction.

H. Install damper motors on outside of duct in warm areas. Do not install motors in locations at outdoor

temperatures.

I. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration free walls or free standing angle iron

supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one system in same equipment room. Provide

engraved plastic nameplates for instruments and controls inside cabinet and engraved plastic

nameplates on cabinet face.

J. Install "hand/off/auto" selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in "hand"

position.

PARTNERS 15-175B


230913 - 6


K. Provide conduit and electrical wiring in accordance with Section 262717. Electrical material and

installation shall be in accordance with appropriate requirements of Division 26.


PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 1


SECTION 232213 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING PIPING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Pipe and pipe fittings.

B. Valves.

C. Steam piping system.

D. Steam condensate piping system.


A. Section 230548 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

B. Section 230553 - Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.

C. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

D. Section 232214 - Steam and Condensate Heating Specialties.

E. Section 232500 - HVAC Water Treatment: Pipe cleaning.


A. ASME (BPV IX) - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding and Brazing Qualifications; The

American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

B. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of

Mechanical Engineers; 2011.

C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical

Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18).

D. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1).

E. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).

F. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc Coated, Welded

and Seamless; 2012.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 2


G. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel

for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013.

H. AWS D1.1/D1.1M - Structural Welding Code - Steel; American Welding Society; 2010.

I. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacture, Selection, Application,

and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009.

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Use unions and flanges downstream of valves and at equipment or apparatus connections. Use

dielectric unions where joining dissimilar materials. Do not use direct welded or threaded connections.

B. Provide pipe hangers and supports in accordance with ASME B31.9 unless indicated otherwise.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves and accessories. Provide

manufacturers catalogue information. Indicate valve data and ratings.

C. Welders Certificate: Include welders certification of compliance with ASME (BPV IX).

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate hanging and support methods, joining procedures.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

F. Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, spare parts lists, exploded assembly views.


A. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME (BPV IX).


A. Conform to ASME B31.9 and ASME B31.1 code for installation of piping system.


A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labelling in place. Inspect for damage.

B. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 3


C. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 LOW PRESSURE STEAM PIPING (15 PSIG MAXIMUM)

A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M, Schedule 40, black.

1. Fittings: ASME B16.3 malleable iron Class 125, or ASTM A234/A234M wrought steel.

2. Joints: Threaded, or AWS D1.1 welded.

2.2 BOILER FEEDWATER, BLOWDOWN AND MISC. BOILER PIPING




2.3 LOW PRESSURE STEAM CONDENSATE PIPING




2.4 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58.

1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using

MSS SP-58 recommendations.

B. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 to 1-1/2 Inch: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring.

C. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis.

D. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Adjustable steel yoke, cast iron roll, double hanger.

E. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Pipe Sizes to 4 inches: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger

rods.

F. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Steel channels with welded spacers and

hanger rods; cast iron roll and stand.

G. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes to 3 Inches: Cast iron hook.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 4


H. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 4 to 5 Inches: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp.

I. Wall Support for Pipe Sizes 6 Inches and Over: Welded steel bracket and wrought steel clamp;

adjustable steel yoke and cast iron roll.

J. Vertical Support: Steel riser clamp.

K. Hanger Rods: Mild steel threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuous threaded.

L. Inserts: Malleable iron case of galvanized steel shell and expander plug for threaded connection with

lateral adjustment, top slot for reinforcing rods, lugs for attaching to forms; size inserts to suit threaded

hanger rods.

2.5 UNIONS, FLANGES, AND COUPLINGS

A. Unions for Pipe 2 Inches and Under:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig galvanized malleable iron, threaded.

B. Flanges for Pipe Over 2 Inches:

1. Ferrous Piping: 150 psig forged steel, slip-on.

2.6 GATE VALVES

A. Up To and Including 2 Inches:

1. Bronze body, bronze trim, screwed bonnet, non-rising stem, lockshield stem, inside screw with

backseating stem, solid wedge disc, alloy seat rings, solder ends.

B. Over 2 Inches:

1. Iron body, bronze trim, bolted bonnet, rising stem, handwheel, outside screw and yoke, solid wedge

disc with bronze seat rings, flanged ends.

2.7 BALL VALVES


1. Bronze one piece body, chrome plated bass ball, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, lever handle ,

threaded ends with union.

2.8 SWING CHECK VALVES


1. Bronze or iron body, bronze trim, bronze rotating swing disc with composition seat, solder ends.

B. Over 2 Inches:

PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 5


1. Iron body, bronze trim, bronze or bronze faced rotating swing disc, renewable disc and seat,

flanged ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.

B. Remove scale and dirt on inside and outside before assembly.

C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions.

D. Keep open ends of pipe free from scale and dirt. Whenever work is suspended during construction

protect open ends with temporary plugs or caps.

E. After completion, fill, clean, and treat systems. Refer to Section 232500.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and maintain gradient.

C. Install piping to conserve building space and avoid interference with use of space.

D. Sleeve pipe passing through partitions, walls, and floors.

E. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints, or connected

equipment.

F. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.

G. Slope steam piping one inch in 40 feet in direction of flow. Use eccentric reducers to maintain bottom of

pipe level.

H. Slope steam condensate piping one inch in 40 feet. Provide drip trap assembly at low points and before

control valves. Run condensate lines from trap to nearest condensate receiver. Provide loop vents over

trapped sections.

I. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush clean, and apply

one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.

3.3 SCHEDULES

A. Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Piping.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232213 - 6


1. 1/2 inch: Maximum span, 8 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

2. 3/4 inch and 1 inch: Maximum span, 9 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.

3. 1-1/4 inches: Maximum span, 11 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.


5. 2 inches: Maximum span, 13 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch.




B. Hanger Spacing for Steel Steam Condensate Piping.

1. 1/2 inch, 3/4 inch, and 1 inch: Maximum span, 7 feet; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch.





PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 1


SECTION 232214 - STEAM AND CONDENSATE HEATING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Steam traps.

B. Steam air vents.

C. Boiler feed units.


A. Section 230719 - HVAC Piping Insulation.

B. Section 232213 - Steam and Condensate Heating Piping.

C. Section 235233.16 - Steel Water-Tube Boilers.


A. ASME BPVC-VIII-1 - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1 - Rules for Construction of

Pressure Vessels; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013.

B. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014

(ANSI/ASME B31.9).

C. ASTM A105/A105M - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Forgings for Piping Applications; 2013.

D. ASTM A126 - Standard Specification for Grey Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings; 2004

(Reapproved 2014).

E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical


1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data:

1. Provide for manufactured products and assemblies required for this project.

2. Include product description, model, dimensions, component sizes, rough-in requirements, service

sizes, and finishes.

3. Submit schedule indicating manufacturer, model number, size, location, rated capacity, load

served, and features for each specialty.

4. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 2


B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application, selection, and hookup configuration.

Include pipe and accessory elevations.

C. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include installation instructions, servicing requirements, and

recommended spare parts lists.

D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. Steam Trap Service Kits: One for each type and size.


A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Michigan standard for installation of boilers and pressure

vessels.

B. Products Requiring Electrical Connection: Listed and classified by UL as suitable for the purpose

indicated.


A. Boiler Feed Unit has been pre-purchased and will be provided for installation. Coordinate with the Boiler

Feed Unit Manufacturer's Representative for delivery scheduling to correspond with the requirements of

the project schedule.

B. Receive, store and protect the pre-purchased boilers boiler feed unit before, during and after installation.

Contractor shall be responsible to inspect equiment upon delivery. Contractor shall take responsibility for

equipment once it is received at the site, prior to being turned over to the owner for use.

C. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage.

D. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

E. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the


1.7 WARRANTY

A. Complete parts and labor warranty for one (1) year from boiler start-up or 18 months from the date of

shipment, whichever comes first.

B. The contractor shall be the 1st point of contact for warranty coverage for the boiler system, including the

pre-purchased boilers.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 3


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 STEAM TRAPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.

2. Hoffman Specialty/Bell & Gossett

3. Marshall Engineered Products Company: www.mepcollc.com.

4. Spirax-Sarco: www.spiraxsarco.com/us.

B. Steam Trap Applications:

1. Use Float and Thermostatic Traps for:

a. Heating coils.

b. Main headers.

C. Steam Trap Performance:

1. Select to handle minimum of two times maximum condensate load of apparatus served.

2. Pressure Differentials:

a. Low Pressure Systems (15 psi maximum): 2 psi.

D. Float and Thermostatic Traps: ASTM A126 cast iron or semi-steel body and bolted cover, stainless steel

or bronze bellows type air vent, stainless steel or copper float, stainless steel lever and valve assembly

1. Rating: 15 psi WSP.

2. Features: Access to internal parts without disturbing piping, bottom drain plug.

3. Accessories: Gage glass with shut-off cocks.

2.2 STEAM AIR VENTS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Armstrong International, Inc: www.armstronginternational.com.

2. ITT Hoffman Specialty: www.hoffmanspecialty.com.

3. Spirax-Sarco: www.spiraxsarco.com/us.

B. 125 psi WSP: Balanced pressure type; cast brass body and cover; access to internal parts without

disturbing piping; stainless steel bellows, stainless steel valve and seat.

2.3 LOW PRESSURE BOILER FEED UNITS - PRE-PURCHASED BY THE OWNER-INCLUDED FOR

REFERENCE ONLY

A. Manufacturers:

1. Bell & Gossett Hoffman Specialties/Domestic Series

PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 4


B. The boiler feed system shall be supplied by the same manufacturer or manufacturer's representative for

the low pressure steam boilers to obtain single source responsibility for the boilers and boiler feed

system.

C. Boiler Feed Units: Consist of receiver, inlet strainer, pump isolation valves, pumps, water make-up

assembly, electric control components and accessories.

D. Condensate Receiver: Horizontal steel tank, equipped with water level gage, dial thermometer, pressure

gages on pump discharge, bronze isolation valves between pumps and receiver, and lifter eye bolts. The

system shall have the storage capacity to overflow of at least 1 gallon per 1 boiler horsepower of the

boilers it is servicing.

E. Tank tappings: tank shall be supplied (at a minimum) with the following tappings:

1. 4” flanged connections for condensate return

2. 3" threaded connectionfor condensate return and vent

3. pump suction couplings

4. manual fill connection

5. overflow connection

6. drain connection

7. sight glass with brass valves

8. blowout opening properly designed to keep the pressure in the tank at atmoshperic

9. chemical feed tapping

10. sample tapping

F. Inlet Strainer: Cast iron, with vertical self-cleaning easily removable bronze screen and large dirt pocket,

mounted on receiver.

G. Water Make-Up Assembly:

1. A mechanical float-type make-up water control shall be provided to accept incoming water up to a

differential pressure of 100 psi. The make-up valve assembly shall mount directly into the tank to

eliminate unnecessary external piping and be removable from the outside of the vessel for easy

maintenance and inspection. The make-up valve shall be made of brass or bronze with a copper

float that does not require external power for operation.

2. Capacity: Equal to one boiler feed pump.

3. With strainer, and manual bypass.

H. Pumps: Vertical design. Pump size shall be based on schedule below. The pump shall be a vertical

multistage pump (Goulds SSV, Grundfos CR, or similar) with stainless steel impellers and a minimum of

250F seals. The pump motors shall be 3-phase, TEFC motors. Each boiler feed pumps shall be

supplied with the boiler feed system and be capable of pumping twice the evaporation rate of the boiler it

serves at 3% above the boiler relief valve setting per the ASME code. Centrifugal pumps, specifically

suited for the application, are also acceptable.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 5


I. Steel support stand: The entire boiler feed system shall be provided on a steel stand to house the tanks,

pumps, control panel and misc. accessories. The stand shall be constructed so the top of the tank is 54"

above the floor. If the inlet strainer and 4" flanged connection are located on the side/end of the tank, this

connection could be as high as 60" to the centerline of the 4" connection.

J. The base shall extend in front of the storage vessel for pump mounting and easier access to the pump(s)

for inspection and maintenance. All exposed metal surfaces shall be protected with a suitable heat and

rust resisting paint.

K. Control Panel: The control panel shall be configured to allow selection of which two pumps will be in

service, designating the third pump as back-up. Terminal strips shall be provided for field wiring of boiler

interlock to start pumps with signal from the boiler water level control. The complete boiler feed system

will have single point electrical connection located in a UL listed Nema 12 control panel. Liquid tight

conduit shall be used between the panel and external electrical items mounted on the boiler feed system

package. Control panels shall be UL listed and labeled. All wiring between control panel, pumps and

electrical devices provided will be factory completed.

1. Each pump shall have a thru-the-door (3-phase) pump disconnect switch, 3-phase protection by

Class LPJ fusing or similar fuse, and a motor starter with overloads. A hand-off-auto switch and

pilot light shall also be provided for each pump. Pumps shall be provided with low water level

cut-off, locking out the pumps if the tank level is too low. All pump electrical components shall be

wired and factory checked before shipment.

2. Provide a fused control circuit transformer to reduce the 3-phase supplied power to 120/1/60 for the

control circuit, external resets, 115v holding coils, starter overload heaters, and selector switches.

3. Provide, as a minimum, outputs from the control panel to the Building Automation System (BAS) as

follows. Wire to terminal strip for connection to BAS.

a. Status to indicate system enabled/disabled

b. An alarm condition

c. Pump activated, for each pump

d. Provide a current sensing relay for each pump to provide status

e. Low level cut-out

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative for starting and testing unit.

3.2 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Train operating personnel in operation and maintenance of units.

B. Provide the services of manufacturer's field representative to conduct training.

PARTNERS 15-175B


232214 - 6


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Install steam and steam condensate piping and specialties in accordance with ASME B31.9.

B. Install specialties in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Steam Traps:

1. Provide minimum 3/4 inch size on steam mains and branches.

2. Install with union or flanged connections at both ends.

3. Provide gate valve and strainer at inlet, and gate valve and check valve at discharge.

4. Provide minimum 10 inch long, line size dirt pocket between apparatus and trap.

D. Terminate relief valves to outdoors. Provide drip pan elbow with drain connection to nearest floor drain.

3.4 SCHEDULES

A. Pre-Purchased Boiler Feed Unit:

1. Tag: NMS BFU-1

2. Receiver Capacity: 500 Gallons

3. Number of Pumps: three (3) - one for each of two boilers, one back-up

4. Pump Capacity: 20 gpm

5. Pump Head: 35 psi

6. Power: 208V, 3 phase, 60 Hz, single point power connection with main disconnect.


PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 1


SECTION 233100 - HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single-wall rectangular ducts and fittings.

B. Single-wall round ducts and fittings.

C. Sheet metal materials.

D. Sealants and gaskets.

E. Hangers and supports.

Casing and plenums.

F. Kitchen hood ductwork.


A. Section 016116 - Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Content Restrictions.

B. Section 230593 - TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC.

C. Section 230713 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner.

D. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories.

E. Section 233700 - Air Outlets and Inlets.


A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2014.

B. ASTM A276/A276M - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes; 2015.

C. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron

Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2015.

D. ASTM A1011/A1011M - Standard Specification for Steel, Sheet and Strip, Hot-Rolled, Carbon, Structural,

High-Strength Low Alloy, High-Strength Low-Alloy With Improved Formability, and Ultra-High Strength;

2014.

E. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and Plate; 2014.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 2


F. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2015a.

G. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012.

H. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements;

2012.

I. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013.

J. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire

Protection Association; 2012.

K. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations;

National Fire Protection Association; 2014.

L. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors'

National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition.

M. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards Metal and Flexible; Sheet Metal and Air

Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005.

N. SMACNA (KVS) - Kitchen Ventilation Systems and Food Service Equipment Fabrication & Installation

Guidelines; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2001.

O. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.;

Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 1978 - Grease Ducts; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

Q. UL 2221 - Tests of Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure Assemblies; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.


A. Delegated Duct Design: Duct construction, including sheet metal thicknesses, seam and joint

construction, reinforcements, and hangers and supports, shall comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct

Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" and performance requirements and design criteria indicated

in "Duct Schedule" Article.

B. Structural Performance: Duct hangers and supports shall withstand the effects of gravity loads and

stresses within limits and under conditions described in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible" and ASCE/SEI 7.

C. Airstream Surfaces: Surfaces in contact with the airstream shall comply with requirements in ASHRAE

62.1.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 3


1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials, duct liner, duct connections, and factory fabricated fittings.

B. Shop Drawings: Submit 1/4 scale, double line shop drawings that indicate duct fittings, duct size, bottom

of duct elevations, necessary offsets to accomodate building structure, particulars such as gages, sizes,

welds, elevations, all fittings, and configuration prior to start of work for all systems.


A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

B. Construct ductwork to SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible; Sheet

Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 1995, Second Edition with Addendum No.

1.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SINGLE-WALL RECTANGULAR DUCT AND FITTING ASSEMBLIES

A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards.

B. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible" based on indicated static-pressure class unless otherwise indicated.

C. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-1, "Rectangular Duct/Transverse Joints," for static-pressure

class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in

SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

D. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 2-2, "Rectangular Duct/Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure

class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in


E. Elbows, Transitions, Offsets, Branch Connections, and Other Duct Construction: Select types and

fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 4,

"Fittings and Other Construction," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials

involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards

- Metal and Flexible."

2.2 SINGLE-WALL ROUND DUCT AND FITTING ASSEMBLIES

A. General Fabrication Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible," Chapter 3, "Round, Oval, and Flexible Duct," based on indicated static-pressure class

unless otherwise indicated.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 4


1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products

that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. McGill AirFlow LLC.

b. Spiral Manufacturing Co., Inc.

B. Transverse Joints: Select joint types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-1, "Round Duct Transverse Joints," for static-pressure class,

applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in


1. Transverse Joints in Ducts Larger Than 60 Inchesin Diameter: Flanged.

C. Longitudinal Seams: Select seam types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-2, "Round Duct Longitudinal Seams," for static-pressure class,

applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support intervals, and other provisions in


1. Fabricate round ducts larger than 90 inches in diameter with butt-welded longitudinal seams.

D. Tees and Laterals: Select types and fabricate according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees," for static-pressure class, applicable sealing requirements, materials involved, duct-support

intervals, and other provisions in SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2.3 MATERIALS

A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with

G60/Z180 coating.

B. General Material Requirements: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal

and Flexible" for acceptable materials, material thicknesses, and duct construction methods unless

otherwise indicated. Sheet metal materials shall be free of pitting, seam marks, roller marks, stains,

discolorations, and other imperfections.

C. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Comply with ASTM A 653/A 653M.

1. Galvanized Coating Designation: G90.

2. Finishes for Surfaces Exposed to View: Mill phosphatized.

D. Carbon-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, with oiled, matte finish for exposed ducts.

E. Stainless-Steel Sheets: Comply with ASTM A 480/A 480M, Type 304 or 316, as indicated in the "Duct

Schedule" Article; cold rolled, annealed, sheet. Exposed surface finish shall be No. 2B, No. 2D, No. 3, or

No. 4 as indicated in the "Duct Schedule" Article.

F. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: ASTM A 36/A 36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars; black and

galvanized.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 5


1. Where black- and galvanized-steel shapes and plates are used to reinforce aluminum ducts, isolate

the different metals with butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM gasket materials.

G. Tie Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inchminimum diameter for lengths 36 inches or less; 3/8-inchminimum

diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches.

H. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant.

1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible

with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts.

2. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread index of zero and smoke developed index of zero,

when tested in accordance with ASTM E84.

I. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or

continuously threaded.

J. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows:

1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01.

3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106.

K. Ducts: Galvanized steel, unless otherwise indicated.

L. Low Pressure Supply (Heating Systems): 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel.

2.4 SEALANTS AND GASKETS

A. General Sealant and Gasket Requirements: Surface-burning characteristics for sealants and gaskets

shall be a maximum flame-spread index of 25 and a maximum smoke-developed index of 50 when tested

according to UL 723; certified by an NRTL.

B. Two-Part Tape Sealing System:

1. Tape: Woven cotton fiber impregnated with mineral gypsum and modified acrylic/silicone activator

to react exothermically with tape to form hard, durable, airtight seal.

2. Tape Width: 3 inches.

3. Sealant: Modified styrene acrylic.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

7. Service: Indoor and outdoor.

8. Service Temperature: Minus 40 to plus 200 deg F.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 6


9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or

aluminum.

10. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

11. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

C. Water-Based Joint and Seam Sealant:

1. Application Method: Brush on.

2. Solids Content: Minimum 65 percent.

3. Shore A Hardness: Minimum 20.

4. Water resistant.

5. Mold and mildew resistant.

6. VOC: Maximum 75 g/L (less water).

7. Maximum Static-Pressure Class: 10-inch wg, positive and negative.

8. Service: Indoor or outdoor.

9. Substrate: Compatible with galvanized sheet steel (both PVC coated and bare), stainless steel, or

aluminum sheets.

D. Flanged Joint Sealant: Comply with ASTM C 920.

1. General: Single-component, acid-curing, silicone, elastomeric.

2. Type: S.

3. Grade: NS.

4. Class: 25.

5. Use: O.

6. For indoor applications, sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated

according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

7. Sealant shall comply with the testing and product requirements of the California Department of

Health Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various

Sources Using Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

E. Flange Gaskets: Butyl rubber, neoprene, or EPDM polymer with polyisobutylene plasticizer.

F. Round Duct Joint O-Ring Seals:

1. Seal shall provide maximum leakage class of 3 cfm/100 sq. ft. at 1-inch wgand shall be rated for

2.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger Rods for Noncorrosive Environments: Cadmium-plated steel rods and nuts.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 7


B. Hanger Rods for Corrosive Environments: Electrogalvanized, all-thread rods or galvanized rods with

threads painted with zinc-chromate primer after installation.

C. Strap and Rod Sizes: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,

"Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for

Round Duct."

D. Steel Cables for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized steel complying with ASTM A 603.

E. Steel Cables for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless steel complying with ASTM A 492.

F. Steel Cable End Connections: Cadmium-plated steel assemblies with brackets, swivel, and bolts

designed for duct hanger service; with an automatic-locking and clamping device.

G. Duct Attachments: Sheet metal screws, blind rivets, or self-tapping metal screws; compatible with duct

materials.

H. Trapeze and Riser Supports:

1. Supports for Galvanized-Steel Ducts: Galvanized-steel shapes and plates.

2. Supports for Stainless-Steel Ducts: Stainless-steel shapes and plates.

3. Supports for Aluminum Ducts: Aluminum or galvanized steel coated with zinc chromate.

2.6 DUCTWORK FABRICATION

A. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Provide turning vanes in all mitered elbows.

C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline.

Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of

perforated metal with glass fiber insulation.

D. T's, bends, and elbows: Construct according to SMACNA (DCS).

E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30

degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream.

F. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

G. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings two gages heavier than duct gages indicated

in SMACNA Standard. Joints shall be minimum 4 inch cemented slip joint, brazed or electric welded.

Prime coat welded joints.

H. Provide standard 45 degree lateral wye takeoffs unless otherwise indicated where 90 degree conical tee

connections may be used.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 8


I. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide

blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior

side; seal to louver frame and duct.

2.7 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS

A. Manufacture in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible, and

as indicated. Provide duct material, gages,reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated.

B. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.

1. UL labeled.

2. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with polyethylene vapor barrier film.

3. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 0.5 inches WG negative.

4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm.

5. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F.

C. Kitchen Cooking Hood and Grease Exhaust: Nominal 3 inches thick ceramic fiber insulation between 20

gage, 0.0375 inch, Type 304 stainless steel liner and 24 gage, 0.0239 inch aluminized steel sheet outer

jacket.

1. Tested and UL listed for use with commercial cooking equipment in accordance with NFPA 96.

2. Certified for zero clearance to combustible material in accordance with:

a. UL 2221 with a 2 hour rating.

3. Materials and construction of the modular sections and accessories to be in accordance with the

terms of the following listings:

a. UL 1978.

b. UL 2221.

D. Dishwasher Exhaust: Minimum 21 gage, 0.0344 inch thick, single wall, Type 304 stainless steel.

1. Single wall, factory built chimney liner system.

2. Designed, fabricated, and installed to be liquid tight preventing exhaust leakage into the building.

3. Joints to be sealed during installation with factory supplied overlapping V-bands and sealant.

2.8 CASINGS

A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures indicated.

B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to

angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage, 0.0478 inch

expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal

shields.

C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install

hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 9


2.9 KITCHEN HOOD EXHAUST DUCTWORK

A. Fabricate in accordance with ductwork manufacturer's installation instructions, SMACNA (DCS),

SMACNA (KVS), and NFPA 96.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS).

B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of duct system.

Indicated duct locations, configurations, and arrangements were used to size ducts and calculate friction

loss for air-handling equipment sizing and for other design considerations. Install duct systems as

indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings and Coordination Drawings.

D. Install ducts according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible" unless

otherwise indicated.

E. Install round ducts in maximum practical lengths.

F. Install ducts with fewest possible joints.

G. Install factory- or shop-fabricated fittings for changes in direction, size, and shape and for branch

connections.

H. Unless otherwise indicated, install ducts vertically and horizontally, and parallel and perpendicular to

building lines.

I. Install ducts close to walls, overhead construction, columns, and other structural and permanent

enclosure elements of building.

J. Install ducts with a clearance of 1 inch, plus allowance for insulation thickness.

K. Route ducts to avoid passing through transformer vaults and electrical equipment rooms and enclosures.

L. Where ducts pass through non-fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls and are exposed to view,

cover the opening between the partition and duct or duct insulation with sheet metal flanges of same

metal thickness as the duct. Overlap openings on four sides by at least 1-1/2 inches.

M. Where ducts pass through fire-rated interior partitions and exterior walls, install fire dampers. Comply with

requirements in Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories" for fire and smoke dampers.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 10


N. Protect duct interiors from moisture, construction debris and dust, and other foreign materials. Comply

with SMACNA's "IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings Under Construction," Appendix G, "Duct

Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines."

O. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to

prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system.

P. Kitchen Hood Exhaust: Provide residue traps at base of vertical risers with provisions for clean out.

Q. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining.

R. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in

direction of air flow.

S. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports.

3.2 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION

A. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Chapter 5, "Hangers

and Supports."

B. Building Attachments: Concrete inserts, powder-actuated fasteners, or structural-steel fasteners

appropriate for construction materials to which hangers are being attached.

1. Where practical, install concrete inserts before placing concrete.

2. Install powder-actuated concrete fasteners after concrete is placed and completely cured.

3. Use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for standard-weight aggregate concretes or for slabs more

than 4 inches thick.

4. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for lightweight-aggregate concretes or for slabs

less than 4 inches thick.

5. Do not use powder-actuated concrete fasteners for seismic restraints.

C. Hanger Spacing: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Table 5-1, "Rectangular Duct Hangers Minimum Size," and Table 5-2, "Minimum Hanger Sizes for Round

Duct," for maximum hanger spacing; install hangers and supports within 24 inchesof each elbow and

within 48 inchesof each branch intersection.

D. Hangers Exposed to View: Threaded rod and angle or channel supports.

E. Support vertical ducts with steel angles or channel secured to the sides of the duct with welds, bolts,

sheet metal screws, or blind rivets; support at each floor and at a maximum intervals of 16 feet.

F. Install upper attachments to structures. Select and size upper attachments with pull-out, tension, and

shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 11


3.3 INSTALLATION OF EXPOSED DUCTWORK

A. Protect ducts exposed in finished spaces from being dented, scratched, or damaged.

B. Trim duct sealants flush with metal. Create a smooth and uniform exposed bead. Do not use two-part

tape sealing system.

C. Grind welds to provide smooth surface free of burrs, sharp edges, and weld splatter. When welding

stainless steel with a No. 3 or 4 finish, grind the welds flush, polish the exposed welds, and treat the

welds to remove discoloration caused by welding.

D. Maintain consistency, symmetry, and uniformity in the arrangement and fabrication of fittings, hangers

and supports, duct accessories, and air outlets.

E. Repair or replace damaged sections and finished work that does not comply with these requirements.

3.4 DUCT SEALING

A. Seal ducts for duct static-pressure, seal classes, and leakage classes specified in "Duct Schedule" Article

according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

B. Seal ducts to the following seal classes according to SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible":

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible."

2. Outdoor, Supply-Air Ducts: Seal Class A.

3. Outdoor, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

4. Outdoor, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

5. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wgand Lower: Seal Class B.

6. Unconditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class A.

7. Unconditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class C.

8. Unconditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class B.

9. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes 2-Inch wgand Lower: Seal Class C.

10. Conditioned Space, Supply-Air Ducts in Pressure Classes Higher Than 2-Inch wg: Seal Class B.

11. Conditioned Space, Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class B.

12. Conditioned Space, Return-Air Ducts: Seal Class C.

13. All locations, Laboratory Exhaust Ducts: Seal Class A.

3.5 DUCT CLEANING

A. Clean new duct system(s) before testing, adjusting, and balancing.

B. Use service openings for entry and inspection.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 12


1. Create new openings and install access panels appropriate for duct static-pressure class if required

for cleaning access. Provide insulated panels for insulated or lined duct. Patch insulation and liner

as recommended by duct liner manufacturer. Comply with Section 233300 "Air Duct Accessories"

for access panels and doors.

2. Disconnect and reconnect flexible ducts as needed for cleaning and inspection.

3. Remove and reinstall ceiling to gain access during the cleaning process.

C. Particulate Collection and Odor Control:

1. When venting vacuuming system inside the building, use HEPA filtration with 99.97 percent

collection efficiency for 0.3-micron-size (or larger) particles.

2. When venting vacuuming system to outdoors, use filter to collect debris removed from HVAC

system, and locate exhaust downwind and away from air intakes and other points of entry into

building.

D. Clean the following components by removing surface contaminants and deposits:

1. Air outlets and inlets (registers, grilles, and diffusers).

2. Supply, return, and exhaust fans including fan housings, plenums (except ceiling supply and return

plenums), scrolls, blades or vanes, shafts, baffles, dampers, and drive assemblies.

3. Air-handling unit internal surfaces and components including mixing box, coil section, air wash

systems, spray eliminators, condensate drain pans, humidifiers and dehumidifiers, filters and filter

sections, and condensate collectors and drains.

4. Coils and related components.

5. Return-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes except in ceiling plenums and mechanical

equipment rooms.

6. Supply-air ducts, dampers, actuators, and turning vanes.

7. 7. Dedicated exhaust and ventilation components and makeup air systems.

E. Mechanical Cleaning Methodology:

1. Clean metal duct systems using mechanical cleaning methods that extract contaminants from

within duct systems and remove contaminants from building.

2. Use vacuum-collection devices that are operated continuously during cleaning. Connect vacuum

device to downstream end of duct sections so areas being cleaned are under negative pressure.

3. Use mechanical agitation to dislodge debris adhered to interior duct surfaces without damaging

integrity of metal ducts, duct liner, or duct accessories.

4. Clean fibrous-glass duct liner with HEPA vacuuming equipment; do not permit duct liner to get wet.

Replace fibrous-glass duct liner that is damaged, deteriorated, or delaminated or that has friable

material, mold, or fungus growth.

5. Clean coils and coil drain pans according to NADCA 1992. Keep drain pan operational. Rinse coils

with clean water to remove latent residues and cleaning materials; comb and straighten fins.

6. Provide drainage and cleanup for wash-down procedures.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 13


7. Antimicrobial Agents and Coatings: Apply EPA-registered antimicrobial agents if fungus is present.

Apply antimicrobial agents according to manufacturer's written instructions after removal of surface

deposits and debris.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROLS

A. Perform tests and inspections.

B. Leakage Tests:

1. Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual." Submit a test report for each test.

2. Test the following systems:

a. Ducts with a Pressure Class Higher Than 3-Inch wg: Test representative duct sections,selected by Architect from sections installed, totaling no less than 25 percent of total installed

duct area for each designated pressure class.

3. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of systems to accommodate leakage testing and for

compliance with test requirements.

4. Keep open ends of ductwork covered during construction.

5. Test for leaks before applying external insulation.

6. Conduct tests at static pressures equal to maximum design pressure of system or section being

tested. If static-pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design

pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure.

7. Give seven days' advance notice for testing.

C. Duct System Cleanliness Tests:

1. Visually inspect duct system to ensure that no visible contaminants are present.

2. Test sections of metal duct system, chosen randomly by Owner, for cleanliness according to

"Vacuum Test" in NADCAACR, "Assessment, Cleaning and Restoration of HVAC Systems."

a. Acceptable Cleanliness Level: Net weight of debris collected on the filter media shall notexceed 0.75 mg/100 sq. cm.

D. Duct system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

E. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.7 SCHEDULES

A. Supply Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fan Coil Units, Furnaces, Heat Pumps, and Terminal Units:

a. Pressure Class: Positive 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C.

c. SMACNA Leakage Class for Rectangular: 12.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class for Round and Flat Oval: 6.

2. Ducts Connected to Constant-Volume Air-Handling Units:

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 14



b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.



3. Ducts Connected to Variable-Air-Volume Air-Handling Units:





B. Return Ducts:


a. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 1-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: B.



2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:





C. Exhaust Ducts:

1. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 1 and 2) Air:

a. Pressure Class: Negative 2-inch wg.

b. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: C if negative pressure, and A if positive pressure.



2. Ducts Connected to Fans Exhausting Laboratory and Process (ASHRAE 62.1, Class 3 and 4) Air:

a. Type 316, stainless-steel sheet.

1) Exposed to View: No. 4 finish.

2) Concealed: No. 2D finish.

b. Pressure Class: Positive or negative 6-inch wg.

c. Minimum SMACNA Seal Class: A.

d. SMACNA Leakage Class: 3.

D. Outdoor-Air (Not Filtered, Heated, or Cooled) Ducts:






2. Ducts Connected to Air-Handling Units:



PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 15




E. Intermediate Reinforcement:

1. Stainless-Steel Ducts:

a. Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

b. Not Exposed to Airstream: Match duct material.

F. Elbow Configuration:

1. Rectangular Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and

Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Velocity 1000 fpmor Lower:

1) Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

2) Mitered Type RE 4 without vanes.

b. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4,

"Vane Support in Elbows."

c. Velocity 1500 fpm or Higher:


2) Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

3) Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction

Standards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4,



Flexible," Figure 4-2, "Rectangular Elbows."

a. Radius Type RE 1 with minimum 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio.

b. Radius Type RE 3 with minimum 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and two vanes.

c. Mitered Type RE 2 with vanes complying with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct ConstructionStandards - Metal and Flexible," Figure 4-3, "Vanes and Vane Runners," and Figure 4-4,


3. Round Duct: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible,"

Figure 3-4, "Round Duct Elbows."

a. Minimum Radius-to-Diameter Ratio and Elbow Segments: Comply with SMACNA's "HVACDuct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible," Table 3-1, "Mitered Elbows." Elbows with

less than 90-degree change of direction have proportionately fewer segments.

1) Velocity 1000 fpmor Lower: 0.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and three segments for 90degree elbow.

2) Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: 1.0 radius-to-diameter ratio and four segments for 90 degreeelbow.

3) Velocity 1500 fpmor Higher: 1.5 radius-to-diameter ratio and five segments for 90 degree

elbow.

4) Radius-to Diameter Ratio: 1.5.

b. Round Elbows, 12 Inchesand Smaller in Diameter: Stamped or pleated.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233100 - 16


c. Round Elbows, 14 Inchesand Larger in Diameter: Welded.

G. Branch Configuration:


Flexible," Figure 4-6, "Branch Connection."

a. Rectangular Main to Rectangular Branch: 45-degree entry.

b. Rectangular Main to Round Branch: Spin in.

1) Round and Flat Oval: Comply with SMACNA's "HVAC Duct Construction Standards -

Metal and Flexible," Figure 3-5, "90 Degree Tees and Laterals," and Figure 3-6, "Conical

Tees." Saddle taps are permitted in existing duct.

c. Velocity 1000 fpmor Lower: 90-degree tap.

d. Velocity 1000 to 1500 fpm: Conical tap.

e. Velocity 1500 fpmor Higher: 45-degree lateral.


PARTNERS 15-175B


233300 - 1


SECTION 233300 - AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Air turning devices/extractors.

B. Backdraft dampers - metal.

C. Combination fire and smoke dampers.

D. Duct access doors.

E. Duct test holes.

F. Flexible duct connections.

G. Volume control dampers.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include

electrical characteristics and connection requirements.


A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS

A. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable

blades, mounting straps.

2.2 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS - METAL

2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS

A. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted

blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free

manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit

setting for varying differential static pressure.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233300 - 2


2.4 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com.

2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com.

3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com.

B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated.

C. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper.

D. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized steel frame and blades,

oil-impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb

seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock,

and 1/2 inch actuator shaft.

E. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz.

Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper operator on interior of duct and link to

damper operating shaft.

F. Normally Open Smoke Responsive Fire Dampers: Curtain type, closing upon actuation of electro thermal

link, flexible stainless steel blade edge seals to provide constant sealing pressure, stainless steel springs

with locking devices to ensure positive closure for units mounted horizontally.

2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated.

2.6 DUCT TEST HOLES

A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs,

threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended

neck fittings to clear insulation.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS


B. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip.

2.8 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS


PARTNERS 15-175B


233300 - 3


B. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch.

1. Blade: 24 gage, 0.0239 inch, minimum.

C. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch.

Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable

hardware.

1. Blade: 18 gage, 0.0478 inch, minimum.

D. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade

dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings.

E. Quadrants:

1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.

2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters.

3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA

(DCS). Refer to Section 233100 for duct construction and pressure class.

B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated.

C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic

dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for

cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand

access, size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only.

Review locations prior to fabrication.

D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes.

E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated,

where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by Authorities Having

Jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections,

corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges.

F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92.

G. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately

adjacent to the equipment.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233300 - 4


H. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken

from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off.

I. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether

dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly.


PARTNERS 15-175B


233416 - 1


SECTION 233416 - CENTRIFUGAL HVAC FANS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Inline centrifugal fans.


A. Section 233300 - Air Duct Accessories: Backdraft dampers.


A. ABMA STD 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings; American Bearing Manufacturers

Association, Inc.; 2015.

B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010.

C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE

51).

D. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;

http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.


A. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating

Seal.

B. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

C. Performance Base: Sea level conditions.

D. Static and Dynamic Balance: Eliminate vibration or noise transmission to occupied areas.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with specified

operating point clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated

capacity, and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate assembly of centrifugal fans and accessories including fan curves with

specified operating point clearly plotted, sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity,

and electrical characteristics and connection requirements.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233416 - 2


C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Include complete installation instructions.

D. Maintenance Data: Include instructions for lubrication, motor and drive replacement, spare parts list, and

wiring diagrams.


A. Provide certified fan sound power ratings


A. Permanent fans may be used for ventilation during construction only after ductwork is clean, filters are in

place, bearings have been lubricated, and fan has been test run under observation.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. ACME Engineering and Manufacturing Corporation: www.acmefan.com.

B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.

C. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.

D. Greenheck.

2.2 WHEEL AND INLET

A. Backward Inclined: Steel or aluminum construction with smooth curved inlet flange, heavy back plate,

backwardly curved blades welded or riveted to flange and back plate; cast iron or cast steel hub riveted

to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screws.

B. Forward Curved: Black enameled steel construction with inlet flange, back plate, shallow blades with

inlet and tip curved forward in direction of airflow, mechanically secured to flange and back plate; steel

hub swaged to back plate and keyed to shaft with set screw.

2.3 HOUSING

A. Heavy gage steel, spot welded for AMCA 99 Class I and II fans, and continuously welded for Class III,

adequately braced, designed to minimize turbulence with spun inlet bell and shaped cut

B. Factory finish before assembly to manufacturer's standard. For fans handling air downstream of

humidifiers, provide two additional coats of paint. Prime coating on aluminum parts is not required.

C. Provide bolted construction with horizontal flanged split housing, where indicated.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233416 - 3


2.4 BEARINGS AND DRIVES

A. Bearings: Heavy duty pillow block type, selfgreasing ball bearings, with ABMA STD 9 life at 50,000

hours.

B. Shafts: Hot rolled steel, ground and polished, with keyway, protectively coated with lubricating oil, and

shaft guard.

C. Drive: Cast iron or steel sheaves, dynamically balanced, keyed. Variable and adjustable pitch sheaves

for motors 15 hp and under, selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid Fixed sheave

for 20 hp and over, matched belts, and drive rated as recommended by manufacturer or minimum 1.5

times nameplate rating of the motor.

2.5 ACCESSORIES

A. Access Doors: Shaped to conform to scroll, with quick opening latches and gaskets.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install flexible connections between fan inlet and discharge ductwork; refer to Section 233300. Ensure

metal bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while

running.

C. Provide fixed sheaves required for final air balance.


PARTNERS 15-175B


233416 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


233423 - 1


SECTION 233423 - POWER VENTILATORS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Roof exhausters.

B. Kitchen hood upblast roof exhausters.


A. AMCA (DIR) - [Directory of] Products Licensed Under AMCA International Certified Ratings Program; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.;

http://www.amca.org/certified/search/company.aspx.

B. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook; Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2010.

C. AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans; Air Movement and Control Association

International, Inc.; 2005.

D. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Certified Aerodynamic Performance Rating; Air

Movement and Control Association International, Inc.; 2007 (ANSI/AMCA 210, same as ANSI/ASHRAE

51).

E. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans; Air Movement and Control

Association International, Inc.; 2014.

F. AMCA 301 - Methods for Calculating Fan Sound Ratings from Laboratory Test Data; Air Movement and

Control Association International, Inc.; 2014.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data on fans and accessories including fan curves with specified operating point

clearly plotted, power, RPM, sound power levels at rated capacity, and electrical characteristics and

connection requirements.


A. Permanent ventilators may not be used for ventilation during construction.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233423 - 2


B. Loren Cook Company: www.lorencook.com.

C. PennBarry: www.pennbarry.com.

2.2 POWER VENTILATORS - GENERAL

A. Static and Dynamically Balanced: AMCA 204 - Balance Quality and Vibration Levels for Fans.

B. Performance Ratings: Determined in accordance with AMCA 210 and bearing the AMCA Certified Rating

Seal.

C. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300 and bearing AMCA Certified Sound Rating Seal.

D. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.

E. Electrical Components: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the

purpose specified and indicated.

2.3 ROOF EXHAUSTERS

A. Fan Unit: V-belt or direct driven as indicated, with spun aluminum housing; resilient mounted motor; 1/2

inch mesh, 0.62 inch thick aluminum wire birdscreen; square base to suit roof curb with continuous curb

gaskets.

B. Roof Curb: 12 inch high self-flashing of galvanized steel with continuously welded seams, built-in cant

strips, insulation and curb bottom, and factory installed nailer strip.

C. Disconnect Switch: Factory wired, non-fusible, in housing for thermal overload protected motor and wall

mounted multiple speed switch or solid state speed controller.

D. Backdraft Damper: Gravity actuated, aluminum multiple blade construction, felt edged with offset hinge

pin, nylon bearings, blades linked.

E. Sheaves: Cast iron or steel, dynamically balanced, bored to fit shafts and keyed; variable and adjustable

pitch motor sheave selected so required rpm is obtained with sheaves set at mid-position; fan shaft with

self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings.

2.4 KITCHEN HOOD UPBLAST ROOF EXHAUSTERS

A. Direct Drive Fan:

1. Fan Wheel:

a. Type: Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal.

b. Material: Aluminum.

2. Statically and dynamically balanced.

3. Motors:

PARTNERS 15-175B


233423 - 3


a. Open drip-proof (ODP).

b. Heavy duty ball bearing type.

c. Mount on vibration isolators or resilient cradle mounts, out of air stream.

d. Fully accessible for maintenance.

4. Housing:

a. Construct of heavy gage aluminum including curb cap, windband, and motor compartment.

b. Rigid internal support structure.

c. One-piece fabricated or fully welded curb-cap base to windband for leak proof construction.

d. Construct drive frame assembly of heavy gage steel, mounted on vibration isolators.

e. Provide breather tube for fresh air motor cooling and wiring.

B. Shafts and Bearings:

1. Fan Shaft:

a. Ground and polished steel with anti-corrosive coating.

b. First critical speed at least 25 percent over maximum cataloged operating speed.

2. Bearings:

a. Permanently sealed or pillow block type.

b. Minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours (equivalent to L50 average life of 500,000

hours), at maximum cataloged operating speed.

c. 100 percent factory tested.

C. Drive Assembly:

1. Belts, pulleys, and keys oversized for a minimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower.

2. Belts: Static free and oil resistant.

3. Fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.

4. Motor pulley adjustable for final system balancing.

5. Readily accessible for maintenance.

D. Drain Trough: Allows for single-point drainage of water, grease, and other residues.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated steel lag screws to roof curb.

C. Extend ducts to roof exhausters into roof curb. Counterflash duct to roof opening.

D. Hung Cabinet Fans:

1. Install fans with resilient mountings and flexible electrical leads. Refer to Section 220548.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233423 - 4


2. Install flexible connections specified in Section 233300 between fan and ductwork. Ensure metal

bands of connectors are parallel with minimum one inch flex between ductwork and fan while

running.

E. Provide sheaves required for final air balance.

F. Install backdraft dampers on inlet to roof and wall exhausters.

G. Provide backdraft dampers on outlet from cabinet and ceiling exhauster fans and as indicated.


PARTNERS 15-175B


233700 - 1


SECTION 233700 - AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Diffusers.

B. Registers/grilles.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size,

finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type,

size, location, application, and noise level.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com.

B. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com.

C. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com.

2.2 RECTANGULAR CEILING DIFFUSERS

A. Type: Provide square, plaque diffuser to discharge air in 360 degree pattern.

B. Connections: Round.

C. Frame: Provide spline type. In plaster ceilings, provide plaster frame and ceiling frame.

D. Fabrication: Aluminum with baked enamel finish.

E. Color: As scheduled.

2.3 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES

A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other

device to set blades, vertical face.

B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting.

PARTNERS 15-175B


233700 - 2


C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

D. Color: As scheduled.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with

architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.

C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection.

D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether

dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly.

E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 099123.


PARTNERS 15-175B


237433 - 1


SECTION 237433 - PACKAGED OUTDOOR HEATING AND COOLING MAKE-UP AIR UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Direct fired make-up air heater.

B. Controls.


A. AHRI 210/240 - Standard for Performance Rating of Unitary Air Conditioning and Air-Source Heat Pump

Equipment; Air-Conditioning, Heating, and Refrigeration Institute; 2008.

B. ASHRAE Std 23.1 - Methods of Testing for Rating Positive Displacement Refrigerant Compressors and

Condensing Units; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.;

2010.

C. ASHRAE Std 90.1 - Energy Standard for Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings; American

Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2013, Including All Addenda

(ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Std 90.1).

D. UL 207 - Refrigerant-Containing Components and Accessories, Nonelectrical; Underwriters Laboratories

Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide data with dimensions, duct and service connections, accessories, controls,

electrical nameplate data, and wiring diagrams.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURED UNITS

A. Unit: Outdoor unit.

1. Construction and Ratings: In accordance with AHRI 210/240 and UL 207. Testing: ASHRAE Std

23.1.

2. Performance Ratings: Energy Efficiency Rating (EER)/Coefficient of Performance (COP) not less

than requirements of ASHRAE Std 90.1.

2.2 FABRICATION

A. Casing and Components: Steel panels, 18 gage, 0.0478 reinforced with structural angles and channels

to ensure rigidity; access panels to burner and blower motor assemblies from either side of unit.

PARTNERS 15-175B


237433 - 2


B. Observation Port: On burner section for observing main and pilot flames.

C. Insulation: Neoprene faced glass fiber insulation 1 inch thick on inlet components to burner profile plate.

D. Finish: Heat resistant baked enamel.

E. Outdoor Installation: Weatherproofed casing, with intake louver or hood.

2.3 FILTERS

A. Filter: Removable 2 inches thick high velocity permanent filters in metal frames.

2.4 BURNERS

A. Assembly: For natural gas, capable of modulating turn down ratio of 4:1, including electric modulating

main gas valve, motorized shut down valve, main and pilot gas regulators, pilot electric gas valve,

manual shut-off valve and pilot adjustment valve.

2.5 FAN

A. Fan: Statically and dynamically balanced centrifugal fan mounted on solid steel shaft with heavy duty

self-aligning pre-lubricated ball bearings and V-belt drive with matching motor sheaves and belts.

2.6 CONTROLS

A. Controls: Pre-wire unit for connection of power supply. Field wiring from unit to remote control panel

makes unit operative.

B. Remote Control Panel: On-off-auto switch, indicating lights for supply fan, pilot operation, burner

operation, lockout indication, and clogged filter indication.

C. Interlocks: Unit to start when exhaust fan is running. Burner to operate when flow switch located in

exhaust duct proves flow.

D. Fan Discharge Thermostat: Controls modulating gas valve to maintain supply air temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION



PARTNERS 15-175B


238101 - 1


SECTION 238101 - TERMINAL HEAT TRANSFER UNITS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Cabinet unit heaters.

B. Fan-coil units.


A. Section 232113 - Hydronic Piping.

B. Section 232114 - Hydronic Specialties.

C. Section 262717 - Equipment Wiring: Electrical characteristics and wiring connections. Installation of

room thermostats. Electrical supply to units.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide typical catalog of information including arrangements.

C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate cross sections of cabinets, grilles, bracing and reinforcing, and typical elevations.

2. Submit schedules of equipment and enclosures typically indicating length and number of pieces of

element and enclosure, corner pieces, end caps, cap strips, access doors, pilaster covers, and

comparison of specified heat required to actual heat output provided.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate installation instructions and recommendations.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of components and locations of access doors in

radiation cabinets required for access or valving.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Include manufacturers descriptive literature, operating instructions,

installation instructions, maintenance and repair data, and parts listings.

G. Warranty: Submit manufacturer's warranty and ensure forms have been completed in Owner's name and

registered with manufacturer.

1.4 WARRANTY


PARTNERS 15-175B


238101 - 2


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 FAN-COIL UNITS

A. Manufacturers:

1. Enviro-Tec: www.enviro-tec.com.

2. Daikin Applied: www.daikinapplied.com.

3. Greenheck: www.greenheck.com.

B. Coils: Evenly spaced aluminum fins mechanically bonded to copper tubes, designed for 200 psi and 220

degrees F.

C. Fans: Centrifugal forward-curved double-width wheels, statically and dynamically balanced, direct

driven.

D. Motor: Tap wound multiple speed permanent split capacitor with sleeve bearings, resiliently mounted.

E. Control: Multiple speed switch, factory wired, located in cabinet.

F. Filter: Easily removed 1 inch thick glass fiber throw-away type, located to filter air before coil.

G. Capacity: As Scheduled, based on 65 degrees F entering air temperature, one psig steam.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION


B. Install equipment exposed to finished areas after walls and ceiling are finished and painted. Do not

damage equipment or finishes.

C. Fan-Coil Units: Install as indicated. Coordinate to assure correct recess size for recessed units.

D. Install electric heating equipment including devices furnished by manufacturer but not factory-mounted.

Furnish copy of manufacturer's wiring diagram submittal. Install electrical wiring in accordance with

manufacturer's submittals and Section 262717.

3.2 CLEANING

A. After construction is completed, including painting, clean exposed surfaces of units. Vacuum clean coils

and inside of cabinets.

PARTNERS 15-175B


238101 - 3


B. Install new filters.


PARTNERS 15-175B


238101 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 1


SECTION 260500 - BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions,

Special Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Provide all items, articles, materials, operations or methods listed, mentioned or scheduled on drawings

and/or herein, including all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals necessary and required for their

completion.

C. The items in this section are supplementary to the requirements set forth in other portions of the

specifications as indicated under Item "A" above.

1.2 DRAWINGS

A. The drawings show the location and general arrangement of equipment, electrical systems and related

items. They shall be followed as closely as elements of the construction will permit.

B. Examine the drawings of other trades and verify the conditions governing the work on the job site.

Arrange work accordingly, providing such fittings, conduit, junction boxes and accessories as may be

required to meet such conditions.

C. Deviations from the drawings, with the exception of minor changes in routing and other such incidental

changes that do not affect the functioning or serviceability of the systems, shall not be made without the

written approval of the Architect/Engineer.

D. The architectural and structural drawings take precedence in all matters pertaining to the building

structure, mechanical drawings in all matters pertaining to mechanical trades and electrical drawings in

all matters pertaining to electrical trades. Where there are conflicts or differences between the drawings

for the various trades, report such conflicts or differences to the Architect/Engineer for resolution.

1.3 INSPECTION OF SITE

A. Visit the site, examine and verify the conditions under which the work must be conducted before

submitting proposal.

B. The submitting of a proposal implies that the contractor has visited the site and understands the

conditions under which the work must be conducted.

1.4 CONTRACT BREAKDOWN

A. Within two (2) weeks following award of contract, submit to the Architect/Engineer for approval a contract

amount breakdown. Breakdown shall be submitted on a form similar to the form available at the

Architect/Engineer's office. All requests for payment shall be based on the approved breakdown.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 2


1.5 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Provide and remove upon completion of the project, in accordance with the general conditions, a

complete temporary electrical and telephone service during construction.

1.6 ALTERNATES

A. See Alternate Section and other applicable parts of the specifications.

1.7 GUARANTEE

A. Contractor guarantees that the installation is free from defects and agrees to replace or repair, any part of

this installation which becomes defective within a period of one year following final acceptance, unless

noted otherwise, provided that such failure is due to defects in the equipment, material or installation or to

follow the specifications and drawings. File with the Owner any and all guarantees from the equipment

manufacturers.

1.8 CODES, PERMITS AND FEES

A. Unless otherwise indicated, all required permits, licenses, inspections, approvals and fees for electrical

work shall be secured and paid for by the contractor. All work shall conform to all applicable codes, rules

and regulations.

B. Rules of local utility companies shall be complied with. Check with the utility company supplying service

to the installation and determine all devices including, but not limited to, all current and potential

transformers, meter boxes, C.T. cabinets and meters which will be required and include the cost of all

such items in proposal.

C. All work shall be executed in accordance with the rules and regulations set forth in local and state codes.

Prepare any detailed drawings or diagrams which may be required by the governing authorities. Where

the drawings and/or specifications indicate materials or construction in excess of code requirements, the

drawings and/or specifications shall govern.

1.9 STANDARDS OF MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP:

A. All materials shall be new. The electrical and physical properties of all materials, and the design,

performance characteristics, and methods of construction of all items of equipment, shall be in

accordance with the latest issue of the various, applicable Standard Specifications of the following

recognized authorities:

1. A.N.S.I.American National Standards Institute

2. A.S.T.M.American Society for Testing Materials

3. I.C.E.A.Insulated Cable Engineers Association

4. I.E.E.E.Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers

5. N.E.C.National Electrical Code

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 3


6. N.E.M.A.National Electrical Manufacturer's Association

7. U.L.Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.

B. Perform all work in a first class and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the latest accepted

standards and practices for the Trades involved.

C. All equipment of the same or similar systems shall be by the same manufacturer.

1.10 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Provide complete operating and maintenance instruction manuals covering all electrical equipment herein

specified, together with parts lists. All literature shall be furnished in triplicate for Owner and shall be

bound in book or ring binder form as directed by Architect/ Engineer.

B. The operating and maintenance instructions shall include a brief, general description for all electrical

systems including, but not limited to:

C. Routine maintenance procedures.

D. Trouble-shooting procedures.

E. Shop Drawings

F. Any equipment offered as a substitution shall be equal in quality, durability, appearance, ampacity, and

efficiency through all ranges of operation, shall conform with arrangements and space limitations of the

equipment shown on the plans and/or specified, shall be compatible with the other components of the

system. All costs to make these items of equipment comply with these requirements including, but not

limited to, conduit, wiring, bus work, enclosures and building alterations shall be included in the original

bid. Similar equipment shall be by one manufacturer.

1.11 SHOP DRAWINGS/SUBMITTALS

A. All shop drawings shall be submitted in groupings of similar and/or related items (lighting fixtures,

switchgear, etc.). Incomplete submittal groupings will be returned unchecked.

B. Submit for approval eight (8) copies of shop drawings for all electrical systems or equipment but not

limited to the items listed below. Where items are referred to by symbolic designation on the drawings

and specifications, all submittals shall bear the same designation (light fixtures). Refer to other sections

of the electrical specifications for additional requirements.

1. Panelboards

2. Disconnect Switches

3. Wiring Devices

4. Lighting Fixtures

5. Fire Alarm System

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 4


1.12 MANUFACTURERS LISTED

A. The listing of specific manufacturers does not imply acceptance of their products that do not meet the

specified ratings, features and functions. Manufacturers listed are not relieved from meeting these

specifications in their entirety.

B. Products in compliance with the specification and manufactured by others not named will be considered

only if pre-approved by the Engineer ten (10) days prior to bid date.

1.13 USE OF EQUIPMENT

A. The use of any equipment, or any part thereof for purposes other than testing even with the Owner's

consent, shall not be construed to be an acceptance of the work on the part of the Owner, nor be

construed to obligate the Owner in any way to accept improper work or defective materials.

B. Do not use Owner's lamps for temporary lighting except as allowed and directed by the Owner. Equip

lighting fixtures with new lamps when the project is turned over to the Owner.

PART 2 EXECUTION

2.1 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Install all equipment in strict accordance with all directions and recommendations furnished by the

manufacturer. Where such directions are in conflict with the drawings and specifications, report such

conflicts to the Architect/Engineer for resolution.

2.2 COORDINATION

A. Install work to avoid interference with work of other trades including, but not limited to, architectural and

mechanical trades. Remove and relocate any work that causes an interference at contractor's expense.

Disputes regarding the cause of an interference will be resolved by the Construction Manager or

Architect/Engineer.

2.3 CHASES AND RECESSES

A. Provided by the architectural trades, but the contractor shall be responsible for their accurate location

and size.

2.4 CUTTING, PATCHING AND DAMAGE TO OTHER WORK

A. Refer to General Conditions for requirements.

B. All cutting, patching and repair work shall be performed by the contractor through approved, qualified

subcontractors. Contractor shall include full cost of same in bid.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 5


2.5 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Provide all excavation, trenching, tunneling, dewatering and backfilling required for the electrical work.

Coordinate the work with other excavating and backfilling in the same area.

B. Where conduit is installed less than 2''6" below the surface of pavement, provide concrete encasement,

4" minimum coverage, all around or as shown on the electrical drawings.

C. Backfill all excavations inside building, under drives and parking areas with well-tamped granular

material. Backfill all excavations under wall footings with lean mix concrete up to underside of footings

and extend concrete within excavation a minimum of four (4) feet each side of footing. Granular backfill

shall be placed in layers not more than 8 inches in thickness, 95 percent compaction throughout with

approved compaction equipment. Tamp, roll as required. Excavated material shall not be used.

D. Backfill outside building with granular material to a height 12 inches over top of pipe compacted to 95

percent compaction as specified above. Backfill remainder of excavation with unfrozen, excavated

material in such a way to prevent settling. Tamp, roll as required.

2.6 EQUIPMENT FOUNDATION AND SUPPORTS

A. Shall be as required or as shown on plans or specified.

B. Provide concrete bases and supports for floor mounted electrical equipment.

C. Provide concrete house keeping bases 4" above finished floor, with leveling channels, where noted, for

floor-mounted equipment.

D. For equipment suspended from ceilings or walls, furnish and install all inserts, rods, structural steel

frames, brackets and platforms required.

2.7 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS

A. Make connections to equipment, motors, lighting fixtures, and other items included in the work in

accordance with the approved shop drawings and rough-in measurements furnished by the

manufacturers of the particular equipment furnished. All additional connections not shown on the

drawings, but called out by the equipment manufacturer's shop drawings shall be provided.

2.8 ACCESS DOORS

A. Provide access doors for installation by architectural trades. In the walls, provide Milcor No. "DW" or "M"

as required to make all controls, electrical boxes and other equipment installed by the contractor

accessible. Minimum size 12 inches x 12 inches. In the ceiling, provide Milcor No. 3210, 3105 or 3206

for accessibility as mentioned above, 24 inches x 24 inches minimum size. The plaster or acoustical tile

insert shall be by the architectural trades. Areas with accessible ceilings (ceilings where tiles are not

fastened in place and can be individually removed without removal of adjacent tiles) will not require

access doors.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 6


B. When access doors are in fire resistant wall or ceilings, they must bear the Underwriter's' Laboratories,

Inc., Label, with time design rating equal to or exceeding that of the wall or ceiling unless they were a part

of the tested assembly.

2.9 CLEANING

A. All debris shall be removed daily as required to maintain the work area in a neat, orderly condition.

B. Final cleanup shall include, but not be limited to, washing of fixture lenses or louvers, switchboards,

substations, motor control centers, panels, etc. Fixture reflectors and lenses or louvers shall be left with

no water marks or cleaning streaks.

2.10 PROTECTION AND HANDLING OF EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS

A. Equipment and materials shall be protected from theft, injury or damage.

B. Protect conduit openings with temporary plugs or caps.

C. Provide adequate storage for all equipment and materials delivered to the job site. Location of the space

will be designated by the Construction Manager or Architect/Engineer. Equipment set in place in

unprotected areas must be provided with temporary protection.

2.11 NAMEPLATES AND DIRECTORIES

A. Identify switchgear, motor controls, panelboards, safety switches, etc., with manufacturer's nameplate,

shop order, where applicable on composite assemblies, and designations used on the Drawings.

Nameplates shall be laminated phenolic plastic, beveled edged white with engraved black letters. Except

where impractical, letters and numerals shall be a minimum of 1/4 inch high. Nameplates shall be

mechanically secured. Pressure sensitive nameplates are not acceptable. Panel directories shall be

neatly typed, showing equipment served and location for each breaker or switch with a clear plastic

protective cover.

B. For detailed requirements refer to Section 26 0553 IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS.

2.12 EXTRA WORK

A. For any extra electrical work which may be proposed, this Contractor shall furnish to the Construction

Manager, an itemized breakdown of the estimated cost of the materials and labor required to complete

this work. The Contractor shall proceed only after receiving a written order from the Construction

Manager establishing the agreed price and describing the work to be done.

2.13 DRAWINGS AND MEASUREMENTS

A. These Specifications and accompanying Drawings are intended to describe and provide for finished

work. They are intended to be cooperative, and what is called for by either shall be as binding as if call

PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 7


for by both. The Contractor will understand that the work herein described shall be complete in every

detail.

B. The Drawings are not intended to be scaled for rough-in measurements nor to serve as Shop Drawings.

Field measurements necessary for ordering materials and fitting the installation to the building

construction and arrangement shall be taken by the Contractor. The Contractor shall check latest

Architectural drawings and locate light switches from same where door swings are different from

Electrical Drawings.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260500 - 8


PARTNERS 15-175B


260501 - 1


SECTION 260501 - MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical demolition.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


1.3 SUMMARY

A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision,

materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the system of minor electrical demolition as

described in this specification.

B. The demolition documents plans and specification have been prepared from existing non-as built

documents and cursory non-invasive field investigation.

C. It is the contractors obligation to become familiar with the extent of demolition and the existing condition

before submitting their bid.

D. During demolition if the contractor discovers unforseen significant non code compliance conditions of the

existing installation they shall notify the Architect and Engineer immediately in writting.

E. During demolition the contractor shall record on the as-builts all demolished circuits numbers that can be

used for new circuiting.

1.4

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities.

B. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260501 - 2


C. Report discrepancies to Owner before disturbing existing installation.

D. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed.

B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company.

C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction.

When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such

operations.

D. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable

system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration.

1. Notify Owner before partially or completely disabling system.

2. Notify local fire service.

3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance.

4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area.

3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK

A. Perform work for removal and disposal of equipment and materials containing toxic substances regulated

under the Federal Toxic Substances Control Act (TSCA) in accordance with applicable federal, state, and

local regulations. Applicable equipment and materials include, but are not limited to:

1. PCB-containing electrical equipment, including transformers, capacitors, and switches.

2. PCB- and DEHP-containing lighting ballasts.

3. Mercury-containing lamps and tubes, including fluorescent lamps, high intensity discharge (HID),

arc lamps, ultra-violet, high pressure sodium, mercury vapor, ignitron tubes, neon, and

incandescent.

B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

C. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply.

D. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes.

Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces.

E. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing

them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed.

F. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260501 - 3


G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers, and other

accessories.

H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work.

I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide

access panel as appropriate.

J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing electrical installations,

or as specified.

3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR

A. See Section 017419 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements.

B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged

circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing

revised circuiting arrangement.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260501 - 4


PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 1


SECTION 260519 - LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Single conductor building wire.

B. Metal-clad cable.

C. Wiring connectors.

D. Electrical tape.

E. Wire pulling lubricant.



B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding

conductors and grounding connectors.

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

D. Section 283100 - Fire Detection and Alarm: Fire alarm system conductors and cables.


A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013.

B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard,

or Soft; 2011.

C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes;

2010 (Reapproved 2014).

D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper

Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2014).

E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic

Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010.

F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 2


G. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2012 (NECA/NACMA 102).

H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S-95-658).

I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;

International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS).

J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted

by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

P. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with

the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for

voltage drop.

2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable

for use with the conductors to be installed.

3. Notify Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract

documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and

cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes,

configurations, and stranding.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 3


C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for

underground circuits.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions.


A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14

degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this

temperature is unavoidable, notify Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. and obtain direction before proceeding

with work.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product

listing.

B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted,

or required.

C. Metal-clad cable is permitted only as follows:

1. Where not otherwise restricted, may be used:

a. Where concealed above accessible ceilings for final connections from junction boxes toluminaires.

b. Where concealed in hollow stud walls, above accessible ceilings, and under raised floors forbranch circuits up to 20 A.

1) Exception: Provide single conductor building wire in raceway for circuit homerun from

first outlet to panelboard.

2. In addition to other applicable restrictions, may not be used:

a. Where exposed to damage.

b. For damp, wet, or corrosive locations, unless provided with a PVC jacket listed as suitable forthose locations.

2.2 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 4


B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc.

as required for a complete operating system.

D. Comply with NEMA WC 70.

E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83.

F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44.

G. Conductor Material:

1. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors

complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated.

2. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33.

H. Minimum Conductor Size:

1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG.

a. Exceptions:

1) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 75 feet: 10 AWG, for voltage drop.

2) 20 A, 120 V circuits longer than 150 feet: 8 AWG, for voltage drop.

2. Control Circuits: 14 AWG.

I. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum

size requirements specified.

J. Conductor Color Coding:

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction.

Maintain consistent color coding throughout project.

2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation.

3. Color Code:

a. 240/120 V High-Leg Delta, 3 Phase, 4 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B (High-Leg): Orange.

3) Phase C: Blue.

4) Neutral/Grounded: White.

b. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System:

1) Phase A: Black.

2) Phase B: Red.

3) Neutral/Grounded: White.

c. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 5


2.3 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE

A. Manufacturers:

1. Copper Building Wire:

a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com.

b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.

c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits:

a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation:

1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below.

a. Size 4 AWG and Larger: Type XHHW-2.

b. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2.

c. Fixture Wiring Within Luminaires: Type TFFN/TFN for luminaires with labeled maximumtemperature of 90 degrees C; Approved suitable type for luminaires with labeled maximum

temperature greater than 90 degrees C.

2.4 METAL-CLAD CABLE

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com.

2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com.

3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use

in classified firestop systems to be used.

C. Conductor Stranding:

1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid.

2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded.

D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 6


F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor.

G. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape.

H. Provide PVC jacket applied over cable armor where indicated or required for environment of installed

location.

2.5 WIRING CONNECTORS

A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be

connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable.

2.6 WIRING ACCESSORIES

A. Electrical Tape:

1. Manufacturers:

a. 3M: www.3m.com.

b. Plymouth Rubber Europa: www.plymouthrubber.com.

2. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510;

minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for

application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221

degrees F.

B. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable

for use at the installation temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather.

B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed.

C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to

accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70.

D. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 7


3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Circuiting Requirements:

1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.

3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices.

4. Include circuit lengths required to install connected devices within 10 ft of location shown.

5. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power-limited

circuits in accordance with NFPA 70.

6. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70.

7. Circuiting Adjustments: Unless otherwise indicated, when branch circuits are shown as separate,

combining them together in a single raceway is not permitted.

8. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up

to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not

permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit.

B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120.

E. Installation in Raceway:

1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants.

2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time.

3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling

tension and sidewall pressure.

4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by

the manufacturer.

F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner.

G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and

methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building

structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems.

H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings.

1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC):

a. Use listed fittings.

b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Donot use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260519 - 8


I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet.

J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment

enclosures.

K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside

enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70.

L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors.

1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices

in conduit bodies or wiring gutters.

2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking

or damaging conductors.

3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and

other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the

application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors.

N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using vinyl insulating electrical tape.

O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and

methods specified in Section 078400.

P. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices,

including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system.


A. See Section 014000 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements.

B. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is

required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required.

E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260526 - 1


SECTION 260526 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Grounding and bonding requirements.

B. Conductors for grounding and bonding.

C. Connectors for grounding and bonding.


A. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for

conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding.

B. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

B. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;


C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


D. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:



1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. See Section 013000 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures.

B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and

bonding system components.

C. Shop Drawings:

PARTNERS 15-175B


260526 - 2


1. Indicate proposed arrangement for signal reference grids. Include locations of items to be bonded

and methods of connection.

D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product

testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and

installation of product.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors,

conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding

system.

C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum


D. Bonding and Equipment Grounding:

1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic

equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other

normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or

likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70.

2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do

not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor.

3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding

conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70.

4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment

grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus

only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus.

6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to

accommodate conduit movement.

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS


1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260526 - 3


2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable.

B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in Addition to Requirements of Section 260526:

1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated.

a. Exceptions:

1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth.

2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway).

C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding:

1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items

to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and

other inaccessible connections.

3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic

welded connections for accessible connections.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed.

B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with

NECA 1.

C. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors.

1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking

or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector.

2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact

surfaces.

3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be

connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.

4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque

settings.

5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260526 - 4


D. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 260553.



B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS except Section 4.

C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.13.

D. Perform ground electrode resistance tests under normally dry conditions. Precipitation within the previous

48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions.

E. Investigate and correct deficiencies where measured ground resistances do not comply with specified

requirements.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 1


SECTION 260529 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work.


A. Section 033000 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete equipment pads.

B. Section 260534 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits.

C. Section 260537 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes.

D. Section 265100 - Interior Lighting: Additional support and attachment requirements for interior

luminaires.

E. Construction requirements for concrete bases


A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel

Products; 2013.

B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware;

2009.

C. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004.

D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


F. UL 5B - Strut-Type Channel Raceways and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and

components to be installed.

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for

installation.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 2


3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the

installed locations.

4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential

conflicts installed under other sections or by others.



B. Sequencing:

1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured

in accordance with Section 033000.

C. ANSI/ TIA/ EIA 568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current revision level.

D. ANSI/ TIA/ EIA 569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces,

current revision level.

E. ANSI/ TIA/ EIA 568 Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard, current revision level.

F. ANSI/ TIA/ EIA 569 Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces,

current revision level.

1.5 SUMMARY

A. ASTM A682 Standard Specification for Steel, Strip, High-Carbon, Cold-Rolled, Spring Quality.

B. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor, supervision,

materials, equipment, and services to completely execute the system of conduit hangers and supports as

described in this specification.

C. Rated Strength: Adequate in tension, shear, and pullout force to resist maximum loads calculated or

imposed for this project, with a minimum structural safety factor of five times the applied force.

1.6 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut)

framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors.

C. Shop Drawings: Include details for fabricated hangers and supports where materials or methods other

than those indicated are proposed for substitution.

D. Evaluation Reports: For products specified as requiring evaluation and recognition by ICC Evaluation

Service, LLC (ICC-ES), provide current ICC-ES evaluation reports upon request.

E. Installer's Qualifications: Include evidence of compliance with specified requirements.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 3


F. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product

testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and



A. Comply with NFPA 70.

B. Comply with applicable building code.

1.8 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of concrete bases. Cast anchor-bolt inserts into bases. Concrete,

reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 03.

B. Coordinate installation of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS


1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as

necessary for the complete installation of electrical work.

2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where

applicable.

3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance

with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum

safety factor of _____. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads

where applicable.

4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing.

5. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed.

a. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633.

b. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123Mor ASTM A153/A153M.

B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported.

1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron.

2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com.

c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 4


d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported.

1. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.


c. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.

d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

e. ______.

D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and

associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports.

1. Comply with MFMA-4.

2. Channel (Strut) Used as Raceway (only where specifically indicated): Listed and labeled as

complying with UL 5B.

3. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.

b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.

d. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

e. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, andhardware produced by a single manufacturer.

E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated.

1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required:

a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter.

b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter.

F. Non-Penetrating Rooftop Supports for Low-Slope Roofs: Steel pedestals with thermoplastic or rubber

bases that rest on top of roofing membrane, not requiring any attachment to the roof structure and not

penetrating the roofing assembly, with support fixtures as specified.

1. Base Sizes: As required to distribute load sufficiently to prevent indentation of roofing assembly.

2. Attachment/Support Fixtures: As recommended by manufacturer, same type as indicated for

equivalent indoor hangers and supports.

3. Mounting Height: Provide minimum clearance of 6 inches under supported component to top of

roofing.

4. Manufacturers:

a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com.


c. PHP Systems/Design: www.phpsd.com.

d. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com.

G. Anchors and Fasteners:

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 5


1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types

indicated for the specified applications.

2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors.

3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors.

4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts.

5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts.

6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs.

7. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to

be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors.

a. Comply with MFMA-4.

b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel.

c. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system.

8. Manufacturers - Powder-Actuated Fastening Systems:

a. Hilti, Inc: www.us.hilti.com.

b. ITW Ramset, a division of Illinois Tool Works, Inc: www.ramset.com.

c. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com.

d. Simpson Strong-Tie Company Inc: www.strongtie.com.

H. Power-Strut, Division of Allied Support Systems

I. Hilti Corporation

J. ERICO, International Corporation.

K. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Protective zinc coating either Electro-Plated

(ASTM B633 SCI or SC3), Pre-Galvanized (ASTM a525 coating designation G90) or Hot-Dip Galvanized

after fabrication (ASTM A123). The minimum thickness of zinc coating shall be 0.2 mill (5 micrometers)..

L. Provide materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight

of wire in conduit.

1. Product: Pre-galvanized strut.

2. Product: Hilti DX Series

M. Conduit Hangers:

1. Shall have a vertical load limit of 100 lbs, and a horizontal load limit of 25 lbs..

2. Shall be available with either a plain hole for 1/4” bolt or a 1/4-20 thread impression.

3. Shall be available for 3/8” through 2” EMT, rigid, and aluminum conduit.

4. Shall be available pre-assembled with manufacturer's specialty fasteners for connection to building

structures like beam, flange, drop wire/rod, wood structure, concrete and acoustical tee grid.

N. Wire Rope Hangers:

1. Wire rope hanger assemblies shall be made of galvanized steel.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 6


2. Hanger shall meet the fire rating requirements for DIN 4102-2 for 30 minutes at 30 percent of rated

load.

3. Rope hangers shall have a minimum safety factor of 5:1.

4. Rope hangers are not permitted to support conduits.

5. Rope hangers are permitted to hang light fixtures, were applicable.

6. Hangers shall be fully adjustable.

7. Manufacturer of wire rope hangers shall be:

a. ERICO, INC., Speed Link series.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA

1.

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or

other systems.

D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc., do not provide support from

suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid.

E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc., do not provide support from

roof deck.

F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer.

G. Equipment Support and Attachment:

1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support

equipment as required.

2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud

walls when wall strength is not sufficient to resist pull-out.

3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to

provide space between equipment and mounting surface.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 7


4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own

weight for support.

H. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during

concrete pour.

I. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

J. Remove temporary supports.



B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects.

C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components.

E. Mounting and Anchorage of surface-mounted equipment and components: Anchor and fasten electrical

items and their supports to building structural elements by the following methods unless otherwise

indicated by code:

1. To wood: Fasten with lag screws or through bolts.

2. To new concrete: Bolt to concrete inserts

3. To Masonry: Approved toggle-type bolts on hollow masonry units and expansion anchor fasteners

on solid masonry units.

4. Instead of expansion anchors, powder-actuated driven threaded studs provided with lock washers

and nuts may be used in existing standard-weight concrete 4-inches thick or greater. Do not use for

anchorage to lightweight-aggregate concrete or for slabs less than 4 inches thick.

5. To Steel: Beam clamps (MSS type 19,21,23,25,or 27) complying with MSS SP-69.

6. To light steel: Sheet metal screws.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260529 - 8


PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 1


SECTION 260534 - CONDUIT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

B. Intermediate metal conduit (IMC).

C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC).

D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC).

E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC).

F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit.

H. Electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT).

I. Conduit fittings.

J. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies.



B. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 260537 - Boxes.


A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005.

B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005.

C. ANSI C80.6 - American National Standard for Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit (EIMC); 2005.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 2


D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2013.

F. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2003.

G. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and

Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

H. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;

2013.

I. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National

Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2015.

J. NEMA TC 13 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing (ENT); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2014.

K. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


L. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

O. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

P. UL 651 - Schedule 40, 80, Type EB and A Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All

Revisions.

Q. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

R. UL 1242 - Electrical Intermediate Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

S. UL 1653 - Electrical Nonmetallic Tubing; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 3


C. Shop Drawings:

1. Indicate proposed arrangement for conduits to be installed within structural concrete slabs, where

permitted.

2. Include proposed locations of roof penetrations and proposed methods for sealing.

D. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits

embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

E. Product Data: Provide for metallic conduit, flexible metal conduit, liquidtight flexible metal conduit,

metallic tubing, nonmetallic conduit, flexible nonmetallic conduit, nonmetallic tubing, fittings, and conduit

bodies.

F. Project Record Documents: Accurately record actual routing of conduits larger than 2 inches.



B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and

shown.


A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage.

C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate

covering.

D. Protect PVC conduit from sunlight.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS

A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and

product listing.

B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the

specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive

requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid

metal conduit.

C. Underground:

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 4


1. Under Slab on Grade: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, intermediate metal conduit (IMC),

PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit, or rigid PVC conduit.

2. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit

where emerging from underground.

3. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use

galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends.

4. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than

2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local

experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use

PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

5. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide

supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit

emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit.

D. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic

tubing (EMT).

E. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

F. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or intermediate metal conduit

(IMC).

2.2 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS

A. Existing Work: Where existing conduits are indicated to be reused, they may be reused only where they

comply with specified requirements, are free from corrosion, and integrity is verified by pulling a mandrel

through them.

B. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system.

C. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

D. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

1. Branch Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

3. Control Circuits: 1/2 inch (16 mm) trade size.

4. Flexible Connections to Luminaires: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size.

5. Underground, Interior: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size.

E. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum


PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 5


2.3 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC)

A. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and

listed and labeled as complying with UL 6.

B. Fittings:

1. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as


2. Material: Use steel or malleable iron.

3. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression

(gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.4 INTERMEDIATE METAL CONDUIT (IMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com.

2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com.

3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type IMC galvanized steel intermediate metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.6

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 1242.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.

b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com.

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.

2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as



4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression

(gland) type fittings are not permitted.

2.5 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com.

2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com.

3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as

complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 6


C. Fittings:

1. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B.


D. Description: Interlocked steel construction.

E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1.

2.6 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC)

A. Manufacturers:

1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc; ______: www.afcweb.com.

2. Electri-Flex Company; ______: www.electriflex.com.

3. International Metal Hose; ______: www.metalhose.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed

and labeled as complying with UL 360.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:





2.7 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Allied Tube & Conduit; ______: www.alliedeg.com.

2. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.

3. Wheatland Tube Company; ______: www.wheatland.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed


C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturers:



c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com.



PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 7


4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) or set-screw type.

a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings.

D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing.

E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type.

2.8 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT

A. Manufacturers:

1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com.

2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com.

3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed

and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where

subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C.

C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected.

2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651;

material to match conduit.

2.9 ELECTRICAL NONMETALLIC TUBING (ENT)

A. Manufacturers:

1. Beck Manufacturing, Inc: www.beckmfg.com.

2. Cantex Inc; ______: www.cantexinc.com.

3. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation; ______: www.carlon.com.

B. Description: NFPA 70, Type ENT electrical nonmetallic tubing complying with NEMA TC 13 and listed


C. Fittings:

1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of ENT to be connected.

2. Use solvent-welded type fittings.

3. Solvent-Welded Fittings: Rigid PVC fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as

complying with UL 651; suitable for use with ENT.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 8


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits.


D. Verify routing and termination locations of conduit prior to rough-in.

E. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required

to complete wiring system.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

D. Install intermediate metal conduit (IMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

E. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111.

F. Install electrical nonmetallic tubing (ENT) in accordance with NECA 111.

G. Conduit Routing:

1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required.

3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed.

4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated:

a. Electrical rooms.

b. Mechanical equipment rooms.

c. Within joists in areas with no ceiling.

5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed:

a. Across floors.

b. Across roofs.

c. Across top of parapet walls.

d. Across building exterior surfaces.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 9


6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible

manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building

structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical.

7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access.

8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull

points.

H. Conduit Support:

1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable

supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork,

or other systems.

3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not

provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles.

4. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

5. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory

conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits.

I. Connections and Terminations:

1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel

conduits prior to making connections.

2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings

or split couplings. Do not use running threads.

3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another.

4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into

connectors.

5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for

dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations.

6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors.

7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity.

J. Penetrations:

1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade

beams, without approval of Structural Engineer.

2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated.

3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves

flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required.

4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground.

5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent

entry of moisture and gases.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260534 - 10


6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of

membrane.

7. Make penetrations for roof-mounted equipment within associated equipment openings and curbs

where possible to minimize roofing system penetrations. Where penetrations are necessary, seal

as indicated or as required to preserve integrity of roofing system and maintain roof warranty.

Include proposed locations of penetrations and methods for sealing with submittals.

8. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using

materials and methods specified in Section 078400.

K. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and

expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This

includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection.

2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost.

L. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial

temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near

the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to:

1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces.

M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.



B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer.

Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion.

C. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 1


SECTION 260537 - BOXES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes.

B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches.



B. Section 083100 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes.

C. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

D. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

E. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices:

1. Wall plates.

2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices.


A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and

Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1).

D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1).

E. NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box Supports; National Electrical

Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 2).

F. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical


G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 2


H. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable Telecommunications

Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77).

I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.

J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.

K. UL 508A - Industrial Control Panels; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

L. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other

potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical

equipment required by NFPA 70.

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of

the actual equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps,

support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70.

4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected

conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70.

5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under

other sections or by others.

6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity.

7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush-mounted

boxes where indicated.



1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and

enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

1. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Include reports for load testing in accordance with SCTE 77

certified by a professional engineer or an independent testing agency upon request.

C. Samples:

PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 3


1. Floor Boxes: Provide one sample(s) of each floor box proposed for substitution upon request.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated

by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination,

preparation, and installation of product.

E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets

and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground boxes/enclosures.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Keys for Lockable Enclosures: Two of each different key.



PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 BOXES


1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70

and product listing.

2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and

to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum


5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate.

B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes:

1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required.

2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated

or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers.

3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete.

4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls.

5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where

required.

6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction.

7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall.

8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 4


9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish

with threaded hubs.

10. Boxes for Supporting Luminaires and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of

load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of luminaire where

required.

11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use

field-connected gangable boxes.

12. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 262726.

C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A.

2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated:

3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches:

a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

D. The Wiremold Company: www.wiremold.com.

E. Thomas & Betts Corporation.

F. Raco. A Hubbell Company.

1. Minimum size for communications, fire alarm, sound system and security system rough-ins shall be

4" square, 3-1/2" deep unless otherwise noted.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings.

B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes.


3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,

NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not

indicated.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

NFPA 70.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 5


D. Box Locations:

1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 083100 as

required where approved by the Architect.

2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate.

3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others.

a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 262726.

4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes.

5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints.

6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at

different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line.

7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6

inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated.

E. Box Supports:

1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 260529 using suitable

supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction.

2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes

used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70.

Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems.

F. Install boxes plumb and level.

G. Flush-Mounted Boxes:

1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front

edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or

does not project beyond finished surface.

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised

cover is flush with finished surface.

3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum,

plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box.

H. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity.

I. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices

exceeds 300 V.

J. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and

methods specified in Section 078400.

K. Close unused box openings.

L. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or

designated for future use.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260537 - 6


M. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

3.3 CLEANING

A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material.


PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 1


SECTION 260553 - IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Electrical identification requirements.

B. Identification nameplates and labels.

C. Wire and cable markers.


A. Section 099123 - Interior Painting.

B. Section 260519 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power

conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape.

C. Section 260573 - Power System Studies: Arc flash hazard warning labels.

D. Section 262726 - Wiring Devices - Lutron: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates.

E. Section 271005 - Structured Cabling for Voice and Data - Inside-Plant: Identification for communications

cabling and devices.


A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011.

B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011.

C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


D. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to

fabrication of identification products.

B. Sequencing:

1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until

identification products have been installed.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 2


2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide catalog data for nameplates, labels, and markers.

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product

testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and





A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by

manufacturer.

B. Conform with ANSI A13.1 and ANSI C2.

C. Conform with 29 CFR 1910.145.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS

A. Identification for Equipment:

1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment

and associated sections, compartments, and components.

a. Panelboards:

1) Identify ampere rating.

2) Identify voltage and phase.

3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight ofequipment.

4) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door.Identify spares and spaces using pencil.

5) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s)served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces.

2. Emergency System Equipment:

a. Use identification nameplate or voltage marker to identify emergency system equipment inaccordance with NFPA 70.

b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify type and location

of on-site emergency power sources.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 3


3. Use identification label to identify overcurrent protective devices for branch circuits serving fire

alarm circuits. Identify with text "FIRE ALARM CIRCUIT".

4. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Comply with Section 260573.

5. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical

equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures,

and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or

maintenance while energized.

a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches.

b. Legend: Include orange header that reads "WARNING", followed by the word message "ArcFlash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required; Do not operate controls or open covers

without appropriate personal protection equipment; Failure to comply may result in injury or

death; Refer to NFPA 70E for minimum PPE requirements" or approved equivalent.

B. Identification for Conductors and Cables:

1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 260519.

2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and

grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit

distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one

nominal voltage system.

C. Identification for Devices:

1. Identification for Communications Devices: Comply with Section 271005.

2. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 262726.

3. Use identification label to identify fire alarm system devices.

a. For devices concealed above suspended ceilings, provide additional identification on ceilingtile below device location.

4. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles.

a. For receptacles in public areas or in areas as directed by Architect, provide identification oninside surface of wallplate.

D. Identification for Luminaires:

1. Use permanent red dot on luminaire frame to identify luminaires connected to emergency power

system.

2.2 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS

A. Identification Nameplates:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com.

b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co; ______: www.kolbipipemarkers.com.

2. Materials:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 4


3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically non-conductive

phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text.

4. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high;

Four, located at corners for larger sizes.

B. Identification Labels:

1. Manufacturers:

a. Brady Corporation; ______: www.bradyid.com.

b. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com.

2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion

resistant.

3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise

indicated.

C. Format for Equipment Identification:

1. Minimum Size: 1 inch by 2.5 inches.

2. Legend:

a. Equipment designation or other approved description.

3. Text: All capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

4. Minimum Text Height:

a. Equipment Designation: 1/2 inch.

5. Color:

a. Normal Power System: White text on black background.

b. Emergency Power System: White text on red background.

D. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background.

E. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch white letters on black background. Use only for

identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, control device stations, and _______.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS

A. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around

self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve

type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified.

B. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties.

C. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated.

D. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated.

E. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 5


F. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated.

G. Description: Vinyl cloth type self-adhesive wire markers.

2.4 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS

A. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable.

B. Warning Signs:

1. Materials:

2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated.

C. Warning Labels:

1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self-adhesive vinyl

labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to

UL 969.

2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories

recommended by label manufacturer.

3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions.

B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and

maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows:

1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front.

2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door.

3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access.

4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform.

5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device.

6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access.

7. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access.

8. Devices: Outside face of cover.

PARTNERS 15-175B


260553 - 6


C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified.

D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior

surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement.

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and

edges properly sealed.

F. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible.


PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 1


SECTION 262416 - PANELBOARDS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Lighting and appliance panelboards.


A. Section 260526 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems.

B. Section 260529 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems.

C. Section 260553 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements.

D. Section 262813 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches and spare fuse cabinets.


A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision

E, 2013.

B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2009.

D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2014.

E. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical


F. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011.

G. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards

Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1).

H. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems;


I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


J. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition,

Including All Revisions.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 2


K. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.

L. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current

Edition, Including All Revisions.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent

protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor

terminal information, and installed features and accessories.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated



D. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed

circuiting arrangements.

E. Maintenance Data: Include information on replacement parts and recommended maintenance

procedures and intervals.

F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Owner's use in maintenance of project.

1. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

2. Panelboard Keys: Two of each different key.



B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Siemens Industry, Inc: www.usa.siemens.com.

B. Eaton Corporation; ______: www.eaton.com.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 3


C. Schneider Electric; Square D Products; ______: www.schneider-electric.us.

2.2 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following

service conditions:

1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet.

2. Ambient Temperature:

a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

C. Short Circuit Current Rating:

D. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation.

E. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices.

F. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements.

1. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each

feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

G. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed.

H. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E.

1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following

installation locations:

a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1.

2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated.

a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed.

3. Fronts:

a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes.

b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening.

4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

I. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing,

connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions.

2.3 POWER DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, power and feeder distribution type, circuit breaker

type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on

the drawings.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 4


B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

2. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers:

1. Provide bolt-on type or plug-in type secured with locking mechanical restraints.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted enclosures unless otherwise indicated.

2. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS

A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit

breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as

indicated on the drawings.

B. Conductor Terminations:

1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical.

C. Bussing:

1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices.

2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper.

3. Ground Bus Material: Copper.

D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated.

E. Enclosures:

1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated.

2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective

device handles without exposing live parts.

3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door.

2.5 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers:

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 5


1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers

listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable;

ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings.

2. Interrupting Capacity:

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuitcurrent rating indicated, but not less than:

1) 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC.

b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the

short circuit current rating indicated.

3. Conductor Terminations:

a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated.

b. Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only.

4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for

overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection.

5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles.

6. Provide multi-pole circuit breakers for multi-wire branch circuits as required by NFPA 70.

7. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete

installation:

a. Shunt Trip: Provide coil voltage as required for connection to indicated trip actuator.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent

with the indicated requirements.

C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards.

D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 INSTALLATION


B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general

workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1.

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and

NFPA 70.

D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 260529.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 6


E. Install panelboards plumb.

F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough

opening completely covered.

G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches

does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform.

H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed

into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 260526.

J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories.

K. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards.

L. Provide circuit breaker lock-on devices to prevent unauthorized personnel from de-energizing essential

loads where indicated. Also provide for the following:

1. Fire detection and alarm circuits.

M. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 260553.



B. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4.

D. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.6.1.1. Tests

listed as optional are not required.

E. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

F. Test AFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation.

G. Test shunt trips to verify proper operation.

H. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 7


3.4 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque

settings.

B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts.

C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each

measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly.

Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's

instructions.

B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.


PARTNERS 15-175B


262416 - 8


PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 1


SECTION 262726 - WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Wall switches.

B. Receptacles.

C. Wall plates.


A. Section 096900 - Access Flooring.

B. Section 260537 - Boxes.

C. Section 260537 - Boxes.


A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G,

2001.

B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal

Specification; Revision F, 1999.

C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 1999 (R 2010).

E. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers

Association; 2012.

F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


G. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

H. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

I. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 2


J. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under

other sections or by others.

2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual

equipment to be installed.

3. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide

suitable surface for installation of wiring devices.

4. Notify Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to

obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and

configurations.



B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

B. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

C. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

2.2 ALL WIRING DEVICES

A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose

specified and indicated.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 3


2.3 WALL SWITCHES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Hubbell Incorporated: www.hubbell-wiring.com.

2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc: www.leviton.com.

3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc: www.legrand.us

B. Wall Switches - General Requirements: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver

alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and

where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back

wiring with separate ground terminal screw.

C. Wall Switches: Heavy Duty, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1.

1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle.

2. Ratings:

a. Voltage: 120 - 277 volts, AC.

b. Current: 20 amperes.

2.4 RECEPTACLES

A. Manufacturers:



3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; Designer Style: www.lutron.com.

B. Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6,

and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the

drawings.

1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring

with separate ground terminal screw.

2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6.

C. GFCI Receptacles:

1. GFCI Receptacles - General Requirements: Self-testing, with feed-through protection and light to

indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection; listed as complying with UL 943, class

A.

a. Provide test and reset buttons of same color as device.

2. Standard GFCI Receptacles: Industrial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,

rectangular decorator style.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 4


2.5 WALL PLATES

A. Manufacturers:



3. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc: www.lutron.com.

B. Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D.

1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices.

2. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish.

C. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly

sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates.

D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting.

E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring

devices.

F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable,

NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated.

B. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of wiring

devices provided under this section.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 5


1. Mounting Heights: Unless otherwise indicated, as follows:

a. Wall Switches: 48 inches above finished floor.

b. Wall Dimmers: 48 inches above finished floor.

c. Fan Speed Controllers: 48 inches above finished floor.

d. Receptacles: 18 inches above finished floor or 6 inches above counter.

2. Where multiple receptacles, wall switches, or wall dimmers are installed at the same location and at

the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate.

C. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

D. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices

exceeds 300 V.

E. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more

than one conductor to wiring device terminals.

F. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to

proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that

do not rely on screw-actuated binding.

G. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment

grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper.

H. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place.

I. Install wall switches with OFF position down.

J. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles

with grounding pole on left.

K. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered

without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or improperly sized rough

openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement.

L. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or

designated for future use.



B. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 014000.

C. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects.

PARTNERS 15-175B


262726 - 6


D. Operate each wall switch, wall dimmer, and fan speed controller with circuit energized to verify proper

operation.

E. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity.

F. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions.

G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original

factory finish.


PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 1


SECTION 265100 - INTERIOR LIGHTING

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Interior luminaires.

B. Emergency lighting units.

C. Exit signs.

D. Ballasts and drivers.


A. Section 260537 - Boxes.


A. ANSI C78.379 - American National Standard for Electric Lamps -- Reflector Lamps -- Classification of

Beam Patterns; 2006.

B. ANSI C82.1 - American National Standard for Lamp Ballast - Line Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballast;

2004.

C. ANSI C82.4 - American National Standard for Ballasts for High-Intensity-Discharge and Low Pressure

Sodium Lamps (Multiple-Supply Type); 2002.

D. IES LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State Lighting

Products; Illuminating Engineering Society; 2008.

E. IES LM-80 - Approved Method: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources; Illuminating

Engineering Society; 2008.

F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2010.

G. NECA/IESNA 500 - Standard for Installing Indoor Commercial Lighting Systems; National Electrical

Contractors Association; 2006.

H. NECA/IESNA 502 - Standard for Installing Industrial Lighting Systems; National Electrical Contractors

Association; 2006.

I. NEMA LE 4 - Recessed Luminaires, Ceiling Compatibility; National Electrical Manufacturers Association;

2012.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 2


J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted


K. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2015.

L. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

M. UL 1598 - Luminaires; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

N. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for Use in Lighting Products; Current Edition, Including

All Revisions.


A. Coordination:

1. Coordinate the installation of luminaires with mounting surfaces installed under other sections or by

others. Coordinate the work with placement of supports, anchors, etc. required for mounting.

Coordinate compatibility of luminaires and associated trims with mounting surfaces at installed

locations.

2. Coordinate the placement of luminaires with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment,

diffusers, fire suppression system components, and other potential conflicts installed under other

sections or by others.

3. Coordinate the placement of exit signs with furniture, equipment, signage or other potential

obstructions to visibility installed under other sections or by others.

4. Notify Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to

obtain direction prior to proceeding with work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed

information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements, listings,

service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling compatibility; include

model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features.

1. LED Luminaires:

a. Include estimated useful life, calculated based on IES LM-80 test data.

b. Include IES LM-79 test report upon request.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated



D. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product including information on replacement

parts.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 3


E. Ballast product specification sheet from manufacturer.


A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this


1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of lighting fixtures and suspension system with other construction that

penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and

partition assemblies.

1.8 WARRANTY


B. Provide five year pro-rata warranty for batteries for emergency lighting units.

C. Provide ten year pro-rata warranty for batteries for self-powered exit signs.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. See Section 016000 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions.

B. Furnish two of each plastic lens type.

C. Furnish ten replacement lamps for each lamp type.

D. Furnish two of each ballast type.

E. Furnish two of each emergency battery type.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

3.1 MANUFACTURERS - LUMINAIRES

A. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.

B. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 4


C. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.

3.2 LUMINAIRE TYPES

A. Furnish products as indicated in luminaire schedule included on the drawings.

3.3 LUMINAIRES

A. Manufacturers:

1. Acuity Brands, Inc: www.acuitybrands.com.

2. Cooper Lighting, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com.

3. Hubbell Lighting, Inc: www.hubbelllighting.com.

B. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70 and NFPA 101.

C. Provide products that are listed and labeled as complying with UL 1598, where applicable.

D. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended.

E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide complete luminaires including lamp(s) and all sockets, ballasts,

reflectors, lenses, housings and other components required to position, energize and protect the lamp

and distribute the light.

F. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors,

hardware, supports, trims, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete operating system.

G. Provide products suitable to withstand normal handling, installation, and service without any damage,

distortion, corrosion, fading, discoloring, etc.

H. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Ceiling Compatibility: Comply with NEMA LE 4.

2. Luminaires Recessed in Insulated Ceilings: Listed and labeled as IC-rated, suitable for direct

contact with insulation and combustible materials.

I. LED Luminaires:

1. Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

2. Tested in accordance with IES LM-79 and IES LM-80.

3. LED Estimated Useful Life: Minimum of 50,000 hours at 70 percent lumen maintenance, calculated

based on IES LM-80 test data.

J. LED Luminaire Components: UL 8750 recognized or listed as applicable.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 5


3.4 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS

A. Manufacturers:




B. Description: Emergency lighting units complying with NFPA 101 and all applicable state and local codes,

and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

C. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent

voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral battery

power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically recharges battery

upon restoration of normal power source.

D. Battery:

1. Sealed maintenance-free nickel cadmium unless otherwise indicated.

2. Size battery to supply all connected lamps, including emergency remote heads where indicated.

E. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually activate

emergency operation.

F. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

3.5 EXIT SIGNS

A. Manufacturers - Powered and Self-Luminous Signs:




B. Description: Internally illuminated exit signs with LEDs unless otherwise indicated; complying with NFPA

101 and all applicable state and local codes, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 924.

1. Number of Faces: Single or double as indicated or as required for the installed location.

2. Directional Arrows: As indicated or as required for the installed location.

C. Self-Powered Exit Signs:

1. Operation: Upon interruption of normal power source or brownout condition exceeding 20 percent

voltage drop from nominal, solid-state control automatically switches connected lamps to integral

battery power for minimum of 90 minutes of rated emergency illumination, and automatically

recharges battery upon restoration of normal power source.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 6


2. Diagnostics: Provide power status indicator light and accessible integral test switch to manually

activate emergency operation.

3. Provide low-voltage disconnect to prevent battery damage from deep discharge.

3.6 BALLASTS AND DRIVERS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.

2. Lutron Electronics Company, Inc; www.lutron.com.

3. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.

4. Substitutions: See Section 016000 - Product Requirements.

5. Manufacturer Limitations: Where possible, for each type of luminaire provide ballasts produced by

a single manufacturer.

B. Dimmable LED Drivers:

1. Dimming Range: Continuous dimming from 100 percent to five percent relative light output unless

dimming capability to lower level is indicated, without flicker.

2. Control Compatibility: Fully compatible with the dimming controls to be installed.

3.7 LAMPS

A. Manufacturers:

1. General Electric Company/GE Lighting: www.gelighting.com.

2. Osram Sylvania: www.sylvania.com.

3. Philips Lighting Company: www.lighting.philips.com.

B. Lamps - General Requirements:

1. Unless explicitly excluded, provide new, compatible, operable lamps in each luminaire.

2. Verify compatibility of specified lamps with luminaires to be installed. Where lamps are not

specified, provide lamps per luminaire manufacturer's recommendations.

3. Minimum Efficiency: Provide lamps complying with all current applicable federal and state lamp

efficiency standards.

4. Color Temperature Consistency: Unless otherwise indicated, for each type of lamp furnish

products which are consistent in perceived color temperature. Replace lamps that are determined

by the Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. to be inconsistent in perceived color temperature.

PART 3 EXECUTION

4.1 EXAMINATION


PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 7


B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly

sized to accommodate conductors in accordance with NFPA 70.

C. Verify that suitable support frames are installed where required.

D. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to luminaires.

E. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work.

4.2 PREPARATION

A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface.

B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes.

4.3 INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 260537 as required for installation of

luminaires provided under this section.

B. Install products according to manufacturer's instructions.

C. Install luminaires securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1 (general

workmanship), NECA 500 (commercial lighting), and NECA 502 (industrial lighting).

D. Install luminaires plumb and square and aligned with building lines and with adjacent luminaires.

E. Suspended Ceiling Mounted Luminaires:

1. Do not use ceiling tiles to bear weight of luminaires.

2. Do not use ceiling support system to bear weight of luminaires unless ceiling support system is

certified as suitable to do so.

3. Secure lay-in luminaires to ceiling support channels using listed safety clips at four corners.

4. See appropriate Division 9 section where suspended grid ceiling is specified for additional

requirements.

F. Recessed Luminaires:

1. Install trims tight to mounting surface with no visible light leakage.

G. Suspended Luminaires:

1. Install using the suspension method indicated, with support lengths and accessories as required for

specified mounting height.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, support pendants from swivel hangers.

H. Install accessories furnished with each luminaire.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 8


I. Bond products and metal accessories to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor.

J. Emergency Lighting Units:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal

lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

K. Exit Signs:

1. Unless otherwise indicated, connect unit to unswitched power from same circuit feeding normal

lighting in same room or area. Bypass local switches, contactors, or other lighting controls.

L. Install lamps in each luminaire.



B. Inspect each product for damage and defects.

C. Operate each luminaire after installation and connection to verify proper operation.

D. Test self-powered exit signs, emergency lighting units, and fluorescent emergency power supply units to

verify proper operation upon loss of normal power supply.

E. Correct wiring deficiencies and repair or replace damaged or defective products. Repair or replace

excessively noisy ballasts as determined by Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc..

4.5 ADJUSTING

A. Aim and position adjustable luminaires to achieve desired illumination as indicated or as directed by

Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc.. Secure locking fittings in place.

B. Aim and position adjustable emergency lighting unit lamps to achieve optimum illumination of egress path

as required or as directed by Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. or authority having jurisdiction.

C. Exit Signs with Field-Selectable Directional Arrows: Set as indicated or as required to properly designate

egress path as directed by Strategic Energy Solutions, Inc. or authority having jurisdiction.

4.6 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces according to NECA 500 (commercial lighting), NECA 502 (industrial lighting), and

manufacturer's instructions to remove dirt, fingerprints, paint, or other foreign material and restore

finishes to match original factory finish.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 9


4.7 CLOSEOUT ACTIVITIES

A. Just prior to Substantial Completion, replace all lamps that have failed .

4.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed luminaires from subsequent construction operations.

4.9 ATTACHMENTS

A. Luminaire schedule.


PARTNERS 15-175B


265100 - 10


PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 1


SECTION 265701 - OCCUPANCY SENSORS AND INDOOR PHOTOCELLS

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Dual Technology Occupancy Sensors

B. Power Packs

1.2 RELATED SECTIONS

A. Section 26 5100 Interior Luminaires

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI/ASHREA/IESNA Standard 90.1-1999

B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2002.

C. IEEE Std 2000.1-1998

D. UL 916 Energy Management Equipment

1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. The objective of this section is to ensure the proper installation of the occupancy sensor based lighting

control system and/or daylight harvesting system so that lighting is controlled automatically after

reasonable time delay when a room or area is vacated by the last person to occupy said room or area or

natural lighting conditions change.

B. The occupancy sensor based lighting control and/or daylight harvesting system shall accommodate all

conditions of space utilization and all irregular work hours and habits.

1.5 WORK INCLUDED

A. Contractor's work to include all labor, materials, tools, appliances, control hardware, sensor, wire,

junction boxes and equipment necessary for and incidental to the delivery, installation and furnishing of a

completely operational occupancy sensor lighting control system, as described herein.

B. Contractor/Supplier shall examine all general specification provisions and drawings for related electrical

work required as work under Division 16.

C. Contractor shall coordinate all work described in this section with all other applicable plans and

specifications, including but not limited to wiring, conduit, fixtures, HVAC systems and building

management systems.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 2


1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Provide dimensions, ratings, and performance data.

B. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated

by product testing agency specified under Quality Assurance. Include instructions for storage, handling,

protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product.

C. Submit a lighting plan clearly marked by manufacturer showing proper product, location and orientation of

each sensor.

D. Submit any interconnection diagrams per major subsystem showing proper wiring.

E. Catalog sheets must clearly state any load restrictions when used with electronic ballasts.

F. Operation and Maintenance Data: Instructions for each product.

G. Certificates: Certify that products of this section meet or exceed specified requirements.

H. Warranty: Submit manufacturer warranty and ensure that forms have been completed in owner's name

and registered with manufacturer.


A. Products supplied shall be from a single manufacturer that has been continuously involved in

manufacturing of occupancy sensors for a minimum of five (5) years. Mixing of manufacturers shall not

be allowed.

B. All components shall be U.L. listed, offer a five (5) year warranty and meet all state and local applicable

code requirements.

C. Products shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect

rate of less than 1/3 of 1%.

D. Wall switch products must be capable of withstanding the effects of inrush current. Submittals shall

clearly indicate the method used.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Contractor shall warrant all equipment furnished in accordance to this specification to be undamaged,

free of defects in materials and workmanship, and in conformance with the specifications for a period of

not less than 5 years.

B. The suppliers obligation shall include repair or replacement, and testing without charge to the owner, all

or any parts of equipment which are found to be damaged, defective or non-conforming and returned to

the supplier.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 3


C. The warranty shall commence upon the owner's acceptance of the project.

D. Warranty on labor shall be for a minimum period of one (1) year.

1.9 COMMISSIONING

A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to make all proper adjustments to assure owner's satisfaction

with the occupancy system, or;

B. Factory Startup (Optional): It shall be the manufacturer's responsibility to verify all proper adjustments

and train owner's personnel to ensure owner's satisfaction with the occupancy system. This service is

provided at an additional cost.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Sensor Switch, Inc.

B. The Wattstopper

C. Leviton

D. Hubbel

E. Lutron

2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Approved manufacturer shall be Sensor Switch, Inc.

B. Substitutions must be submitted no less than 5 days prior to bid date. An AutoCAD drawing of the facility

showing coverage patterns and technical data must be provided with substitution request. All

substitutions must clearly identify any and all exceptions to the specifications with a detailed explanation

as to the exception. If substitution is approved, the contractor shall bear the responsibility of a fully

functional system to the owner's and specifying engineer/architect's satisfaction.


A. All sensors shall be capable of operating normally with electronic ballasts, PL lamp systems and rated

motor loads.

B. Coverage of sensors shall remain constant after sensitivity control has been set. No automatic reduction

shall occur in coverage due to the cycling of air conditioner or heating fans.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 4


C. All sensors shall have readily accessible, user adjustable settings for time delay and sensitivity. Settings

shall be located on the sensor (not the control unit) and shall be recessed to limit tampering.

D. In the event of failure, a bypass manual override shall be provided on each sensor. When bypass is

utilized, lighting shall remain on constantly or control shall divert to a wall switch until sensor is replaced.

This control shall be recessed to prevent tampering.

E. All sensors shall provide an LED as a visual means of indication at all times to verify that motion is being

detected during both testing and normal operation.

F. Where specified, sensor shall have an internal additional isolated relay with Normally Open, Normally

Closed and Common outputs for use with HVAC control, Data Logging and other control options.

Sensors utilizing separate components or specially modified units to achieve this function are not

acceptable.

G. All sensors shall have UL rated, 94V-0 plastic enclosures.

H. To ensure complete protection from weather elements and exposure, outdoor sensors shall be

manufactured with precision double-shot tooling and contain internal silicon gaskets.

2.4 LOW VOLTAGE OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. The installing contractor shall install one or more sensors with coverage areas that cover the entire space

and all entrance points. Exact placement and quantity required shall be per manufacturer's best practice

recommendations.

B. In areas with periodic or permanent obstruction to a sensor's field of view, sensors that utilize dual

technology detection shall be used.

C. Sensors shall utilize a digital signal analysis component, so as to provide a high degree of RF immunity.

D. Sensors shall operate on 12 to 24 VAC or VDC.

E. Sensors shall have test mode that temporarily shortens/disable all time delays (e.g., minimum on,

occupancy, photocell transition, dimming rates) such that an installer can quickly test operation of sensor.

Test mode shall time out and return sensor to normal operation should the installer forget to disable test

mode after installation.

F. Sensors shall have optional features for on/off photocell control, automatic dimming control photocell,

high/low occupancy based dimming, and usage in low temperature/high humidity environments.

2.5 DUAL TECHNOLOGY OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Dual technology sensors shall consist of passive infrared and ultrasonic or microphonic technologies for

occupancy detection.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 5


B. Where specified, dual technology sensors shall offer daylighting footcandle adjustment control and be

able to accommodate dual level lighting.

C. Dual technology sensors shall be mounted to avoid detection outside the controlled area when doors are

left open.

2.6 POWER PACKS

A. Power packs shall accept and switch 120 or 277 VAC, be plenum rated, and provide class 2 power for up

to 14 remote sensors.

B. When required by local code, power pack must install inside standard electrical enclosure and provide UL

recognized support to junction box. All class 1 wiring is to pass through chase nipple into adjacent

junction box without any exposure of wire leads.

C. Power pack shall incorporate a Class 1 relay and an AC electronic switching device. The AC electronic

switching device shall make and break the load, while the relay shall carry the current in the on condition.

This system shall provide full 20 Amp switching of all load types, and be rated for 400,000 cycles.

D. Power packs shall be single circuit, or two circuits. Slave packs may be used to control additional circuits.

When two circuit power packs, or slave packs are used, the power packs must be wired directly to circuit

breaker. Otherwise, power packs may be wired on the line or load side of the local switch.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensory in the correct location required for

complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage(s) of controlled areas per the

manufacturer's recommendations. Rooms shall have ninety (90) to one hundred (100) percent coverage

to completely cover the controlled area to accommodate all occupancy habits of single or multiple

occupants at any location within the room(s). The locations and quantities of sensors shown on the

drawings are diagrammatic and indicate only the rooms which are to be provided with sensors. The

contractor shall provide additional sensors if required to properly and completely cover the respective

room.

B. It is the contractors responsibility to arrange a pre-installation meeting with the manufacturer's factory

authorized representative, at the owner's facility, to verify placement of sensors and installation criteria.

C. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible

installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or

interference of structural components. The contractor shall also provide, at the owner's facility, the

training necessary to familiarize the owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem

solving diagnosis of the occupancy sensing devices and systems.

PARTNERS 15-175B


265701 - 6


3.2 FACTORY COMMISSIONING (OPTIONAL)

A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely commissioned by the manufacturer's

factory authorized technician who will verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a

trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control system. This service is provided at an additional cost.

B. The electrical contractor shall provide both the manufacturer and the electrical engineer with ten working

days written notice of the scheduled commissioning date. Upon completion of the system fine tuning the

factory authorized technician shall provide the proper training to the owner's personnel in the adjustment

and maintenance of the sensors.

3.3 INTERFACE WITH OTHER WORK

A. Verify that installed sensors are coordinated with all lighting controls and luminaires to provide a

complete lighting control system.


A. Upon completion of the installation, the system shall be completely tested by the contractor who will

verify all adjustments and sensor placement to ensure a trouble-free occupancy-based lighting control

system.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust _________ for smooth operation.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean ______________.

B. Protect installed _____________ from subsequent construction operations.


PARTNERS 15-175B EARTH MOVING 312000-1


SECTION 312000 - EARTH MOVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY


1. Excavating and filling for rough grading the Site. 2. Preparing subgrades for slabs-on-grade, walks and turf and grasses. 3. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 4. Drainage course for concrete slabs-on-grade. 5. Subbase course for concrete walks. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches for utilities.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil material used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe.

2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Base Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subbase course and hot-mix asphalt paving.

C. Bedding Course: Aggregate layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

D. Borrow Soil: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

E. Drainage Course: Aggregate layer supporting the slab-on-grade that also minimizes upward capillary flow of pore water.

F. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations and to lines and dimensions indicated.

1. Authorized Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions as directed by Architect. Authorized additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work.

2. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated lines and dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

G. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

H. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.



I. Subbase Course: Aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and base course for hot-mix asphalt pavement, or aggregate layer placed between the subgrade and a cement concrete pavement or a cement concrete or hot-mix asphalt walk.

J. Subgrade: Uppermost surface of an excavation or the top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, drainage course, or topsoil materials.

K. Utilities: On-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables as well as underground services within buildings.


A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct preexcavation conference at Project site.


A. Material test reports.


A. Utility Locator Service: Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before beginning earth-moving operations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-1, A-2-4, A-2-5, and A-3 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups; free of rock or gravel larger than 3 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: Soil Classification Groups GC, SC, CL, ML, OL, CH, MH, OH, and PT according to ASTM D 2487, Groups A-2-6, A-2-7, A-4, A-5, A-6, and A-7 according to AASHTO M 145, or a combination of these groups.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Subbase Material: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.



E. Base Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 95 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

F. Engineered Fill: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 12 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

G. Bedding Course: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 sieve.

H. Drainage Course: Narrowly graded mixture of washed crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 sieve.

2.2 ACCESSORIES

A. Detectable Warning Tape: Acid- and alkali-resistant, polyethylene film warning tape manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities, a minimum of 6 inches (150 mm) wide and 4 mils (0.1 mm) thick, continuously inscribed with a description of the utility, with metallic core encased in a protective jacket for corrosion protection, detectable by metal detector when tape is buried up to 30 inches (750 mm) deep; colored to comply with local practice or requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earth-moving operations.

B. Protect and maintain erosion and sedimentation controls during earth-moving operations.

C. Protect subgrades and foundation soils from freezing temperatures and frost. Remove temporary protection before placing subsequent materials.

3.2 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered. Unclassified excavated materials may include rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials.



3.3 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). If applicable, extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work.

3.4 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS

A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to indicated lines, cross sections, elevations, and subgrades.

3.5 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide the following clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: Minimum 12 inches (300 mm) each side of pipe or conduit unless otherwise noted.

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate and shape trench bottoms to provide uniform bearing and support of pipes and conduit. Shape subgrade to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits. Remove projecting stones and sharp objects along trench subgrade.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.6 SUBGRADE INSPECTION

A. Proof-roll subgrade below the building slabs and pavements with a pneumatic-tired dump truck to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding. Do not proof-roll wet or saturated subgrades. If dump truck cannot be used, consult with soils testing engineer for direction on inspecting the sub-grade.

B. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect, without additional compensation.

3.7 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill, with 28-day compressive strength of 2500 psi (17.2 MPa), may be used when approved by Architect.



1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction, pipe, or conduit as directed by Architect.

3.8 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow soil materials and excavated satisfactory soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.9 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place backfill on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

C. Trenches under Footings: Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings with satisfactory soil; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Trenches under Roadways: Provide 4-inch- (100-mm-) thick, concrete-base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 inches (750 mm) below surface of roadways. After installing and testing, completely encase piping or conduit in a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing roadway subbase course. Concrete is specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

E. Initial Backfill: Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm) in any dimension, to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact initial backfill under pipe haunches and compact evenly up on both sides and along the full length of piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of piping or conduit. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

F. Final Backfill: Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil to final subgrade elevation.

G. Warning Tape: Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches (300 mm) below finished grade, except 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade under pavements and slabs.

3.10 SOIL FILL

A. Plow, scarify, bench, or break up sloped surfaces steeper than 1 vertical to 4 horizontal so fill material will bond with existing material.

B. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under grass and planted areas, use satisfactory soil material. 2. Under walks and pavements, use satisfactory soil material. 3. Under steps and ramps, use engineered fill.



4. Under building slabs, use engineered fill. 5. Under footings and foundations, use engineered fill.

3.11 SOIL MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill soil layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill soil material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds

optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.12 COMPACTION OF SOIL BACKFILLS AND FILLS

A. Place backfill and fill soil materials in layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment and not more than 4 inches (100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

B. Place backfill and fill soil materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

C. Compact soil materials to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 95 percent.

2. Under walkways, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 92 percent.

3. Under turf or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill soil material at 85 percent.

4. For utility trenches, compact each layer of initial and final backfill soil material at 95 percent.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free of irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

B. Site Rough Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish subgrades to elevations required to achieve indicated finish elevations, within the following subgrade tolerances:

1. Turf or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Pavements: Plus or minus 1/2 inch (13 mm).

C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2 inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.



3.14 SUBBASE AND BASE COURSES UNDER PAVEMENTS AND WALKS

A. Place subbase course and base course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place subbase course and base course under pavements and walks as follows:

1. Shape subbase course and base course to required crown elevations and cross-slope grades. 2. Place subbase course and base course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in

layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

3. Compact subbase course and base course] at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections, and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698 and ASTM D 1557.

3.15 DRAINAGE COURSE UNDER CONCRETE SLABS-ON-GRADE

A. Place drainage course on subgrades free of mud, frost, snow, or ice.

B. On prepared subgrade, place and compact drainage course under cast-in-place concrete slabs-on-grade as follows:

1. Place drainage course that exceeds 6 inches (150 mm) in compacted thickness in layers of equal thickness, with no compacted layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick.

2. Compact each layer of drainage course to required cross sections and thicknesses to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698.


A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform inspections:

B. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

C. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earth moving only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

D. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil materials to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.17 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.



B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to greatest extent possible.

3.18 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste materials, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.


PARTNERS 15-175B CONCRETE PAVING 321313-1


SECTION 321313 - CONCRETE PAVING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Walks.

1.2 SUBMITTALS


B. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified. Provide actual color samples of each available color for stamped concrete.

C. Other Action Submittals:

1. Design Mixtures: For each concrete paving mixture. Include alternate design mixtures when characteristics of materials, Project conditions, weather, test results, or other circumstances warrant adjustments.


A. Ready-Mix-Concrete Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing ready-mixed concrete products and that complies with ASTM C 94/C 94M requirements for production facilities and equipment.

B. ACI Publications: Comply with ACI 301 unless otherwise indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS


A. Recycled Content: Provide steel reinforcement with an average recycled content of steel so postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content is not less than 25 percent.

B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 185/A 185M, fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into flat sheets.

C. Deformed-Steel Welded Wire Reinforcement: ASTM A 497/A 497M, flat sheet.

D. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60; deformed.

E. Plain-Steel Wire: ASTM A 82/A 82M, as drawn.



F. Deformed-Steel Wire: ASTM A 496/A 496M.

G. Dowel Bars: ASTM A 615/A 615M, Grade 60 plain-steel bars zinc coated (galvanized) after fabrication according to ASTM A 767/A 767M, Class I coating. Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burrs.

H. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars, welded wire reinforcement, and dowels in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete specified.

2.2 CONCRETE MATERIALS

A. Cementitious Material: Use the following cementitious materials, of same type, brand, and source throughout Project:

1. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, gray portland cement Type I.

a. Fly Ash: ASTM C 618, Class C or Class F. b. Ground Granulated Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989, Grade 100.

2. Blended Hydraulic Cement: ASTM C 595, Type IP, portland-pozzolan cement.

B. Fine and Coarse Aggregates: ASTM C 33, MDOT 2ns and 4AA, 6A, 6AA, 6AAA uniformly graded. Provide aggregates from a single source.

C. Water: Potable and complying with ASTM C 94/C 94M.

D. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260.

E. Chemical Admixtures: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to be compatible with other admixtures and to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble chloride ions by mass of cementitious material.

2.3 CURING MATERIALS

A. Moisture-Retaining Cover: ASTM C 171, polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene sheet.

B. Water: Potable.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Waterborne, monomolecular, film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete.

D. Clear, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 1, Class B, dissipating.

E. White, Waterborne, Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309, Type 2, Class B, dissipating.



2.4 RELATED MATERIALS

A. Joint Fillers: ASTM D 1751, asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber in preformed strips.

2.5 CONCRETE MIXTURES

A. Prepare design mixtures, proportioned according to ACI 301, with the following properties:

1. Compressive Strength (28 Days): 3500 psi 2. Maximum Water-Cementitious Materials Ratio at Point of Placement: 0.45. 3. Slump Limit: 4 inches plus or minus 1 inch. 4. Air Content: 6 percent plus or minus 1.5 percent.

B. Chemical Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Synthetic Fiber: Uniformly disperse in concrete mixture at manufacturer's recommended rate, but not less than 1.0 lb/cu. yd.

2.6 CONCRETE MIXING

A. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Measure, batch, and mix concrete materials and concrete according to ASTM C 94/C 94M and ASTM C 1116/C 1116M. Furnish batch certificates for each batch discharged and used in the Work.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION AND PREPARATION

A. Proof-roll prepared subbase surface below concrete paving to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete.

3.2 EDGE FORMS AND SCREED CONSTRUCTION

A. Set, brace, and secure edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed guides to required lines, grades, and elevations. Install forms to allow continuous progress of work and so forms can remain in place at least 24 hours after concrete placement.

B. Clean forms after each use and coat with form-release agent to ensure separation from concrete without damage.


A. General: Comply with CRSI's "Manual of Standard Practice" for fabricating, placing, and supporting reinforcement.



3.4 JOINTS

A. General: Form construction, isolation, and contraction joints and tool edges true to line, with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct transverse joints at right angles to centerline unless otherwise indicated.

B. Construction Joints: Set construction joints at side and end terminations of paving and at locations where paving operations are stopped for more than one-half hour unless paving terminates at isolation joints.

C. Isolation Joints: Form isolation joints of preformed joint-filler strips abutting concrete curbs, catch basins, manholes, inlets, structures, other fixed objects, and where indicated.

D. Contraction Joints: Form weakened-plane contraction joints, sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at least one-fourth of the concrete thickness.

E. Edging: After initial floating, tool edges of paving, gutters, curbs, and joints in concrete with an edging tool to a 1/4-inch radius. Repeat tooling of edges after applying surface finishes. Eliminate edging-tool marks on concrete surfaces.

3.5 CONCRETE PLACEMENT

A. Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at time concrete is placed.

B. Comply with ACI 301 requirements for measuring, mixing, transporting, placing, and consolidating concrete.

C. Deposit and spread concrete in a continuous operation between transverse joints. Do not push or drag concrete into place or use vibrators to move concrete into place.

D. Screed paving surface with a straightedge and strike off.

E. Commence initial floating using bull floats or darbies to impart an open-textured and uniform surface plane before excess moisture or bleed water appears on the surface. Do not further disturb concrete surfaces before beginning finishing operations or spreading surface treatments.

3.6 FLOAT FINISHING

A. General: Do not add water to concrete surfaces during finishing operations.

B. Float Finish: Begin the second floating operation when bleed-water sheen has disappeared and concrete surface has stiffened sufficiently to permit operations. Float surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or inaccessible to power units. Finish surfaces to true planes. Cut down high spots and fill low spots. Refloat surface immediately to uniform granular texture. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Draw a soft-bristle broom across float-finished concrete

surface perpendicular to line of traffic to provide a uniform, fine-line texture.



3.7 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING

A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures.

B. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection.

C. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to concrete surfaces if hot, dry, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 lb/sq. ft. x h before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions after placing, screeding, and bull floating or darbying concrete but before float finishing.

D. Begin curing after finishing concrete but not before free water has disappeared from concrete surface.

3.8 PAVING TOLERANCES

A. Comply with tolerances in ACI 117 and as follows:

1. Elevation: 3/4 inch. 2. Thickness: Plus 3/8 inch, minus 1/4 inch. 3. Surface: Gap below 10-foot- long, unleveled straightedge not to exceed 1/2 inch. 4. Joint Spacing: 3 inches. 5. Contraction Joint Depth: Plus 1/4 inch, no minus. 6. Joint Width: Plus 1/8 inch, no minus.

3.8 REPAIRS AND PROTECTION

A. Remove and replace concrete paving that is broken, damaged, or defective or that does not comply with requirements in this Section. Remove work in complete sections from joint to joint unless otherwise approved by Architect.

B. Protect concrete paving from damage. Exclude traffic from paving for at least 14 days after placement. When construction traffic is permitted, maintain paving as clean as possible by removing surface stains and spillage of materials as they occur.

C. Maintain concrete paving free of stains, discoloration, dirt, and other foreign material. Sweep paving not more than two days before date scheduled for Substantial Completion inspections.


PARTNERS 15-175B

HYDROSEEDING

329200 - 1


SECTION 329200 – HYDROSEEDING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Attention is directed to Bidding and Contract Requirements, and to General and Supplemental

Conditions, hereby made a part of this Section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Hydroseeded shall be used at all disturbed lawn areas impacted by construction operations.

B. Types of work required include the following:

1. Soil preparation

2. Hydroseeding lawns

1.03 SUBMITTALS:

A. Submit seed vendor’s certification for required grass seed mixture, indicating percentage by weight and

percentage of purity, germination and weed seed for each grass species.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:

A. Deliver seed and fertilizer materials in original unopened containers showing weight analysis and

manufacturer. Store to prevent wetting and deterioration.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS:

A. Work notifications: Notify Landscape Architect at least 7 working days prior to start of hydro-seeding

operation.

B. Protect existing utilities, paving and other facilities from damage caused by hydro-seeding operations.

C. Perform hydro-seeding work only after planting and other work affecting ground surface has been

completed.

D. Restrict traffic from lawn areas until grass is established. Erect signs and barriers as required.

E. Provide hose and lawn watering equipment as required.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Seed: Fresh, clean and new crop seed mixture, mixed by approved methods.

PARTNERS 15-175B

HYDROSEEDING

329200 - 2


B. Seed Mixture: “THM” – as supplied by Rhino Seed Company, Brighton, Michigan (1-800-482-3130) or

approved equal.

C. Fertilizer: 15-30-15. Granular, non-burning product composed of not less than 50% organic slow

acting, guaranteed analysis, professional fertilizer.

D. Water: Hoses or other methods of transportation.

E. Compost (organic soil) shall be derived from vegetative material (such as yard trimmings), wood or

bark, ground within one (1) month of cutting and the compost shall be mature/stabilized with a particle

30-35 percent. It shall contain no substances toxic to plants, shall possess no objectionable odors and

shall not resemble the raw material from which it was derived. It shall be free of plastic, glass, metal

and other physical contaminants, as well as viable weed seeds and other plants capable of

reproducing (except airborne weed species).

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine finish surfaces, grades, topsoil quality and depth. Do not start seeding work until

unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION:

A. Limit preparation to areas that will be immediately seeded. Spread topsoil, fine grade.

B. Treat lawn areas with "Round Up", by Monsanto, per label directions as required to kill existing

vegetation prior to sodding.

C. Loosen topsoil of lawn areas to minimum depth of 3". Remove stones over 1" in any dimension and

sticks, roots, rubbish and extraneous matter.

D. Grade lawn areas to smooth, free draining and even surface with a loose and uniformly fine texture.

Roll and rake; remove ridges and fill depressions as required to drain.

E. Apply amendments to supplied or existing topsoil, if required by soil test report at a rate determined by

the soil test to adjust the pH of topsoil to not less than 7.0 and not more than 6.8.

F. Apply fertilizer to indicated turf areas as indicated above.

G. Restore prepared area to specified condition if eroded, settled or otherwise disturbed after fine grading

and prior to sodding.

3.03 INSTALLATION:

PARTNERS 15-175B

HYDROSEEDING

329200 - 3


A. Seed lawns only between April 1 and June 1 and fall seeding between August 15 and October 15, or at

such time as acceptable to Architect.

B. Seed immediately after preparation of area. Seed areas within contract limits and areas adjacent to

contract limits disturbed as a result of construction operations.

C. Perform seeding operations when the soil is dry and when winds do not exceed 5 miles per hour

velocity.

D. Apply seed/organic soil/tackifier mix at the rate as noted. (1 inch layer) It shall be uniformly applied

using an Express Blower or other approved equipment. Using the blower, project mix directly at soil

surface and approximately 3 feet over the top of the slope or overlap it into existing vegetation.

E. Apply seed using Hydroseeder.

F. Apply seed to indicated areas. Use takifier only on erosion prone areas. Apply fertilizer to hydro mix.

i. Seed: 5-7 lbs. per 1000sf

ii. Fertilizer: 3 bags (50 lbs each) per acre

iii. Tackifier: 60 gallons per acre

G. Care must be taken to not get seed material on buildings, walks, roadways, planting beds, etc.

3.06 LAWN ESTABLISHMENT:

A. Establish dense lawn of permanent grasses, free from lumps and depressions. Any area failing to

show uniform germination to be re-seeded; continue until dense lawn is established. Damage to

seeded area due to erosion to be repaired by Contractor. Scattered bare spots over 5% not allowed.

B. In event Contractor does not establish dense lawn during germination period, return to project to re-

fertilize and re-seed to establish dense lawn.

C. Should the seeded lawn become largely weeds after germination, Contractor responsible to kill the

weeds and re-seed the proposed lawn areas to produce a dense lawn.

3.07 CLEANING:

A. Perform cleaning during installation of the work and upon completion of the work. Remove from site all

excess materials, debris and equipment. Repair damage resulting from seeding operations. Clean all

areas where over spray has occurred from hydroseeding operations.


PARTNERS 15-175B TOPSOIL 329220 - 1


SECTION 329220 - TOPSOIL

PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Attention is directed to Bidding and Contract Requirements, General and Supplemental Requirements, which are hereby made a part of this Section.

1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK:

A. Extent of Topsoil Work is to include all disturbed lawn areas impacted by construction

operations. B. Topsoil for lawn work shall be as stripped from site or provided by contractor from off-site sources. C. Related Work Specified Elsewhere:

1. Section 329200: Hydroseeding

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Testing and inspection: For supplied or stockpiled topsoil. Performed by a qualified independent test-

ing laboratory, under the supervision of a registered professional engineer, specializing in soils engi-neering. Obtain samples of stockpiled topsoil before complete stripping from the interior of stockpile.

B. Provide and pay for testing and inspection during topsoil operations. Laboratory, inspection services

and Soils Engineer shall be acceptable to the Architect.

1. Recommended testing laboratory: A & L Agricultural Laboratories, Inc. 3505 Conestoga Drive Fort Wayne, IN 46808 (219) 483-4759

C. Test representative material samples for proposed use.

D. Topsoil: (Supplied and Stockpiled - See Materials 2.01)

1. pH factor 2. Lime requirement 3. Mechanical analysis (P.K. Ca. mg) and cation ratios 4. Percentage of organic content and loss by ignition 5. Soil series classification 6. Clay content



E. Recommendations on type and quantity of additives required to establish satisfactory pH factor and supply of nutrients to bring nutrients to satisfactory level for planting.

F. Submit test reports.

1.04 PROJECT CONDITIONS: A. Known underground and surface utility lines are indicated on the drawings. B. Protect existing trees, plants, lawns and other features designated to remain as part of the landscaping

work. C. Promptly repair damage to adjacent facilities caused by topsoil operations. Cost of repair at Contrac-

tor's expense. D. Promptly notify the Architect of unexpected sub-surface conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS:

A. Topsoil: Supplied or stockpiled topsoil proposed for use must meet testing criteria results specified and

conform to adjustments as recommended by soil test and Architect. B. Existing topsoil: Existing topsoil from on site stockpile shall be utilized. All processing, screening,

cleaning and preparation of this stored topsoil to render it acceptable for use is the responsibility of the contractor.

C. Provide additional topsoil as required to complete job. Topsoil must meet testing criteria results speci-

fied. All processing, cleaning and preparation of this stored topsoil to render it acceptable for use is the responsibility of this contractor.

D. Supplied or stockpiled topsoil, shall be fertile, friable and representative of local productive soil, capable

of sustaining vigorous plant growth and screened free of clay lumps, subsoil, noxious weeds or other foreign matter such as stones greater than 1" in diameter in any dimension, roots, sticks and other ex-traneous materials: not frozen or muddy. Ph of soil to range between 5.0 and 7.5. Adjusted to 6.0 to 7.5 by additives as required by soil test. Topsoil shall contain not less than 3% and not greater than 10% organic matter. Clay content as determined by Bouyoucous Hydrometer Test shall range between 5 and 15 percent. Mechanical analysis as follows:

PASSING RETAINED ON PERCENTAGE 1" Screen 100% 1" Screen 1/4" screen (gravel) Not more than 3% 1/4" Screen No. 140 USS Mesh Sieve 40-60%



PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION:

A. Examine rough grades and installation conditions. Do not start topsoil work until unsatisfactory condi-tions are corrected.

3.02 FINISH GRADING:

A. Perform topsoiling within contract limits, including adjacent transition areas, to new elevations, levels,

profiles, and contours indicated. Provide uniform levels and slopes between new elevations and exist-ing grades.

B. Grade surfaces to assure areas drain away from building structures and to prevent ponding and pock-

ets of surface drainage. C. Lawn and planting areas: Supply and spread topsoil to 4" minimum compacted depth in lawn areas or

as indicated on drawings. D. For trees, shrubs, ground cover beds and backfill for beds see Trees, Plants and Ground Cover Sec-

tion. E. Provide earth crowning where indicated on drawings. F. Crowning/mounding to be free flowing in shape and design, as indicated, and to blend into existing

grades gradually so that toe of slope is not readily visible. G. Regardless of finish grading elevations indicated, it is intended that grading be such that proper drain-

age of surface water will occur and that no low areas are created to allow ponding. Contractor to con-sult with Owner or Architect regarding minor variations in grade elevations before rough grading is completed.

3.03 CLEANING:

A. Upon completion of topsoiling operations, clean areas within contract limits, remove tools and equip-

ment. Site shall be clear, clean, free of debris and suitable for site work operations.


PARTNERS 15-175B FINE GRADING 329230 - 1


SECTION 329230 – FINE GRADING

PART 1 - GENERAL

Provide all topsoil and establish fine grade over Areas of Construction prior to or in conjunction with landscape construction.

1.01 SITE INSPECTION:

A. The Contractor shall visit the site and acquaint himself with all existing conditions. The Contractor shall

be responsible for his own subsurface investigations as necessary to satisfy requirements of this sec-tion. All subsurface investigations shall be preformed only under time schedules and arrangements ap-proved in advance by the Architect or Owner’s Representative.

B. Contractor to inspect and approve finish grade prior to installation of landscape plantings and lawn are-

as to ensure positive grade, proper elevations and free of debris and rocks. Contractor shall alert Archi-tect of any inadequacies in finish grade or materials.

1.02 Existing Conditions:

A. Contractor shall make whatever corrections and/or repairs necessary to make finish grades consistent

with the requirements of the grading drawings and specifications.

1.03 UTILITIES:

A. Before starting site operations verify that the earlier Contractors have disconnected all temporary utili-

ties that might interfere with the fine grading work. B. Locate all existing, active utility lines traversing the site and determine the requirements for their protec-

tion. Preserve in operating condition all active utilities adjacent to or transverse the site that are desig-nated to remain.

C. Observe rules and regulations governing respective utilities in working under requirements of this sec-

tion. Adequately protect utilities from damage, remove or relocate as indicated, specified or required. Remove, plug or cap inactive or abandoned utilities encountered in excavation. Record location of ac-tive utilities.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Requirements of all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the

work.

B. Primary emphasis should be given to the aesthetic appearance and function of berming and swales, as directed by the Architect or owner’s Representative. The Contractor shall employ skilled personnel and any necessary equipment to insure that finish grading is smooth, aesthetically pleasing, drains well and is ideal for receiving sod and plant materials.



PART 2 - MATERIALS

2.01 EXISTING SOIL:

A. The Contractor shall ensure that all existing soil has sufficient percolation and surface drainage to sup-port grasses and plant material and that extreme compaction occurs only in areas receiving pavement.

B. In areas to receive sod, verify that all soil is scarified to a depth of three inches and that soil contains

enough organic matter to support and encourage rooting of sod.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 JOB CONDITIONS:

A. Dust Control: Use all means necessary to prevent dust from construction operations from being a nui-sance to adjacent property owners and from damaging surfaces on adjacent buildings, paving, etc. Methods used for dust control are subject to approval by the Architect or Owner’s Representative.

B. Burning: On-site burning will not be permitted

C. Protection: Use all means necessary to protect curbs, gutters, sprinklers, utilities and vegetation desig-

nated to remain and in the event of damage, immediately make repairs, replacements and dressings to damaged plants necessary to the approval of the Architect. Contractor shall incur all cost for the re-placement of damaged objects and vegetation.

3.02 SCHEDULING:

A. Schedule all work in a careful manner with all necessary consideration for adjoining property owners and the public.

B. Coordinate schedule with other contractors to avoid conflicts with their work.

3.03 EXCAVATION:

A. Excavate where necessary to obtain subgrades, percolation and surface drainage as required

B. Materials to be excavated are unclassified. C. Remove entirely any existing obstructions after approval by the Architect or Owner’s representative. D. Remove from site and dispose of debris and excavated material not required.



3.04 GRADING: A. The Contractor shall inspect and ensure finished grading is smooth, aesthetically pleasing, drain well

and ready to receive sod and other plant material to full satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative and Architect. Finish grade shall not fall below the top of sidewalk elevation.

B. Contractor shall provide a 1” max. shoveled, beveled edge where lawn areas meet sidewalks and curbs.

3.05 CORRECTION OF GRADE:

A. Bring to the required grade levels areas where settlement, erosion or other grade changes occur. Ad-

just as required to carry drainage away from buildings and to prevent ponding around the buildings and on pavements.

B. Remove all rock or objectionable material larger than 1” any direction prior to commencing landscaping.

C. Contractor shall be responsible for stabilizing grades by approved methods prior to landscaping, and

shall be responsible for correction of grades as mentioned above, and clean up washouts or erosion.


PARTNERS 15-175B SUBDRAINAGE 334600 - 1


SECTION 334600 - SUBDRAINAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes subdrainage systems for foundations and underslab areas.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of drainage panel indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PIPING MATERIALS

A. Refer to the "Piping Applications" Article in Part 3 for applications of pipe, fitting, and joining materials.

2.2 PERFORATED-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. Perforated PE Pipe and Fittings: ASTM F 405 or AASHTO M 252, Type CP; corrugated, for coupled joints.

1. Couplings: Manufacturer's standard, band type.

2.3 SOLID-WALL PIPES AND FITTINGS

A. PE Drainage Tubing and Fittings: AASHTO M 252, Type S, corrugated, with smooth waterway, for coupled joints.

1. Couplings: AASHTO M 252, corrugated, band type, matching tubing and fittings.

2.4 SPECIAL PIPE COUPLINGS

A. Comply with ASTM C 1173, elastomeric, sleeve-type, reducing or transition coupling, for joining underground nonpressure piping. Include ends of same sizes as piping to be joined and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end. 1. Shielded Flexible Couplings: ASTM C 1460, elastomeric or rubber sleeve with full-length,

corrosion-resistant outer shield and corrosion-resistant metal tension band and tightening mechanism on each end.



2.5 CLEANOUTS

A. Cast-Iron Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M; with round-flanged, cast-iron housing; and secured, scoriated, Medium-Duty Loading class, cast-iron cover. Include cast-iron ferrule and countersunk, brass cleanout plug.

2.6 SOIL MATERIALS

A. Backfill, drainage course, impervious fill, and satisfactory soil materials are specified in Division 31 Section “Earth Moving”.

2.7 GEOTEXTILE FILTER FABRICS

A. Description: Fabric of PP or polyester fibers or combination of both, with flow rate range from 110 to 330 gpm/sq. ft. (4480 to 13 440 L/min. per sq. m) when tested according to ASTM D 4491.

1. Structure Type: Nonwoven, needle-punched continuous filament or woven, monofilament or multifilament].

2. Style(s): Flat and sock.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EARTHWORK

A. Excavating, trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 31 Section "Earth Moving."

3.2 PIPING APPLICATIONS

A. Underground Subdrainage Piping:

1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.

B. Underslab Subdrainage Piping:

1. Perforated PE pipe and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.

C. Header Piping: 1. PE drainage tubing and fittings, couplings, and coupled joints.

3.3 CLEANOUT APPLICATIONS

A. In Underground Subdrainage Piping:

1. At Grade in Earth: Cast-iron cleanouts. 2. At Grade in Paved Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts.



B. In Underslab Subdrainage Piping:

1. In Equipment Rooms and Unfinished Areas: Cast-iron cleanouts. 2. In Finished Areas: Copper-alloy cleanouts.

3.4 FOUNDATION DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Place impervious fill material on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing after concrete footing forms have been removed. Place and compact impervious fill to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide.

B. Place impervious fill on subgrade adjacent to bottom of footing and compact to dimensions indicated, but not less than 6 inches (150 mm) deep and 12 inches (300 mm) wide after concrete footing forms have been removed.

C. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.

D. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).

E. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive.

F. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for foundation subdrainage.

G. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.

H. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from footing and above top of pipe to within 12 inches (300 mm) of finish grade.

I. Install drainage course and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

J. Place layer of flat-style geotextile filter fabric over top of drainage course, overlapping edges at least 4 inches (100 mm).

K. Place initial backfill material over compacted drainage course. Place material in loose-depth layers not exceeding 6 inches (150 mm). Thoroughly compact each layer. Final backfill to finish elevations and slope away from building.

3.5 UNDERSLAB DRAINAGE INSTALLATION

A. Excavate for underslab drainage system after subgrade material has been compacted but before drainage course has been placed. Include horizontal distance of at least 6 inches (150 mm) between drainage pipe and trench walls. Grade bottom of trench excavations to required slope, and compact to firm, solid bed for drainage system.

B. Lay flat-style geotextile filter fabric in trench and overlap trench sides.



C. Place supporting layer of drainage course over compacted subgrade and geotextile filter fabric, to compacted depth of not less than 4 inches (100 mm).

D. Encase pipe with sock-style geotextile filter fabric before installing pipe. Connect sock sections with adhesive.

E. Install drainage piping as indicated in Part 3 "Piping Installation" Article for underslab subdrainage.

F. Add drainage course to width of at least 6 inches (150 mm) on side away from wall and to top of pipe to perform tests.

G. After satisfactory testing, cover drainage piping with drainage course to elevation of bottom of slab, and compact and wrap top of drainage course with flat-style geotextile filter fabric.

3.6 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Install piping beginning at low points of system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Bed piping with full bearing in filtering material. Install gaskets, seals, sleeves, and couplings according to manufacturer's written instructions and other requirements indicated.

1. Foundation Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent and with a minimum cover of 36 inches (915 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

2. Underslab Subdrainage: Install piping pitched down in direction of flow, at a minimum slope of 0.5 percent.

3. Lay perforated pipe with perforations down. 4. Excavate recesses in trench bottom for bell ends of pipe. Lay pipe with bells facing upslope and

with spigot end entered fully into adjacent bell.

B. Use increasers, reducers, and couplings made for different sizes or materials of pipes and fittings being connected. Reduction of pipe size in direction of flow is prohibited.

C. Install PE piping according to ASTM D 2321.

3.7 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings: Hub and spigot, with rubber compression gaskets according to CISPI's "Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook." Use gaskets that match class of pipe and fittings.

B. Join PE pipe, tubing, and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties."

C. Join perforated, PE pipe and fittings with couplings for soil-tight joints according to AASHTO's "Standard Specifications for Highway Bridges," Division II, Section 26.4.2.4, "Joint Properties"; or according to ASTM D 2321.

3.8 CLEANOUT INSTALLATION

A. Cleanouts for Foundation Subdrainage:



1. Install cleanouts from piping to grade. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

2. In nonvehicular-traffic areas, use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout. Set cleanout frames and covers in a cast-in-place concrete anchor, 12 by 12 by 4 inches (300 by 300 by 100 mm) in depth. Set top of cleanout plug 1 inch (25 mm) above grade.

B. Cleanouts for Underslab Subdrainage:

1. Install cleanouts and riser extensions from piping to top of slab. Locate cleanouts at beginning of piping run and at changes in direction. Install fittings so cleanouts open in direction of flow in piping.

2. Use NPS 4 (DN 100) cast-iron soil pipe and fittings for piping branch fittings and riser extensions to cleanout flush with top of slab.

3.9 CONNECTIONS

A. Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

B. Connect low elevations of subdrainage system to building's solid-wall-piping storm drainage system.

C. Where required, connect low elevations of foundation and underslab subdrainage to stormwater sump pumps.


A. Testing: After installing drainage course to top of piping, test drain piping with water to ensure free flow before backfilling. Remove obstructions, replace damaged components, and repeat test until results are satisfactory.

3.11 CLEANING

A. Clear interior of installed piping and structures of dirt and other superfluous material as work progresses. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as it is completed. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted pipe at end of each day or when work stops.


Date post:	27-Aug-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	buithuy
View:	219 times
Download:	0 times